From 74298f8ca11dc8d3b0359d1d4e124d6494c3eeac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nicolas Schodet Date: Fri, 10 Apr 2009 01:15:42 +0200 Subject: * digital/avr/modules/usb: - imported LUFA. --- .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c | 570 ++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h | 135 ++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt | 40 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c | 247 ++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h | 95 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf | 55 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile | 707 ++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c | 692 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h | 199 +++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt | 52 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c | 181 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h | 166 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile | 710 ++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c | 218 +++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h | 91 ++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c | 156 ++ .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h | 73 + .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt | 41 + .../usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile | 707 ++++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile | 29 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps | 1 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c | 231 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h | 90 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt | 48 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c | 314 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h | 322 +++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c | 305 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h | 127 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt | 50 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c | 314 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h | 322 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile | 702 +++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps | 1 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.c | 318 +++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.h | 190 +++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt | 45 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c | 263 ++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf | 55 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps | 1 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c | 278 ++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h | 89 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt | 42 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 212 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 86 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c | 385 +++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h | 118 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps | 1 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c | 358 +++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h | 126 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt | 57 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf | 56 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c | 250 ++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h | 93 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps | 1 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c | 264 ++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h | 98 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt | 44 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/makefile | 700 +++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c | 267 ++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps | 1 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c | 429 ++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h | 116 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt | 43 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c | 267 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps | 1 + .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c | 462 ++++++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h | 115 ++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt | 44 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile | 701 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 144 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 74 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c | 314 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h | 95 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt | 46 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c | 149 ++ .../Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h | 74 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps | 1 + .../Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c | 321 +++++ .../Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h | 95 ++ .../KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt | 47 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c | 171 +++ .../KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h | 81 ++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c | 119 ++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h | 80 ++ .../KeyboardHostWithParser.aps | 1 + .../KeyboardHostWithParser.c | 345 +++++ .../KeyboardHostWithParser.h | 80 ++ .../KeyboardHostWithParser.txt | 44 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile | 707 ++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c | 354 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h | 104 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c | 372 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h | 114 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt | 48 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c | 267 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c | 453 ++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h | 112 ++ .../lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt | 44 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c | 325 +++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h | 189 +++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps | 1 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c | 225 +++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h | 98 ++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt | 48 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c | 316 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h | 71 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c | 223 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h | 71 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c | 396 ++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h | 159 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt | 54 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c | 350 +++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h | 143 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h | 85 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/makefile | 704 ++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 173 +++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 77 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps | 1 + .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c | 420 ++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h | 85 ++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt | 43 + .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c | 664 +++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h | 176 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h | 85 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile | 706 ++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c | 251 ++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h | 93 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps | 1 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c | 376 +++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h | 115 ++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt | 43 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/makefile | 703 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c | 250 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h | 93 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c | 399 ++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h | 114 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt | 44 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile | 703 +++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 155 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 74 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps | 1 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c | 310 ++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h | 95 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt | 47 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c | 149 ++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h | 74 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps | 1 + .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c | 320 +++++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h | 96 ++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt | 48 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c | 171 +++ .../Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h | 82 ++ .../lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c | 119 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h | 89 ++ .../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps | 1 + .../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c | 352 +++++ .../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h | 80 ++ .../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt | 44 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile | 707 ++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c | 250 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h | 93 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c | 389 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h | 111 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt | 44 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile | 703 +++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c | 85 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h | 76 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c | 118 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h | 125 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c | 263 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c | 136 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h | 116 ++ .../lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h | 87 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c | 79 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h | 80 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c | 111 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h | 93 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf | 52 + .../lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c | 280 ++++ .../lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h | 56 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c | 386 +++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h | 226 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h | 98 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c | 357 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h | 108 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt | 62 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c | 614 ++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h | 253 ++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c | 80 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h | 66 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c | 162 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h | 55 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile | 715 ++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 191 +++ .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 77 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h | 51 + .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c | 273 ++++ .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h | 102 ++ .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c | 436 ++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h | 83 ++ .../lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt | 40 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile | 705 ++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c | 187 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h | 59 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps | 1 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c | 198 +++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h | 62 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt | 51 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c | 226 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h | 110 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/makefile | 710 ++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c | 263 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf | 55 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c | 120 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h | 116 ++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c | 390 +++++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h | 192 +++ .../usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt | 45 + .../modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile | 704 ++++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/makefile | 121 ++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA.pnproj | 1 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt | 22 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/ChangeLog.txt | 387 +++++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h | 72 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h | 77 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/Common.h | 171 +++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/FunctionAttributes.h | 110 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/CompileTimeTokens.txt | 167 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DirectorySummaries.txt | 119 ++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h | 81 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/HWB.h | 84 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h | 99 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h | 121 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h | 58 + .../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h | 177 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h | 139 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c | 65 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h | 115 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c | 45 + .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h | 82 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h | 79 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h | 120 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h | 210 +++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h | 87 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h | 85 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h | 113 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h | 141 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h | 84 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h | 75 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/HWB.h | 79 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h | 104 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h | 117 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h | 94 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h | 75 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/HWB.h | 79 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h | 101 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h | 117 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c | 60 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h | 100 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h | 94 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h | 78 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/HWB.h | 79 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h | 104 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h | 117 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h | 176 +++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c | 135 ++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.h | 258 ++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c | 326 +++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.h | 252 ++++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDReportData.h | 128 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c | 39 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h | 440 ++++++ .../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c | 43 + .../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h | 523 +++++++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c | 252 ++++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h | 224 +++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c | 257 ++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h | 198 +++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c | 313 +++++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h | 135 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h | 126 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c | 387 +++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h | 842 +++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c | 115 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h | 245 ++++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c | 175 +++ .../lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h | 127 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c | 260 ++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h | 371 +++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h | 102 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c | 258 ++++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h | 788 +++++++++++ .../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StdRequestType.h | 191 +++ .../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StreamCallbacks.h | 87 ++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBMode.h | 77 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h | 83 ++ .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/GettingStarted.txt | 117 ++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MainPage.txt | 75 + .../usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c | 226 +++ .../usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.h | 182 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MigrationInformation.txt | 227 +++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c | 95 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h | 262 ++++ .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/SchedulerOverview.txt | 31 + .../avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/VIDAndPIDValues.txt | 224 +++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Version.h | 49 + .../modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/WritingBoardDrivers.txt | 26 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/makefile | 42 + .../AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt | 176 +++ .../AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps | 1 + .../Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c | 886 ++++++++++++ .../Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h | 194 +++ .../AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt | 89 ++ .../AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg | Bin 0 -> 74610 bytes .../lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c | 263 ++++ .../lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h | 98 ++ .../lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf | 55 + .../usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c | 120 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h | 116 ++ .../Sample_Programming_Session.txt | 104 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile | 702 +++++++++ .../lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c | 113 ++ .../lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h | 90 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c | 247 ++++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h | 99 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps | 1 + .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c | 436 ++++++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h | 121 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt | 85 ++ .../usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h | 100 ++ .../modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile | 710 ++++++++++ digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/makefile | 25 + digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/makefile | 27 + 395 files changed, 119098 insertions(+) create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA.pnproj create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/ChangeLog.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/Common.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/FunctionAttributes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/CompileTimeTokens.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DirectorySummaries.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/HWB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDReportData.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StdRequestType.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StreamCallbacks.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBMode.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/GettingStarted.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MainPage.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MigrationInformation.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/SchedulerOverview.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/VIDAndPIDValues.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Version.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/WritingBoardDrivers.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/makefile create mode 100644 digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/makefile (limited to 'digital/avr/modules') diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0f0e756 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +BootloaderCDC30-Sep-2008 14:20:0930-Sep-2008 14:20:30241030-Sep-2008 14:20:0944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCBootloaderCDC.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000BootloaderCDC.cDescriptors.cBootloaderCDC.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111BootloaderCDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\BootloaderCDC.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\CDC\Descriptors.c diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..654eabd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,570 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C +#include "BootloaderCDC.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** Line coding options for the virtual serial port. Although the virtual serial port data is never + * sent through a physical serial port, the line encoding data must still be read and preserved from + * the host, or the host will detect a problem and fail to open the port. This structure contains the + * current encoding options, including baud rate, character format, parity mode and total number of + * bits in each data chunk. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host, + * and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued + * command.) + */ +uint16_t CurrAddress; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000. + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + while (RunBootloader) + { + USB_USBTask(); + CDC_Task(); + } + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Wait until any pending transmissions have completed before shutting down */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Shut down the USB subsystem */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = 0; + + /* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */ + PORTD = 0; + DDRD = 0; + + #if defined(PORTE) + PORTE = 0; + DDRE = 0; + #endif + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + /* Start the user application */ + AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000; + AppStartPtr(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user + * application started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Upon disconnection, run user application */ + RunBootloader = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately + * for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(LineCodingData++)); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < sizeof(LineCoding); i++) + *(LineCodingData++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending + * on the AVR910 protocol command issued. + * + * \param Command Single character AVR910 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform + */ +static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command) +{ + uint16_t BlockSize; + char MemoryType; + + bool HighByte = false; + uint8_t LowByte = 0; + + BlockSize = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8); + BlockSize |= FetchNextCommandByte(); + + MemoryType = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if ((MemoryType == 'E') || (MemoryType == 'F')) + { + /* Check if command is to read memory */ + if (Command == 'g') + { + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == 'E') + { + /* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress)); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + /* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte)); + #else + WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte((CurrAddress << 1) + HighByte)); + #endif + + /* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + CurrAddress++; + + HighByte ^= 1; + } + } + } + else + { + uint32_t PageStartAddress = ((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1); + + if (MemoryType == 'F') + { + boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + while (BlockSize--) + { + if (MemoryType == 'E') + { + /* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + /* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */ + if (HighByte) + { + /* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte)); + + HighByte = false; + + /* Increment the address counter after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else + { + LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + HighByte = true; + } + } + } + + /* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */ + if (MemoryType == 'F') + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageStartAddress); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Send response byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + } + else + { + /* Send error byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + } +} + +/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed + * to allow reception of the next data packet from the host. + * + * \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint + */ +static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */ + return Endpoint_Read_Byte(); +} + +/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the + * bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host. + * + * \param Response Next response byte to send to the host + */ +static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response) +{ + /* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + } + + /* Write the next byte to the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Response); +} + +/** Task to read in AVR910 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions + * and send the appropriate response back to the host. + */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */ + uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte(); + + if ((Command == 'L') || (Command == 'P') || (Command == 'T') || (Command == 'E')) + { + if (Command == 'E') + RunBootloader = false; + if (Command == 'T') + FetchNextCommandByte(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 't') + { + /* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */ + WriteNextResponseByte(0x44); + + WriteNextResponseByte(0x00); + } + else if (Command == 'a') + { + /* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */ + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + } + else if (Command == 'A') + { + /* Set the current address to that given by the host */ + CurrAddress = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8); + CurrAddress |= FetchNextCommandByte(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'p') + { + /* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('S'); + } + else if (Command == 'S') + { + /* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */ + for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++) + WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]); + } + else if (Command == 'V') + { + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR); + WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR); + } + else if (Command == 's') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(4)); + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(2)); + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_signature_byte_get(0)); + } + else if (Command == 'b') + { + WriteNextResponseByte('Y'); + + /* Send block size to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF); + } + else if (Command == 'e') + { + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress++) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE; + } + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'l') + { + /* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */ + boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'r') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'F') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'N') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if (Command == 'Q') + { + WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS)); + } + else if ((Command == 'C') || (Command == 'c')) + { + if (Command == 'c') + { + /* Increment the address if the second byte is being written */ + CurrAddress++; + } + + /* Write the high byte to the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1), FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'm') + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1); + + /* Wait until write operation has completed */ + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if ((Command == 'B') || (Command == 'g')) + { + /* Delegate the block write/read to a seperate function for clarity */ + ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command); + } + else if (Command == 'R') + { + #if defined(RAMPZ) + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(((uint32_t)CurrAddress << 1)); + #else + uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress << 1); + #endif + + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8); + WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF); + } + else if (Command == 'D') + { + /* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte()); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress++; + + /* Send confirmation byte back to the host */ + WriteNextResponseByte('\r'); + } + else if (Command == 'd') + { + /* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */ + WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)CurrAddress)); + + /* Increment the address after use */ + CurrAddress++; + } + else if (Command == 27) + { + /* Escape is sync, ignore */ + } + else + { + /* Unknown command, return fail code */ + WriteNextResponseByte('?'); + } + + /* Select the IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */ + bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()); + + /* Send the endpoint data to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */ + if (IsEndpointFull) + { + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Acknowledge the command from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d8f1e3d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderCDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_H_ +#define _CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class Specific request to get the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the + * baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. + */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class Specific request to set the line encoding on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port, including the + * baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. + */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class Specific request to set the state of the serial handshake lines (such as DCD and RTS) on + * a CDC-ACM virtual serial port. + */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested */ + #define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER "LUFA-CDC" + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /** Type define for the CDC-ACM virtual serial port line encoding options, including baud rate, format, parity + * and size of each data chunk in bits. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate in BPS */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity mode, an entry from the BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t enum */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Size of each data chunk, in bits */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */ + enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Single stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< 1.5 stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible parity modes on a CDC-ACM virtual serial port */ + enum BootloaderCDC_CDC_LineCodeingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No data parity checking */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd data parity checking */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even data parity checking */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark data parity checking */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space data parity checking */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static void ProgramReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command); + static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void); + static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb6f9f01 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109 + * protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and will fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If + * you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU + * values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, or Atmel's AVRPROG. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee0e194d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204A, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x10, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR CDC Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bd6bdf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Structure for a CDC class Functional descriptor, with a given data size. This is used instead of a + * type define so that the same macro can be used for functional descriptors of varying data lengths, + * while allowing the sizeof() operator to return correct results. + * + * \param DataSize Size of the functional descriptor's data payload, in bytes + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ba226d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6df089ab --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB AVR109 Bootloader" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..532fc17a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BootloaderCDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0x1E000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d0f40b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +BootloaderDFU30-Sep-2008 14:20:4730-Sep-2008 14:21:00241030-Sep-2008 14:20:4744, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Bootloaders\DFU\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000BootloaderDFU.cDescriptors.cBootloaderDFU.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111BootloaderDFU.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a997b207 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c @@ -0,0 +1,692 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +/** Configuration define. Define this token to true to case the bootloader to reject all memory commands + * until a memory erase has been performed. When used in conjunction with the lockbits of the AVR, this + * can protect the AVR's firmware from being dumped from a secured AVR. When false, memory operations are + * allowed at any time. + */ +#define SECURE_MODE false + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C +#include "BootloaderDFU.h" + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations + * other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader + * once a memory erase has completed. + */ +bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host). + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and + * jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly + * acknowedged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set, + * causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down. + */ +bool WaitForExit = false; + +/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */ +uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + +/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after + * each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued. + */ +uint8_t DFU_Status = OK; + +/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */ +DFU_Command_t SentCommand; + +/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command + * requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command + * is issued by the host. + */ +uint8_t ResponseByte; + +/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host + * may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command. + */ +AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000; + +/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than + * 64KB of flash memory. + */ +uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0; + +/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM + * depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read to/write from in the memory being addressed (either FLASH + * of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host). + */ +uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start + * the loaded application code. + */ +int main (void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize the USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */ + while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Shut down the USB subsystem */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = 0; + + /* Reset any used hardware ports back to their defaults */ + PORTD = 0; + DDRD = 0; + + #if defined(PORTE) + PORTE = 0; + DDRE = 0; + #endif + + /* Start the user application */ + AppStartPtr(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the bootloader should exit and the user + * application started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Upon disconnection, run user application */ + RunBootloader = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the DFU commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Discard unused wIndex value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Discard unused wValue value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */ + SentCommand.DataSize = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + switch (bRequest) + { + case DFU_DNLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */ + if (WaitForExit) + { + /* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + + /* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */ + WaitForExit = false; + } + + /* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */ + if (SentCommand.DataSize) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */ + SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */ + SentCommand.DataSize--; + + /* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */ + for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) && + Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++) + { + SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + SentCommand.DataSize--; + } + + /* Process the command */ + ProcessBootloaderCommand(); + } + + /* Check if currently downloading firmware */ + if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE) + { + if (!(SentCommand.DataSize)) + { + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + else + { + /* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE); + + /* Throw away the page alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */ + DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % SPM_PAGESIZE); + + /* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Write flash + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + uint8_t WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next word into the current flash page */ + boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + WordsInFlashPage += 1; + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + + /* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */ + if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining)) + { + /* Commit the flash page to memory */ + boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Check if programming incomplete */ + if (WordsRemaining) + { + CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long; + WordsInFlashPage = 0; + + /* Erase next page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + } + } + + /* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + else // Write EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */ + eeprom_write_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */ + DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE); + } + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + case DFU_UPLOAD: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE) + { + if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank Check + { + /* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host + that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */ + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(StartAddr); + } + else + { + /* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(ResponseByte); + } + } + else + { + /* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */ + uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1); + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read FLASH + { + /* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */ + uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1); + + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + while (WordsRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + } + + /* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #else + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long)); + #endif + + /* Adjust counters */ + CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2; + } + + /* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */ + StartAddr = EndAddr; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM + { + while (BytesRemaining--) + { + /* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + } + + /* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr)); + + /* Adjust counters */ + StartAddr++; + } + } + + /* Return to idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Send ZLP to the host to acknowedge the request */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_GETSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write 8-bit status value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_Status); + + /* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(0); + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(0); + + /* Write 8-bit state value */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State); + + /* Write 8-bit state string ID number */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(0); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_CLRSTATUS: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */ + DFU_Status = OK; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + case DFU_GETSTATE: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current device state to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(DFU_State); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + break; + case DFU_ABORT: + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */ + DFU_State = dfuIDLE; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to + * discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix. + * + * \param NumberOfBytes Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint + */ +static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes) +{ + while (NumberOfBytes--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until next data packet received */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + Endpoint_Discard_Byte(); + } +} + +/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures + * that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the + * appropriate handler function. + */ +static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void) +{ + /* Check if device is in secure mode */ + if (IsSecure) + { + /* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */ + if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE) && + IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) || + (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ))) + { + /* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errWRITE; + + /* Stall command */ + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + /* Don't process the command */ + return; + } + } + + /* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */ + switch (SentCommand.Command) + { + case COMMAND_PROG_START: + ProcessMemProgCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_DISP_DATA: + ProcessMemReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_WRITE: + ProcessWriteCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_READ: + ProcessReadCommand(); + break; + case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR: + if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00)) // Set 64KB flash page command + Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2]; + + break; + } +} + +/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them + * in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables. + */ +static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void) +{ + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + uint16_t Word; + } Address[2] = {{Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}}, + {Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}}; + + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */ + StartAddr = Address[0].Word; + EndAddr = Address[1].Word; +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed + * to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory. + */ +static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Write FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Write EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) + { + union + { + uint16_t Words[2]; + uint32_t Long; + } CurrFlashAddress = {Words: {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}}; + + /* Erase the current page's temp buffer */ + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + } + + /* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preperations needed + * to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory + * blank check command. + */ +static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) || // Read FLASH command + IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02)) // Read EEPROM command + { + /* Load in the start and ending read addresses */ + LoadStartEndAddresses(); + + /* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */ + DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Blank check FLASH command + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + /* Check if the current byte is not blank */ + #if defined(RAMPZ) + if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #else + if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF) + #endif + { + /* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */ + Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16); + StartAddr = CurrFlashAddress; + + /* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */ + DFU_State = dfuERROR; + DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED; + + break; + } + + CurrFlashAddress++; + } + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as + * bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure. + */ +static void ProcessWriteCommand(void) +{ + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03)) // Start application + { + /* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */ + WaitForExit = true; + + /* Check if empty request data array - an empty request after a filled request retains the + previous valid request data, but initializes the reset */ + if (!(SentCommand.DataSize)) + { + if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00) // Start via watchdog + { + /* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + } + else // Start via jump + { + /* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */ + union + { + uint8_t Bytes[2]; + AppPtr_t FuncPtr; + } Address = {Bytes: {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}; + + AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr; + + /* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity */ + RunBootloader = false; + } + } + } + else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) // Erase flash + { + uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; + + /* Clear the application section of flash */ + while (CurrFlashAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR) + { + boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE; + } + + /* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */ + boot_rww_enable(); + + /* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */ + IsSecure = false; + } +} + +/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval + * commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval. + */ +static void ProcessReadCommand(void) +{ + const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2}; + const uint8_t SignatureInfo[3] = {SIGNATURE_BYTE_1, SIGNATURE_BYTE_2, SIGNATURE_BYTE_3}; + + uint8_t DataIndexToRead = SentCommand.Data[1]; + + if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00)) // Read bootloader info + { + ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead]; + } + else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01)) // Read signature byte + { + ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[DataIndexToRead - 0x30]; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5c680d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for BootloaderDFU.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_ +#define _BOOTLOADER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** Major bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2 + + /** Minor bootloader version number. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV 0 + + /** Complete bootloder version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the + * two individual bootloader version macros. + */ + #define BOOTLOADER_VERSION ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV) + + /** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1 0xDC + + /** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */ + #define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2 0xFB + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command. + * + * \param dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param cb1 First command byte to check + */ + #define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1) (dataarr[0] == cb1) + + /** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command. + * + * \param dataarr Command byte array to check against + * \param cb1 First command byte to check + * \param cb2 Second command byte to check + */ + #define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == cb1) && (dataarr[1] == cb2)) + + /** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command. + * The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as + * a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE 16 + + /** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command. + * Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded. + */ + #define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE 26 + + /** DFU class command request to detatch from the host. */ + #define DFU_DETATCH 0x00 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_DNLOAD 0x01 + + /** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */ + #define DFU_UPLOAD 0x02 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_GETSTATUS 0x03 + + /** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */ + #define DFU_CLRSTATUS 0x04 + + /** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */ + #define DFU_GETSTATE 0x05 + + /** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */ + #define DFU_ABORT 0x06 + + /** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_PROG_START 0x01 + + /** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */ + #define COMMAND_DISP_DATA 0x03 + + /** DFU command to issue a write command. */ + #define COMMAND_WRITE 0x04 + + /** DFU command to issue a read command. */ + #define COMMAND_READ 0x05 + + /** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page + * that subsequent flash operations should use. */ + #define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */ + typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + + /** Type define for a strucuture containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the COMMAND_* macro values */ + uint8_t Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */ + uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */ + } DFU_Command_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */ + enum DFU_State_t + { + appIDLE = 0, + appDETACH = 1, + dfuIDLE = 2, + dfuDNLOAD_SYNC = 3, + dfuDNBUSY = 4, + dfuDNLOAD_IDLE = 5, + dfuMANIFEST_SYNC = 6, + dfuMANIFEST = 7, + dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET = 8, + dfuUPLOAD_IDLE = 9, + dfuERROR = 10 + }; + + /** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */ + enum DFU_Status_t + { + OK = 0, + errTARGET = 1, + errFILE = 2, + errWRITE = 3, + errERASE = 4, + errCHECK_ERASED = 5, + errPROG = 6, + errVERIFY = 7, + errADDRESS = 8, + errNOTDONE = 9, + errFIRMWARE = 10, + errVENDOR = 11, + errUSBR = 12, + errPOR = 13, + errUNKNOWN = 14, + errSTALLEDPKT = 15 + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C) + static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes); + static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void); + static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void); + static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void); + static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void); + static void ProcessWriteCommand(void); + static void ProcessReadCommand(void); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..091ce408 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming + * software to load firmware onto the AVR. + * + * This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP application. However, it requires the use of Atmel's + * DFU drivers. You will need to install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader. + * + * As an open-source option, this bootloader is also compatible with the Linux Atmel USB DFU Programmer + * software, available for download at http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/. + * + * If SECURE_MODE is defined as true, upon startup the bootloader will be locked, with only the chip erase + * function available (similar to Atmel's DFU bootloader). If SECURE_MODE is defined as false, all functions + * are usable on startup without the prerequisite firmware erase. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB1287, and should fit into 4KB of bootloader space. If + * you wish to enlarge this space and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the BOOT_START and MCU + * values in the accompanying makefile. + * + * NOTE: This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader + * drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please + * manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)
USB Subclass:None
Relevant Standards:USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a1c69c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: PRODUCT_ID_CODE, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + DFUInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0xFE, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DFUFunctional: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t), Type: DTYPE_DFUFunctional}, + + Attributes: (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD), + + DetatchTimeout: 0x0000, + TransferSize: 0x0c00, + + DFUSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.01) + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR DFU Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b6d1a2af --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_DFUFunctional 0x21 + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH + * command is issued, rather than the host issing a USB Reset. + */ + #define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH (1 << 3) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manefestation phase + * (memory programming phase). + */ + #define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT (1 << 2) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from + * the device to the host. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD (1 << 1) + + /** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from + * the host to the device. + */ + #define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD (1 << 0) + + #if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x97 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF9 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x96 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFA + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF7 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x82 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FFB + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF4 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x95 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x87 + #elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) + #define PRODUCT_ID_CODE 0x2FF3 + + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_1 0x1E + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_2 0x94 + #define SIGNATURE_BYTE_3 0x88 + #else + #error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + #if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE) + #error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader. + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information + * to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the + * ATTR_* macros listed in this source file + */ + uint16_t DetatchTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH + * command being issued and the device detaching + * from the USB bus + */ + uint16_t TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept + * from the host in a transaction + */ + uint16_t DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU + * device complies with + */ + } USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DFUInterface; + USB_DFU_Functional_Descriptor_t DFUFunctional; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f78e5fde --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7801745 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = BootloaderDFU + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0x1E000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=32 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fdata-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen clean_doxygen diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..adfbe6c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] = +{ + 0x06, 0x9c, 0xff, /* Usage Page (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x09, 0x19, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x0a, 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage (Vendor Defined) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x82, /* Report Count (130) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0xff, /* Logical Maximum (255) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x16C0, + ProductID: 0x0478, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0010, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + ProductStrIndex: 0x01, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + HIDDescriptor: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(HIDReport) + }, + + HIDEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | HID_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x40 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(21), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"AVR Teensy Bootloader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + if (!(DescriptorNumber)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = LanguageString.Header.Size; + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = ProductString.Header.Size; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.HIDDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(HIDReport); + Size = sizeof(HIDReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24a0cdaa --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t HIDDescriptor; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HIDEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the HID data IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define HID_EPSIZE 64 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0df2320a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Teensy HID Bootloader" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f09ac50 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.c @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the TeensyHID bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TEENSYHID_C +#include "TeensyHID.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run + * via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application + * started via a forced watchdog reset. + */ +bool RunBootloader = true; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously + * runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */ + MCUCR = (1 << IVCE); + MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL); + + /* Initialize USB subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + while (RunBootloader) + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Shut down the USB interface, so that the host will register the disconnection */ + USB_ShutDown(); + + /* Wait 100ms to give the host time to register the disconnection */ + _delay_ms(100); + + /* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */ + wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS); + + for (;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay data to and from the attached USB host. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup HID Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the command (report) has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the write destination address */ + uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */ + if (PageAddress == TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION) + { + RunBootloader = false; + } + else + { + /* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */ + boot_page_erase(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */ + for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < 128; PageByte += 2) + { + /* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint())) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + } + + /* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */ + boot_page_fill(PageAddress + PageByte, Endpoint_Read_Word_LE()); + } + + /* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */ + boot_page_write(PageAddress); + boot_spm_busy_wait(); + + /* Re-enable RWW section */ + boot_rww_enable(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a53fca30 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.h @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TeensyHID.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TEENSYHID_H_ +#define _TEENSYHID_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) + #error This bootloader is not compatible with the selected AVR model. + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + #define TEENSY_STARTAPPLICATION 0xFFFF + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..973819cf --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/TeensyHID.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Teensy HID Class USB AVR Bootloader + * + * This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for Teensy compatible programming + * software to load firmware onto the AVR, such as the official software at http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/. + * + * Out of the box this bootloader builds for the USB162, and will fit into 2KB of bootloader space. + * + * This spoofs (with permission) the offical Teensy bootloader's VID and PID, so that the software remains + * compatible with no changes. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device Class (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Class StandardTeensy Programming Protocol Details
Usable Speeds:Low Speed ModeFull Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d40a0f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/TeensyHID/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb162 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = TeensyHID + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Starting byte address of the bootloader +BOOT_START = 0xC000 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DSTATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DUSE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START)UL -DFIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8 -DUSE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION +CDEFS += -DNO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START) +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78af34d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all bootloaders. + +# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C 'DFU/' clean + make -C 'DFU/' all + + make -C 'CDC/' clean + make -C 'CDC/' all + + make -C 'TeensyHID/' clean + make -C 'TeensyHID/' all + +%: + make -C 'DFU/' $@ + make -C 'CDC/' $@ + make -C 'TeensyHID/' $@ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aed850ae --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +AudioInput30-Sep-2008 14:03:0030-Sep-2008 14:03:28241030-Sep-2008 14:03:0044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCAudioInput.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000AudioInput.cDescriptors.cAudioInput.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111AudioInput.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\AudioInput.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioInput\Descriptors.c diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5474b49 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.c @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Audio Input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +/* --- Project Configuration --- */ +//#define MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL +/* --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- */ + +#include "AudioInput.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioIn App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_32); + ADC_SetupChannel(MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL); + + /* Start the ADC conversion in free running mode */ + ADC_StartReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and + * configures the sample update and PWM timers. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop the sample reload timer */ + TCCR0B = 0; + + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetInterface: + /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */ + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */ + if (wValue) + { + /* Start audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + /* Stop audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + } + + /* Handshake the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioInput_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in ADC samples from the microphone, and them to the host. */ +TASK(USB_Audio_Task) +{ + /* Select the audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be stored */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))) + { + /* Clear the sample reload timer */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A); + + /* Audio sample is ADC value scaled to fit the entire range */ + int16_t AudioSample = ((SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / ADC_MAX_RANGE) * ADC_GetResult()); + +#if defined(MICROPHONE_BIASED_TO_HALF_RAIL) + /* Microphone is biased to half rail voltage, subtract the bias from the sample value */ + AudioSample -= (SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE / 2)); +#endif + + /* Write the sample to the buffer */ + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(AudioSample); + + /* Check to see if the bank is now full */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Send the full packet to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97978fde --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // ADC driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** ADC channel number for the microphone input. */ + #define MIC_IN_ADC_CHANNEL 2 + + /** Maximum ADC sample value for the microphone input. */ + #define SAMPLE_MAX_RANGE 0xFFFF + + /** Maximum ADC range for the microphone input. */ + #define ADC_MAX_RANGE 0x3FF + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum AudioInput_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Audio_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09b77f7e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/AudioInput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Audio Input Device Demo + * + * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Audio Input device using the + * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers + * required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a USB microphone. Incomming audio from the ADC channel 1 will + * be sampled and sent to the host computer. + * + * To use, connect a microphone to the ADC channel 2. + * + * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option + * to automatically install the appropriate drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSBIF Audio Class Terminal Types SpecificationUSBIF Audio Data Formats Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a3e4288 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2047, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + InputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x01, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_IN_MIC, + AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00, + + TotalChannels: 1, + ChannelConfig: 0, + + ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + OutputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x02, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING, + AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00, + + SourceID: 0x01, + + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt0: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 1, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TerminalLink: 0x02, + + FrameDelay: 1, + AudioFormat: 0x0001 + }, + + AudioFormat: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format, + + FormatType: 0x01, + Channels: 0x01, + + SubFrameSize: 0x02, + BitResolution: 16, + SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)), + + SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)} + }, + + AudioEndpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 1 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + AudioEndpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + Attributes: 0x00, + + LockDelayUnits: 0x00, + LockDelay: 0x0000 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio In Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc007498 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02 + + //@{ + /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1) + #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2) + #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7) + #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10) + #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0) + #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1) + #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2) + #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3) + #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4) + #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5) + #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6) + #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7) + #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8) + #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100 + #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101 + #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF + #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201 + #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307 + //@} + + /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number. + * + * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ + */ + #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)} + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1 + #else + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3 + #endif + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires + * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller + * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output. + */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM) + + /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features + * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio + * specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */ + + uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */ + uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */ + + uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */ + uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */ + + uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */ + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */ + + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */ + + uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */ + uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t; + + /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype, + * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */ + uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */ + } AudioSampleFreq_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details + * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used + * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */ + + uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */ + uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */ + + uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */ + AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */ + } USB_AudioFormat_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */ + + uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */ + uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal; + USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1; + USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f84efb7b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Input Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7569ea24 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioInput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = AudioInput + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a01ba8f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +AudioOutput30-Sep-2008 14:03:5130-Sep-2008 14:04:06241030-Sep-2008 14:03:5144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AudioOutput\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000AudioOutput.cDescriptors.cAudioOutput.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111AudioOutput.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..184910e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.c @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Audio Output demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +/* --- Project Configuration (Choose ONE) --- */ +//#define AUDIO_OUT_MONO +#define AUDIO_OUT_STEREO +//#define AUDIO_OUT_LEDS +//#define AUDIO_OUT_PORTC +/* --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- */ + +#include "AudioOutput.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AudioOut App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Audio_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs, and + * configures the sample update and PWM timers. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + OCR0A = (F_CPU / AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); // Fcpu speed + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Set speakers as outputs */ + DDRC |= ((1 << 6) | (1 << 5)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Set PORTC as outputs */ + DDRC |= 0xFF; +#endif + +#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)) + /* PWM speaker timer initialization */ + TCCRxA = ((1 << WGMx0) | (1 << COMxA1) | (1 << COMxA0) + | (1 << COMxB1) | (1 << COMxB0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP + TCCRxB = ((1 << WGMx2) | (1 << CSx0)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed +#endif +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and Audio management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop the timers */ + TCCR0B = 0; +#if (defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) || defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO)) + TCCRxB = 0; +#endif + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~(1 << 6); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Set speakers as inputs to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~((1 << 6) | (1 << 5)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Set PORTC low */ + PORTC = 0x00; +#endif + + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Audio class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process General and Audio specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_SetInterface: + /* Set Interface is not handled by the library, as its function is application-specific */ + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Check if the host is enabling the audio interface (setting AlternateSetting to 1) */ + if (wValue) + { + /* Start audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + /* Stop audio task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Audio_Task, TASK_STOP); + } + + /* Handshake the request */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Audio interface, reading in audio samples from the host, and outputting them to the speakers/LEDs as + * desired. + */ +TASK(USB_Audio_Task) +{ + /* Select the audio stream endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the current endpoint can be read from (contains a packet) and that the next sample should be read */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))) + { + /* Clear the sample reload timer */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << OCF0A); + + /* Retreive the signed 16-bit left and right audio samples */ + int16_t LeftSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + int16_t RightSample_16Bit = (int16_t)Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Check to see if the bank is now empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Acknowedge the packet, clear the bank ready for the next packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Massage signed 16-bit left and right audio samples into signed 8-bit */ + int8_t LeftSample_8Bit = (LeftSample_16Bit >> 8); + int8_t RightSample_8Bit = (RightSample_16Bit >> 8); + +#if defined(AUDIO_OUT_MONO) + /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */ + int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1); + + /* Load the sample into the PWM timer channel */ + OCRxA = ((uint8_t)MixedSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_STEREO) + /* Load the dual 8-bit samples into the PWM timer channels */ + OCRxA = ((uint8_t)LeftSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); + OCRxB = ((uint8_t)RightSample_8Bit ^ (1 << 7)); +#elif defined(AUDIO_OUT_PORTC) + /* Mix the two channels together to produce a mono, 8-bit sample */ + int8_t MixedSample_8Bit = (((int16_t)LeftSample_8Bit + (int16_t)RightSample_8Bit) >> 1); + + PORTC = MixedSample_8Bit; +#else + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Make left channel positive (absolute) */ + if (LeftSample_8Bit < 0) + LeftSample_8Bit = -LeftSample_8Bit; + + /* Make right channel positive (absolute) */ + if (RightSample_8Bit < 0) + RightSample_8Bit = -RightSample_8Bit; + + /* Set first LED based on sample value */ + if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1)) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + else if (LeftSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3)) + LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + /* Set second LED based on sample value */ + if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 1)) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + else if (RightSample_8Bit < ((128 / 8) * 3)) + LEDMask |= (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + else + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +#endif + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b992317 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.h @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + #define TCCRxA TCCR3A + #define TCCRxB TCCR3B + #define OCRxA OCR3A + #define OCRxB OCR3B + #define WGMx0 WGM30 + #define WGMx2 WGM32 + #define COMxA1 COM3A1 + #define COMxA0 COM3A0 + #define COMxB1 COM3B1 + #define COMxB0 COM3B0 + #define CSx0 CS30 + #else + /** Timer count register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */ + #define TCCRxA TCCR1A + + /** Timer count register used for right channel PWM audio output */ + #define TCCRxB TCCR1B + + /** Timer compare register used for left channel PWM audio output (or mixed output in mono output mode) */ + #define OCRxA OCR1A + + /** Timer compare register used for right channel PWM audio output */ + #define OCRxB OCR1B + + /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */ + #define WGMx0 WGM10 + + /** Timer control register mask used to select PWM mode */ + #define WGMx2 WGM12 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxA1 COM1A1 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxA0 COM1A0 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxB1 COM1B1 + + /** Timer control register mask used to set, clear or toggle channel output pin on match */ + #define COMxB0 COM1B0 + + /** Timer control register mask used to start the timer at Fcpu clock rate */ + #define CSx0 CS10 + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum AudioOutput_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Audio_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce7d4ed9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/AudioOutput.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Audio Output Device Demo + * + * Audio demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Audio Output device using the + * basic USB Audio drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers + * required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a USB speaker. Incomming audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto + * the timer output (timer 3 for the AT90USBXXX6/7 USB AVRs, timer 1 for + * the AT90USBXXX2 controller AVRs) compare channel A for AUDIO_OUT_MONO + * mode, on channels A and B for AUDIO_OUT_STEREO and on the board LEDs + * for AUDIO_OUT_LEDS mode. Decouple audio outputs with a capacitor and + * attach to a speaker to hear the audio. + * + * Under Windows, if a driver request dialogue pops up, select the option + * to automatically install the appropriate drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSBIF Audio Class Terminal Types SpecificationUSBIF Audio Data Formats Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..169e534b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(02.00), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2046, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t) + + sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t)), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + InputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x01, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_STREAMING, + AssociatedOutputTerminal: 0x00, + + TotalChannels: 2, + ChannelConfig: (CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT | CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT), + + ChannelStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + OutputTerminal: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal, + + TerminalID: 0x02, + TerminalType: TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER, + AssociatedInputTerminal: 0x00, + + SourceID: 0x01, + + TerminalStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt0: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_Alt1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 1, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TerminalLink: 0x01, + + FrameDelay: 1, + AudioFormat: 0x0001 + }, + + AudioFormat: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioFormat_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Format, + + FormatType: 0x01, + Channels: 0x02, + + SubFrameSize: 0x02, + BitResolution: 16, + + SampleFrequencyType: (sizeof(ConfigurationDescriptor.AudioFormat.SampleFrequencies) / sizeof(AudioSampleFreq_t)), + SampleFrequencies: {SAMPLE_FREQ(AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY)} + }, + + AudioEndpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS | ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 1 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + AudioEndpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + Attributes: EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS, + + LockDelayUnits: 0x00, + LockDelay: 0x0000 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Audio Out Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99f10d64 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Output Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputTerminal 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Input Terminal Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputTerminal 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Feature Unit Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_FeatureUnit 0x06 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for an Audio class specific descriptor indicating the format of an audio stream. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Format 0x02 + + //@{ + /** Supported channel mask for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_FRONT (1 << 0) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_FRONT (1 << 1) + #define CHANNEL_CENTER_FRONT (1 << 2) + #define CHANNEL_LOW_FREQ_ENHANCE (1 << 3) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_SURROUND (1 << 4) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_SURROUND (1 << 5) + #define CHANNEL_LEFT_OF_CENTER (1 << 6) + #define CHANNEL_RIGHT_OF_CENTER (1 << 7) + #define CHANNEL_SURROUND (1 << 8) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_LEFT (1 << 9) + #define CHANNEL_SIDE_RIGHT (1 << 10) + #define CHANNEL_TOP (1 << 11) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Supported feature mask for an Audio class feature unit descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define FEATURE_MUTE (1 << 0) + #define FEATURE_VOLUME (1 << 1) + #define FEATURE_BASS (1 << 2) + #define FEATURE_MID (1 << 3) + #define FEATURE_TREBLE (1 << 4) + #define FEATURE_GRAPHIC_EQUALIZER (1 << 5) + #define FEATURE_AUTOMATIC_GAIN (1 << 6) + #define FEATURE_DELAY (1 << 7) + #define FEATURE_BASS_BOOST (1 << 8) + #define FEATURE_BASS_LOUDNESS (1 << 9) + //@} + + //@{ + /** Terminal type constant for an Audio class terminal descriptor. See the Audio class specification for more details. */ + + #define TERMINAL_UNDEFINED 0x0100 + #define TERMINAL_STREAMING 0x0101 + #define TERMINAL_VENDOR 0x01FF + #define TERMINAL_IN_UNDEFINED 0x0200 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC 0x0201 + #define TERMINAL_IN_DESKTOP_MIC 0x0202 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PERSONAL_MIC 0x0203 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OMNIDIR_MIC 0x0204 + #define TERMINAL_IN_MIC_ARRAY 0x0205 + #define TERMINAL_IN_PROCESSING_MIC 0x0206 + #define TERMINAL_IN_OUT_UNDEFINED 0x0300 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_SPEAKER 0x0301 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEADPHONES 0x0302 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_HEAD_MOUNTED 0x0303 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_DESKTOP 0x0304 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_ROOM 0x0305 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_COMMUNICATION 0x0306 + #define TERMINAL_OUT_LOWFREQ 0x0307 + //@} + + /** Convenience macro, to fill a 24-bit AudioSampleFreq_t structure with the given sample rate as a 24-bit number. + * + * \param freq Required audio sampling frequency in HZ + */ + #define SAMPLE_FREQ(freq) {LowWord: ((uint32_t)freq & 0x00FFFF), HighByte: (((uint32_t)freq >> 16) & 0x0000FF)} + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * accepts only filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_ONLY_FULL_PACKETS (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the attributes parameter of an Audio class specific Endpoint descriptor, indicating that the endpoint + * will accept partially filled endpoint packets of audio samples. + */ + #define EP_ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS (0 << 7) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Endpoint number of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 1 + #else + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM 3 + #endif + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data endpoint. The Windows audio stack requires + * at least 192 bytes for correct output, thus the smaller 128 byte maximum endpoint size on some of the smaller + * USB AVR models will result in unavoidable distorted output. + */ + #define AUDIO_STREAM_EPSIZE ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(AUDIO_STREAM_EPNUM) + + /** Sample frequency of the data being transmitted through the streaming endpoint. */ + #define AUDIO_SAMPLE_FREQUENCY 48000 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /**< Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /**< Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific Feature Unit descriptor. This indicates to the host what features + * are present in the device's audio stream for basic control, such as per-channel volume. See the USB Audio + * specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t UnitID; /**< ID value of this feature unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< Source ID value of the audio source input into this feature unit */ + + uint8_t ControlSize; /**< Size of each element in the ChanelControlls array */ + uint8_t ChannelControls[3]; /**< Feature masks for the control channel, and each seperate audio channel */ + + uint8_t FeatureUnitStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioFeatureUnit_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific input terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an input audio source, either from a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedOutputTerminal; /**< ID of associated output terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t TotalChannels; /**< Total number of seperate audio channels within this interface (right, left, etc.) */ + uint16_t ChannelConfig; /**< CHANNEL_* masks indicating what channel layout is supported by this terminal */ + + uint8_t ChannelStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this channel within the device */ + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioInputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific output terminal descriptor. This indicates to the host that the device + * contains an output audio sink, either to a physical terminal on the device, or a logical terminal (for example, + * a USB endpoint). See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalID; /**< ID value of this terminal unit - must be a unique value within the device */ + uint16_t TerminalType; /**< Type of terminal, a TERMINAL_* mask */ + uint8_t AssociatedInputTerminal; /**< ID of associated input terminal, for physically grouped terminals + * such as the speaker and microphone of a phone handset + */ + uint8_t SourceID; /**< ID value of the unit this terminal's audio is sourced from */ + + uint8_t TerminalStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how audio streams within the device are formatted. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TerminalLink; /**< ID value of the output terminal this descriptor is describing */ + + uint8_t FrameDelay; /**< Delay in frames resulting from the complete sample processing from input to output */ + uint16_t AudioFormat; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AS_t; + + /** Type define for a 24bit audio sample frequency structure. GCC does not contain a built in 24bit datatype, + * this this structure is used to build up the value instead. Fill this structure with the SAMPLE_FREQ() macro. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t LowWord; /**< Low 16 bits of the 24-bit value */ + uint8_t HighByte; /**< Upper 8 bits of the 24-bit value */ + } AudioSampleFreq_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific audio format descriptor. This is used to give the host full details + * about the number of channels, the sample resolution, acceptable sample frequencies and encoding method used + * in the device's audio streams. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t FormatType; /**< Format of the audio stream, see Audio Device Formats specification */ + uint8_t Channels; /**< Total number of discrete channels in the stream */ + + uint8_t SubFrameSize; /**< Size in bytes of each channel's sample data in the stream */ + uint8_t BitResolution; /**< Bits of resolution of each channel's samples in the stream */ + + uint8_t SampleFrequencyType; /**< Total number of sample frequencies supported by the device */ + AudioSampleFreq_t SampleFrequencies[1]; /**< Sample frequencies supported by the device */ + } USB_AudioFormat_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of endpoints used to stream audio in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t Attributes; /**< Audio class specific endpoint attributes, such as ACCEPTS_SMALL_PACKETS */ + + uint8_t LockDelayUnits; /**< Units used for the LockDelay field, see Audio class specification */ + uint16_t LockDelay; /**< Time required to internally lock endpoint's internal clock recovery circuitry */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioInputTerminal_t InputTerminal; + USB_AudioOutputTerminal_t OutputTerminal; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt0; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface_Alt1; + USB_AudioInterface_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_AudioFormat_t AudioFormat; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t AudioEndpoint; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Spc_t AudioEndpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..114137e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Audio Output Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = YES + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c8e7fa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/AudioOutput/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = AudioOutput + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83dde595 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +CDC30-Sep-2008 14:04:3430-Sep-2008 14:04:56241030-Sep-2008 14:04:3444, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\CDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000CDC.cDescriptors.cCDC.hDescriptors.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111CDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e232a48 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "CDC.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA CDC App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */ +char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */ +char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */ +char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */ +char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */ +char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n"; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake + lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks + to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code: + */ + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + // Do something with the given line states in wIndex +#endif + + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the CDC_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + char* ReportString = NULL; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + static bool ActionSent = false; + +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232 + handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code: + */ + USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t) + { + NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + Notification: NOTIF_SerialState, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + uint16_t LineStateMask; + + // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask)); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +#endif + + /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportString = JoystickUpString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportString = JoystickDownString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportString = JoystickLeftString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportString = JoystickRightString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportString = JoystickPressedString; + + /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */ + if (ReportString == NULL) + { + ActionSent = false; + } + else if (ActionSent == false) + { + ActionSent = true; + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the String to the Endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Throw away any received data from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98f30b52 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_H_ +#define _CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for + * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC + * notification endpoint. + */ + #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20 + + /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6) + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a + * change in the device state asynchronously. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants + * from the library StdRequestType.h header + */ + uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */ + } USB_Notification_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum CDC_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34e1c82a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/CDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Communications Device Class Device (Virtual Serial Port) + * + * Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a CDC device acting as a virtual serial port. Joystick + * actions are transmitted to the host as strings. The device + * does not respond to serial data sent from the host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa0c79da --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2044, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bec5e40d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3493347c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9d9ed63 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/LUFA CDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e42d173e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = CDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b68991ca --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +CDCHost30-Sep-2008 14:05:2030-Sep-2008 14:05:44241030-Sep-2008 14:05:2044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\CDCHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000CDCHost.cConfigDescriptor.cCDCHost.hConfigDescriptor.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111CDCHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac6d89ad --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,278 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the CDCHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "CDCHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA CDC Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_CDC_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_CDC_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start CDC Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_CDC_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the CDCHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in + * data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_CDC_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + + /* Check if data is in the pipe */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */ + uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe(); + uint8_t Buffer[BufferLength]; + + /* Read in the pipe data to the tempoary buffer */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength); + + /* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */ + for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++) + putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]); + } + + /* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data is in the pipe */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Discard the event notification */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + break; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2adbefd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CDCHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CDC_HOST_H_ +#define _CDC_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN 1 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */ + #define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT 2 + + /** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE 3 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum CDCHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_CDC_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f8dc8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo + * + * CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application + * for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile. + * + * This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port. + * + * Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC + * and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor + * specific features, thus use vendor-specfic class/subclass/protocol codes to force + * the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compaible with such devices. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb80ec3e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the CDC interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextCDCInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the CDC interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Get the next CDC interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextCDCInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCDCInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the notification pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextCDCInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + + /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_DATA_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared + * using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface). + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04d71aad --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "CDCHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the CDC class */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS 0x02 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */ + #define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */ + #define CDC_DATA_CLASS 0x0A + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass (unused) */ + #define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS 0x00 + + /** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */ + #define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL 0x00 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoCDCInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< Cmpatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextCDCInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..320951a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cd54dd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/CDCHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = CDCHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f74b138 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,385 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0xEF, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204E, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 4, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + IAD1: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + FirstInterfaceIndex: 0, + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC1_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + CDC1_ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + CDC1_DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC1_DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC1_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + CDC1_DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC1_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + IAD2: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), Type: DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + FirstInterfaceIndex: 2, + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + IADStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 2, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x03} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC2_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x02, 0x03} + }, + + CDC2_ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + CDC2_DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 3, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC2_DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC2_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + CDC2_DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC2_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(13), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Dual CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7bbe52fe --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the first CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC1_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 4 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_TX_EPNUM 5 + + /** Endpoint number of the second CDC interface's host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC2_RX_EPNUM 6 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoints. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD1; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC1_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC1_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC1_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC1_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t IAD2; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC2_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC2_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC2_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC2_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b3b7417 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Dual CDC Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..276e7435 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +DualCDC30-Sep-2008 14:06:0330-Sep-2008 14:06:18241030-Sep-2008 14:06:0344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\DualCDC\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cDualCDC.cDescriptors.hDualCDC.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111DualCDC.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90f00997 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.c @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the DualCDC demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "DualCDC.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA DualCDC App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC1_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC2_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding1 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the second virtual serial port. While this demo does not use + * the physical USART and thus does not use these settings, they must still be retained and returned to the host + * upon request or the host will assume the device is non-functional. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, however they are not required to be used accurately. + * It is possible to completely ignore these value or use other settings as the host is completely unaware of the physical + * serial link characteristics and instead sends and recieves data in endpoint streams. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding2 = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed upwards. */ +char JoystickUpString[] = "Joystick Up\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed downwards. */ +char JoystickDownString[] = "Joystick Down\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed left. */ +char JoystickLeftString[] = "Joystick Left\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed right. */ +char JoystickRightString[] = "Joystick Right\r\n"; + +/** String to print through the first virtual serial port when the joystick is pressed inwards. */ +char JoystickPressedString[] = "Joystick Pressed\r\n"; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management tasks are started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the first CDC */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints for the second CDC */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC1_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC2_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData; + + /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */ + Endpoint_Ignore_Word(); + + /* wIndex indicates the interface being controlled */ + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Determine which interface's Line Coding data is being set from the wIndex parameter */ + LineCodingData = (wIndex == 0) ? (uint8_t*)&LineCoding1 : (uint8_t*)&LineCoding2; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(CDC_Line_Coding_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command (currently unused) */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the DualCDC_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the first CDC interface, which sends joystick + * movements to the host as ASCII strings. + */ +TASK(CDC1_Task) +{ + char* ReportString = NULL; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + static bool ActionSent = false; + + /* Determine if a joystick action has occurred */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportString = JoystickUpString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportString = JoystickDownString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportString = JoystickLeftString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportString = JoystickRightString; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportString = JoystickPressedString; + + /* Flag management - Only allow one string to be sent per action */ + if (ReportString == NULL) + { + ActionSent = false; + } + else if (ActionSent == false) + { + ActionSent = true; + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the String to the Endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReportString, strlen(ReportString)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC1_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Throw away any received data from the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Function to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host for the second CDC interface, which echos back + * all data sent to it from the host. + */ +TASK(CDC2_Task) +{ + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check to see if any data has been received */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create a temp buffer big enough to hold the incomming endpoint packet */ + uint8_t Buffer[Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()]; + + /* Remember how large the incomming packet is */ + uint16_t DataLength = Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); + + /* Read in the incomming packet into the buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC2_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Write the received data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Buffer, DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a01e07f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.h @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DualCDC.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DUAL_CDC_H_ +#define _DUAL_CDC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum DualCDC_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC1_Task); + TASK(CDC2_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aebbec35 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/DualCDC.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Dual Communications Device Class Device (Dual Virtual Serial Port) + * + * Dual Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a compound device with dual CDC functions acting as a pair + * of virtual serial ports. This demo uses Interface Association + * Descriptors to link together the pair of related CDC + * descriptors for each virtual serial port, which may not be + * supported in all OSes - Windows Vista is supported, as is + * XP (although the latter may need a hotfix to function). + * + * Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings + * through the first serial port. The device does not respond to + * serial data sent from the host in the first serial port. + * + * The second serial port echoes back data sent from the host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Miscellaneous Device Class( Sub-Interface: Communications Device Class (CDC) )
USB Subclass:Common Class( Sub-Interface: Abstract Control Model (ACM) )
Relevant Standards:USBIF Interface Association Descriptor ECNUSBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10ba560f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/LUFA DualCDC.inf @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +; Windows LUFA Dual CDC Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_00 +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204E&MI_02 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..103cd7d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/DualCDC/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = DualCDC + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36e644c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM JoystickReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x04, /* Usage (Joystick) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xa1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage (X) */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage (Y) */ + 0x15, 0x9c, /* Logical Minimum (-100) */ + 0x25, 0x64, /* Logical Maximum (100) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x81, 0x82, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute, Volatile) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Button 2) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Button 1) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x75, 0x06, /* Report Size (6) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0xc0, /* End Collection */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2043, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + JoystickHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(JoystickReport) + }, + + JoystickEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | JOYSTICK_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: JOYSTICK_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Joystick Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.JoystickHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(JoystickReport); + Size = sizeof(JoystickReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3463d962 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t JoystickHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t JoystickEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define JOYSTICK_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Joystick HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define JOYSTICK_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2af5ce68 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Joystick Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..245245da --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Joystick30-Sep-2008 14:06:3830-Sep-2008 14:07:27241030-Sep-2008 14:06:3844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Joystick\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cJoystick.cDescriptors.hJoystick.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Joystick.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88d41584 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.c @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Joystick demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Joystick.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Joystick App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Joystick_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and joystick reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running joystick reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the joystick reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Joystick Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, JOYSTICK_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start joystick reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Joystick_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData; + + /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */ + GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(JoystickReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(JoystickReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -100; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 100; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 100; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -100; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 1); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 0); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Joystick_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host. */ +TASK(USB_Joystick_Report) +{ + /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Joystick Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(JOYSTICK_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Joystick Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_JoystickReport_Data_t JoystickReportData; + + /* Create the next HID report to send to the host */ + GetNextReport(&JoystickReportData); + + /* Write Joystick Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&JoystickReportData, sizeof(JoystickReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + JoystickReportData.X = 0; + JoystickReportData.Y = 0; + JoystickReportData.Button = 0; + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..966fa7e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Joystick.c. + */ + +#ifndef _JOYSTICK_H_ +#define _JOYSTICK_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Joystick_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the joystick HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + int8_t X; /**< Current absolute joystick X position, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current absolute joystick Y position, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed joystick buttons */ + } USB_JoystickReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Joystick_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_JoystickReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6229aa04 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/Joystick.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Joystick Device Demo + * + * Joystick demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard device, for USB Joysticks + * using the standard Keyboard HID profile. + * + * This device will show up as a generic joystick device, with two buttons. + * Pressing the joystick inwards is the first button, and the HWB button + * is the second. + * + * Moving the joystick on the selected board moves the joystick location on + * the host computer. + * + * Currently only single interface joysticks are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..abd98972 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Joystick/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,700 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Joystick + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e11ef662 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa1bf05b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79a300ae --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..541c1750 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Keyboard30-Sep-2008 13:59:2930-Sep-2008 14:00:25241030-Sep-2008 13:59:2944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCKeyboard.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Keyboard\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboard.cDescriptors.hKeyboard.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Keyboard.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe00000makefile1 diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92f4ae94 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.c @@ -0,0 +1,429 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Keyboard demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Keyboard.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Keyboard App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Keyboard reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the keyboard reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; + + /* Start Keyboard reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Keyboard_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write, and if we should send a report */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport) + { + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1aed1ec --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Keyboard.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Keyboard_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2277255 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/Keyboard.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b870c21f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Keyboard/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Keyboard + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23c4165a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(16), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Denver Gingerich" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa1bf05b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a35a143 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo (Fully Interrupt Driven)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f23575e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardFullInt30-Sep-2008 14:07:5930-Sep-2008 14:08:25241030-Sep-2008 14:07:5944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardFullInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboardFullInt.cDescriptors.hKeyboardFullInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardFullInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe00000makefile1 diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e90b5ff --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,462 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardFullInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardFullInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KeyboardFI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Main program code loop */ + for (;;) + { + /* No main code -- all USB code is interrupt driven */ + } +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint OUT interrupt ISR for the LED report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardFullInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control + * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } + + /* Check if keyboard endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_EPNUM)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Keyboard Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } + + /* Check if Keyboard LED status Endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM)) + { + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint OUT interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Clear the Keyboard LED Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } +} + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7711faaa --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardFullInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardFullInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89071188 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/KeyboardFullInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Fully Interrupt Driven Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host, and control requests on the control + * endpoint. This gives a simple reference application for implementing a + * USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. + * no special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus + * works under compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6937f41b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardFullInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,701 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardFullInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a704cfc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d168b45 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "KeyboardHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3bdbc95e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f80c86dc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHost30-Sep-2008 14:08:4830-Sep-2008 14:09:04241030-Sep-2008 14:08:4844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHost\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cKeyboardHost.cConfigDescriptor.hKeyboardHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd05bdea --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop Keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport; + + /* Read in keyboard report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero */ + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0); + + /* Check if a key has been pressed */ + if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + } + + /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97695f74 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */ + uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92e38078 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse keyboard, for USB keyboards using + * the standard keyboard HID profile. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. + * + * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f502bc31 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aaf929fe --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Enable the pipe IN interrupt for the data pipe */ + USB_INT_Enable(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95854509 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "KeyboardHostViaInt.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..185fcd32 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo (Via Pipe Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a7cdb4c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHostViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:09:2330-Sep-2008 14:09:46241030-Sep-2008 14:09:2344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostViaInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cKeyboardHostViaInt.cConfigDescriptor.hKeyboardHostViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardHostViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecff9511 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,321 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHostViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHostViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to enable the pipe + * interrupts so that reports can be processed as they arrive from the device. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Interrupt handler for the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt vector. This interrupt fires each time an enabled + * pipe interrupt occurs on a pipe which has had that interrupt enabled. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport; + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Check to see if the keyboard data pipe has caused the interrupt */ + if (Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE)) + { + /* Clear the pipe interrupt, and select the keyboard pipe */ + Pipe_ClearPipeInterrupt(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + + /* Check to see if the pipe IN interrupt has fired */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(PIPE_INT_IN) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(PIPE_INT_IN)) + { + /* Clear interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Read in keyboard report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0); + + /* Check if a key has been pressed */ + if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED4) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED4); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED4); + + /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22848eea --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardHostViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */ + uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07c11084 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/KeyboardHostViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application, using pipe interrupts. This gives + * a simple reference application for implementing a USB Keyboard host utilizing + * the LUFA pipe interrupt system, for USB keyboards using the standard Keyboard + * HID profile. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. + * + * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23155ed4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHostViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c962cbc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextKeyboardInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextHID))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + else + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e007a942 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */ + #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextKeyboardInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c6db18f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70749eb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Report << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} + +/** Function to print out the attached device's HID descriptor elements in human readable form + * through the serial port. This is good for examining a device's HID descriptors, however it + * can cause noticible delays as there is generally a lot of data to be sent. + */ +void DumpHIDReportItems(void) +{ + /* Loop through each of the loaded HID report items in the processed item structure */ + for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++) + { + /* Create pointer to the current report info structure */ + HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex]; + + /* Print out each report item's details */ + printf_P(PSTR(" Item %d:\r\n" + " Type: %s\r\n" + " Flags: %d\r\n" + " BitOffset: %d\r\n" + " BitSize: %d\r\n" + " Coll Ptr: %d\r\n" + " Coll Usage: %d\r\n" + " Coll Prnt: %d\r\n" + " Usage Page: %d\r\n" + " Usage: %d\r\n" + " Usage Min: %d\r\n" + " Usage Max: %d\r\n" + " Unit Type: %d\r\n" + " Unit Exp: %d\r\n" + " Log Min: %d\r\n" + " Log Max: %d\r\n" + " Phy Min: %d\r\n" + " Phy Max: %d\r\n"), ItemIndex, + ((RItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In) ? "IN" : "OUT"), + RItem->ItemFlags, + RItem->BitOffset, + RItem->Attributes.BitSize, + RItem->CollectionPath, + RItem->CollectionPath->Usage, + RItem->CollectionPath->Parent, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..282b58b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // HID Class Report Parser + + #include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD 0x07 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occured while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + void DumpHIDReportItems(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a51668b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardHostWithParser30-Sep-2008 14:10:1030-Sep-2008 14:10:39241030-Sep-2008 14:10:1044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCKeyboardHostWithParser.elfC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cHIDReport.cKeyboardHostWithParser.cConfigDescriptor.hHIDReport.hKeyboardHostWithParser.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111KeyboardHostWithParser.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\ConfigDescriptor.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\HIDReport.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\KeyboardHostWithParser.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\ConfigDescriptor.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\HIDReport.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardHostWithParser\KeyboardHostWithParser.c diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b92c302 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,345 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KBD Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Keyboard Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop keyboard and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Keyboard Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* LEDs one and two on to indicate busy processing */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Dumping HID Report Items.\r\n")); + + /* Dump the HID report items to the serial port */ + DumpHIDReportItems(); + + /* All LEDs off - ready to indicate keypresses */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the keyboard report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a tempoary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + /* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */ + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize == 8) && + (ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */ + bool FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */ + uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */ + if (KeyCode) + { + /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */ + if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + else + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2); + + char PressedKey = 0; + + /* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */ + if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A'; + else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27)) + PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0'; + else if (KeyCode == 0x2C) + PressedKey = ' '; + else if (KeyCode == 0x28) + PressedKey = '\n'; + + /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */ + if (PressedKey) + putchar(PressedKey); + } + + /* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */ + break; + } + } + } + + /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6846e179 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */ + #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy dumping HID report items to the serial port */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09a83ca5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using + * the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports, + * allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports + * keyboards with a single HID report. + * + * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial + * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the + * report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the + * USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c5a236d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9d91039 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,354 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + * + * This descriptor describes the mouse HID interface's report structure. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Physical) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Same as the MouseReport structure, but defines the keyboard HID interface's report structure. */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204D, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + KeyboardInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + MouseInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x01, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: HID_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(28), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse and Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + if (!(wIndex)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + } + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + if (!(wIndex)) + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + } + else + { + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59495425 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t KeyboardInterface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MouseInterface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_IN_EPNUM 3 + + /** Size in bytes of each of the HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define HID_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12916856 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Combined Keyboard/Mouse Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb54f1d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardMouse30-Sep-2008 14:11:0030-Sep-2008 14:11:17241030-Sep-2008 14:11:0044, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardMouse\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cKeyboardMouse.cDescriptors.hKeyboardMouse.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111KeyboardMouse.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2216472d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,372 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardMouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardMouse.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseKBD App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Global structure to hold the current keyboard interface HID report, for transmission to the host */ +USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + +/** Global structure to hold the current mouse interface HID report, for transmission to the host */ +USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running HID reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard and mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, HID_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* ReportData; + uint8_t ReportSize; + + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_Ignore_Word(); + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Determine if it is the mouse or the keyboard data that is being requested */ + if (!(wIndex)) + { + ReportData = (uint8_t*)&KeyboardReportData; + ReportSize = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + } + else + { + ReportData = (uint8_t*)&MouseReportData; + ReportSize = sizeof(MouseReportData); + } + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > ReportSize) + wLength = ReportSize; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(ReportData, 0, ReportSize); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current HID LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Keyboard task. This generates the next keyboard HID report for the host, and transmits it via the + * keyboard IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. Additionally, it processes host LED status + * reports sent to the device via the keyboard OUT reporting endpoint. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + + /* Check if HWB is not pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */ + if (!(HWB_GetStatus())) + { + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + KeyboardReportData.KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&KeyboardReportData, 0, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + } + + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard LED Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDStatus & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} + +/** Mouse task. This generates the next mouse HID report for the host, and transmits it via the + * mouse IN endpoint when the host is ready for more data. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + + /* Check if HWB is pressed, if so mouse mode enabled */ + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + { + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + MouseReportData.Y = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + MouseReportData.Y = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + MouseReportData.X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + MouseReportData.X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + MouseReportData.Button = (1 << 0); + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host and report protocol mode is enabled */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5c1d4e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard); + TASK(USB_Mouse); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardMouse_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..969e2871 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/KeyboardMouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Dual HID Keyboard and Mouse Device Demo + * + * Keyboard/Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a composite device containing both USB Keyboard + * and USB Mouse functionality using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes + * (i.e. no special drivers required). This example uses two seperate HID + * interfaces for each function. It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works under + * compatible BIOS as if it was a native keyboard and mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present and the HWB is not + * pressed. When enabled, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * When the HWB is pressed, the mouse mode is enabled. When enabled, move the + * joystick to move the pointer, and push the joystick inwards to simulate a + * left-button click. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fc0a6ea --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardMouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardMouse + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e28b59e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x05, /* Report Count (5) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x08, /* Usage Page (LEDs) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Num Lock) */ + 0x29, 0x05, /* Usage Maximum (Kana) */ + 0x91, 0x02, /* Output (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x03, /* Report Size (3) */ + 0x91, 0x03, /* Output (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + KeyboardLEDsEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(16), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Denver Gingerich" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(18), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Keyboard Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa1bf05b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the Keyboard HID reporting OUT endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the Keyboard HID reporting IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d354a312 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Device Demo (Via Endpoint Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d31b4a0f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +KeyboardViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:11:3530-Sep-2008 14:11:49241030-Sep-2008 14:11:3544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\KeyboardViaInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31000Descriptors.cKeyboardViaInt.cDescriptors.hKeyboardViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111KeyboardViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f6fcd8c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,453 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the KeyboardViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "KeyboardViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA KeyboardI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running keyboard reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the keyboard device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Setup Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint OUT interrupt ISR for the LED report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Wait until the LED report has been sent by the host */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Clear the endpoint data */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host is ready to receive the request confirmation */ + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + /* Handshake the request by sending an empty IN packet */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x04; // A + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x05; // B + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x06; // C + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x07; // D + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = 0x08; // E + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = (uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL); + + /* Save the current joystick status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Processes a given LED report mask from the host and sets the board LEDs to match. + * + * \param LEDReport LED mask from the host, containing a mask of what LEDs are set + */ +void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_LED2; + + if (LEDReport & 0x01) // NUM Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (LEDReport & 0x02) // CAPS Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (LEDReport & 0x04) // SCROLL Lock + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Set the status LEDs to the current Keyboard LED status */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the KeyboardViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Save previously selected endpoint before selecting a new endpoint */ + uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(); + + /* Check if keyboard endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_EPNUM)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Keyboard Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(KeyboardReportData)); + } + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Check if Keyboard LED status Endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM)) + { + /* Select the Keyboard LED Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint OUT interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_OUT); + + /* Clear the Keyboard LED Report endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(KEYBOARD_LEDS_EPNUM); + + /* Read in the LED report from the host */ + uint8_t LEDStatus = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + /* Process the incomming LED report */ + ProcessLEDReport(LEDStatus); + + /* Handshake the OUT Endpoint - clear endpoint and ready for next report */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Restore previously selected endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint); +} + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..833bc919 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Based on code by Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for KeyboardViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _KEYBOARD_H_ +#define _KEYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier mask byte, containing a mask of modifier keys set (such as shift or CTRL) */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved, always set as 0x00 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Array of up to six simultaneous key codes of pressed keys */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum KeyboardViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void ProcessLEDReport(uint8_t LEDReport); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02ee7592 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/KeyboardViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Partially Interrupt Driven Keyboard Device Demo + * + * Keyboard demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Keyboard using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native keyboard (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a keyboard when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the keyboard example, manipulate the joystick to send the letters + * a, b, c, d and e. See the USB HID documentation for more information + * on sending keyboard event and keypresses. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e2108e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/KeyboardViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = KeyboardViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1dbc1d91 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,325 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2048, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + AudioControlInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioControlInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_Header, + + ACSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + TotalLength: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_AC_t), + + InCollection: 1, + InterfaceNumbers: {1}, + }, + + AudioStreamInterface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x01, + SubClass: 0x03, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + AudioStreamInterface_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + AudioSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.00), + + TotalLength: (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) - offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, AudioStreamInterface_SPC)) + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Emb: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED, + JackID: 0x01, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Ext: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_InputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL, + JackID: 0x02, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED, + JackID: 0x03, + + NumberOfPins: 1, + SourceJackID: {0x02}, + SourcePinID: {0x01}, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioInterface}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_OutputJack, + + JackType: JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL, + JackID: 0x04, + + NumberOfPins: 1, + SourceJackID: {0x01}, + SourcePinID: {0x01}, + + JackStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01, + AssociatedJackID: {0x01} + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint: + { + Endpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + EndpointSize: MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0 + }, + + Refresh: 0, + SyncEndpointNumber: 0 + }, + + MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_AudioEndpoint}, + Subtype: DSUBTYPE_General, + + TotalEmbeddedJacks: 0x01, + AssociatedJackID: {0x03} + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(14), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA MIDI Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f80e58b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class interface descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioInterface 0x24 + + /** Descriptor header constant to indicate a Audio class endpoint descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_AudioEndpoint 0x25 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific header descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_Header 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI input jack descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_InputJack 0x02 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a Audio class specific MIDI output jack descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_OutputJack 0x03 + + /** Audio class descriptor subtype value for a general Audio class specific descriptor. */ + #define DSUBTYPE_General 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an embedded (logical) MIDI input or output jack. */ + #define JACKTYPE_EMBEDDED 0x01 + + /** Audio class descriptor jack type value for an external (physical) MIDI input or output jack. */ + #define JACKTYPE_EXTERNAL 0x02 + + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Audio class specific interface descriptor. This follows a regular interface descriptor to + * supply extra information about the audio device's layout to the host. See the USB Audio specification for more + * details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t ACSpecification; /** Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /** Total length of the Audio class specific control descriptors, including this descriptor */ + + uint8_t InCollection; /** Total number of audio class interfaces within this device */ + uint8_t InterfaceNumbers[1]; /** Interface numbers of each audio interface */ + } USB_AudioInterface_AC_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI streaming interface descriptor. This indicates to the host + * how MIDI the specification compliance of the device and the total length of the Audio class specific descriptors. + * See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint16_t AudioSpecification; /**< Binary coded decimal value, indicating the supported Audio Class specification version */ + uint16_t TotalLength; /**< Total length of the Audio class specific descriptors, including this descriptor */ + } USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific endpoint descriptor. This contains a regular endpoint + * descriptor with a few Audio-class specific extensions. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t Endpoint; /**< Standard endpoint descriptor describing the audio endpoint */ + + uint8_t Refresh; /**< Always set to zero */ + uint8_t SyncEndpointNumber; /**< Endpoint address to send synchronisation information to, if needed (zero otherwise) */ + } USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI IN jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI input, either + * a physical input jack, or a logical jack (recieving input data internally, or from the host via an endpoint). + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */ + uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */ + + uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific MIDI OUT jack. This gives information to the host on a MIDI output, either + * a physical output jack, or a logical jack (sending output data internally, or to the host via an endpoint). + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t JackType; /**< Type of jack, one of the JACKTYPE_* mask values */ + uint8_t JackID; /**< ID value of this jack - must be a unique value within the device */ + + uint8_t NumberOfPins; /**< Number of output channels within the jack, either physical or logical */ + uint8_t SourceJackID[1]; /**< ID of each output pin's source data jack */ + uint8_t SourcePinID[1]; /**< Pin number in the input jack of each output pin's source data */ + + uint8_t JackStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing this descriptor within the device */ + } USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t; + + /** Type define for an Audio class specific extended MIDI jack endpoint descriptor. This contains extra information + * on the usage of MIDI endpoints used to stream MIDI events in and out of the USB Audio device, and follows an Audio + * class specific extended MIDI endpoint descriptor. See the USB Audio specification for more details. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + uint8_t Subtype; /**< Sub type value used to distinguish between audio class specific descriptors */ + + uint8_t TotalEmbeddedJacks; /**< Total number of jacks inside this endpoint */ + uint8_t AssociatedJackID[1]; /**< IDs of each jack inside the endpoint */ + } USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioControlInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_AC_t AudioControlInterface_SPC; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AudioStreamInterface; + USB_AudioInterface_MIDI_AS_t AudioStreamInterface_SPC; + USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_In_Jack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext; + USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Out_Jack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + USB_AudioStreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d36de8e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e61e7701 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MIDI30-Sep-2008 14:13:1230-Sep-2008 14:13:33241030-Sep-2008 14:13:1244, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MIDI\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMIDI.cDescriptors.hMIDI.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MIDI.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9c827a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.c @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MIDI input demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MIDI.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MIDI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_MIDI_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs, disables the sample update and PWM output timers and stops the USB and MIDI management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running audio and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the MIDI management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup MIDI stream endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start MIDI task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MIDI_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Task to handle the generation of MIDI note change events in response to presses of the board joystick, and send them + * to the host. + */ +TASK(USB_MIDI_Task) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoystickStatus; + + /* Select the MIDI IN stream */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint is ready to be written to */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Get current joystick mask, XOR with previous to detect joystick changes */ + uint8_t JoystickStatus = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t JoystickChanges = (JoystickStatus ^ PrevJoystickStatus); + + /* Get HWB status - if set use channel 10 (percussion), otherwise use channel 1 */ + uint8_t Channel = ((HWB_GetStatus()) ? MIDI_CHANNEL(10) : MIDI_CHANNEL(1)); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_LEFT) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3C, (JoystickStatus & JOY_LEFT), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_UP) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3D, (JoystickStatus & JOY_UP), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_RIGHT) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3E, (JoystickStatus & JOY_RIGHT), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_DOWN) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3F, (JoystickStatus & JOY_DOWN), 0, Channel); + + if (JoystickChanges & JOY_PRESS) + SendMIDINoteChange(0x3B, (JoystickStatus & JOY_PRESS), 0, Channel); + + /* Save previous joystick value for next joystick change detection */ + PrevJoystickStatus = JoystickStatus; + } + + /* Select the MIDI OUT stream */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check if endpoint is ready to be read from, if so discard its (unused) data */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MIDI_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Sends a MIDI note change event (note on or off) to the MIDI output jack, on the given virtual cable ID and channel. + * + * \param Pitch Pitch of the note to turn on or off + * \param OnOff Set to true if the note is on (being held down), or false otherwise + * \param CableID ID of the virtual cable to send the note change to + * \param Channel MIDI channel number to send the note change event to + */ +void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff, const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel) +{ + /* Wait until endpoint ready for more data */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Check if the message should be a Note On or Note Off command */ + uint8_t Command = ((OnOff)? MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON : MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF); + + /* Write the Packet Header to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte((CableID << 4) | (Command >> 4)); + + /* Write the Note On/Off command with the specified channel, pitch and velocity */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Command | Channel); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Pitch); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY); + + /* Send the data in the endpoint to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1775c637 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** MIDI command for a note on (activation) event */ + #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON 0x90 + + /** MIDI command for a note off (deactivation) event */ + #define MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF 0x80 + + /** Standard key press velocity value used for all note events, as no pressure sensor is mounted */ + #define MIDI_STANDARD_VELOCITY 64 + + /** Convenience macro. MIDI channels are numbered from 1-10 (natural numbers) however the logical channel + * addresses are zero-indexed. This converts a natural MIDI channel number into the logical channel address. + * + * \param channel MIDI channel number to address + */ + #define MIDI_CHANNEL(channel) (channel - 1) + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MIDI_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MIDI_Task); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SendMIDINoteChange(const uint8_t Pitch, const bool OnOff, + const uint8_t CableID, const uint8_t Channel); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b34ccb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/MIDI.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage MIDI Input Device Demo + * + * MIDI demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing the USB-MIDI class in USB devices. + * It is built upon the USB Audio class. + * + * Joystick movements are translated into note on/off messages and + * are sent to the host PC as MIDI streams which can be read by any + * MIDI program supporting MIDI IN devices. + * + * If the HWB is not pressed, channel 1 (default piano) is used. If + * the HWB is set, then channel 10 (default percussion) is selected. + * + * This device implements MIDI-THRU mode, with the IN MIDI data being + * generated by the device itself. OUT MIDI data is discarded. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Audio Class
USB Subclass:Standard Audio Device
Relevant Standards:USBIF Audio Class SpecificationUSB-MIDI Audio Class Extention SpecificationGeneral MIDI Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40e19519 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MIDI/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MIDI + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba09a595 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.c @@ -0,0 +1,316 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions to manage the physical dataflash media, including reading and writing of + * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored + * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such + * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C +#include "DataflashManager.h" + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), from + * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes + * them to the dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. + * + * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the dataflash IC based on the page number */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + /* Ensure endpoint is ready before continuing */ + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the current endpoint bank */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */ + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the dataflash */ + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + + /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter and reset the sub block counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the dataflash buffer contents back to the dataflash page */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Deselect all dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board dataflash IC(s), into + * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint. + * + * \param BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the dataflash IC based on the page number */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Ensure endpoint is ready before continuing */ + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */ + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + /* Check if end of dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next dataflash chip based on the new dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the dataflash */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Increment the dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Deselect all dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Disables the dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */ +void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void) +{ + /* Select first dataflash chip, send the read status register command */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + + /* Select second dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */ + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + #endif + + /* Deselect current dataflash chip */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0c43c39 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/DataflashManager.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DataflashManager.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H +#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "MassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Dataflash chip driver + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16) + #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more dataflash ICs. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) + + /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying + * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(const uint32_t BlockAddress, uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6173156 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2045, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: 0x03, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED, + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x08, + SubClass: 0x06, + Protocol: 0x50, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(22), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mass Storage Demo" +}; + +/** Serial number descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing a string of HEX characters at least 12 + * digits in length to uniquely identify a device when concatenated with the device's Vendor and Product IDs. By + * using the unique serial number string to identify a device, the device drivers do not need to be reinstalled + * each time the device is inserted into a different USB port on the same system. This should be unique between + * devices, or conflicts will occur if two devices sharing the same serial number are inserted into the same system + * at the same time. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM SerialNumberString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(12), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"000000000000" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x03: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(SerialNumberString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&SerialNumberString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a64d72e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7b90016 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..483bc4ca --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MassStorage30-Sep-2008 14:12:0930-Sep-2008 14:12:25241030-Sep-2008 14:12:0944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MassStorage\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000DataflashManager.cDescriptors.cMassStorage.cSCSI.cDataflashManager.hDescriptors.hMassStorage.hSCSI.hSCSI_Codes.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111MassStorage.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb61530f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.c @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Mass Storage demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C +#include "MassStorage.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MassStore App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_MassStorage , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Structure to hold the latest Command Block Wrapper issued by the host, containing a SCSI command to execute. */ +CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock; + +/** Structure to hold the latest Command Status Wrapper to return to the host, containing the status of the last issued command. */ +CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus = { Signature: CSW_SIGNATURE }; + +/** Flag to asyncronously abort any in-progress data transfers upon the reception of a mass storage reset command. */ +volatile bool IsMassStoreReset = false; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + Dataflash_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2); + + /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */ + DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Reset the MSReset flag upon connection */ + IsMassStoreReset = false; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mass storage task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mass Storage In and Out Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start mass storage task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStorage, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the Mass Storage class-specific + * requests) so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Process UFI specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_MassStorageReset: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Indicate that the current transfer should be aborted */ + IsMassStoreReset = true; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetMaxLUN: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Indicate to the host the number of supported LUNs (virtual disks) on the device */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_Write_Byte(TOTAL_LUNS - 1); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MassStorage_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + case Status_CommandBlockError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_ProcessingCommandBlock: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the Mass Storage interface, reading in Command Block Wrappers from the host, processing the SCSI commands they + * contain, and returning Command Status Wrappers back to the host to indicate the success or failure of the last issued command. + */ +TASK(USB_MassStorage) +{ + /* Check if the USB System is connected to a Host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Data Out Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Check to see if a command from the host has been issued */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Indicate busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingCommandBlock); + + /* Process sent command block from the host */ + if (ReadInCommandBlock()) + { + /* Check direction of command, select Data IN endpoint if data is from the device */ + if (CommandBlock.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN) + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Decode the received SCSI command */ + SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(); + + /* Load in the CBW tag into the CSW to link them together */ + CommandStatus.Tag = CommandBlock.Tag; + + /* Load in the data residue counter into the CSW */ + CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue = CommandBlock.DataTransferLength; + + /* Stall the selected data pipe if command failed (if data is still to be transferred) */ + if ((CommandStatus.Status == Command_Fail) && (CommandStatus.DataTransferResidue)) + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + /* Return command status block to the host */ + ReturnCommandStatus(); + + /* Check if a Mass Storage Reset ocurred */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + { + /* Reset the data endpoint banks */ + Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + Endpoint_ResetFIFO(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the abort transfer flag */ + IsMassStoreReset = false; + } + + /* Indicate ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + } + else + { + /* Indicate error reading in the command block from the host */ + UpdateStatus(Status_CommandBlockError); + } + } + } +} + +/** Function to read in a command block from the host, via the bulk data OUT endpoint. This function reads in the next command block + * if one has been issued, and performs validation to ensure that the block command is valid. + * + * \return Boolean true if a valid command block has been read in from the endpoint, false otherwise + */ +static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void) +{ + /* Select the Data Out endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* Read in command block header */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock, (sizeof(CommandBlock) - sizeof(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData)), + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Verify the command block - abort if invalid */ + if ((CommandBlock.Signature != CBW_SIGNATURE) || + (CommandBlock.LUN >= TOTAL_LUNS) || + (CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength > MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH)) + { + /* Stall both data pipes until reset by host */ + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + + return false; + } + + /* Read in command block command data */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&CommandBlock.SCSICommandData, + CommandBlock.SCSICommandLength, + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + return true; +} + +/** Returns the filled Command Status Wrapper back to the host via the bulk data IN endpoint, waiting for the host to clear any + * stalled data endpoints as needed. + */ +static void ReturnCommandStatus(void) +{ + /* Select the Data Out endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM); + + /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */ + while (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + { + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Select the Data In endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM); + + /* While data pipe is stalled, wait until the host issues a control request to clear the stall */ + while (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + { + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Write the CSW to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&CommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatus), + AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return; + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +} + +/** Stream callback function for the Endpoint stream read and write functions. This callback will abort the current stream transfer + * if a Mass Storage Reset request has been issued to the control endpoint. + */ +STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset) +{ + /* Abort if a Mass Storage reset command was received */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return STREAMCALLBACK_Abort; + + /* Continue with the current stream operation */ + return STREAMCALLBACK_Continue; +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when a control request has been issued to the control endpoint, + * so that the request can be processed. As several elements of the Mass Storage implementation require asynchronous control requests + * (such as endpoint stall clearing and Mass Storage Reset requests during data transfers) this is done via interrupts rather than + * polling. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f0e5b58 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.h @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStorage.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORAGE_H_ +#define _MASS_STORAGE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "SCSI.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Dataflash chip driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** Mass Storage Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface, ready for the next command. */ + #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF + + /** Mass Storage Class specific request to retrieve the total number of Logical Units (drives) in the SCSI device. */ + #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE + + /** Maximum length of a SCSI command which can be issued by the device or host in a Mass Storage bulk wrapper. */ + #define MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH 16 + + /** Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. By default, the total device capacity is shared equally between + * each drive - this can be set to any positive non-zero amount. */ + #define TOTAL_LUNS 2 + + /** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */ + #define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS) + + /** Magic signature for a Command Block Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */ + #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL + + /** Magic signature for a Command Status Wrapper used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only transport protocol. */ + #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL + + /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from host-to-device. */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7) + + /** Mask for a Command Block Wrapper's flags attribute to specify a command with data sent from device-to-host. */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7) + + /* Type defines: */ + /** Type define for a Command Block Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, must be CBW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Block */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */ + uint32_t DataTransferLength; /** Length of the optional data portion of the issued command, in bytes */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< Command block flags, indicating command data direction */ + uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit number this command is issued to */ + uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the issued SCSI command within the SCSI command data array */ + uint8_t SCSICommandData[MAX_SCSI_COMMAND_LENGTH]; /**< Issued SCSI command in the Command Block */ + } CommandBlockWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a Command Status Wrapper, used in the Mass Storage Bulk-Only Transport protocol. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Status block signature, must be CSW_SIGNATURE to indicate a valid Command Status */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Unique command ID value, to associate a command block wrapper with its command status wrapper */ + uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Number of bytes of data not processed in the SCSI command */ + uint8_t Status; /**< Status code of the issued command - a value from the MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */ + } CommandStatusWrapper_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible command status wrapper return status codes. */ + enum MassStorage_CommandStatusCodes_t + { + Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed with no error */ + Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete - host may check the exact error via a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command */ + Phase_Error = 2 /**< Command failed due to being invalid in the current phase */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MassStorage_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_CommandBlockError = 3, /**< Processing a SCSI command block from the host */ + Status_ProcessingCommandBlock = 4, /**< Error during the processing of a SCSI command block from the host */ + }; + + /* Global Variables: */ + extern CommandBlockWrapper_t CommandBlock; + extern CommandStatusWrapper_t CommandStatus; + extern volatile bool IsMassStoreReset; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MassStorage); + + /* Stream Callbacks: */ + STREAM_CALLBACK(AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORAGE_C) + static bool ReadInCommandBlock(void); + static void ReturnCommandStatus(void); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..428faa8e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/MassStorage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Device Demo + * + * Dual LUN Mass Storage demonstration application. This gives a simple + * reference application for implementing a multiple LUN USB Mass Storage + * device using the basic USB UFI drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no + * special drivers required). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function as an + * external mass storage device with two LUNs (seperate disks) which may + * be formatted and used in the same manner as commercial USB Mass Storage + * devices. + * + * You will need to format the mass storage drives upon first run of this + * demonstration - as the device acts only as a data block transport between + * the host and the storage media, it does not matter what file system is used, + * as the data interpretation is performed by the host and not the USB device. + * + * This demo is not restricted to only two LUNs; by changing the TOTAL_LUNS + * value in MassStorageDualLUN.h, any number of LUNs can be used (from 1 to + * 255), with each LUN being allocated an equal portion of the available + * Dataflash memory. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Mass Storage Device
USB Subclass:Bulk-Only Transport
Relevant Standards:USBIF Mass Storage StandardUSB Bulk-Only Transport StandardSCSI Primary Commands SpecificationSCSI Block Commands Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9c55269 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI reponse data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + DeviceType: 0, + PeripheralQualifier: 0, + + Removable: true, + + Version: 0, + + ResponseDataFormat: 2, + NormACA: false, + TrmTsk: false, + AERC: false, + + AdditionalLength: 0x1F, + + SoftReset: false, + CmdQue: false, + Linked: false, + Sync: false, + WideBus16Bit: false, + WideBus32Bit: false, + RelAddr: false, + + VendorID: "LUFA", + ProductID: "Dataflash Disk", + RevisionID: {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + ResponseCode: 0x70, + AdditionalLength: 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + */ +void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the apropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + /* Command succeeded - set the CSW status and update the SENSE key */ + CommandStatus.Status = Command_Pass; + + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + } + else + { + /* Command failed - set the CSW status - failed command function updates the SENSE key */ + CommandStatus.Status = Command_Fail; + } +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = (((uint16_t)CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3] << 8) | + CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(InquiryData))? AllocationLength : + sizeof(InquiryData); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Write the INQUIRY data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred]; + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = (AllocationLength < sizeof(SenseData))? AllocationLength : sizeof(SenseData); + + /* Send the SENSE data - this indicates to the host the status of the last command */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + uint8_t PadBytes[AllocationLength - BytesTransferred]; + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&PadBytes, (AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), AbortOnMassStoreReset); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void) +{ + /* Send the total number of logical blocks in the current LUN */ + Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1); + + /* Send the logical block size of the device (must be 512 bytes) */ + Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (IsMassStoreReset) + return false; + + /* Send the endpoint data packet to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command peforms a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the + * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is + * supported. + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnByte; + + /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */ + if (!(CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2))) + { + /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + #endif + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint32_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */ + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[3] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[2] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + ((uint8_t*)&BlockAddress)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[5]; + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to do it byte-by-byte) */ + ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[1] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]; + ((uint8_t*)&TotalBlocks)[0] = CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[8]; + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + #if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1) + /* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */ + BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS); + #endif + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + else + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + return true; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0be3900 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include // Function Attribute, Atomic, Debug and ISR Macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + + #include "MassStorage.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + #include "SCSI_Codes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(key, acode, aqual) MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey = key; \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = acode; \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = aqual; }MACROE + + /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a SCSI response structure to a SCSI INQUIRY command. For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int DeviceType : 5; + unsigned int PeripheralQualifier : 3; + + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 7; + unsigned int Removable : 1; + + uint8_t Version; + + unsigned int ResponseDataFormat : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED2 : 1; + unsigned int NormACA : 1; + unsigned int TrmTsk : 1; + unsigned int AERC : 1; + + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t _RESERVED3[2]; + + unsigned int SoftReset : 1; + unsigned int CmdQue : 1; + unsigned int _RESERVED4 : 1; + unsigned int Linked : 1; + unsigned int Sync : 1; + unsigned int WideBus16Bit : 1; + unsigned int WideBus32Bit : 1; + unsigned int RelAddr : 1; + + uint8_t VendorID[8]; + uint8_t ProductID[16]; + uint8_t RevisionID[4]; + } SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t; + + /** Type define for a SCSI sense structure to a SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t ResponseCode; + + uint8_t SegmentNumber; + + unsigned int SenseKey : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 1; + unsigned int ILI : 1; + unsigned int EOM : 1; + unsigned int FileMark : 1; + + uint8_t Information[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier; + uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode; + uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3]; + } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(void); + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(const bool IsDataRead); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b2213de --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to + * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and + * the SENSE data. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_ +#define _SCSI_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12 + #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03 + #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00 + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25 + #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D + #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28 + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08 + #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A + + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E + + #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A + + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c8bf352 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorage/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MassStorage + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + SCSI.c \ + DataflashManager.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53e44875 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextMassStorageInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMassStorageInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MASS_STORE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if + * another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + /* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */ + if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..908cc2ba --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */ + #define MASS_STORE_CLASS 0x08 + + /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */ + #define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */ + #define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL 0x50 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMassStorageInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b154575b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9481b344 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MassStorageHost30-Sep-2008 14:12:4326-Jan-2009 16:08:24241030-Sep-2008 14:12:4344, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMassStorageHost.cMassStoreCommands.cConfigDescriptor.hMassStorageHost.hMassStoreCommands.hSCSI_Codes.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MassStorageHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20081205\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20081205\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\ConfigDescriptor.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStorageHost.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStoreCommands.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\ConfigDescriptor.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStorageHost.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\MassStorageHost\MassStoreCommands.c diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee4befd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MassStorageHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MS Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_MassStore_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals */ +/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */ +uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "MassStore Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop USB management and Mass Storage tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStore_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Once device is fully enumerated, start the Mass Storage Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_MassStore_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from + * the device and print them to the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_MassStore_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */ + printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1)); + + /* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data + * is read - both on startup and after a failed command */ + SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData; + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready")); + + /* Wait until disk ready */ + do + { + Serial_TxByte('.'); + MassStore_TestUnitReady(0); + } + while ((SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass) && USB_IsConnected); + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... ")); + + /* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */ + SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity; + + /* Retrieve disk capacity */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */ + printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize); + + /* Create a new buffer capabable of holding a single block from the device */ + uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize]; + + /* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Show the number of bytes not transferred in the previous command */ + printf_P(PSTR("Transfer Residue: %lu\r\n"), SCSICommandStatus.DataTransferResidue); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n")); + + /* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */ + for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++) + { + /* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */ + uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4]; + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte); + } + + puts_P(PSTR(" ")); + + /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */ + for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++) + { + char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset); + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + } + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress HWB to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n")); + + /* Wait for HWB to be pressed */ + while (!(HWB_GetStatus())) + { + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */ + for (uint32_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlock++) + { + /* Read in the next block of data from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlock, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) + { + ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), ErrorCode); + break; + } + + /* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */ + for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++) + { + char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte]; + + putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.'); + } + + /* Abort if device removed */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + break; + } + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MassStorageHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + case Status_SCSICommandError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Indicates that a communication error has ocurred with the attached Mass Storage Device, + * printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before + * continuing. + * + * \param CommandString ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + */ +void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + /* Display the error code */ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d"), ErrorCode); + + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_SCSICommandError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ace6d46 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "MassStoreCommands.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy reading or writing to the attached Mass Storage device */ + Status_SCSICommandError = 6, /**< Error sending or recieving a command to or from the attached SCSI device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_MassStore_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, uint8_t ErrorCode); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2defd7fe --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo + * + * Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices + * using the standard Mass Storage USB profile. + * + * The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped + * out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287 + * AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents + * of the disk will be dumped to the serial port. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Mass Storage Device
USB Subclass:Bulk Only
Relevant Standards:USBIF Mass Storage StandardUSB Bulk-Only Transport StandardSCSI Primary Commands SpecificationSCSI Block Commands Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2760eaa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,664 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file + * also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks + * can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained + * to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C +#include "MassStoreCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** Current CBW to send to the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is not externally accessable. + */ +static CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock; + +/** Current CSW received from the device. This is automatically filled by the routines + * in this file and is externally accessable so that the return codes may be checked. + */ +CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + +/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented + * by the routines in this file, and is not externally accessable. + */ +static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1; + + +/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, excluding valued 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF */ + if (++MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF) + MassStore_Tag = 1; + + /* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking + * to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Unfreeze the OUT pipe so that it can be checked */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected; + }; + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or + * writing to the nominated buffer. + * + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + uint16_t BytesRem = SCSICommandBlock.Header.DataTransferLength; + + /* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */ + if (SCSICommandBlock.Header.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN) + { + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the block data from the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + } + else + { + /* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the block data to the pipe */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + } + + /* Acknowledge the packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze used pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Load in the CSW from the attached device */ + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + return ErrorCode; + + /* Clear the data ready for next reception */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Some buggy devices require a delay here before the pipe freezing or they will lock up */ + USB_Host_WaitMS(1); + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + bRequest: REQ_ClearFeature, + wValue: FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + wIndex: EndpointNum, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface, + * readying the device for the next CBW. + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_MassStorageReset, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} + +/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical + * Unit in the attached device. + * + * \param MaxLUNIndex Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetMaxLUN, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 1, + }; + + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled) + { + /* Clear the pipe stall */ + Pipe_ClearStall(); + + /* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */ + *MaxLUNIndex = 0; + } + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This + * gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param SensePtr Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned sense data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData((uint8_t*)SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the + * storage medium into a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to read from + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to read from the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to read + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Read + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Read + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned block data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the + * storage medium from a buffer. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param BlockAddress Start block address to write to + * \param Blocks Number of blocks to write to in the device + * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to write + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize), + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10, + 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off) + (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address + (BlockAddress >> 16), + (BlockAddress >> 8), + (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address + 0x00, // Unused (reserved) + 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Write + Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Write + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Write the data to the device from the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept + * other commands. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 0, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the + * given Logical Unit within the device. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param CapacityPtr Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 8, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 10 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // MSB of Logical block address + 0x00, + 0x00, + 0x00, // LSB of Logical block address + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Partial Medium Indicator + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Wait until data received from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Read the returned capacity data into the buffer */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + /* Endian-correct the read data */ + CapacityPtr->Blocks = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks); + CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from + * being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still + * be issued before the first read or write command is sent. + * + * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to + * \param PreventRemoval Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval) +{ + uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; + + /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */ + SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t) + { + Header: + { + Signature: CBW_SIGNATURE, + Tag: MassStore_Tag, + DataTransferLength: 0, + Flags: COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT, + LUN: LUNIndex, + SCSICommandLength: 6 + }, + + SCSICommandData: + { + SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL, + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00, // Reserved + PreventRemoval, // Prevent flag + 0x00, // Reserved + 0x00 // Unused (control) + } + }; + + /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */ + MassStore_SendCommand(); + + /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */ + if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + Pipe_Freeze(); + return ReturnCode; + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3ddfeeb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/MassStoreCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MassStoreCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "MassStorageHost.h" + #include "SCSI_Codes.h" + + #include // USB Functionality + + /* Macros: */ + /** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */ + #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF + + /** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */ + #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE + + /** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */ + #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL + + /** Command Statuc Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */ + #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7) + + /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */ + #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7) + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 500 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE 1 + + /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */ + #define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2 + + /* Type defines: */ + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */ + uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */ + uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */ + } Header; + + uint8_t SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */ + } CommandBlockWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI + * responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */ + uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */ + uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transfered */ + uint8_t Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */ + } CommandStatusWrapper_t; + + /** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the + * device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the + * device (giving explitic error codes for the last issued command). For details of the + * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications. + */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int ReponseCode : 7; + unsigned int Valid : 1; + + uint8_t SegmentNumber; + + unsigned int SenseKey : 4; + unsigned int _RESERVED1 : 1; + unsigned int ILI : 1; + unsigned int EOM : 1; + unsigned int FileMark : 1; + + uint8_t Information[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalLength; + uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4]; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode; + uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier; + uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode; + uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3]; + } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t; + + /** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number + * of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by + * the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */ + uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */ + } SCSI_Capacity_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */ + enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t + { + Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */ + Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */ + Phase_Error = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C) + static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void); + static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void); + #endif + + uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum); + uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void); + uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress, + const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5); + uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex); + uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b2213de --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/SCSI_Codes.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to + * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and + * the SENSE data. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_ +#define _SCSI_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12 + #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03 + #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00 + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25 + #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D + #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28 + #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A + #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08 + #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A + #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A + + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09 + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D + #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E + + #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21 + #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A + + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02 + #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7853e81 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MassStorageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,706 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MassStorageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + MassStoreCommands.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dac048b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fcee721 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62c4db11 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ae16379 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Mouse30-Sep-2008 14:13:5230-Sep-2008 14:14:08241030-Sep-2008 14:13:5244, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\Mouse\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouse.cDescriptors.hMouse.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111Mouse.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9080efba --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.c @@ -0,0 +1,376 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Mouse demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Mouse.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and Mouse reporting tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mouse reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the mouse reporting task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; + + /* Start running mouse reporting task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Report, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the Mouse_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage HID report generation and transmission to the host, when in report mode. */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Report) +{ + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Mouse Endpoint Ready for Read/Write and if we should send a new report */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && SendReport) + { + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c7b5888 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Mouse.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Report); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum Mouse_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b7360f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/Mouse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f851f3b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/Mouse/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Mouse + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a139bc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3aea3164 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ebd12da --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo (Fully Interrupt Driven)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff9750a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseFullInt30-Sep-2008 14:14:2530-Sep-2008 14:14:39241030-Sep-2008 14:14:2544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseFullInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouseFullInt.cDescriptors.hMouseFullInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseFullInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c21959a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,399 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseFullInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseFullInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseFI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Main program code loop */ + for (;;) + { + /* No main code -- all USB code is interrupt driven */ + } +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. This fires when the USB interface is reset by the USB host, before the + * enumeration process begins, and enables the control endpoint interrupt so that control requests can be handled + * asynchronously when they arrive rather than when the control endpoint is polled manually. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + /* Select the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Enable the endpoint SETUP interrupt ISR for the control endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseFullInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. It is also used to respond to standard and class specific requests send to the device on the control + * endpoint, by handing them off to the LUFA library when they are received. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if the control endpoint has received a request */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP)) + { + /* Clear the endpoint interrupt */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + /* Process the control request */ + USB_USBTask(); + + /* Handshake the endpoint setup interrupt - must be after the call to USB_USBTask() */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP); + } + + /* Check if mouse endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(MOUSE_EPNUM)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Mouse Report endpoint interrupt and select the endpoint */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fdc51d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseFullInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseFullInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..460a8dd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/MouseFullInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Fully Interrupt Driven Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host, and control requests on the control + * endpoint. This gives a simple reference application for implementing a + * USB Mouse using the basic USB HID drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no + * special drivers required). It is boot protocol compatible, and thus works + * under compatible BIOS as if it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f781ea90 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseFullInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseFullInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..645f6c80 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22e73371 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MouseHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5194af37 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e40b0c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHost30-Sep-2008 14:14:5630-Sep-2008 14:15:10241030-Sep-2008 14:14:5644, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMouseHost.cConfigDescriptor.hMouseHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bc13a90 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,310 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport; + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Read in mouse report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */ + if (MouseReport.X > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + else if (MouseReport.X < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */ + if (MouseReport.Y > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + else if (MouseReport.Y < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */ + if (MouseReport.Button) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */ + printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X, + MouseReport.Y, + MouseReport.Button); + } + + /* Freeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e474956 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */ + int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11c434c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs, + * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and + * button status information. + * + * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * MouseHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b812428d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb629d48 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Enable the pipe IN interrupt for the data pipe */ + USB_INT_Enable(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4328646a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "MouseHostViaInt.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum KeyboardHostViaInt_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee9bcd5f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo (Via Pipe Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..adf632fc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHostViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:15:2630-Sep-2008 14:15:40241030-Sep-2008 14:15:2644, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHostViaInt\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cMouseHostViaInt.cConfigDescriptor.hMouseHostViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHostViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4c37785 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHostViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + + #include "MouseHostViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to enable the pipe + * interrupts so that reports can be processed as they arrive from the device. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_SetProtocol, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error status */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + } +} + +/** Interrupt handler for the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt vector. This interrupt fires each time an enabled + * pipe interrupt occurs on a pipe which has had that interrupt enabled. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport; + + /* Check to see if the mouse data pipe has caused the interrupt */ + if (Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(MOUSE_DATAPIPE)) + { + /* Clear the pipe interrupt, and select the mouse pipe */ + Pipe_ClearPipeInterrupt(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + + /* Check to see if the pipe IN interrupt has fired */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(PIPE_INT_IN) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(PIPE_INT_IN)) + { + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Clear interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(PIPE_INT_IN); + + /* Read in mouse report data */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport)); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */ + if (MouseReport.X > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + else if (MouseReport.X < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */ + if (MouseReport.Y > 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + else if (MouseReport.Y < 0) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */ + if (MouseReport.Button) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */ + printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X, + MouseReport.Y, + MouseReport.Button); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4238c80 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseHostViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_VIA_INT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */ + int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHostViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72ee1dbe --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/MouseHostViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application, using pipe interrupts. This + * gives a simple reference application for implementing a USB Mouse + * host utilizing the LUFA pipe interrupt system, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs, + * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and + * button status information. + * + * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so + * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation + * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across + * all compatable mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the + * MouseHostWithParser demo application. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65495347 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHostViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31e1aa13 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor. + * + * \return An error code from the MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextMouseInterface))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextHID))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoHIDDescriptorFound; + } + + /* Save the HID report size for later use */ + HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength; + + /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint))) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Configure the mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + else + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..971bdfee --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */ + #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */ + #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextMouseInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextHID); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3f45e31 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using Mouse Descriptor Parser)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e9bdadc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDReport.h" + +/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */ +uint16_t HIDReportSize; + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + +/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read + * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library. + * + * \return A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void) +{ + /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */ + uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize]; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Report << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: HIDReportSize, + }; + + /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ParseControlError; + + /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */ + if (ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful) + return ParseError; + + return ParseSuccessful; +} + +/** Function to print out the attached device's HID descriptor elements in human readable form + * through the serial port. This is good for examining a device's HID descriptors, however it + * can cause noticible delays as there is generally a lot of data to be sent. + */ +void DumpHIDReportItems(void) +{ + /* Loop through each of the loaded HID report items in the processed item structure */ + for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++) + { + /* Create pointer to the current report info structure */ + HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex]; + + /* Print out each report item's details */ + printf_P(PSTR(" Item %d:\r\n" + " Type: %s\r\n" + " Flags: %d\r\n" + " BitOffset: %d\r\n" + " BitSize: %d\r\n" + " Coll Ptr: %d\r\n" + " Coll Usage: %d\r\n" + " Coll Prnt: %d\r\n" + " Usage Page: %d\r\n" + " Usage: %d\r\n" + " Usage Min: %d\r\n" + " Usage Max: %d\r\n" + " Unit Type: %d\r\n" + " Unit Exp: %d\r\n" + " Log Min: %d\r\n" + " Log Max: %d\r\n" + " Phy Min: %d\r\n" + " Phy Max: %d\r\n"), ItemIndex, + ((RItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In) ? "IN" : "OUT"), + RItem->ItemFlags, + RItem->BitOffset, + RItem->Attributes.BitSize, + RItem->CollectionPath, + RItem->CollectionPath->Usage, + RItem->CollectionPath->Parent, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9381273d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReport.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // HID Class Report Parser + + #include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON 0x09 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */ + #define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL 0x01 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */ + #define USAGE_X 0x30 + + /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */ + #define USAGE_Y 0x31 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */ + enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t + { + ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */ + ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */ + ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occured while trying to read the device HID descriptor */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint16_t HIDReportSize; + extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void); + void DumpHIDReportItems(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81d82eba --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseHostWithParser30-Sep-2008 14:15:5730-Sep-2008 14:16:12241030-Sep-2008 14:15:5744, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseHostWithParser\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cHIDReport.cMouseHostWithParser.cConfigDescriptor.hHIDReport.hMouseHostWithParser.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111MouseHostWithParser.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dde6e852 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,352 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseHostWithParser.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Mouse Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Mouse_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Mouse Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop mouse and USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Start Mouse Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Mouse_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process + * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs. + */ +TASK(USB_Mouse_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */ + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n")); + + /* LEDs one and two on to indicate busy processing */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */ + if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Dumping HID Report Items.\r\n")); + + /* Dump the HID report items to the serial port */ + DumpHIDReportItems(); + + /* All LEDs off - ready to indicate keypresses */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */ + if (Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Create buffer big enough for the report */ + uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()]; + + /* Load in the mouse report */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe()); + + /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */ + for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++) + { + /* Create a tempoary item pointer to the next report item */ + HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber]; + + bool FoundData; + + if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse button value */ + FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */ + if (ReportItem->Value) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) && + ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) || + (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y)) && + (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In)) + { + /* Get the mouse relative position value */ + FoundData = GetReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem); + + /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */ + if (!(FoundData)) + continue; + + /* Value is a signed 8-bit value, cast as appropriate */ + int8_t DeltaMovement = (int8_t)ReportItem->Value; + + /* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */ + if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2); + } + else + { + /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */ + if (DeltaMovement) + LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4); + } + } + } + + /* Display the button information on the board LEDs */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze mouse data pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + break; + } +} + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d1ce32d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_ +#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "HIDReport.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */ + #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseHostWithParser_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy dumping HID report items to the serial port */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_Mouse_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97ee8bfb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo + * + * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using + * the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID + * reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This + * demo supports mice with a single HID report. + * + * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs. + * On connection to a USB mouse, the report items will be processed and + * printed as a formatted list through the USART before the mouse is + * fully enumerated. + * + * Currently only single interface mice are supported. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f32c756 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseHostWithParser/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,707 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseHostWithParser + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + HIDReport.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f099692 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MouseReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x02, /* Usage (Mouse) */ + 0xA1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x09, 0x01, /* Usage (Pointer) */ + 0xA1, 0x00, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x95, 0x03, /* Report Count (3) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x05, 0x09, /* Usage Page (Button) */ + 0x19, 0x01, /* Usage Minimum (Button 1) */ + 0x29, 0x03, /* Usage Maximum (Button 3) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x05, /* Report Size (5) */ + 0x81, 0x01, /* Input (Constant) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x95, 0x02, /* Report Count (2) */ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop Control) */ + 0x09, 0x30, /* Usage X */ + 0x09, 0x31, /* Usage Y */ + 0x15, 0x81, /* Logical Minimum (-127) */ + 0x25, 0x7F, /* Logical Maximum (127) */ + 0x81, 0x06, /* Input (Data, Variable, Relative) */ + 0xC0, /* End Collection */ + 0xC0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2041, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x02, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + MouseHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(MouseReport) + }, + + MouseEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MOUSE_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: MOUSE_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(15), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Mouse Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.MouseHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(MouseReport); + Size = sizeof(MouseReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3aea3164 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor, to describe the HID device's specifications. Refer to the HID + * specification for details on the structure elements. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; + + uint16_t HIDSpec; + uint8_t CountryCode; + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; + + uint8_t HIDReportType; + uint16_t HIDReportLength; + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used to store HID report descriptor elements. */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; + USB_Descriptor_HID_t MouseHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MouseEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size in bytes of the Mouse HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MOUSE_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor header type value, to indicate a HID class HID report descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a36c211 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Device Demo (Via Endpoint Interrupts)" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02f8890e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +MouseViaInt30-Sep-2008 14:16:2830-Sep-2008 14:16:44241030-Sep-2008 14:16:2844, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\MouseViaInt\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMouseViaInt.cDescriptors.hMouseViaInt.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111MouseViaInt.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..77e4c565 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.c @@ -0,0 +1,389 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MouseViaInt demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MouseViaInt.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA MouseI App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates what report mode the host has requested, true for normal HID reporting mode, false for special boot + * protocol reporting mode. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Current Idle period. This is set by the host via a Set Idle HID class request to silence the device's reports + * for either the entire idle duration, or until the report status changes (e.g. the user moves the mouse). + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Current Idle period remaining. When the IdleCount value is set, this tracks the remaining number of idle + * milliseconds. This is seperate to the IdleCount timer and is incremented and compared as the host may request + * the current idle period via a Get Idle HID class request, thus its value must be preserved. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running mouse reporting and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the mouse device endpoints. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, MOUSE_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Enable the endpoint IN interrupt ISR for the report endpoint */ + USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the HID commands, which are + * all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(MouseReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(MouseReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, wLength); + + /* Clear the report data afterwards */ + memset(&MouseReportData, 0, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler elapsed idle period counter when the host has set an idle period. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; +} + +/** Fills the given HID report data structure with the next HID report to send to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a HID report data structure to be filled + * + * \return Boolean true if the new report differs from the last report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static uint8_t PrevJoyStatus = 0; + static bool PrevHWBStatus = false; + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + bool InputChanged = false; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_MouseReport_Data_t)); + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + ReportData->Y = -1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + ReportData->Y = 1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + ReportData->X = 1; + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + ReportData->X = -1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + ReportData->Button = (1 << 0); + + if (HWB_GetStatus()) + ReportData->Button |= (1 << 1); + + /* Check if the new report is different to the previous report */ + InputChanged = ((uint8_t)(PrevJoyStatus ^ JoyStatus_LCL) | (uint8_t)(HWB_GetStatus() ^ PrevHWBStatus)); + + /* Save the current joystick and HWB status for later comparison */ + PrevJoyStatus = JoyStatus_LCL; + PrevHWBStatus = HWB_GetStatus(); + + /* Return whether the new report is different to the previous report or not */ + return InputChanged; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the MouseViaInt_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** ISR for the general Pipe/Endpoint interrupt vector. This ISR fires when an endpoint's status changes (such as + * a packet has been received) on an endpoint with its corresponding ISR enabling bits set. This is used to send + * HID packets to the host each time the HID interrupt endpoints polling period elapses, as managed by the USB + * controller. + */ +ISR(ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Save previously selected endpoint before selecting a new endpoint */ + uint8_t PrevSelectedEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(); + + /* Check if mouse endpoint has interrupted */ + if (Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(MOUSE_EPNUM)) + { + USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReportData; + bool SendReport = true; + + /* Create the next mouse report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&MouseReportData); + + /* Check if the idle period is set*/ + if (IdleCount) + { + /* Determine if the idle period has elapsed */ + if (!(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + else + { + /* Idle period not elapsed, indicate that a report must not be sent */ + SendReport = false; + } + } + + /* Check to see if a report should be issued */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Select the Mouse Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Clear the endpoint IN interrupt flag */ + USB_INT_Clear(ENDPOINT_INT_IN); + + /* Clear the Mouse Report endpoint interrupt and select the endpoint */ + Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(MOUSE_EPNUM); + + /* Write Mouse Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&MouseReportData, sizeof(MouseReportData)); + } + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Restore previously selected endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevSelectedEndpoint); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f4b9abe --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.h @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MouseViaInt.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MOUSE_H_ +#define _MOUSE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class specific request to get the next HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class specific request to get the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class specific request to send the next HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the idle timeout period of the device. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class specific request to get the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class specific request to set the current HID protocol in use, either report or boot. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the mouse HID report structure, for creating and sending HID reports to the host PC. + * This mirrors the layout described to the host in the HID report descriptor, in Descriptors.c. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Button; /**< Bit mask of the currently pressed mouse buttons */ + int8_t X; /**< Current mouse delta X movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + int8_t Y; /**< Current mouse delta Y movement, as a signed 8-bit integer */ + } USB_MouseReport_Data_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum MouseViaInt_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_MouseReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f42c2b33 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/MouseViaInt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Partially Interrupt Driven Mouse Device Demo + * + * Mouse demonstration application, using endpoint interrupts for the + * exchange of data to the USB host. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a USB Mouse using the basic USB HID + * drivers in all modern OSes (i.e. no special drivers required). It is + * boot protocol compatible, and thus works under compatible BIOS as if + * it was a native mouse (e.g. PS/2). + * + * On startup the system will automatically enumerate and function + * as a mouse when the USB connection to a host is present. To use + * the mouse, move the joystick to move the pointer, and push the + * joystick inwards to simulate a left-button click. The HWB serves as + * the right mouse button. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a835161 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/MouseViaInt/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,703 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = MouseViaInt + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3560403f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.c @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the + * conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the + * device. + */ + +#include "ARP.h" + +/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the + * virtual server device on the network. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ARP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart); + + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + /* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */ + if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) && + (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST)) + { + /* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */ + if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || + MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress)) + { + /* Fill out the ARP response header */ + ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType; + ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType; + ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN; + ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN; + ARPHeaderOUT->Operation = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY); + + /* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */ + ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA; + ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA; + + /* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */ + ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress; + ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress; + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return sizeof(ARP_Header_t); + } + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8551df85 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ARP.h @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ARP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ARP_H_ +#define _ARP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */ + #define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST 1 + + /** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */ + #define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY 2 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */ + uint16_t ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */ + + uint8_t HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */ + uint8_t PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */ + uint16_t Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */ + + MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */ + IP_Address_t SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */ + MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */ + IP_Address_t TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */ + } ARP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f220c42 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol + * handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided + * IP address given to it by the device. + */ + +#include "DHCP.h" + +/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param DHCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's DHCP header + * \param DHCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart) +{ + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart; + DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart; + DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart; + + uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart); + + /* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */ + memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + /* Fill out the response DHCP packet */ + DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY; + DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops = 0; + DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID; + DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds = 0; + DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags; + DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP = ClientIPAddress; + memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)); + DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE); + + /* Alter the incomming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that + when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */ + IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress = ClientIPAddress; + IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress; + + /* Process the incomming DHCP packet options */ + while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END) + { + /* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */ + if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE) + { + if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST)) + { + /* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */ + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER + : DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK; + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00; + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER; + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t); + memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t)); + DHCPOptionsOUTStart += sizeof(IP_Address_t); + + *(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t)); + } + } + + /* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */ + DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2)); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1e14e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/DHCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DHCP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCP_H_ +#define _DHCP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST 0x01 + + /** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY 0x02 + + /** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */ + #define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET 0x01 + + /** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */ + #define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE 0x63825363 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK 1 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE 53 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER 54 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_PAD 0 + + /** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_END 255 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER 2 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST 3 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE 4 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK 5 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK 6 + + /** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */ + #define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE 7 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */ + uint8_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */ + uint8_t HardwareAddressLength; /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */ + uint8_t Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */ + + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for postive matching between sent and recieved packets */ + + uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */ + uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */ + + IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */ + IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */ + IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */ + uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */ + } DHCP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1994c601 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x204C, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0xFF, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_Header: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x00, 0x00} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x00} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..070c118d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 1 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 2 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Header; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d7973b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8d56150 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet + * frames sent and receieved, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate + * protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP. + */ + +#include "Ethernet.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the incomming Ethernet frame from the host. */ +Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; + +/** Ethernet Frame buffer structure, to hold the outgoing Ethernet frame to the host. */ +Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */ +const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */ +const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS}; + +/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */ +const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS}; + + +/** Processes an incomming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet + * frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response. + */ +void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void) +{ + DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN.FrameData); + + /* Cast the incomming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */ + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN.FrameData; + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData; + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + /* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */ + if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) || + MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) && + (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)) + { + /* Process the packet depending on its protocol */ + switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType)) + { + case ETHERTYPE_ARP: + RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)], + &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]); + break; + case ETHERTYPE_IPV4: + RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(&FrameIN.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)], + &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]); + break; + } + + /* Protcol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */ + FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress; + FrameOUTHeader->Destination = FrameINHeader->Source; + FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = FrameINHeader->EtherType; + + /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */ + FrameOUT.FrameLength = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize); + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true; + } + } + + /* Check if the packet was processed */ + if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS) + { + /* Clear the frame buffer */ + FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = false; + } +} + +/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's + * compliment of each word, complimented. + * + * \param Data Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated + * \param Bytes Number of bytes in the data buffer to process + * + * \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value + */ +uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + uint16_t* Words = (uint16_t*)Data; + uint32_t Checksum = 0; + + for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++) + Checksum += Words[CurrWord]; + + while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000) + Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16)); + + return ~Checksum; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23fc325a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Ethernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Ethernet.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_ +#define _ETHERNET_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + #include "ICMP.h" + #include "TCP.h" + #include "UDP.h" + #include "DHCP.h" + #include "ARP.h" + #include "IP.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */ + #define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01} + + /** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */ + #define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF} + + /** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical. + * + * \param MAC1 First MAC address + * \param MAC2 Second MAC address + * + * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise + */ + #define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2) (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0) + + /** Maximum size of an incomming or outgoing Ethernet frame in bytes */ + #define ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX 1500 + + /** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */ + #define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE 0x0600 + + /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */ + #define NO_RESPONSE 0 + + /** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */ + #define NO_PROCESS -1 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an Ethernet frame buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t FrameData[ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX]; /**< Ethernet frame contents */ + uint16_t FrameLength; /**< Length in bytes of the Ethernet frame stored in the buffer */ + bool FrameInBuffer; /**< Indicates if a frame is currently stored in the buffer */ + } Ethernet_Frame_Info_t; + + /** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */ + typedef struct + { + MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */ + MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */ + + union + { + uint16_t EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet subprotocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */ + uint16_t Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */ + }; + } Ethernet_Frame_Header_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameIN; + extern Ethernet_Frame_Info_t FrameOUT; + + extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t ServerIPAddress; + extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t BroadcastIPAddress; + extern const IP_Address_t ClientIPAddress; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(void); + uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ff3433a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/EthernetProtocols.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by + * all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack. + */ + +#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_ +#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define ETHERTYPE_IPV4 0x0800 + #define ETHERTYPE_ARP 0x0806 + #define ETHERTYPE_RARP 0x8035 + #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK 0x809b + #define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP 0x80f3 + #define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q 0x8100 + #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX 0x8137 + #define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL 0x8138 + #define ETHERTYPE_IPV6 0x86DD + #define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET 0x8819 + #define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING 0x88a8 + #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST 0x8847 + #define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST 0x8848 + #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY 0x8863 + #define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION 0x8864 + #define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN 0x888E + #define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI 0x889A + #define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET 0x88A2 + #define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT 0x88A4 + #define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII 0x88CD + #define ETHERTYPE_CESoE 0x88D8 + #define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY 0x88E5 + #define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL 0x8906 + #define ETHERTYPE_QINQ 0x9100 + #define ETHERTYPE_VLLT 0xCAFE + + #define PROTOCOL_ICMP 1 + #define PROTOCOL_IGMP 2 + #define PROTOCOL_TCP 6 + #define PROTOCOL_UDP 17 + #define PROTOCOL_OSPF 89 + #define PROTOCOL_SCTP 132 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a physical MAC address of a device on a network */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Octets[6]; /**< Individual bytes of a MAC address */ + } MAC_Address_t; + + /** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */ + } IP_Address_t; + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a1556405 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.c @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles + * Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host + * and the virtual server. + */ + +#include "ICMP.h" + +/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's ICMP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart); + + /* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */ + if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST) + { + /* Fill out the ICMP response packet */ + ICMPHeaderOUT->Type = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Code = 0; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Id = ICMPHeaderIN->Id; + ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence; + + uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN.FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN.FrameData)); + + /* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */ + memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)], + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)], + DataSize); + + ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t))); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b20a557e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ICMP.h @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ICMP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ICMP_H_ +#define _ICMP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY 0 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH 4 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE 5 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST 8 + + /** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */ + #define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED 11 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an ICMP message header. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */ + uint8_t Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */ + uint16_t Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */ + uint16_t Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */ + uint16_t Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */ + } ICMP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65875bb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.c @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the + * host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP. + */ + +#include "IP.h" + +/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a subprotocol handler. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param OutDataStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no + * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the + * next Ethernet packet handler iteration + */ +int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart) +{ + DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart); + + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart; + + /* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */ + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + /* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */ + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) && + !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress))) + { + return NO_RESPONSE; + } + + /* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */ + switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol) + { + case PROTOCOL_ICMP: + RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(&((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + case PROTOCOL_TCP: + RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart, + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + case PROTOCOL_UDP: + RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart, + &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes], + &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]); + break; + } + + /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response IP packet header */ + IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize); + IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4; + IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = IPHeaderIN->Protocol; + IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL; + IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress; + IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress; + + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t)); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize); + } + + return RetSize; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..119d219e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/IP.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for IP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _IP_H_ +#define _IP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */ + #define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 1} + + /** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */ + #define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS { 10, 0, 0, 2} + + /** Protocol IP address of the broadcase address */ + #define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF} + + /** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */ + #define DEFAULT_TTL 128 + + /** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical. + * + * \param IP1 First IP address + * \param IP2 Second IP address + * + * \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise + */ + #define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2) (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define of an IP packet header. */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned int HeaderLength : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */ + unsigned int Version : 4; /**< IP protocol version */ + unsigned int TypeOfService : 8; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */ + unsigned int TotalLength : 16; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */ + + unsigned int Identification : 16; /**< Idenfication value for identifying fragmented packets */ + unsigned int FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */ + unsigned int Flags : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */ + + unsigned int TTL : 8; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */ + unsigned int Protocol : 8; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */ + unsigned int HeaderChecksum : 16; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */ + + IP_Address_t SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */ + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */ + } IP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a124afec --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature = "$Windows NT$" +Class = Net +ClassGUID = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318} +Provider = %COMPANY% +DriverVer = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384 +;CatalogFile = device.cat + +[Manufacturer] +%COMPANY% = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64 + +; Decoration for x86 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTx86] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +; Decoration for x64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTamd64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +; Decoration for ia64 architecture +[RndisDevices.NTia64] +%RNDISDEV% = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C + +;@@@ This is the common setting for setup +[ControlFlags] +ExcludeFromSelect=* + +; DDInstall section +; References the in-build Netrndis.inf +[RNDIS.NT.5.1] +Characteristics = 0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI +BusType = 15 +; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi +AddReg = Rndis_AddReg_Vista + +; DDInstal.Services section +[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services] +include = netrndis.inf +needs = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services + +; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build +; (part of the operating system). + +; Modify these strings for your device as needed. +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0e6ebba --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.c @@ -0,0 +1,280 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines + accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertient information + on the packet through the serial port. + + To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol} + in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes. + * Enabled protocol decoders will print incomming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human + * readable format. + * + * Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably. + * Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile + * and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch. + */ + +#include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + +/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame header + */ +void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET) + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" ETHERNET\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameIN.FrameLength); + + if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) && + !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4], + FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4], + FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]); + + if (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN.FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE) + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType)); + else + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n")); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header + */ +void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP) + ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ARP\r\n")); + + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) && + !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation)); + + if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4], + ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4], + ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2], + ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]); + } + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an IP packet header + */ +void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP) + IP_Header_t* IPHeader = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n IP\r\n")); + + if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress))) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n")); + return; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol); + printf_P(PSTR(" + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2], + IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2], + IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header + */ +void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP) + ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n ICMP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header + */ +void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP) + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n TCP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags); + + if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed) + printf_P(PSTR(" + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n")); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header + */ +void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP) + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart; + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n UDP\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort)); + printf_P(PSTR(" + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length)); + #endif +} + +/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format. + * + * \param InDataStart Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header + */ +void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart) +{ + #if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP) + uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + printf_P(PSTR(" \\\r\n DHCP\r\n")); + + while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END) + { + if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE) + { + switch (DHCPOptions[2]) + { + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER: + printf_P(PSTR(" + DISCOVER\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST: + printf_P(PSTR(" + REQUEST\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE: + printf_P(PSTR(" + RELEASE\r\n")); + break; + case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE: + printf_P(PSTR(" + DECLINE\r\n")); + break; + } + } + + DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2)); + } + + #endif +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06e4c0ad --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/ProtocolDecoders.h @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c. + */ + +#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_ +#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart); + void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee0c8c34 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.c @@ -0,0 +1,386 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * RNDIS command handler functions. This handles RNDIS commands according to + * the Microsoft RNDIS specification, creating a USB Ethernet network adapter. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C +#include "RNDIS.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Physical MAC address of the network adapter, which becomes the MAC address of the host for packets sent to the adapter. */ +static MAC_Address_t PROGMEM AdapterMACAddress = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS}; + +/** Vendor description of the adapter. This is overridden by the INF file required to install the appropriate RNDIS drivers for + * the device, but may still be used by the OS in some circumstances. + */ +static char PROGMEM AdapterVendorDescription[] = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter"; + +/** List of RNDIS OID commands supported by this adapter. */ +static const uint32_t PROGMEM AdapterSupportedOIDList[] = + { + OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST, + OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE, + OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED, + OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE, + OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE, + OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID, + OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION, + OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER, + OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE, + OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS, + OID_GEN_XMIT_OK, + OID_GEN_RCV_OK, + OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR, + OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR, + OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER, + OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS, + OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS, + OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST, + OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE, + OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT, + OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION, + OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS, + }; + +/** Buffer for RNDIS messages (as distinct from Ethernet frames sent through the adapter. This must be big enough to hold the entire + * Supported OID list, plus the response header. The buffer is half-duplex, and is written to as it is read to save on SRAM - for this + * reason, care must be taken when constructing RNDIS responses that unread data is not overwritten when writing in responses. + */ +uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList) + sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)]; + +/** Pointer to the RNDIS message header at the top of the RNDIS message buffer, for convenience. */ +RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader = (RNDIS_Message_Header_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + +/** Indicates if a RNDIS message response is ready to be sent back to the host. */ +bool ResponseReady = false; + +/** Current RNDIS adapter state, a value from the RNDIS_States_t enum. */ +uint8_t CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized; + +/** Current Ethernet packet filter mask. This is non-zero when the adapter is initialized, or zero when disabled. */ +uint32_t CurrPacketFilter = 0; + + +/** Processes the RNDIS message received by the host and stored in the RNDISMessageBuffer global buffer. If a response is + * created, the ResponseReady global is updated so that the response is written back to the host upon request. + */ +void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void) +{ + /* Note: Only a single buffer is used for both the received message and its response to save SRAM. Because of + this, response bytes should be filled in order so that they do not clobber unread data in the buffer. */ + + switch (MessageHeader->MessageType) + { + case REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG: + /* Initialize the adapter - return information about the supported RNDIS version and buffer sizes */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t* INITIALIZE_Message = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t* INITIALIZE_Response = (RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + INITIALIZE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT; + INITIALIZE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t); + INITIALIZE_Response->RequestId = INITIALIZE_Message->RequestId; + INITIALIZE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + + INITIALIZE_Response->MajorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR; + INITIALIZE_Response->MinorVersion = REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR; + INITIALIZE_Response->DeviceFlags = REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS; + INITIALIZE_Response->Medium = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3; + INITIALIZE_Response->MaxPacketsPerTransfer = 1; + INITIALIZE_Response->MaxTransferSize = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX); + INITIALIZE_Response->PacketAlignmentFactor = 0; + INITIALIZE_Response->AFListOffset = 0; + INITIALIZE_Response->AFListSize = 0; + + CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Initialized; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG: + /* Halt the adapter, reset the adapter state - note that no response should be returned when completed */ + + ResponseReady = false; + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0; + + CurrRNDISState = RNDIS_Uninitialized; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG: + /* Request for information about a parameter about the adapter, specified as an OID token */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t* QUERY_Message = (RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t* QUERY_Response = (RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + uint32_t Query_Oid = QUERY_Message->Oid; + + void* QueryData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) + + QUERY_Message->InformationBufferOffset]; + void* ResponseData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t)]; + uint16_t ResponseSize; + + QUERY_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT; + QUERY_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t); + + if (ProcessNDISQuery(Query_Oid, QueryData, QUERY_Message->InformationBufferLength, + ResponseData, &ResponseSize)) + { + QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + QUERY_Response->MessageLength += ResponseSize; + + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = ResponseSize; + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)); + } + else + { + QUERY_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED; + + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferLength = 0; + QUERY_Response->InformationBufferOffset = 0; + } + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG: + /* Request to set a parameter of the adapter, specified as an OID token */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_SET_MSG_t* SET_Message = (RNDIS_SET_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t* SET_Response = (RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + uint32_t SET_Oid = SET_Message->Oid; + + SET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT; + SET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t); + SET_Response->RequestId = SET_Message->RequestId; + + void* SetData = &RNDISMessageBuffer[sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t) + + SET_Message->InformationBufferOffset]; + + if (ProcessNDISSet(SET_Oid, SetData, SET_Message->InformationBufferLength)) + SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + else + SET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG: + /* Soft reset the adapter */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t* RESET_Response = (RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + RESET_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT; + RESET_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t); + RESET_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + RESET_Response->AddressingReset = 0; + + break; + case REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG: + /* Keep alive message sent to the adapter every 5 seconds when idle to ensure it is still responding */ + + ResponseReady = true; + + RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t* KEEPALIVE_Message = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t* KEEPALIVE_Response = (RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t*)&RNDISMessageBuffer; + + KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT; + KEEPALIVE_Response->MessageLength = sizeof(RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t); + KEEPALIVE_Response->RequestId = KEEPALIVE_Message->RequestId; + KEEPALIVE_Response->Status = REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS; + + break; + } +} + +/** Processes RNDIS query commands, retrieving information from the adapter and reporting it back to the host. The requested + * parameter is given as an OID value. + * + * \param OId OId value of the parameter being queried + * \param QueryData Pointer to any extra query data being sent by the host to the device inside the RNDIS message buffer + * \param QuerySize Size in bytes of the extra query data being sent by the host + * \param ResponseData Pointer to the start of the query response inside the RNDIS message buffer + * \param ResponseSize Pointer to the size in bytes of the response data being sent to the host + * + * \return Boolean true if the query was handled, false otherwise + */ +static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize, + void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize) +{ + /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG messages */ + + switch (OId) + { + case OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList); + + /* Copy the list of supported NDIS OID tokens to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterSupportedOIDList, sizeof(AdapterSupportedOIDList)); + + return true; + case OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Always indicate hardware ready */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = NdisHardwareStatusReady; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED: + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate 802.3 (Ethernet) supported by the adapter */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Vendor ID 0x0xFFFFFF is reserved for vendors who have not purchased a NDIS VID */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0x00FFFFFF; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE: + case OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE: + case OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate that the maximum frame size is the size of the ethernet frame buffer */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription); + + /* Copy vendor description string to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, AdapterVendorDescription, sizeof(AdapterVendorDescription)); + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Always indicate that the adapter is connected to a network */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate 10Mb/s link speed */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 100000; + + return true; + case OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS: + case OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(MAC_Address_t); + + /* Copy over the fixed adapter MAC to the response buffer */ + memcpy_P(ResponseData, &AdapterMACAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)); + + return true; + case OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate only one multicast address supported */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 1; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate the current packet filter mask */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = CurrPacketFilter; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_XMIT_OK: + case OID_GEN_RCV_OK: + case OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR: + case OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR: + case OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER: + case OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT: + case OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION: + case OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Unused statistic OIDs - always return 0 for each */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = 0; + + return true; + case OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE: + *ResponseSize = sizeof(uint32_t); + + /* Indicate maximum overall buffer (Ethernet frame and RNDIS header) the adapter can handle */ + *((uint32_t*)ResponseData) = (sizeof(RNDISMessageBuffer) + ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX); + + return true; + default: + return false; + } +} + +/** Processes RNDIS set commands, setting adapter parameters to values given by the host. The requested parameter is given + * as an OID value. + * + * \param OId OId value of the parameter being set + * \param SetData Pointer to the parameter value in the RNDIS message buffer + * \param SetSize Size in bytes of the parameter value being sent by the host + * + * \return Boolean true if the set was handled, false otherwise + */ +static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize) +{ + /* Handler for REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG messages */ + + switch (OId) + { + case OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER: + /* Save the packet filter mask in case the host queries it again later */ + CurrPacketFilter = *((uint32_t*)SetData); + + /* Set the RNDIS state to initialized if the packet filter is non-zero */ + CurrRNDISState = ((CurrPacketFilter) ? RNDIS_Data_Initialized : RNDIS_Data_Initialized); + + return true; + case OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST: + /* Do nothing - throw away the value from the host as it is unused */ + + return true; + default: + return false; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c75875c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDIS.h @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for RNDIS.c. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDIS_H_ +#define _RNDIS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "RNDISEthernet.h" + #include "RNDISConstants.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Physical MAC Address of the USB netowork adapter */ + #define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00} + + /** Implemented RNDIS Version Major */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MAJOR 0x01 + + /** Implemented RNDIS Version Minor */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_VERSION_MINOR 0x00 + + /** RNDIS request to issue a host-to-device NDIS command */ + #define SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND 0x00 + + /** RNDIS request to issue a device-to-host NDIS response */ + #define GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE 0x01 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible NDIS adapter states. */ + enum RNDIS_States_t + { + RNDIS_Uninitialized = 0, /**< Adapter currently uninitialized */ + RNDIS_Initialized = 1, /**< Adapter currently initialized but not ready for data transfers */ + RNDIS_Data_Initialized = 2, /**< Adapter currently initialized and ready for data transfers */ + }; + + /** Enum for the NDIS hardware states */ + enum NDIS_Hardware_Status_t + { + NdisHardwareStatusReady, /**< Hardware Ready to accept commands from the host */ + NdisHardwareStatusInitializing, /**< Hardware busy initializing */ + NdisHardwareStatusReset, /**< Hardware reset */ + NdisHardwareStatusClosing, /**< Hardware currently closing */ + NdisHardwareStatusNotReady /**< Hardware not ready to accept commands from the host */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a RNDIS message header, sent before RNDIS messages */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; /**< RNDIS message type, a REMOTE_NDIS_*_MSG constant */ + uint32_t MessageLength; /**< Total length of the RNDIS message, in bytes */ + } RNDIS_Message_Header_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS packet message, used to encapsulate Ethernet packets sent to and from the adapter */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t DataOffset; + uint32_t DataLength; + uint32_t OOBDataOffset; + uint32_t OOBDataLength; + uint32_t NumOOBDataElements; + uint32_t PerPacketInfoOffset; + uint32_t PerPacketInfoLength; + uint32_t VcHandle; + uint32_t Reserved; + } RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t MajorVersion; + uint32_t MinorVersion; + uint32_t MaxTransferSize; + } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Initialize complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t MajorVersion; + uint32_t MinorVersion; + uint32_t DeviceFlags; + uint32_t Medium; + uint32_t MaxPacketsPerTransfer; + uint32_t MaxTransferSize; + uint32_t PacketAlignmentFactor; + uint32_t AFListOffset; + uint32_t AFListSize; + } RNDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Keepalive complete message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + } RNDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Reset complete message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t AddressingReset; + } RNDIS_RESET_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Set command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t Oid; + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + uint32_t DeviceVcHandle; + } RNDIS_SET_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Set complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + } RNDIS_SET_CMPLT_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Query command message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + + uint32_t Oid; + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + uint32_t DeviceVcHandle; + } RNDIS_QUERY_MSG_t; + + /** Type define for a RNDIS Query complete response message */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t MessageType; + uint32_t MessageLength; + uint32_t RequestId; + uint32_t Status; + + uint32_t InformationBufferLength; + uint32_t InformationBufferOffset; + } RNDIS_QUERY_CMPLT_t; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint8_t RNDISMessageBuffer[]; + extern RNDIS_Message_Header_t* MessageHeader; + extern bool ResponseReady; + extern uint8_t CurrRNDISState; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ProcessRNDISControlMessage(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_RNDIS_C) + static bool ProcessNDISQuery(uint32_t OId, void* QueryData, uint16_t QuerySize, + void* ResponseData, uint16_t* ResponseSize); + static bool ProcessNDISSet(uint32_t OId, void* SetData, uint16_t SetSize); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91a7e898 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISConstants.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * RNDIS specification related constants. For more information on these + * constants, please refer to the Microsoft RNDIS specification. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_ +#define _RNDIS_CONSTANTS_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG 0x00000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_MSG 0x00000002UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_HALT_MSG 0x00000003UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_MSG 0x00000004UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_MSG 0x00000005UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_MSG 0x00000006UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INDICATE_STATUS_MSG 0x00000007UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_MSG 0x00000008UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_INITIALIZE_CMPLT 0x80000002UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_QUERY_CMPLT 0x80000004UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_SET_CMPLT 0x80000005UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_RESET_CMPLT 0x80000006UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_KEEPALIVE_CMPLT 0x80000008UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_SUCCESS 0x00000000UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_FAILURE 0xC0000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_INVALID_DATA 0xC0010015UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_NOT_SUPPORTED 0xC00000BBUL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_CONNECT 0x4001000BUL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_STATUS_MEDIA_DISCONNECT 0x4001000CUL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_CONNECTED 0x00000000UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIA_STATE_DISCONNECTED 0x00000001UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_MEDIUM_802_3 0x00000000UL + + #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTIONLESS 0x00000001UL + #define REMOTE_NDIS_DF_CONNECTION_ORIENTED 0x00000002UL + + #define OID_GEN_SUPPORTED_LIST 0x00010101UL + #define OID_GEN_HARDWARE_STATUS 0x00010102UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_SUPPORTED 0x00010103UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_IN_USE 0x00010104UL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_FRAME_SIZE 0x00010106UL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL + #define OID_GEN_LINK_SPEED 0x00010107UL + #define OID_GEN_TRANSMIT_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010AUL + #define OID_GEN_RECEIVE_BLOCK_SIZE 0x0001010BUL + #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_ID 0x0001010CUL + #define OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION 0x0001010DUL + #define OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER 0x0001010EUL + #define OID_GEN_MAXIMUM_TOTAL_SIZE 0x00010111UL + #define OID_GEN_MEDIA_CONNECT_STATUS 0x00010114UL + #define OID_GEN_XMIT_OK 0x00020101UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_OK 0x00020102UL + #define OID_GEN_XMIT_ERROR 0x00020103UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_ERROR 0x00020104UL + #define OID_GEN_RCV_NO_BUFFER 0x00020105UL + #define OID_802_3_PERMANENT_ADDRESS 0x01010101UL + #define OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS 0x01010102UL + #define OID_802_3_MULTICAST_LIST 0x01010103UL + #define OID_802_3_MAXIMUM_LIST_SIZE 0x01010104UL + #define OID_802_3_RCV_ERROR_ALIGNMENT 0x01020101UL + #define OID_802_3_XMIT_ONE_COLLISION 0x01020102UL + #define OID_802_3_XMIT_MORE_COLLISIONS 0x01020103UL + +#endif \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5d21c1f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +RNDISEthernet30-Sep-2008 14:17:0522-Jan-2009 17:52:35241030-Sep-2008 14:17:0544, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\JTAGICE mkIIAT90USB1287.xmlfalseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ARP.cDescriptors.cEthernet.cICMP.cIP.cProtocolDecoders.cRNDIS.cRNDISEthernet.cTCP.cWebserver.cARP.hDescriptors.hEthernet.hEthernetProtocols.hICMP.hIP.hProtocolDecoders.hRNDIS.hRNDISEthernet.hTCP.hWebserver.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileat90usb1287111RNDISEthernet.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20081205\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20081205\utils\bin\make.exeC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\EthernetProtocols.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.hC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ARP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Descriptors.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Ethernet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ICMP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\IP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\ProtocolDecoders.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDIS.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\RNDISEthernet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\TCP.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Telnet.cC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\LUFAWORK\Demos\RNDISEthernet\Webserver.c diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..255a53b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c @@ -0,0 +1,357 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "RNDISEthernet.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA RNDIS App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: Ethernet_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: TCP_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: RNDIS_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the USB management task. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + + /* Webserver Initialization */ + TCP_Init(); + Webserver_Init(); + + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\n****** RNDIS Demo running. ******\r\n")); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops all the relevent tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running TCP/IP and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host sets the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration, and configures the RNDIS device endpoints and starts the relevent tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start TCP/IP tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(RNDIS_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Ethernet_Task, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TCP_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the RNDIS control commands, + * which set up the USB RNDIS network adapter), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Discard the unused wValue parameter */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Discard the unused wIndex parameter */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the wLength parameter */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* Process RNDIS class commands */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read in the RNDIS message into the message buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Process the RNDIS message */ + ProcessRNDISControlMessage(); + } + + break; + case GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Check if a response to the last message is ready */ + if (!(MessageHeader->MessageLength)) + { + /* Set the response to a single 0x00 byte to indicate that no response is ready */ + RNDISMessageBuffer[0] = 0; + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 1; + } + + /* Check if less than the requested number of bytes to transfer */ + if (MessageHeader->MessageLength < wLength) + wLength = MessageHeader->MessageLength; + + /* Clear the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the message response data to the endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(RNDISMessageBuffer, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + + /* Reset the message header once again after transmission */ + MessageHeader->MessageLength = 0; + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + case Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task to manage the sending and receiving of encapsulated RNDIS data and notifications. This removes the RNDIS + * wrapper from recieved Ethernet frames and places them in the FrameIN global buffer, or adds the RNDIS wrapper + * to a frame in the FrameOUT global before sending the buffer contents to the host. + */ +TASK(RNDIS_Task) +{ + /* Select the notification endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + + /* Check if a message response is ready for the host */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && ResponseReady) + { + USB_Notification_t Notification = (USB_Notification_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + bNotification: NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Indicate that a message response is ready for the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate a response is no longer ready */ + ResponseReady = false; + } + + /* Don't process the data endpoints until the system is in the data initialized state, and the buffer is free */ + if ((CurrRNDISState == RNDIS_Data_Initialized) && !(MessageHeader->MessageLength)) + { + /* Create a new packet header for reading/writing */ + RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t RNDISPacketHeader; + + /* Select the data OUT endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the data OUT endpoint contains data, and that the IN buffer is empty */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && !(FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)) + { + /* Read in the packet message header */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Stall the request if the data is too large */ + if (RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength > ETHERNET_FRAME_SIZE_MAX) + { + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + return; + } + + /* Read in the Ethernet frame into the buffer */ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(FrameIN.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Store the size of the Ethernet frame */ + FrameIN.FrameLength = RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength; + + /* Indicate Ethernet IN buffer full */ + FrameIN.FrameInBuffer = true; + } + + /* Select the data IN endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the data IN endpoint is ready for more data, and that the IN buffer is full */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() && FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer) + { + /* Clear the packet header with all 0s so that the relevant fields can be filled */ + memset(&RNDISPacketHeader, 0, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Construct the required packet header fields in the buffer */ + RNDISPacketHeader.MessageType = REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_MSG; + RNDISPacketHeader.MessageLength = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) + FrameOUT.FrameLength); + RNDISPacketHeader.DataOffset = (sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t) - sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Header_t)); + RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength = FrameOUT.FrameLength; + + /* Send the packet header to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&RNDISPacketHeader, sizeof(RNDIS_PACKET_MSG_t)); + + /* Send the Ethernet frame data to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(FrameOUT.FrameData, RNDISPacketHeader.DataLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Indicate Ethernet OUT buffer no longer full */ + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = false; + } + } +} + +/** Ethernet frame processing task. This task checks to see if a frame has been received, and if so hands off the processing + * of the frame to the Ethernet processing routines. + */ +TASK(Ethernet_Task) +{ + /* Task for Ethernet processing. Incoming ethernet frames are loaded into the FrameIN structure, and + outgoing frames should be loaded into the FrameOUT structure. Both structures can only hold a single + Ethernet frame at a time, so the FrameInBuffer bool is used to indicate when the buffers contain data. */ + + /* Check if a frame has been written to the IN frame buffer */ + if (FrameIN.FrameInBuffer) + { + /* Indicate packet processing started */ + UpdateStatus(Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame); + + /* Process the ethernet frame - replace this with your own Ethernet handler code as desired */ + Ethernet_ProcessPacket(); + + /* Indicate packet processing complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a0f3c18 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for RNDISEthernet.c. + */ + +#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_ +#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "RNDIS.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "TCP.h" + #include "ARP.h" + #include "Webserver.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Notification value to indicate that a frame is ready to be read by the host. */ + #define NOTIF_RESPONSE_AVAILABLE 0x01 + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a RNDIS notification message, for transmission to the RNDIS host via the notification + * Endpoint. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t bmRequestType; /**< Notification type, a mask of values from SrdRequestType.h */ + uint8_t bNotification; /**< Notification index, indicating what the RNDIS notification relates to */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Two byte notification value parameter */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Two byte notification index parameter */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Size of data payload following the notification header */ + } USB_Notification_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum RNDISEthernet_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_ProcessingEthernetFrame = 3, /**< Currently processing an ethernet frame from the host */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(RNDIS_Task); + TASK(Ethernet_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd4ff69e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet) + * + * Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for + * ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft + * standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually + * patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no + * manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels. + * + * Before running, you will need to install the INF file that + * is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will + * enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the + * need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install, + * right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If + * Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix + * will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and + * then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted. + * + * When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network + * adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received + * from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP + * stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be + * accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or + * through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports + * ping echos via the ICMP protocol. + * + * \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations + * and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor + * compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is + * recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP + * stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)
Relevant Standards:Microsoft RNDIS Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b4a65344 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.c @@ -0,0 +1,614 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission + * and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data + * delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C +#include "TCP.h" + +/* Global Variables: */ +/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are + * stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This + * allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired. + */ +TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS]; + +/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active + * (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections + * not present in the array are closed. + */ +TCP_ConnectionState_t ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS]; + + +/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application + * level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT + * buffer for later transmission. + */ +TASK(TCP_Task) +{ + /* Task to hand off TCP packets to and from the listening applications. */ + + /* Run each application in sequence, to process incomming and generate outgoing packets */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Run the application handler for the port */ + if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && + (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open)) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry], &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer); + } + } + } + + /* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */ + if (FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer) + return; + + /* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) && + (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready)) + { + Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData; + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + + sizeof(IP_Header_t)]; + void* TCPDataOUT = &FrameOUT.FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + + sizeof(IP_Header_t) + + sizeof(TCP_Header_t)]; + + uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length; + + /* Fill out the TCP data */ + TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port; + TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort; + TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut); + TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn); + TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0; + + memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize); + + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress, + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, + (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize)); + + PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t); + + /* Fill out the response IP header */ + IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize); + IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + IPHeaderOUT->Version = 4; + IPHeaderOUT->Flags = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Identification = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = 0; + IPHeaderOUT->Protocol = PROTOCOL_TCP; + IPHeaderOUT->TTL = DEFAULT_TTL; + IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress = ServerIPAddress; + IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress; + + IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t)); + + PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t); + + /* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */ + FrameOUTHeader->Source = ServerMACAddress; + FrameOUTHeader->Destination = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}}; + FrameOUTHeader->EtherType = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4); + + PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t); + + /* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */ + FrameOUT.FrameLength = PacketSize; + FrameOUT.FrameInBuffer = true; + + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false; + + break; + } + } +} + +/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are + * processed. + */ +void TCP_Init(void) +{ + /* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++) + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed; + + /* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */ + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed; +} + +/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state. + * + * \param Port Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian + * \param State New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum + * \param Handler Application callback handler for the port + * + * \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table) + */ +bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*)) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + /* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */ + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler; + return true; + } + } + + /* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */ + if (State == TCP_Port_Open) + { + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed) + { + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port = Port; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State; + PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler; + return true; + } + } + + /* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */ + return false; + } + else + { + /* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */ + return true; + } +} + +/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian. + * + * \param Port TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian + * + * \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum + */ +uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++) + { + /* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */ + if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port) + return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State; + } + + /* Port not in table, assume closed */ + return TCP_Port_Closed; +} + +/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the + * connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible. + * + * \param Port TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected device + * \param RemotePort TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param State TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum + * + * \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table) + */ +bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + { + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State; + return true; + } + } + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find empty entry in the table */ + if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed) + { + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port = Port; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort = RemotePort; + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State; + return true; + } + } + + return false; +} + +/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host. + * + * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host + * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian + * + * \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum + */ +uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + + { + return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State; + } + } + + return TCP_Connection_Closed; +} + +/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host. + * + * \param Port TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian + * \param RemoteAddress Remote protocol IP address of the connected host + * \param RemotePort Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian + * + * \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise + */ +TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort) +{ + /* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplfy network code */ + + for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++) + { + /* Find port entry in the table */ + if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) && + IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) && + ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort) + { + return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info; + } + } + + return NULL; +} + +/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param TCPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's TCP header + * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no + * response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the + * next Ethernet packet handler iteration + */ +int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart) +{ + IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart; + TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart; + + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo; + + DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart); + + bool PacketResponse = false; + + /* Check if the destination port is open and allows incomming connections */ + if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open) + { + /* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */ + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN) + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen); + + /* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */ + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST) + { + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + else + { + /* Process the incomming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */ + switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort)) + { + case TCP_Connection_Listen: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN) + { + /* SYN connection when closed starts a connection with a peer */ + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, + TCP_Connection_SYNReceived); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1); + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + /* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */ + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_Established: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + /* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */ + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait); + + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + } + else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH))) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + /* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */ + if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false)) + { + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = true; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length = 0; + } + + /* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */ + if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) && + (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE)) + { + uint16_t IPOffset = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t)); + uint16_t TCPOffset = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t)); + uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset); + + /* Copy the packet data into the buffer */ + memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length], + &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset], + DataLength); + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length += DataLength; + + /* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */ + if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH)) + { + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + } + } + else + { + /* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incomming packet */ + return NO_PROCESS; + } + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_Closing: + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN); + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1); + + break; + case TCP_Connection_FINWait1: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2); + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_FINWait2: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK)) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK; + PacketResponse = true; + + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++; + ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++; + + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + + break; + case TCP_Connection_CloseWait: + if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) + { + TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed); + } + + break; + } + } + } + else + { + /* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */ + TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK); + PacketResponse = true; + } + + /* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */ + if (PacketResponse) + { + ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, + TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort); + + TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort; + TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort; + TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut); + TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn); + TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t)); + + if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse)) + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE); + else + TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length); + + TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved = 0; + + TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, + IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t)); + + return sizeof(TCP_Header_t); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} + +/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word, + * complimented. + * + * \param TCPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header + * \param SourceAddress Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header + * \param SourceAddress DestinationAddress protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header + * \param TCPOutSize Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload + * + * \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value + */ +static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress, + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize) +{ + uint32_t Checksum = 0; + + /* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP psudo-header, + complimented */ + + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0]; + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1]; + Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP); + Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize); + + for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++) + Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord]; + + if (TCPOutSize & 0x01) + Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF); + + while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000) + Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16)); + + return ~Checksum; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21254859 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/TCP.h @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TCP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TCP_H_ +#define _TCP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */ + #define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS 1 + + /** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */ + #define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS 1 + + /** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */ + #define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE 1024 + + /** Port number for HTTP transmissions */ + #define TCP_PORT_HTTP SwapEndian_16(80) + + /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */ + #define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN false + + /** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */ + #define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT true + + /** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_CWR (1 << 7) + + /** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_ECE (1 << 6) + + /** Urgent TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_URG (1 << 5) + + /** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_ACK (1 << 4) + + /** Data Push TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_PSH (1 << 3) + + /** Reset TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_RST (1 << 2) + + /** Synchronize TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_SYN (1 << 1) + + /** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */ + #define TCP_FLAG_FIN (1 << 0) + + /** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer) (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN)) + + /** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \ + (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT)) + + /** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to check + * + * \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise + */ + #define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) Buffer->InUse + + /** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be + * performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host. + * + * \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(). + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to lock + */ + #define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to release + */ + #define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to send + * \param Len Length of data contained in the buffer + */ + #define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len) MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it. + * + * \param Buffer Application buffer to clear + */ + #define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer) MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE + + /** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host. + * + * \param Connection Open TCP connection to close + */ + #define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection) MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing; }MACROE + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for possible TCP port states */ + enum TCP_PortStates_t + { + TCP_Port_Closed = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */ + TCP_Port_Open = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */ + }; + + /** Enum for possible TCP connection states */ + enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t + { + TCP_Connection_Listen = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */ + TCP_Connection_SYNSent = 1, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */ + TCP_Connection_FINWait1 = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_FINWait2 = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */ + TCP_Connection_CloseWait = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */ + TCP_Connection_Closing = 7, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_LastACK = 8, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_TimeWait = 9, /**< Unused */ + TCP_Connection_Closed = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */ + uint8_t Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */ + bool Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */ + bool Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates + * buffer ready to be sent to the host + */ + bool InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */ + } TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */ + uint32_t SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */ + TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */ + } TCP_ConnectionInfo_t; + + /** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */ + uint16_t RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */ + IP_Address_t RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */ + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */ + uint8_t State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */ + } TCP_ConnectionState_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP port state */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */ + uint8_t State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */ + void (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, + TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */ + } TCP_PortState_t; + + /** Type define for a TCP packet header */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */ + uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */ + + uint32_t SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */ + uint32_t AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */ + + unsigned int Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */ + unsigned int DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */ + uint8_t Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */ + uint16_t WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaning in reception buffer) */ + + uint16_t Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */ + uint16_t UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */ + } TCP_Header_t; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(TCP_Task); + + /* External Variables: */ + TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS]; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void TCP_Init(void); + bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*)); + uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port); + bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State); + uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort); + TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort); + int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C) + static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress, + IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e1f9395 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.c @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low + * reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C +#include "UDP.h" + +/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response + * to the output Ethernet frame if a subprotocol handler has created a response packet. + * + * \param IPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's IP header + * \param UDPHeaderInStart Pointer to the start of the incomming packet's UDP header + * \param UDPHeaderOutStart Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header + * + * \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise + */ +int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart) +{ + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart; + UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart; + + int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE; + + DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart); + + /* Check to see if the UDP packet is a DHCP packet */ + if (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST) + { + RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart, + &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)], + &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]); + } + + /* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */ + if (RetSize > 0) + { + /* Fill out the response UDP packet header */ + UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort; + UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort; + UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0; + UDPHeaderOUT->Length = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize); + + /* Return the size of the response so far */ + return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize); + } + + return NO_RESPONSE; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60bbe218 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/UDP.h @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for IP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _UDP_H_ +#define _UDP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "EthernetProtocols.h" + #include "Ethernet.h" + #include "ProtocolDecoders.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */ + #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67 + + /** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */ + #define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY 68 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a UDP packet header */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */ + uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */ + uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */ + uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */ + } UDP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c07f2c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.c @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This + * application will serve up a static HTTP webpage when requested by the host. + */ + +#include "Webserver.h" + +/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the + * given location, and gives extra connection information. + */ +char PROGMEM HTTPHeader[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n" + "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n" + "Content-type: text/html\r\n" + "Connection: close\r\n\r\n"; + +/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically + * broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run. + */ +char PROGMEM HTTPPage[] = + "" + " " + " " + " LUFA Webserver Demo" + " " + " " + " " + "

Hello from your USB AVR!

" + "

" + " Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack." + "

" + " Project Information: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php." + "


" + " LUFA Version: " LUFA_VERSION_STRING + "

" + " " + ""; + + +/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application + * callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port. + */ +void Webserver_Init(void) +{ + /* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */ + TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback); +} + +/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command. + * + * \param RequestHeader HTTP request made by the host + * \param Command HTTP command to compare the request to + * + * \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise + */ +static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command) +{ + /* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */ + return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0); +} + +/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request + * has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses. + * + * \param ConnectionState Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information + * \param Buffer Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer + */ +void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer) +{ + char* BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data; + static uint8_t PageBlock = 0; + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */ + if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)) + { + if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET")) + { + PageBlock = 0; + + /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */ + strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr)); + + /* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */ + TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer); + } + else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD")) + { + /* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */ + strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTPHeader); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr)); + } + else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE")) + { + /* Echo the host's query back to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length); + } + else + { + /* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */ + TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer); + } + } + else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer)) + { + uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]); + uint16_t Length; + + /* Determine the length of the loaded block */ + Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength); + + /* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */ + strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length); + + /* Send the buffer contents to the host */ + TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length); + + /* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */ + if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE)) + { + /* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */ + TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer); + + /* Close the connection to the host */ + TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState); + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2193ad1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/Webserver.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Webserver.c. + */ + +#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_ +#define _WEBSERVER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "TCP.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */ + #define HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE 128 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Webserver_Init(void); + void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48cd040a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/RNDISEthernet/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,715 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = RNDISEthernet + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + RNDIS.c \ + Ethernet.c \ + ProtocolDecoders.c \ + ICMP.c \ + TCP.c \ + UDP.c \ + DHCP.c \ + ARP.c \ + IP.c \ + Webserver.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" +CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a336c1f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints. + * + * \return An error code from the StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0; + + /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */ + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + return ControlError; + + /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */ + if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE) + return DescriptorTooLarge; + + /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */ + ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize); + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData); + + /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration) + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + + /* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, NextStillImageInterface)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */ + while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE))) + { + /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */ + if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData, + NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint)) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoEndpointFound; + } + + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */ + if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT) + { + /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the events pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + } + } + else + { + /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */ + if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN) + { + /* Configure the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + } + else + { + /* Configure the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT, + EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, + PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE); + + /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */ + FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + } + } + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextStillImageInterface) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == SIMAGE_CLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) && + (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL)) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the + * search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) +{ + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK); + + if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)) + return Descriptor_Search_Found; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface) + { + return Descriptor_Search_Fail; + } + + return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f791488b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Configuration Descriptor Parser + + #include "StillImageHost.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */ + #define SIMAGE_CLASS 0x06 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */ + #define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS 0x01 + + /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */ + #define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL 0x01 + + /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */ + #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */ + NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */ + }; + + /* Configuration Descriptor Comparison Functions: */ + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextStillImageInterface); + DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3a494a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38755aba --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/PIMACodes.h @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard + * documentation for more information on each PIMA command. + */ + +#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO 0x1001 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION 0x1002 + #define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION 0x1003 + + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK 0x2001 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR 0x2002 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN 0x2003 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID 0x2004 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED 0x2005 + #define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED 0x2006 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..969ff5af --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.c @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for + * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as + * reading and writing of stored image data. + */ + +#include "StillImageCommands.h" + +/* Globals: */ +/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + +/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */ +PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + +/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */ + if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if any parameters in the command block */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device. */ +void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void) +{ + /* Unfreeze the events pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the event data into the global structure */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock)); + + /* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Freeze the event pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device. */ +uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */ + while (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */ + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + /* Clear the flag and decrement the timout period counter */ + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + TimeoutMSRem--; + + /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */ + if (!(TimeoutMSRem)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout; + } + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Return error code and break out of the loop */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */ + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + { + /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */ + SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled; + } + + /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */ + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + { + /* Return error code */ + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected; + } + }; + + /* Freeze OUT pipe after use */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + + /* Load in the response from the attached device */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the returned block type is a response block */ + if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock) + { + /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */ + uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Check if the device has returned any parameters */ + if (ParamBytes) + { + /* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes); + } + + /* Clear pipe bank after use */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued. + * + * \param Buffer Source data buffer to send to the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to send + */ +void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Write the data contents to the pipe */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received. + * + * \param Buffer Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device + * \param Bytes Number of bytes to receive + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Read in the data into the buffer */ + ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes); + + /* Freeze the pipe again after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return ErrorCode; +} + +/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device. + * + * \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise + */ +bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void) +{ + bool IsEventReceived = false; + + /* Unfreeze the Event pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */ + if (Pipe_BytesInPipe()) + IsEventReceived = true; + + /* Freeze the pipe after use */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return IsEventReceived; +} + +/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number. + * + * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t PipeEndpointNum) +{ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT), + bRequest: REQ_ClearFeature, + wValue: FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, + wIndex: PipeEndpointNum, + wLength: 0, + }; + + return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5679deae --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageCommands.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageCommands.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include // USB Functionality + + #include "PIMACodes.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE 0x01 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 0x02 + + /** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */ + #define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE 0x03 + + /** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */ + #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 5000 + + /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes. + * + * \param params Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container + */ + #define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \ + (params * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0]))) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receieve responses to and from an + * attached Still Image device. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */ + uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */ + uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */ + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */ + uint32_t Params[4]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code */ + } PIMA_Container_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */ + enum PIMA_Container_Types_t + { + CType_Undefined = 0, /**< Undefined container type */ + CType_CommandBlock = 1, /**< Command Block container type */ + CType_DataBlock = 2, /**< Data Block container type */ + CType_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type */ + CType_EventBlock = 4, /**< Event Block container type */ + }; + + /* External Variables: */ + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock; + extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void); + uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void); + void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void); + void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes); + bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void); + uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t PipeEndpointNum); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf2f1d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +StillImageHost30-Sep-2008 14:17:4130-Sep-2008 14:17:55241030-Sep-2008 14:17:4144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\StillImageHost\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000ConfigDescriptor.cStillImageCommands.cStillImageHost.cConfigDescriptor.hPIMACodes.hStillImageCommands.hStillImageHost.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111StillImageHost.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50b2054d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c @@ -0,0 +1,436 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "StillImageHost.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA SIMG Host App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_SImage_Host , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE); + CLKPR = 0; + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Startup message */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); + + /* Start USB management task to enumerate the device */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + /* Stop USB management and Still Image tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_SImage_Host, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + /* Once device is fully enumerated, start the Still Image Host task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_SImage_Host, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate device enumeration complete */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + UpdateStatus(Status_HardwareError); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occured while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState); + + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); +} + +/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information + * through the serial port. + */ +TASK(USB_SImage_Host) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_Addressed: + /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */ + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetConfiguration, + wValue: 1, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detatch if request fails */ + if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Control error.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Configured: + puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n")); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + if (ErrorCode == ControlError) + puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n")); + else + puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n")); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_EnumerationError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Ready: + /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_Busy); + + puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO, + TransactionID: 0x00000000, + Params: {}, + }; + + /* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response data block */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */ + uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0)); + + /* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */ + uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize]; + + /* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */ + SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize); + + /* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */ + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */ + uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo; + + /* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */ + DeviceInfoPos += 8; // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String + DeviceInfoPos += 2; // Skip over FunctionalMode + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over OperationCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over EventCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over DevicePropCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array + + /* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer); + printf_P(PSTR(" Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Manufacturer String + + /* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char Model[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model); + printf_P(PSTR(" Model: %s\r\n"), Model); + + DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Model String + + /* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */ + char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos]; + UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion); + printf_P(PSTR(" Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion); + + /* Recieve the final response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION, + TransactionID: 0x00000000, + Params: {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n")); + + PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t) + { + DataLength: PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1), + Type: CType_CommandBlock, + Code: PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION, + TransactionID: 0x00000001, + Params: {0x00000001}, + }; + + /* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */ + SImage_SendBlockHeader(); + + /* Recieve the response block from the device */ + if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError) + { + ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false); + break; + } + + /* Verify that the command completed successfully */ + if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK)) + { + ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true); + break; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n")); + + /* Indicate device no longer busy */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); + + break; + } +} + +/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode + * strings which contain ASCII printable characters only. + * + * \param UnicodeString Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string + * \param Buffer Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored + */ +void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer) +{ + /* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */ + uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++); + + /* Loop through the entire unicode string */ + while (CharactersRemaining--) + { + /* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, only Unicode coded ASCII supported) */ + *(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString; + + /* Jump to the next unicode character */ + UnicodeString += 2; + } + + /* Null terminate the string */ + *Buffer = 0; +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the StillImageHost_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_EnumerationError: + case Status_HardwareError: + case Status_PIMACommandError: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + break; + case Status_Busy: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully + * \param ResponseErrorCode Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure + */ +void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError) +{ + char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail")); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"), FailureType); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + /* Indicate error via status LEDs */ + UpdateStatus(Status_PIMACommandError); + + /* Wait until USB device disconnected */ + while (USB_IsConnected); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5669c827 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for StillImageHost.c. + */ + +#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ +#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + #include "PIMACodes.h" + #include "StillImageCommands.h" + + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Serial stream driver + #include // LED driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum StillImageHost_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB device) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + Status_EnumerationError = 3, /**< Software error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_HardwareError = 4, /**< Hardware error while enumerating the attached USB device */ + Status_Busy = 5, /**< Busy reading or writing to the attached Still Image device */ + Status_PIMACommandError = 6, /**< Error while sending or receiving a PIM command to the attached device */ + }; + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(USB_SImage_Host); + + /* Event Handlers: */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer); + void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e2657be --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo + * + * Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference + * application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as + * digital cameras. + * + * This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its + * information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the + * session. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host
USB Class:Still Image Device
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:USBIF Still Image Class SpecificationPIMA 15740 Specification
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83664e47 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/StillImageHost/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,705 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = StillImageHost + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + ConfigDescriptor.c \ + StillImageCommands.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion: + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +## Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc56660b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2040, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: ( sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t) + + sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t) ), + + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 0, + + Class: 0xFF, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(9), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88c0a5e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */ + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; /**< Interface descriptor, required for the device to enumerate */ + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80e1b7e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Test Application Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6939268c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +TestApp30-Sep-2008 14:18:1130-Sep-2008 14:18:23241030-Sep-2008 14:18:1144, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\TestApp\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cTestApp.cTestEvents.cDescriptors.hTestApp.hTestEvents.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111TestApp.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7ee526d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the TestApp demo. This file contains the main tasks of the demo and + * is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "TestApp.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA Test App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: TestApp_CheckJoystick, TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: TestApp_CheckHWB , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: TestApp_CheckTemp , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_RUN }, +}; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware initialization */ + SerialStream_Init(9600, false); + ADC_Init(ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION | ADC_PRESCALE_64); + Temperature_Init(); + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + HWB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled */ + OCR0A = 0x7D; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Turn on interrupts */ + sei(); + + /* Startup message via USART */ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY + "LUFA Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF)); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and increments the + * scheduler tick counter. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Scheduler test - increment scheduler tick counter once each millisecond */ + Scheduler_TickCounter++; +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the joystick position, and displaying the joystick position onto the + * board LEDs. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckJoystick) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t LEDMask = 0; + + /* Test of the Joystick - change a mask in response to joystick */ + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4; + + if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) + LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + /* Test of LEDs - light up in response to joystick */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the current temperature via the temperature sensor mounted on the + * board, and displaying it through the serial USART. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckTemp) +{ + static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 10000; // Force immediate run on startup + + /* Task runs every 10000 ticks, 10 seconds for this demo */ + if (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(10000, &DelayCounter)) + { + printf_P(PSTR("Current temperature: %d Degrees Celcius\r\n\r\n"), + (int)Temperature_GetTemperature()); + + /* Reset the delay counter, ready to count another 10000 tick interval */ + Scheduler_ResetDelay(&DelayCounter); + } +} + +/** Task responsible for checking the HWB button position, and start-stopping other tasks and the USB + * interface in response to user joystick movements. + */ +TASK(TestApp_CheckHWB) +{ + static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 0; + static bool IsPressed; + static bool BlockingJoystickTask; + + /* Check if HWB pressed (start USB) */ + if (HWB_GetStatus() == true) + { + /* Debounce - check 100 ticks later to see if button is still being pressed */ + if ((IsPressed == false) && (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(100, &DelayCounter))) + { + /* Set flag, indicating that current pressed state has been handled */ + IsPressed = true; + + /* First start of the USB interface permenantly blocks the joystick task */ + if (BlockingJoystickTask == false) + { + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckJoystick, TASK_STOP); + BlockingJoystickTask = true; + } + + /* Toggle USB interface */ + if (USB_IsInitialized == true) + { + USB_ShutDown(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_WHITE "USB Power Off.\r\n")); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckTemp, TASK_RUN); + } + else + { + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(TestApp_CheckTemp, TASK_STOP); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_YELLOW "USB Power On.\r\n")); + + USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID, USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL); + } + } + } + else + { + /* HWB not pressed - reset debounce interval counter and press handled flag */ + Scheduler_ResetDelay(&DelayCounter); + IsPressed = false; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4175fad1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TestApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TESTAPP_H_ +#define _TESTAPP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + #include // Auto-defragmenting Dynamic Memory allocation + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // ADC driver + #include // USART Stream driver + #include // Joystick driver + #include // LED driver + #include // Hardware Button driver + #include // Temperature sensor driver + + /* Task Definitions: */ + TASK(TestApp_CheckJoystick); + TASK(TestApp_CheckHWB); + TASK(TestApp_CheckTemp); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5b268aa --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestApp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Test Application for the LUFA library + * + * Test application. Demonstrates several aspects of the LUFA + * Library. On startup the current temperature will be printed + * through the USART every 10 seconds, and the current joystick + * position will be indicated via the LEDs on the selected board. + * Pressing the HWB will initiate the USB subsystem, enumerating + * the device (which has no actual functionality beyond + * enumeration as a device or as a host in this demo, and serves + * only to demonstrate the USB portion of the library). It will + * also suspend the joystick and temperature monitoring tasks. + * + * Pressing the HWB a second time will turn off the USB system + * and resume the temperature printing task (but not the joystick + * monitoring task). + * + * When activated, the USB events will be printed through the + * serial USART. + * + * When the USB subsystem is activated, the board LEDs will show + * the current USB status. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Host/Device (Dual Role)
USB Class:N/A
USB Subclass:N/A
Relevant Standards:N/A
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f05b820 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.c @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains dummy handlers for all the possible USB events passed to the + * application by the library (see Events.h documentation for more details on USB events). + * + * Each event is caught and printed to the USART so that they may be monitored. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TESTEVENTS_C +#include "TestEvents.h" + +/** Simple routine which aborts the program execution when a fatal error occurs, and is passed to the + * application via an event. When run, this function shuts down the USB interface, indicates an error + * via the board LEDs, prints an error message to the USART and then enters an infinite loop, preventing + * any more application code (other than interrupts) from executing. + */ +static void Abort_Program(void) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_INVERSE_ON "\r\n**PROGRAM ABORT**")); + for (;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSChange event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSChange) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS Change\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSConnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSConnect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS +\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_VBUSDisconnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSDisconnect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "VBUS -\r\n")); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_Connect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the + * USB task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB +\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the + * USB task stopped. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB -\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED3); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Suspend event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Suspend) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_YELLOW "USB Sleep\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_WakeUp event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_WakeUp) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_GREEN "USB Wakeup\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Reset event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Reset) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "USB Reset\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UIDChange event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UIDChange) +{ + char* ModeStrPtr; + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "UID Change\r\n")); + + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("HOST"); + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("DEVICE"); + else + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("N/A"); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- New Mode %S\r\n"), ModeStrPtr); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_PowerOnFail event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_PowerOnFail) +{ + char* ModeStrPtr; + + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Power On Fail\r\n")); + + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("DEVICE"); + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("HOST"); + else + ModeStrPtr = PSTR("N/A"); + + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Mode %S\r\n"), ModeStrPtr); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_HostError event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_HostError) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); +} + +/** + * Event handler for the USB_DeviceError event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART and the program + * execution aborted. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceError) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_RED "Device Mode Error\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode); + + Abort_Program(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Ctrl Request\r\n")); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Req Data %d\r\n"), bRequest); + printf_P(PSTR(" -- Req Type %d\r\n"), bmRequestType); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Configuration Number Changed\r\n")); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceAttached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_GREEN "Device +\r\n")); + + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceUnattached) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX ESC_BG_YELLOW "Device -\r\n")); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. When fired, the event is logged to the USART. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete) +{ + puts_P(PSTR(EVENT_PREFIX "Device Enumeration Complete\r\n")); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ba06aed --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/TestEvents.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TestEvents.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TESTEVENTS_H_ +#define _TESTEVENTS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include // Commonly used macros + #include // USB Functionality + #include // LED driver + #include // USART Stream driver + #include // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Event Catch List: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSChange event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSConnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSConnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_VBUSDisconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSDisconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Suspend event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Suspend); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_WakeUp event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_WakeUp); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Reset event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UIDChange event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UIDChange); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_PowerOnFail event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_PowerOnFail); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_HostError event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceError event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceError); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceAttached event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_DeviceUnattached event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + /* Macros: */ + /** Prefix sent through the USART when an even fires before the actual event message. */ + #define EVENT_PREFIX ESC_INVERSE_ON "EVENT:" ESC_INVERSE_OFF " " + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TESTEVENTS_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static void Abort_Program(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16c2ee5b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/TestApp/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = TestApp + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + TestEvents.c \ + Descriptors.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES +CDEFS += -DNUM_BLOCKS=100 -DBLOCK_SIZE=8 -DNUM_HANDLES=20 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +#PRINTF_LIB = +PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03d4ed9e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2044, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(11), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA USB-RS232 Demo" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bec5e40d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1eb8c543 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd9c8bf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA USB to Serial Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f477f17 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.c @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "RingBuff.h" + +void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->Elements = 0; + } +} + +void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + #if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + { + Buffer->OutPtr++; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + else + { + Buffer->Elements++; + } + #elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + return; + + Buffer->Elements++; + #elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK) + Buffer->Elements++; + #endif + + *(Buffer->InPtr) = Data; + Buffer->InPtr++; + + if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } +} + +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + + Buffer->OutPtr++; + Buffer->Elements--; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + + return BuffData; +} + +#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + } + + return BuffData; +} +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b6bfde6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/RingBuff.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* Buffer Configuration: */ + /* Buffer length - select static size of created ringbuffers: */ + #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128 // Set to the static ringbuffer size for all ringbuffers (place size after define) + + /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */ + #define BUFF_VOLATILE // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access + + /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */ + #define BUFF_DROPOLD // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full + // #define BUFF_DROPNEW // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full + // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user! + + /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ringbuffer: */ + //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ringbuffer is read + #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ringbuffers - checking left to user! + + /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */ + #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer + + /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */ + //#define BUFF_USEPEEK + +#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_ +#define _RINGBUFF_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + + /* Defines and checks: */ + #if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE) + #define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE + #else + #error No buffer length specified! + #endif + + #if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)) + #error No buffer drop mode specified. + #endif + + #if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE) + #error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified. + #endif + + #if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE) + #define BUFF_MODE volatile + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + #else + #define BUFF_MODE + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + #endif + + #if (BUFF_STATICSIZE > LONG_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t + #else + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t; + + typedef BUFF_MODE struct + { + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]; + RingBuff_Data_t* InPtr; + RingBuff_Data_t* OutPtr; + RingBuff_Elements_t Elements; + } RingBuff_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buff); + void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data); + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2db4f97b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +USBtoSerial30-Sep-2008 14:18:3930-Sep-2008 14:18:52241030-Sep-2008 14:18:3944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\USBtoSerial\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cRingBuff.cUSBtoSerial.cDescriptors.hRingBuff.hUSBtoSerial.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111USBtoSerial.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c06007a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c @@ -0,0 +1,390 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBtoSerial.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA USB RS232 App"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. + * + * These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, and the physical USART should be reconfigured to match the + * new settings each time they are changed by the host. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the RX data - data from the host to the attached device on the serial port. */ +RingBuff_t Rx_Buffer; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the TX data - data from the attached device on the serial port to the host. */ +RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer; + +/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently transmitting data from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer. */ +volatile bool Transmitting = false; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ReconfigureUSART(); + + /* Ringbuffer Initialization */ + Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + * the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + * of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + * which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Reconfigure the USART with the new settings */ + ReconfigureUSART(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake + lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks + to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code: + */ + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + // Do something with the given line states in wIndex +#endif + + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Task to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host, from and to the physical USART. */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232 + handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code: + */ + + USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t) + { + NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + Notification: NOTIF_SerialState, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + uint16_t LineStateMask; + + // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask)); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +#endif + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read the received data endpoint into the transmission buffer */ + while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + /* Wait until the buffer has space for a new character */ + while (!((BUFF_STATICSIZE - Rx_Buffer.Elements))); + + /* Store each character from the endpoint */ + Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + } + + /* Clear the endpoint buffer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle */ + if (!(Transmitting)) + { + Transmitting = true; + Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer)); + } + } + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the Tx buffer contains anything to be sent to the host */ + if (Tx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Check before sending the data if the endpoint is completely full */ + bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE); + + /* Write the transmission buffer contents to the received data endpoint */ + while (Tx_Buffer.Elements && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE)) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer)); + + /* Send the data */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* If a full endpoint was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to terminate the transfer */ + if (IsFull) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Send an empty packet to terminate the transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } + } +} + +/** ISR to handle the USART transmit complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has sent a character. This reloads the USART + * data register with the next byte from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer if a character is available, or stops the transmission if + * the buffer is currently empty. + */ +ISR(USART1_TX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Send next character if available */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + UDR1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + else + Transmitting = false; +} + +/** ISR to handle the USART receive complete interrupt, fired each time the USART has received a character. This stores the received + * character into the Tx_Buffer circular buffer for later transmission to the host. + */ +ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Character received, store it into the buffer */ + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, UDR1); +} + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + * log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + * \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Reconfigures the USART to match the current serial port settings issued by the host as closely as possible. */ +void ReconfigureUSART(void) +{ + uint8_t ConfigMask = 0; + + /* Determine parity - non odd/even parity mode defaults to no parity */ + if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Odd) + ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10)); + else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Even) + ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11); + + /* Determine stop bits - 1.5 stop bits is set as 1 stop bit due to hardware limitations */ + if (LineCoding.CharFormat == TwoStopBits) + ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1); + + /* Determine data size - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits are supported */ + if (LineCoding.DataBits == 6) + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10); + else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 7) + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11); + else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 8) + ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10)); + + /* Enable double speed, gives better error percentages at 8MHz */ + UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1); + + /* Enable transmit and receive modules and interrupts */ + UCSR1B = ((1 << TXCIE1) | (1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1)); + + /* Set the USART mode to the mask generated by the Line Coding options */ + UCSR1C = ConfigMask; + + /* Set the USART baud rate register to the desired baud rate value */ + UBRR1 = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL((uint16_t)LineCoding.BaudRateBPS); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f363fa93 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBtoSerial.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_ +#define _USB_SERIAL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "RingBuff.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // USART driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for + * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC + * notification endpoint. + */ + #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20 + + /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6) + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a + * change in the device state asynchronously. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants + * from the library StdRequestType.h header + */ + uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */ + } USB_Notification_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ReconfigureUSART(void); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..992f00f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Demo (via CDC-ACM class) + * + * Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a USB to Serial converter using the CDC class. Sent and + * received data on the serial port is communicated to the USB + * host. + * + * After running this demo for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad91aa81 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/USBtoSerial/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,704 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = USBtoSerial + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + RingBuff.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b53d81cd --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Demos/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA Demos. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all demos. + +# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C AudioInput clean + make -C AudioInput all + + make -C AudioOutput clean + make -C AudioOutput all + + make -C CDC clean + make -C CDC all + + make -C CDCHost clean + make -C CDCHost all + + make -C DualCDC clean + make -C DualCDC all + + make -C Joystick clean + make -C Joystick all + + make -C KeyboardMouse clean + make -C KeyboardMouse all + + make -C Keyboard clean + make -C Keyboard all + + make -C KeyboardFullInt clean + make -C KeyboardFullInt all + + make -C KeyboardViaInt clean + make -C KeyboardViaInt all + + make -C KeyboardHost clean + make -C KeyboardHost all + + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser clean + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser all + + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt clean + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt all + + make -C MassStorage clean + make -C MassStorage all + + make -C MassStorageHost clean + make -C MassStorageHost all + + make -C MIDI clean + make -C MIDI all + + make -C Mouse clean + make -C Mouse all + + make -C MouseFullInt clean + make -C MouseFullInt all + + make -C MouseViaInt clean + make -C MouseViaInt all + + make -C MouseHost clean + make -C MouseHost all + + make -C MouseHostWithParser clean + make -C MouseHostWithParser all + + make -C MouseHostViaInt clean + make -C MouseHostViaInt all + + make -C RNDISEthernet clean + make -C RNDISEthernet all + + make -C StillImageHost clean + make -C StillImageHost all + + make -C TestApp clean + make -C TestApp all + + make -C USBtoSerial clean + make -C USBtoSerial all + +%: + make -C AudioInput $@ + make -C AudioOutput $@ + make -C CDC $@ + make -C CDCHost $@ + make -C DualCDC $@ + make -C Joystick $@ + make -C KeyboardMouse $@ + make -C Keyboard $@ + make -C KeyboardFullInt $@ + make -C KeyboardViaInt $@ + make -C KeyboardHost $@ + make -C KeyboardHostWithParser $@ + make -C KeyboardHostViaInt $@ + make -C MassStorage $@ + make -C MassStorageHost $@ + make -C MIDI $@ + make -C Mouse $@ + make -C MouseFullInt $@ + make -C MouseViaInt $@ + make -C MouseHost $@ + make -C MouseHostWithParser $@ + make -C MouseHostViaInt $@ + make -C RNDISEthernet $@ + make -C StillImageHost $@ + make -C TestApp $@ + make -C USBtoSerial $@ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA.pnproj b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA.pnproj new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6cba8f16 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA.pnproj @@ -0,0 +1 @@ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51fb973b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/BuildingLinkableLibraries.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_BuildLibrary Building as a Linkable Library + * + * The LUFA library can be built as a proper linkable library (with the extention .a) under AVR-GCC, so that + * the library does not need to be recompiled with each revision of a user project. Instructions for creating + * a library from a given source tree can be found in the AVR-GCC user manual included in the WinAVR install + * /Docs/ directory. + * + * However, building the library is not recommended, as the static (compile-time) options will be + * unable to be changed without a recompilation of the LUFA code. Therefore, if the library is to be built + * from the LUFA source, it should be made to be application-specific and compiled with the static options + * that are required for each project (which should be recorded along with the library). + * + * Normal library use has the library components compiled in at the same point as the application code, as + * demonstrated in the library demos and applications. This is the preferred method, as the library is recompiled + * each time to ensure that all static options for a particular application are applied. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/ChangeLog.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/ChangeLog.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41967008 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/ChangeLog.txt @@ -0,0 +1,387 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + + /** \page Page_ChangeLog Project Changelog + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog090209 Version 090209 + * + * - PWM timer mode in AudioOut demo changed to Fast PWM for speed + * - Updated Magstripe project to work with the latest hardware revision + * - Fixed library not responding to the BCERRI flag correctly in host mode, leading to device lockups + * - Fixed library handling Get Descriptor requests when not addressed as standard requests to the device or interface + * - Fixed serious data corruption issue in MassStorage demo dataflash write routine + * - Added new NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST compile time token + * - USB task now restores previous global interrupt state after execution, rather than forcing global interrupts to be enabled + * - Fixed USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event firing after each configuration change, rather than once after the initial configuration + * - Added ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED() macros to Endpoint.h, altered ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE() to allow user to specify endpoint + * - ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS changed to ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS, PIPE_MAX_PIPES changed to PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES + * - Endpoint and Pipe non-control stream functions now ensure endpoint or pipe is ready before reading or writing + * - Changed Teensy bootloader to use a watchdog reset when exiting rather than a software jump + * - Fixed integer promotion error in MassStorage and MassStorageHost demos, corrupting read/write transfers + * - SPI_SendByte is now SPI_TransferByte, added new SPI_SendByte and SPI_ReceiveByte functions for fast one-way transfer + * - MassStorage demo changed to use new fast one-way SPI transfers to increase throughput + * - MassStorage handling of Mass Storage Reset class request improved + * - Altered MassStorage demo dataflash block read code for speed + * - Added USB_IsSuspended global flag + * - Simplified internal Dual Mode (OTG) USB library code to reduce code size + * - Extended stream timeout period to 100ms from 50ms + * - Mass Storage Host demo commands now all return an error code from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum + * - Added SubErrorCode parameter to the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event + * - VBUS drop interrupt now disabled during the manual-to-auto VBUS delivery handoff + * - Simplified low level backend so that device/host mode initialization uses the same code paths + * - Added workaround for faulty Mass Storage devices which do not implement the required GET_MAX_LUN request + * - Removed buggy Telnet application from the RNDIS demo + * - Moved Mass Storage class requests in the Mass Storage Host demo to wrapper functions in MassStoreCommands.c + * - Fixed incorrect SCSI command size value in the Request Sense command in MassStoreCommands.c + * - Added SetProtocol request to HID class non-parser Mouse and Keyboard demos to force devices to use the correct Boot Protocol + * - Added new "dfu" and "flip" programming targets to project makefiles + * - HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member typo corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful + * - Changed COLLECTION item strucutres in the HID descriptor parser to include the collection's Usage Page value + * - Serial driver now sets Tx line as output, enables pullup on Rx line + * - Fixed smaller USB AVRs raising multiple connection and disconnection events when NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT is disabled + * - Added HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS to give the host delay after a device is connected before it is enumerated + * - Fixed KeyboardHostWithParser demo linking against the wrong global variables + * - Completed doxygen documentation of remaining library bootloaders, demos and projects + * - Fixed incorrect bootloader start address in the TeensyHID bootloader + * - Added HWB button whole-disk ASCII dump functionality to MassStoreHost demo + * - Replaced printf_P(PSTR("%c"), {Variable}) calls with putchar() for speed and size savings + * - Serial driver now accepts baud rates over 16-bits in size, added double speed flag option + * - Fixed incorrect callback abort return value in Pipe.c + * - Added new flip-ee and dfu-ee makefile targets (courtesy of Opendous Inc.) + * - Removed reboot-on-disconnect code from the TeensyHID bootloader, caused problems on some systems + * - Fixed AudioOutput and AudioInput demos looping on the endpoint data, rather than processing a sample at a time and returning + * each time the task runs to allow for other tasks to execute + * - Added support for the Atmel ATAVRUSBRF01 board + * - Added AVRISP Programmer Project, courtesy of Opendous Inc. + * - Fixed CDC Host demo not searching through both CDC interfaces for endpoints + * - Fixed incorrect Product String descriptor length in the DFU class bootloader + * - Fixed failed descriptor searches in ConfigDescriptor.c eating the last checked descriptor when another search is started + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog081224 Version 081224 + * + * - MyUSB name changed to LUFA, the Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs + * - Fixed Mass Storage Host demo's MassStore_SendCommand() delay in the incorrect place + * - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not calling ReconfigureUSART() after a change in the line encoding + * - Fixed infinite loop in host mode Host-to-Device control transfers with data stages + * - HID report parser now supports devices with multiple reports in one interface via Report IDs + * - Fixed RZUSBSTICK board LED driver header incorrect macro definition order causing compile errors + * - Calling USB_Init() when the USB interface is already configured now forces a complete interface reset + * and re-enumeration - fixes MyUSB DFU bootloader not switching to app code correctly when soft reset used + * - Fixed "No newline at end of file" warning when stream callbacks are enabled + * - DFU bootloader now uses fixed signature bytes per device, rather than reading them out dynamically for size + * - Added new FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE and USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION switches to statically define certain values to + * reduce compiled binary size + * - Added new NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT switch to prevent the library from trying to determine bus connection + * state from the suspension and wake up events on the smaller USB AVRs + * - Added summary of all library compile time tokens to the documentation + * - Added overview of the LUFA scheduler to the documentation + * - Removed MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token, replaced with a mask for the USB_Init() Options parameter + * - CDC bootloader now uses the correct non-far or far versions of the pgm_* functions depending on if RAMPZ is defined + * - Doxygen documentation now contains documentation on all the projects, bootloaders and most demos included with the library + * - CDC bootloader now runs user application when USB disconnected rather than waiting for a hard reset + * - MouseHostWithParser and KeyboardHostWithParser now support multiple-report devices + * - RNDIS demo can now close connections correctly using the new TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION() macro - used in Webserver + * - Fixed the DFU bootloader, no longer freezes up when certain files are programmed into an AVR, made reading/writing faster + * - Fixed mouse/joystick up/down movements reversed - HID mouse X/Y coordinates use a left-handed coordinate system, not a normal + * right-handed system + * - Added stub code to the CDC and USBtoSerial demos showing how to read and set the RS-232 handshake lines - not currently used in + * the demos, but the example code and supporting defines are now in place + * - Interrupts are now disabled when processing a control request in device mode, to avoid exceeding the strict control request + * timing requirements. + * - All demos now use a central StatusUpdate() function rather than direct calls to the board LED functions, so that the demos can + * easily be altered to show different LED combinations (or do something else entirely) as the demo's status changes + * - Removed LED commands from the CDC bootloader, unused by most AVR910 programming software + * - Fixed RNDIS demo ICMP ping requests echoing back incorrect data + * - Added DHCP server code to RNDIS demo, allowing for hands-free autoconfiguration on any PC + * - Fixed DFU bootloader PID value for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR + * - Endpoint and Pipe configuration functions now return an error code indicating success or failure + * - USB Reset in device mode now resets and disables all device endpoints + * - Added intermediate states to the host mode state machine, reducing the USB task blocking time to no more than 1ms explicitly per + * invocation when in host mode + * - Added support for the ATMEGA32U6 microcontroller + * - Added STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION compile time option, enabled in the bootloaders to minimize space usage + * - Removed redudant code from the USB device GetStatus() chapter 9 processing routine + * - Added new TeensyHID bootloader, compatible with the Teensy HID protocol (http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/) + * - Versions are now numbered by release dates, rather than arbitrary major/minor revision numbers + * - USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is now correctly set and cleared by SetFeature and ClearFeature requests from the host + * - Changed prototype of GetDescriptor, so that it now returns the descriptor size (or zero if the descriptor doesn't exist) + * rather than passing the size back to the caller through a parameter and returning a boolean + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog153 Version 1.5.3 - Released 2nd October, 2008 + * + * - Fixed CDC bootloader using pgmspace macros for some descriptors inappropriately + * - Updated all Mouse and Keyboard device demos to include boot protocol support (now works in BIOS) + * - Renamed bootloader directories to remove spaces, which were causing build problems on several OSes + * - Removed serial number strings from all but the MassStore demo where it is required - users were not + * modifing the code to either ommit the descriptor or use a unique serial per device causing problems + * when multiple units of the same device were plugged in at the same time + * - AudioOutput and AudioInput demos now correctly silence endpoints when not enabled by the host + * - Added KeyboardMouse demo (Keyboard and Mouse functionality combined into a single demo) + * - Added DriverStubs directory to house board level driver templates, to make MyUSB compatible custom board + * driver creation easier + * - Extended MassStorage demo to support multiple LUNs, 2 by default + * - Fixed incorrect device address mask, preventing the device from enumerating with addresses larger than 63 + * - Fixed incorrect data direction mask in the GetStatus standard request, preventing it from being handled + * - Fixed incorrect GetStatus standard request for endpoints, now returns the endpoint STALL status correctly + * - Added in new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and USB_CurrentlySelfPowered flags rather than using fixed values + * - Added DualCDC demo to demonstrate the use of Interface Association Descriptors + * - Added pipe NAK detection and clearing API + * - Added pipe status change (NAK, STALL, etc.) interrupt API + * - Fixed MassStorageHost demo so that it no longer freezes randomly when issuing several commands in a row + * - Host demos configuration descriptor routines now return a unique error code when the returned data does + * not have a valid configuration descriptor header + * - Added Endpoint_WaitUntilReady() and Pipe_WaitUntilReady() functions + * - Stream functions now have software timeouts, timeout period can be set by the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token + * - All demos now pass the USB.org automated Chapter 9 device compliance tests + * - All HID demos now pass the USB.org automated HID compliance tests + * - Polling interval of the interrupt endpoint in the CDC based demos changed to 0xFF to fix problems on Linux systems + * - Changed stream functions to accept a new callback function, with NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS used to disable all callbacks + * - Mass Storage demo dataflash management routines changed to use the endpoint stream functions + * - Added AVRStudio project files for each demo in addition to the existing Programmer's Notepad master project file + * - Re-added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes + * are reflected in the hardware (change was previously lost) + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog152 Version 1.5.2 - Released 31st July, 2008 + * + * - Fixed SwapEndian_32() function in Common.h so that it now works correctly (wrong parameter types) + * - Updated RNDIS demo - notification endpoint is no longer blocking so that it works with faulty Linux RNDIS + * implementations (where the notification endpoint is ignored in favour of polling the control endpoint) + * - Fixed incorrect Vendor Description string return size in RNDIS demo for the OID_GEN_VENDOR_DESCRIPTION OID token + * - Added very basic TCP/IP stack and HTTP/TELNET servers to RNDIS demo + * - Fixed DFU bootloader exit causing programming software to complain about failed writes + * - Fixed DFU bootloader EEPROM programming mode wiping first flash page + * - Fixed Clear/Set Feature device standard request processing code (fixing MassStorage demo in the process) + * - Added support for the ATMEGA16U4 AVR microcontroller + * - Library licence changed from LGPLv3 to MIT license + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog151 Version 1.5.1 - Released 31st July, 2008 + * + * - Changed host demos to enable the host function task on the firing of the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event + * rather than the USB_DeviceAttached event + * - HID Usage Stack now forcefully cleared after an IN/OUT/FEATURE item has been completely processed to remove + * any referenced but not created usages + * - Changed USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts() and USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(), + * USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(), USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() to normal functions (from inline) + * - Fixed USBtoSerial demo not sending data, only receiving + * - Fixed main makefile to make all by default, fixed MagStripe directory case to prevent case-sensitive path problems + * - ConfigDescriptor functions made normal, instead of static inline + * - Pipe/Endpoint *_Ignore_* functions changed to *_Discard_*, old names still present as aliases + * - Fixed ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE define to be correct on limited USB controller AVRs + * - Changed endpoint and pipe size translation routines to use previous IF/ELSE IF cascade code, new algorithmic + * approach was buggy and caused problems + * - Bootloaders now compile with -fno-inline-small-functions option to reduce code size + * - Audio demos now use correct endpoint sizes for full and limited controller USB AVRs, double banking in all cases + * to be in line with the specification (isochronous endpoints MUST be double banked) + * - Added Interface Association descriptor to StdDescriptors.h, based on the relevant USB2.0 ECN + * - Fixed MIDI demo, corrected Audio Streaming descriptor to follow the MIDI-specific AS structure + * - Fixed HID class demo descriptors so that the HID interface's protocol is 0x00 (required for non-boot protocol HID + * devices) to prevent problems on hosts expecting the boot protocol functions to be supported + * - Added read/write control stream functions to Endpoint.h + * - Fixed AudioOut demo not setting port pins to inputs on USB disconnect properly + * - Added RNDISEthernet demo application + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog150 Version 1.5.0 - Released 10 June, 2008 + * + * - Fixed MIDI demo, now correctly waits for the endpoint to be ready between multiple note messages + * - Added CDC Host demo application + * - Added KeyboardFullInt demo application + * - Endpoint and Pipe creation routines now mask endpoint/pipe size with the size mask, to remove transaction + * size bits not required for the routines (improves compatibility with devices) + * - Fixed AudioInput demo - now correctly sends sampled audio to the host PC + * - Fixed AudioOutput demo oncemore -- apparently Windows requires endpoint packets to be >=192 bytes + * - Shrunk round-robbin scheduler code slightly via the use of struct pointers rather than array indexes + * - Fixed off-by-one error when determining if the Usage Stack is full inside the HID Report parser + * - Renamed Magstripe.h to MagstripeHW.h and moved driver out of the library and into the MagStripe demo folder + * - Added preprocessor checks to enable C linkage on the library components when used with a C++ compiler + * - Added Still Image Host demo application + * - The USB device task now restores the previously selected endpoint, allowing control requests to be transparently + * handled via interrupts while other endpoints are serviced through polling + * - Fixed device signature being sent in reverse order in the CDC bootloader + * - Host demos now have a seperate ConfigDescriptor.c/.h file for configuration descriptor processing + * - HostWithParser demos now have a seperate HIDReport.c/.h file for HID report processing and dumping + * - Removed non-mandatory commands from MassStorage demo to save space, fixed SENSE ResponseCode value + * - CDC demos now send empty packets after sending a full one to prevent buffering issues on the host + * - Updated demo descriptors to use VID/PID values donated by Atmel + * - Added DoxyGen documentation to the source files + * - Fixed Serial_IsCharRecieved() definition, was previously reversed + * - Removed seperate USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptor, USB_Descriptor_String_t is used instead + * - Removed unused Device Qualifier descriptor structure + * - Renamed the USB_CreateEndpoints event to the more appropriate USB_ConfigurationChanged + * - Fixed MassStorageHost demo reading in the block data in reverse + * - Removed outdated typedefs in StdRequestType.h, superceeded by the macro masks + * - Corrected OTG.h is now included when the AVR supports both Host and Device modes, for creating OTG products + * - USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event is now also fired when in device mode and the host has finished its enumeration + * - Interrupt driven demos now properly restore previously selected endpoint when ISR is complete + * - USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS is now overridable in the user project makefile to a custom fixed timeout value + * - Renamed USB_Host_SOFGeneration_* macros to more friendly USB_Host_SuspendBus(), USB_Host_ResumeBus() + * and USB_Host_IsBusSuspended() + * - Renamed *_*_Is* macros to *_Is* to make all flag checking macros consistant, Pipe_SetInterruptFreq() is now + * Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod() to use the correct terminology + * - UnicodeString member of USB_Descriptor_String_t struct changed to an ordinary int array type, so that the GCC + * Unicode strings (prefixed with an L before the opening quotation mark) can be used instead of explicit arrays + * of ASCII characters + * - Fixed Endpoint/Pipes being configured incorrectly if the maximum endpoint/pipe size for the selected USB AVR + * model was given as the bank size + * - HID device demos now use a true raw array for the HID report descriptor rather than a struct wrapped array + * - Added VERSION_BCD() macro, fixed reported HID and USB version numbers in demo descriptors + * - Cleaned up GetDescriptor device chapter 9 handler function + * - Added GET_REPORT class specific request to HID demos to make them complaint to the HID class + * - Cleaned up setting of USB_IsInitialized and USB_IsConnected values to only when needed + * - Removed Atomic.c and ISRMacro.h; the library was already only compatible with recent avr-lib-c for other reasons + * - All demos and library functions now use USB standardized names for the USB data (bRequest, wLength, etc.) + * - Added USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token to switch back to the non-standard descriptor element names + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog141 Version 1.4.1 - Released 5 May, 2008 + * + * - Enhanced KeyboardWithParser demo, now prints out pressed alphanumeric characters like the standard demo + * - Fixed MassStorage demo, read/writes using non mode-10 commands now work correctly + * - Corrected version number in Version.h + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog140 Version 1.4.0 - Released 5 May, 2008 + * + * - Added HID Report Parser API to the library + * - Added Mouse and Keyboard host demo applications, using the new HID report parser engine + * - Added MouseFullInt demo, which demonstrates a fully interrupt (including control requests) mouse device + * - Fixed incorrect length value in the audio control descriptor of the AudioOutput and AudioInput demos + * - Added MIDI device demo application to the library + * - Fixed problem preventing USB devices from being resumed from a suspended state + * - Added new CDC class bootloader to the library, based on the AVR109 bootloader protocol + * - Added header to each demo application indicating the mode, class, subclass, standards used and supported speed + * - Functions expecting endpoint/pipe numbers are no longer automatically masked against ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK or + * PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK - this should be manually added to code which requires it + * - Fixed DFU class bootloader - corrected frequency of flash page writes, greatly reducing programming time + * - Renamed AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() to USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor() and AVR_HOST_GetNextDescriptor() + * to USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor() + * - Added new USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore() and USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter() routines + * - Moved configuration descriptor routines to MyUSB/Drivers/USB/Class/, new accompanying ConfigDescriptors.c file + * - Added new configuration descriptor comparator API for more powerful descriptor parsing, updated host demos to use the + * new comparator API + * - Fixed MassStorageHost demo capacity printout, and changed data read/write mode from little-endian to the correct + * big-endian for SCSI devices + * - Fixed macro/function naming consistancy; USB_HOST is now USB_Host, USB_DEV is now USB_Device + * - Added better error reporting to host demos + * - Added 10 microsecond delay after addressing devices in host mode, to prevent control stalls + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog132 Version 1.3.2 - Released April 1st, 2008 + * + * - Added call to ReconfigureUSART() in USBtoSerial SetLineCoding request, so that baud rate changes + * are reflected in the hardware + * - Fixed CDC and USBtoSerial demos - Stream commands do not work for control endpoints, and the + * GetLineCoding request had an incorrect RequestType mask preventing it from being processed + * - Improved reliability of the USBtoSerial demo, adding a busy wait while the buffer is full + * - Device control endpoint size is now determined from the device's descriptors rather than being fixed + * - Seperated out SPI code into new SPI driver in AT90USBXXX driver directory + * - Bootloader now returns correct PID for the selected USB AVR model, not just the AT90USB128X PID + * - Added support for the RZUSBSTICK board + * - Bicolour driver removed in favour of generic LEDs driver + * - Added support for the ATMEGA32U4 AVR + * - Added MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time option to prevent the USB library from manipulating the PLL + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog131 Version 1.3.1 - Released March 19th 2008 + * + * - Fixed USB to Serial demo - class value in the descriptors was incorrect + * - Control endpoint size changed from 64 bytes to 8 bytes to save on USB FIFO RAM and to allow low + * speed mode devices to enumerate properly + * - USB to Serial demo data endpoints changed to dual-banked 16 byte to allow the demo to work + * on USB AVRs with limited USB FIFO RAM + * - Changed demo endpoint numbers to use endpoints 3 and 4 for double banking, to allow limited + * USB device controller AVRs (AT90USB162, AT90USB82) to function correctly + * - Updated Audio Out demo to use timer 1 for AVRs lacking a timer 3 for the PWM output + * - Fixed incorrect USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED entry in the Mass Storage device demo makefile + * - Optimized Mass Storage demo for a little extra transfer speed + * - Added LED indicators to the Keyboard demo for Caps Lock, Num Lock and Scroll Lock + * - Added Endpoint_Read_Stream, Endpoint_Write_Stream, Pipe_Read_Stream and Pipe_Write_Stream functions + * (including Big and Little Endian variants) + * - Made Dataflash functions inline for speed, removed now empty Dataflash.c driver file + * - Added new SetSystemClockPrescaler() macro - thanks to Joerg Wunsch + * - Fixed Endpoint_ClearStall() to function correctly on full USB controller AVRs (AT90USBXXX6/7) + * - Endpoint_Setup_In_Clear() and Endpoint_Setup_Out_Clear() no longer set FIFOCON, in line with the + * directives in the datasheet + * - Fixed PLL prescaler defines for all AVR models and frequencies + * - Fixed ENDPOINT_INT_IN and ENDPOINT_INT_OUT definitions + * - Added interrupt driven keyboard and mouse device demos + * - Combined USB_Device_ClearFeature and USB_Device_SetFeature requests into a single routine for code + * size savings + * - Added missing Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() macro to Pipe.h + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.3.0 - Released March 7th 2008 + * + * - Unneccesary control endpoint config removed from device mode + * - Fixed device standard request interpreter accidentally processing some class-specific requests + * - Added USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS compile time options to instruct the library + * to use descriptors stored in RAM or EEPROM rather than flash memory + * - All demos now disable watchdog on startup, in case it has been enabled by fuses or the bootloader + * - USB_DEV_OPT_LOWSPEED option now works correctly + * - Added ability to set the USB options statically for a binary size reduction via the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS + * compile time define + * - USB_Init no longer takes a Mode parameter if compiled for a USB device with no host mode option, or + * if forced to a particular mode via the USB_HOST_ONLY or USB_DEVICE_ONLY compile time options + * - USB_Init no longer takes an Options parameter if options statically configured by USE_STATIC_OPTIONS + * - Endpoint_Ignore_* and Pipe_Ignore_* made smaller by making the dummy variable non-volatile so that the + * compiler can throw away the result more efficiently + * - Added in an optional GroupID value to each scheduler entry, so that groups of tasks can once again be + * controlled by the new Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode() routine + * - Added support for AT90USB162 and AT90USB82 AVR models + * - Added support for the STK525 and STK526 boards + * - Added support for custom board drivers to be supplied by selecting the board type as BOARD_USER, and + * placing board drivers in {Application Directory}/Board/ + * - PLL is now stopped and USB clock is frozen when detatched from host in device mode, to save power + * - Joystick defines are now in synch with the schematics - orientation will be rotated for the USBKEY + * - Fixed USB_DEV_IsUSBSuspended() - now checks the correct register + * - Fixed data transfers to devices when in host mode + * - Renamed USB_DEV_OPT_HIGHSPEED to USB_DEV_OPT_FULLSPEED and USB_HOST_IsDeviceHighSpeed() to + * USB_HOST_IsDeviceFullSpeed() to be in line with the official USB speed names (to avoid confusion with + * the real high speed mode, which is unavailable on the USB AVRs) + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog120 Version 1.2.0 - Released February 4th, 2008 + * + * - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event for host mode + * - Added new Scheduler_Init routine to preprepare the scheduler, so that tasks can be started and + * stopped before the scheduler has been started (via Scheduler_Start) + * - Connection events in both Device and Host mode are now interrupt-driven, allowing the USB management + * task to be stopped when the USB is not connected to a host or device + * - All demos updated to stop the USB task when not in use via the appropriate USB events + * - Mass Storage Host demo application updated to function correctly with all USB flash disks + * - Mass Storage Host demo application now prints out the capacity and number of LUNs in the attached + * device, and prints the first block as hexadecimal numbers rather than ASCII characters + * - Endpoint and Pipe clearing routines now clear the Endpoint/Pipe interrupt and status flags + * - Shifted error handling code in the host enum state machine to a single block, to reduce code complexity + * - Added in DESCRIPTOR_TYPE, DESCRIPTOR_SIZE and DESCRIPTOR_CAST macros to make config descriptor processing + * clearer in USB hosts and DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS for convenience in USB devices + * - Added in alloca macro to common.h, in case the user is using an old version of avr-lib-c missing the macro + * + * + * \section Sec_ChangeLog130 Version 1.1.0 - Released January 25th 2008 + * + * - Fixed DCONNI interrupt being enabled accidentally after a USB reset + * - Fixed DDISCI interrupt not being disabled when a device is not connected + * - Added workaround for powerless pullup devices causing false disconnect interrupts + * - Added USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event for Host mode + * - AVR_HOST_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor routine no longer modifies ConfigSizePtr if a valid buffer + * pointer is passed + * - Added ALLOCABLE_BYTES to DynAlloc, and added code to make the size of key storage variables + * dependant on size of memory parameters passed in via the user project's makefile + * - Fixed incorrect device reset routine being called in USBTask + * - Devices which do not connect within the standard 300mS are now supported + * - Removed incorrect ATTR_PURE from Scheduler_SetTaskMode(), which was preventing tasks from being + * started/stopped, as well as USB_InitTaskPointer(), which was breaking dual device/host USB projects + * - Changed scheduler to use the task name rather than IDs for setting the task mode, eliminating the + * need to have a task ID list + * - ID transistion interrupt now raises the appropriate device/host disconnect event if device attached + * - Fixed double VBUS change (and VBUS -) event when detatching in device mode + * - Added ability to disable ANSI terminal codes by the defining of DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES in makefile + * - Removed return from ConfigurePipe and ConfigureEndpoint functions - use Pipe_IsConfigured() and + * Endpoint_IsConfigured() after calling the config functions to determine success + */ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d4a36550 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/BoardTypes.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains constants which can be passed to the compiler (via setting the macro BOARD) in the + * user project makefile using the -D option to configure the library board-specific drivers. + * + * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's + * functionality. + */ + +#ifndef __BOARDTYPES_H__ +#define __BOARDTYPES_H__ + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__COMMON_H__) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Selects the USBKEY specific board drivers, including Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */ + #define BOARD_USBKEY 0 + + /** Selects the STK525 specific board drivers, including Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */ + #define BOARD_STK525 1 + + /** Selects the STK526 specific board drivers, including Dataflash, Joystick and LED drivers. */ + #define BOARD_STK526 2 + + /** Selects the RZUSBSTICK specific board drivers, including the driver for the boards LEDs. */ + #define BOARD_RZUSBSTICK 3 + + /** Selects the ATAVRUSBRF01 specific board drivers, including the driver for the board LEDs. */ + #define BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01 4 + + /** Selects the user-defined board drivers, which should be placed in the user project's folder + * under a directory named /Board/. Each board driver should be named identically to the LUFA + * master board driver (i.e., driver in the LUFA/Drivers/Board director) so that the library + * can correctly identify it. + */ + #define BOARD_USER 5 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54fab0f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/ButtLoadTag.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains macros for the embedding of compile-time strings into the resultant project binary for + * identification purposes. It is designed to prefix "tags" with the magic string of "@(#)" so that the tags + * can easily be identified in the binary data. + * + * These tags are compatible with the ButtLoad project at http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/ButtLoad.php . + */ + +#ifndef __BUTTLOADTAG_H__ +#define __BUTTLOADTAG_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Creates a new tag in the resultant binary, containing the specified data array. The macro id + * parameter is only for identification purposes (so that the tag data can be referenced in code) + * and is not visible in the compiled binary. + */ + #define BUTTLOADTAG(id, data) const struct ButtLoadTagData BUTTTAG_##id \ + PROGMEM __attribute__((used, externally_visible)) = \ + {MagicString: BT_TAGHEADER, TagData: data} + + /** Macro for retrieving a reference to the specified tag's contents. The tag data is located in + * the program memory (FLASH) space, and so must be read out with the macros in avr-libc which + * deal with embedded data. + */ + #define BUTTLOADTAG_DATA(id) BUTTTAG_##id.TagData + + /* Structures: */ + /** Structure for ButtLoad compatible binary tags. */ + struct ButtLoadTagData + { + char MagicString[4]; /**< Magic tag header, containing the string "@(#)". */ + char TagData[]; /**< Tag contents as a char array. */ + }; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define BT_TAGHEADER {'@','(','#',')'} + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/Common.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/Common.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97e9ce93 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/Common.h @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains macros which are common to all library elements, and which may be useful in user code. It + * also includes other common headees, such as Atomic.h, FunctionAttributes.h and BoardTypes.h. + */ + +#ifndef __COMMON_H__ +#define __COMMON_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "FunctionAttributes.h" + #include "BoardTypes.h" + + #include + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro for encasing other multi-statment macros. This should be used along with an opening brace + * before the start of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated + * as a discreete block and not as a list of seperate statements which may cause problems when used as + * a block (such as inline IF statments). + */ + #define MACROS do + + /** Macro for encasing other multi-statment macros. This should be used along with a preceeding closing + * brace at the end of any multi-statement macro, so that the macros contents as a whole are treated + * as a discreete block and not as a list of seperate statements which may cause problems when used as + * a block (such as inline IF statments). + */ + #define MACROE while (0) + + /** Defines a volatile NOP statment which cannot be optimized out by the compiler, and thus can always + * be set as a breakpoint in the resulting code. Useful for debugging purposes, where the optimizer + * removes/reorders code to the point where break points cannot reliably be set. + */ + #define JTAG_DEBUG_POINT() asm volatile ("NOP" ::) + + /** Defines an explicit JTAG break point in the resulting binary via the ASM BREAK statment. When + * a JTAG is used, this causes the program execution to halt when reached until manually resumed. */ + #define JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() asm volatile ("BREAK" ::) + + /** Macro for testing condition "x" and breaking via JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK() if the condition is false. */ + #define JTAG_DEBUG_ASSERT(x) MACROS{ if (!(x)) { JTAG_DEBUG_BREAK(); } }MACROE + + /** Macro for testing condition "x" and writing debug data to the serial stream if false. As a + * prerequisite for this macro, the serial stream should be configured via the Serial_Stream driver. + * + * The serial output takes the form "{FILENAME}: Function {FUNCTION NAME}, Line {LINE NUMBER}: Assertion + * {x} failed." + */ + #define SERIAL_STREAM_ASSERT(x) MACROS{ if (!(x)) { printf_P(PSTR("%s: Function \"%s\", Line %d: " \ + "Assertion \"%s\" failed.\r\n"), \ + __FILE__, __func__, __LINE__, #x); \ + } }MACROE + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Function for reliably setting the AVR's system clock prescaler, using inline assembly. This function + * is guaranteed to operate reliably regardless of optimization setting or other compile time options. + * + * \param PrescalerMask The mask of the new prescaler setting for CLKPR + */ + static inline void SetSystemClockPrescaler(uint8_t PrescalerMask) + { + uint8_t tmp = (1 << CLKPCE); + __asm__ __volatile__ ( + "in __tmp_reg__,__SREG__" "\n\t" + "cli" "\n\t" + "sts %1, %0" "\n\t" + "sts %1, %2" "\n\t" + "out __SREG__, __tmp_reg__" + : /* no outputs */ + : "d" (tmp), + "M" (_SFR_MEM_ADDR(CLKPR)), + "d" (PrescalerMask) + : "r0"); + } + + /** Function to reverse the individual bits in a byte - i.e. bit 7 is moved to bit 0, bit 6 to bit 1, + * etc. + * + * \param Byte Byte of data whose bits are to be reversed + */ + static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST; + static inline uint8_t BitReverse(uint8_t Byte) + { + Byte = (((Byte & 0xF0) >> 4) | ((Byte & 0x0F) << 4)); + Byte = (((Byte & 0xCC) >> 2) | ((Byte & 0x33) << 2)); + Byte = (((Byte & 0xAA) >> 1) | ((Byte & 0x55) << 1)); + + return Byte; + } + + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 16 bit number. + * + * \param Word Word of data whose bytes are to be swapped + */ + static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST; + static inline uint16_t SwapEndian_16(uint16_t Word) + { + return ((Word >> 8) | (Word << 8)); + } + + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a 32 bit number. + * + * \param DWord Double word of data whose bytes are to be swapped + */ + static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST; + static inline uint32_t SwapEndian_32(uint32_t DWord) + { + return (((DWord & 0xFF000000) >> 24) | + ((DWord & 0x00FF0000) >> 8) | + ((DWord & 0x0000FF00) << 8) | + ((DWord & 0x000000FF) << 24)); + } + + /** Function to reverse the byte ordering of the individual bytes in a n byte number. + * + * \param Data Pointer to a number containing an even number of bytes to be reversed + * \param Bytes Length of the data in bytes + */ + static inline void SwapEndian_n(uint8_t* Data, uint8_t Bytes); + static inline void SwapEndian_n(uint8_t* Data, uint8_t Bytes) + { + uint8_t Temp; + + while (Bytes) + { + Temp = *Data; + *Data = *(Data + Bytes - 1); + *(Data + Bytes) = Temp; + + Data++; + Bytes -= 2; + } + } + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/FunctionAttributes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/FunctionAttributes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16503bb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Common/FunctionAttributes.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file contains macros for applying GCC specific attributes to functions to control various optimizer + * and code generation features of the compiler. Attributes may be placed in the function prototype in any + * order, and multiple attributes can be specified for a single function via a space seperated list. + * + * \note Do not include this file directly, rather include the Common.h header file instead to gain this file's + * functionality. + */ + +#ifndef __FUNCATTR_H__ +#define __FUNCATTR_H__ + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(__COMMON_H__) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Common/Common.h instead to gain this functionality. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates to the compiler that the function can not ever return, so that any stack restoring or + * return code may be ommited by the compiler in the resulting binary. + */ + #define ATTR_NO_RETURN __attribute__ ((noreturn)) + + /** Places the function in one of the initilization sections, which execute before the main function + * of the application. The init function number can be specified as "x", as an integer. Refer to the + * avr-libc manual for more information on the initialization sections. + */ + #define ATTR_INIT_SECTION(x) __attribute__ ((naked, section (".init" #x ))) + + /** Indicates that the function returns a value which should not be ignored by the user code. When + * applied, any ignored return value from calling the function will produce a compiler warning. + */ + #define ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT __attribute__ ((warn_unused_result)) + + /** Indicates that the specified parameters of the function are pointers which should never be NULL. + * When applied as a 1-based comma seperated list the compiler will emmit a warning if the specified + * parameters are known at compiler time to be NULL at the point of calling the function. + */ + #define ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(...) __attribute__ ((nonnull (__VA_ARGS__))) + + /** Removes any preample or postample from the function. When used, the function will not have any + * register or stack saving code. This should be used with caution, and when used the programmer + * is responsible for maintaining stack and register integrity. + */ + #define ATTR_NAKED __attribute__ ((naked)) + + /** Prevents the compiler from considering a specified function for inlining. When applied, the given + * function will not be inlined under any circumstances. + */ + #define ATTR_NOINLINE __attribute__ ((noinline)) + + /** Forces the compiler to inline the specified function. When applied, the given function will be + * inlined under all circumstances. + */ + #define ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE __attribute__ ((always_inline)) + + /** Indicates that the specified function is pure, in that it has no side-effects other than global + * or parameter variable access. + */ + #define ATTR_PURE __attribute__ ((pure)) + + /** Indicates that the specified function is constant, in that it has no side effects other than + * parameter access. + */ + #define ATTR_CONST __attribute__ ((const)) + + /** Marks a given function as deprecated, which produces a warning if the function is called. */ + #define ATTR_DEPRECATED __attribute__ ((deprecated)) + + /** Marks a function as a weak reference, which can be overridden by other functions with an + * identical name (in which case the weak reference is discarded at link time). + */ + #define ATTR_WEAK __attribute__ ((weak)) + + /** Marks a function as an alias for another function of name "x". */ + #define ATTR_ALIAS(x) __attribute__ ((alias( #x ))) + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/CompileTimeTokens.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/CompileTimeTokens.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..196132b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/CompileTimeTokens.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page TokenSummary Summary of Compile Tokens + * + * The following lists all the possible tokens which can be defined in a project makefile, and passed to the + * compiler via the -D switch, to alter the LUFA library code. These tokens may alter the library behaviour, + * or remove features unused by a given application in order to save flash space. + * + * \section Sec_SummaryNonUSBTokens Non USB Related Tokens + * This section describes compile tokens which affect non-USB sections of the LUFA library. + * + * DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES - TerminalCodes.h \n + * If an application contains ANSI terminal control codes listed in TerminalCodes.h, it might be desired to remove them + * at compile time for use with a terminal which is non-ANSI control code aware, without modifying the source code. If + * this token is defined, all ANSI control codes in the application code from the TerminalCodes.h header are removed from + * the source code at compile time. + * + * NUM_BLOCKS - DynAlloc.h \n + * Sets the number of allocable blocks in the psudo-heap of the dynamic memory allocation driver. This should be + * defined as a constant larger than zero. + * + * BLOCK_SIZE - DynAlloc.h \n + * Sets the size of each allocable block in the psudo-heap of the dynamic memory allocation driver. This should be + * defined as a constant larger than zero. + * + * NUM_HANDLES - DynAlloc.h \n + * Sets the maximum number of managed memory handles which can be handed out by the dynamic memory allocation driver + * simultaneously, before a handle (and its associated allocated memory) must be freed. + * + * \section Sec_SummaryUSBClassTokens USB Class Driver Related Tokens + * This section describes compile tokens which affect USB class-specific drivers in the LUFA library. + * + * HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING - HIDParser.h \n + * Define this token to enable the processing of FEATURE HID report items, if any, into the processed HID structure. + * By default FEATURE items (which are device features settable by the host but not directly visible by the user) are + * skipped when processing a device HID report. + * + * HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS - HIDParser.h \n + * By default, constant data items (usually used as spacers to align seperate report items to a byte or word boundary) + * in the HID report are skipped during report processing. It is highly unusual for an application to make any use of + * constant data items (as they do not carry any useful data and only occupy limited RAM) however if required defining + * this switch will put constant data items into the processed HID report structure. + * + * HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH - HIDParser.h \n + * HID reports may contain PUSH and POP elements, to store and retrieve the current HID state table onto a stack. This + * allows for reports to save the state table before modifying it slightly for a data item, and then restore the previous + * state table in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to give the maximum depth of the state + * table stack. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation. + * + * HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH - HIDParser.h \n + * HID reports generally contain many USAGE elements, which are assigned to INPUT, OUTPUT and FEATURE items in succession + * when multiple items are defined at once (via REPORT COUNT elements). This allows for several items to be defined with + * different usages in a compact manner. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the maximum depth of the + * usage stack, indicating the maximum number of USAGE items which can be stored tempoarily until the next INPUT, OUTPUT + * and FEATURE item. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation. + * + * HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS - HIDParser.h \n + * HID reports generally contain several COLLECTION elements, used to group related data items together. Collection information + * is stored seperately in the processed usage structure (and referred to by the data elements in the structure) to save space. + * This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the maximum number of COLLECTION items which can be processed by the + * parser into the resultant processed report structure. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file + * documentation. + * + * HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS - HIDParser.h \n + * All HID reports contain one or more INPUT, OUTPUT and/or FEATURE items describing the data which can be sent to and from the HID + * device. Each item has associated usages, bit offsets in the item reports and other associated data indicating the manner in which + * the report data should be interpreted by the host. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the maximum number of + * data elements which can be stored in the processed HID report strucuture, including INPUT, OUTPUT and (if enabled) FEATURE items. + * If a item has a multiple count (i.e. a REPORT COUNT of more than 1), each item in the report count is placed seperately in the + * processed HID report table. If not defined, this defaults to the value indicated in the HID.h file documentation. + * + * \section Sec_SummaryUSBTokens USB Driver Related Tokens + * This section describes compile tokens which affect USB driver stack as a whole in the LUFA library. + * + * USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS - StdDescriptors.h \n + * Define this token to indicate to the USB driver that device descriptors are stored in RAM, rather than the default of + * the AVR's flash. RAM descriptors may be desirable in applications where speed or minimizing flash usage is more important + * than RAM usage, or applications where the descriptors need to be modified at runtime. + * + * USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS - StdDescriptors.h \n + * Similar to USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS, but descriptors are stored in the AVR's EEPROM memory rather than RAM. + * + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES - StdDescriptors.h \n + * The USB 2.0 standard gives some rather obscure names for the elements in the standard descriptor types (device, configuration, + * string, endpoint, etc.). By default the LUFA library uses these names in its predefined descriptor structure types for + * compatibility. If this token is defined, the structure element names are switched to the LUFA-specific but more descriptive + * names documented in the StdDescriptors.h source file. + * + * FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE - Endpoint.h \n + * By default, the library determines the size of the control endpoint (when in device mode) by reading the device descriptor. + * Normally this reduces the amount of configuration required for the library, allows the value to change dynamically (if + * descriptors are stored in EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, this token can be + * defined to a non-zero value instead to give the size in bytes of the control endpoint, to reduce the size of the compiled + * binary at the expense of flexibility. + * + * STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION - Endpoint.h \n + * By default, the endpoint configuration routine is designed to accept dynamic inputs, so that the endpoints can be configured + * using variable values known only at runtime. This allows for a great deal of flexibility, however uses a small amount of binary + * space which may be wasted if all endpoint configurations are static and known at compile time. Define this token via the -D switch + * to optimize the endpoint configuration routine for constant inputs, to reduce the size of the compiled binary at the expense of + * flexibility. Note that with this option dynamic values may still be used, but will result in many times more code to be generated than + * if the option was disabled. This is designed to be used only if the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE option is also used. + * + * USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION - DevChapter9.h \n + * By default, the library determines the number of configurations a USB device supports by reading the device descriptor. This reduces + * the amount of configuration required to set up the library, and allows the value to change dynamically (if descriptors are stored in + * EEPROM or RAM rather than flash memory) and reduces code maintenance. However, many USB device projects use only a single configuration. + * Defining this token enables single-configuration mode, reducing the compiled size of the binary at the expense of flexibility. + * + * NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST - DevChapter9.h \n + * In some limited USB device applications, the Get Feature and Set Feature requests are not used - this is when the device does not have + * device level features (such as remote wakeup) nor any data endpoints beyond the mandatory control endpoint. In such limited situations, + * this token may be defined to remove the handling of the Get Feature and Set Feature Chapter 9 requests to save space. Generally, this + * is usually only useful in (some) bootloaders. + * + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS - Endpoint.h, Pipe.h \n + * Both the endpoint and the pipe driver code contains stream functions, allowing for arrays of data to be sent to or from the + * host easily via a single function call (rather than complex routines worrying about sending full packets, waiting for the endpoint/ + * pipe to become ready, etc.). By default, these stream functions require a callback function which is executed after each byte processed, + * allowing for early-aborts of stream transfers by the application. If callbacks are not required in an application, they can be removed + * by defining this token, reducing the compiled binary size. When removed, the stream functions no longer accept a callback function as + * a parameter. + * + * USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS - Host.h \n + * When a control transfer is initiated in host mode to an attached device, a timeout is used to abort the transfer if the attached + * device fails to respond within the timeout period. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the timeout period for + * control transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead. + * + * HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS - Host.h \n + * Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds after they are connected to VBUS before the enumeration process can be started, or + * they will fail to enumerate correctly. By placing a delay before the enumeration process, it can be ensured that the bus has settled + * back to a known idle state before communications occur with the device. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the + * device settle period, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in Host.h is used instead. + * + * USE_STATIC_OPTIONS - LowLevel.h \n + * By default, the USB_Init() function accepts dynamic options at runtime to alter the library behaviour, including whether the USB pad + * voltage regulator is enabled, and the device speed when in device mode. By defining this token to a mask comprised of the USB options + * mask defines usually passed as the Options parameter to USB_Init(), the resulting compiled binary can be decreased in size by removing + * the dynamic options code, and replacing it with the statically set options. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts an + * Options parameter. + * + * USB_DEVICE_ONLY - LowLevel.h \n + * For the USB AVR models supporting both device and host USB modes, the USB_Init() function contains a Mode parameter which specifies the + * mode the library should be initialized to. If only device mode is required, the code for USB host mode can be removed from the binary to + * save space. When defined, the USB_Init() function no longer accepts a Mode parameter. This define is irrelevent on smaller USB AVRs which + * do not support host mode. + * + * USB_HOST_ONLY - LowLevel.h \n + * Same as USB_DEVICE_ONLY, except the library is fixed to USB host mode rather than USB device mode. Not available on some USB AVR models. + * + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS - LowLevel.h \n + * When endpoint and/or pipe stream functions are used, by default there is a timeout between each transfer which the connected device or host + * must satisfy, or the stream function aborts the remaining data transfer. This token may be defined to a non-zero value to set the timeout + * period for stream transfers, specified in milliseconds. If not defined, the default value specified in LowLevel.h is used instead. + * + * NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT - Events.h \n + * On the smaller USB AVRs, the USB controller lacks VBUS events to determine the physical connection state of the USB bus to a host. In lieu of + * VBUS events, the library attempts to determine the connection state via the bus suspension and wake up events instead. This however may be + * slightly inaccurate due to the possibility of the host suspending the bus while the device is still connected. If accurate connection status is + * required, the VBUS line of the USB connector should be routed to an AVR pin to detect its level, so that the USB_IsConnected global + * can be accurately set and the USB_Connect and USB_Disconnect events manually raised by the RAISE_EVENT macro. When defined, this token disables + * the library's auto-detection of the connection state by the aformentioned suspension and wake up events. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DirectorySummaries.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DirectorySummaries.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1abf3d49 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DirectorySummaries.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \dir Common + * \brief Common library header files. + * + * This folder contains header files which are common to all parts of the LUFA library. They may be used freely in + * user applications. + * + * \dir MemoryAllocator + * \brief Auto-defragmenting dynamic memory allocation library. + * + * This folder contains a simple handle-based dynamic memory allocation library, capable of handing out memory in + * block chunks. As new memory is allocated, the library will defragment the already allocated memory to ensure + * optimal memory usage. It is not used within the LUFA library, and is provided as a convenience for user applications. + * + * \dir Scheduler + * \brief Simple round-robbin scheduler. + * + * This folder contains the simple LUFA round-robbin scheduler, provided as a convenience for user applications. It + * is very simple in design, and is intended to make code easier to read, rather than providing a complete RTOS kernel. + * + * \dir Drivers + * \brief Library hardware and software drivers. + * + * This folder contains all the library hardware and software drivers for each supported board and USB AVR + * microcontroller model. + * + * \dir Drivers/Misc + * \brief Miscellaneous driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for aspects other than the USB interface, board hardware or AVR peripherals. + * + * \dir Drivers/AT90USBXXX + * \brief USB AVR peripheral driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible with + * all USB AVR models. + * + * \dir Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67 + * \brief AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 AVR model peripheral driver files. Its original name is due to legacy + * reasons. + * + * This folder contains drivers for several of the AVR internal peripherals such as the USART, compatible only with + * the AT90USBXXX6, AT90USBXXX7 and ATMEGAXXU4 USB AVR models, such as the AT90USB1287. Its contents should not be + * included by the user application - the dispatch header file located in the parent AT90USBXXX directory should be used + * instead. + * + * \dir Drivers/USB + * \brief USB controller peripheral driver files. + * + * This folder contains the main header files required to implement the USB interface in the USB supporting AVR models. + * The header files contained directly in this folder should be included in the user application in order to gain USB + * functionality, and the appropriate C source files in the LowLevel and HighLevel driver folders added to the compile + * and link stages. + * + * \dir Drivers/USB/LowLevel + * \brief Low level USB driver files. + * + * This folder contains low level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers. + * + * \dir Drivers/USB/HighLevel + * \brief High level USB driver files. + * + * This folder contains high level USB driver source files required to implement USB functionality on the USB AVR microcontrollers. + * + * \dir Drivers/USB/Class + * \brief USB Class helper driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for implementing functionality of standardized USB classes. These are not used directly by the library, + * but provide a standard and library-maintained way of implementing functionality from some of the defined USB classes without extensive + * development effort. Is is recommended that these drivers be used where possible to reduce maintenance of user applications. + * + * \dir Drivers/Board + * \brief Board hardware driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for interfacing with the physical hardware on supported commercial boards, primarily from + * the Atmel corporation. Header files in this folder should be included in user applications requring the functionality of + * hardware placed on supported boards. + * + * \dir Drivers/Board/USBKEY + * \brief USBKEY board hardware driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel USBKEY demonstration board. The header files in this folder should + * not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory + * should be included instead. + * + * \dir Drivers/Board/STK526 + * \brief STK526 board hardware driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK526 development board. The header files in this folder should + * not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory + * should be included instead. + * + * \dir Drivers/Board/STK525 + * \brief STK525 board hardware driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel STK525 development board. The header files in this folder should + * not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in the parent Board directory + * should be included instead. + * + * \dir Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK + * \brief RZUSBSTICK board hardware driver files. + * + * This folder contains drivers for hardware on the Atmel RZUSBSTICK board, as used in the Atmel "Raven" wireless kits. The header + * files in this folder should not be included directly in user applications; the similarly named dispatch header files located in + * the parent Board directory should be included instead. + * + * \dir DriverStubs + * \brief Driver stub header files for custom boards, to allow the LUFA board drivers to operate. + * + * This contains stub files for the LUFA board drivers. If the LUFA board drivers are used with board hardare other than those + * directly supported by the library, the BOARD parameter of the application's makefile can be set to "USER", and these stub files + * copied to the "/Board/" directory of the application's folder. When fleshed out with working driver code for the custom board, + * the corresponding LUFA board APIs will work correctly with the non-standard board hardware. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08685d10 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 090209 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bef94eb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Dataflash.h @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board + layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If + the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this + driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder + inside the application's folder. + + This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Dataflash + driver. +*/ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USER_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_USER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + // TODO: Add any required includes here + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK // TODO: Replace this with a mask of all the /CS pins of all dataflashes + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR // TODO: Replace with the DDR register name for the board's Dataflash ICs + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT // TODO: Replace with the PORT register name for the board's Dataflash ICs + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */ + #define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS // TODO: Replace with the number of dataflashes on the board, max 2 + + /** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK + + /** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP1 // TODO: Replace with mask to select the first Dataflash chip + + /** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP2 // TODO: Replace with mask to select the second Dataflash chip, if available + + /** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE // TODO: Replace with the page size for the Dataflash ICs + + /** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGES // TODO: Replace with the total number of pages inside one of the Dataflash ICs + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..744828d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board + layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If + the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this + driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder + inside the application's folder. + + This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA HWB (Hardware + Button, a physical button on most Atmel USB boards) driver. This could + alternately be driven from any button connected to the USB AVR. +*/ + +#ifndef __HWB_USER_H__ +#define __HWB_USER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + // TODO: Add any required includes here + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void HWB_Init(void) + { + // TODO: Initialize the appropriate port pin as an input here, with pullup + } + + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) + { + // TODO: Return current button status here, debounced if required + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..415976a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board + layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If + the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this + driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder + inside the application's folder. + + This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA Joystick + driver, a small surface mount four-way (plus button) digital joystick + on most USB AVR boards. +*/ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USER_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_USER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + // TODO: Add any required includes here + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick left position here + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick right position here + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick up position here + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick down position here + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS // TODO: Add mask to indicate joystick pressed position here + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + // TODO: Initialize joystick port pins as inputs with pullups + }; + + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + // TODO: Return current joystick position data which can be obtained by masking against the JOY_* macros + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..993481d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/DriverStubs/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + This is a stub driver header file, for implementing custom board + layout hardware with compatible LUFA board specific drivers. If + the library is configured to use the BOARD_USER board mode, this + driver file should be completed and copied into the "/Board/" folder + inside the application's folder. + + This stub is for the board-specific component of the LUFA LEDs driver, + for the LEDs (up to four) mounted on most USB AVR boards. +*/ + +#ifndef __LEDS_USER_H__ +#define __LEDS_USER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + // TODO: Add any required includes here + +/* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 // TODO: Add mask for first board LED here + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 // TODO: Add mask for second board LED here + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 // TODO: Add mask for third board LED here + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 // TODO: Add mask for fourth board LED here + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + // TODO: Add code to initialize LED port pins as outputs here + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + // TODO: Add code to turn on LEDs given in the LedMask mask here, leave others as-is + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + // TODO: Add code to turn off LEDs given in the LedMask mask here, leave others as-is + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + // TODO: Add code to turn on only LEDs given in the LedMask mask here, all others off + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + // TODO: Add code to set the Leds in the given LedMask to the status given in ActiveMask here + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + // TODO: Add code to return the current LEDs status' here which can be masked against LED_LED* macros + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..341b4e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file is the master dispatch header file for the device-specific ADC driver, for AVRs containing an ADC. + * + * User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct ADC driver header file for the + * currently selected AVR model. + */ + +#ifndef __ADC_H__ +#define __ADC_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H + #define INCLUDE_FROM_CHIP_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)) + #include "AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h" + #else + #error "ADC is not available for the currently selected AVR model." + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58027709 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/AT90USBXXX67/ADC.h @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * ADC driver for the AT90USB1287, AT90USB1286, AT90USB647, AT90USB646, ATMEGA16U4 and ATMEGA32U4 AVRs. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the ADC driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h. + */ + +#ifndef __ADC_AT90USBXXX67_H__ +#define __ADC_AT90USBXXX67_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_ADC_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/ADC.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Initializes the ADC, ready for conversions. This must be called before any other ADC operations. + * The "mode" parameter should be a mask comprised of a conversion mode (free running or single) and + * prescaler masks. + */ + #define ADC_Init(mode) MACROS{ ADCSRA = ((1 << ADEN) | mode); }MACROE + + /** Turns off the ADC. If this is called, any further ADC operations will require a call to the + * ADC_Init() macro before the ADC can be used again. + */ + #define ADC_Off() MACROS{ ADCSRA = 0; }MACROE + + /** Indicates if the ADC is enabled. This macro will return boolean true if the ADC subsystem is + * currently enabled, or false otherwise. + */ + #define ADC_GetStatus() ((ADCSRA & (1 << ADEN)) ? true : false) + + /** Indicates if the current ADC conversion is completed, or still in progress. This returns boolean + * false if the reading is still taking place, or true if the conversion is complete and ready to be + * read out with ADC_GetResult(). + */ + #define ADC_IsReadingComplete() (!(ADCSRA & (1 << ADSC))) + + /** Returns the result of the last conversion, as a 16-bit wide integer. */ + #define ADC_GetResult() ADC + + /** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AREF pin for the ADC reference. */ + #define ADC_REFERENCE_AREF 0 + + /** Reference mask, for using the voltage present at the AVR's AVCC pin for the ADC reference. */ + #define ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC (1 << REFS0) + + /** Reference mask, for using the internally generated 2.56V reference voltage as the ADC reference. */ + #define ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV ((1 << REFS1)| (1 << REFS0)) + + /** Left-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the upper 8 bits of the value returned by the + * ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 most significant bits of the result. */ + #define ADC_LEFT_ADJUSTED (1 << ADLAR) + + /** Right-adjusts the 10-bit ADC result, so that the lower 8 bits of the value returned by the + * ADC_GetResult() macro contain the 8 least significant bits of the result. */ + #define ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED (0 << ADLAR) + + /** Sets the ADC mode to free running, so that conversions take place continuously as fast as the ADC + * is capable of at the given input clock speed. */ + #define ADC_FREE_RUNNING (1 << ADATE) + + /** Sets the ADC mode to single conversion, so that only a single conversion will take place before + * the ADC returns to idle. */ + #define ADC_SINGLE_CONVERSION (0 << ADATE) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 2 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_2 (1 << ADPS0) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 4 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_4 (1 << ADPS1) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 8 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_8 ((1 << ADPS0) | (1 << ADPS1)) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 16 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_16 (1 << ADPS2) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 32 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_32 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS0)) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 64 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_64 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1)) + + /** Sets the ADC input clock to prescale by a factor of 128 the AVR's system clock. */ + #define ADC_PRESCALE_128 ((1 << ADPS2) | (1 << ADPS1) | (1 << ADPS0)) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Configures the given ADC channel, ready for ADC conversions. This function sets the + * associated port pin as an input and disables the digital portion of the I/O to reduce + * power consumption. + * + * \param Channel ADC channel number to set up for conversions + */ + static inline void ADC_SetupChannel(const uint8_t Channel) + { + DDRD &= ~(1 << Channel); + DIDR0 |= (1 << Channel); + } + + /** Starts the reading of the given channel, but does not wait until the conversion has completed. + * Once executed, the conversion status can be determined via the ADC_IsReadingComplete() macro and + * the result read via the ADC_GetResult() macro. + * + * \param MUXMask Mask comprising of an ADC channel number, reference mask and adjustment mask + */ + static inline void ADC_StartReading(const uint8_t MUXMask) + { + ADMUX = MUXMask; + + ADCSRA |= (1 << ADSC); + } + + /** Performs a complete single reading from channel, including a polling spinloop to wait for the + * conversion to complete, and the returning of the converted value. + * + * \param MUXMask Mask comprising of an ADC channel number, reference mask and adjustment mask + */ + static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint8_t MUXMask) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t ADC_GetChannelReading(const uint8_t MUXMask) + { + ADC_StartReading(MUXMask); + + while (!(ADC_IsReadingComplete())); + + return ADC_GetResult(); + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b333a80 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/SPI.h @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Hardware SPI subsystem driver for the supported USB AVRs models. + */ + +#ifndef __SPI_H__ +#define __SPI_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED (1 << 7) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 2. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 4. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4 0 + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 8. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8 (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR0)) + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 16. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16 (1 << SPR0) + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 32. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32 (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1)) + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 64. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64 (SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED | (1 << SPR1) | (1 < SPR0)) + + /** SPI prescaler mask for SPI_Init(). Divides the system clock by a factor of 128. */ + #define SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 ((1 << SPR1) | (1 < SPR0)) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes the SPI subsystem, ready for transfers. Must be called before calling any other + * SPI routines. + * + * \param PrescalerMask Prescaler mask to set the SPI clock speed + * \param Master If true, sets the SPI system to use master mode, slave if false + */ + static inline void SPI_Init(const uint8_t PrescalerMask, const bool Master) + { + DDRB |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2)); + PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3)); + + SPCR = ((1 << SPE) | (Master << MSTR) | (1 << CPOL) | (1 << CPHA) | + (PrescalerMask & ~SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED)); + + if (PrescalerMask & SPI_USE_DOUBLESPEED) + SPSR = (1 << SPI2X); + } + + /** Sends and receives a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. + * + * \param Byte Byte to send through the SPI interface + * + * \return Response byte from the attached SPI device + */ + static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline uint8_t SPI_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + SPDR = Byte; + while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF))); + return SPDR; + } + + /** Sends a byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response + * byte sent to from the attached SPI device is ignored. + * + * \param Byte Byte to send through the SPI interface + */ + static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline void SPI_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + SPDR = Byte; + while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF))); + } + + /** Sends a dummy byte through the SPI interface, blocking until the transfer is complete. The response + * byte from the attached SPI device is returned. + * + * \return The response byte from the attached SPI device + */ + static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t SPI_ReceiveByte(void) + { + SPDR = 0x00; + while (!(SPSR & (1 << SPIF))); + return SPDR; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1c74492 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "Serial.h" + +void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed) +{ + UCSR1A = ((DoubleSpeed) ? (1 << U2X1) : 0); + UCSR1B = ((1 << RXEN1) | (1 << TXEN1)); + UCSR1C = ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10)); + + DDRD |= (1 << 3); + PORTD |= (1 << 2); + + UBRR1 = SERIAL_UBBRVAL(BaudRate); +} + +void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr) +{ + uint8_t CurrByte; + + while ((CurrByte = pgm_read_byte(FlashStringPtr)) != 0x00) + { + Serial_TxByte(CurrByte); + FlashStringPtr++; + } +} + +void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr) +{ + uint8_t CurrByte; + + while ((CurrByte = *StringPtr) != 0x00) + { + Serial_TxByte(CurrByte); + StringPtr++; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bbf3044f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.h @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. + */ + +#ifndef __SERIAL_H__ +#define __SERIAL_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../Misc/TerminalCodes.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates whether a character has been received through the USART - boolean false if no character + * has been received, or non-zero if a character is waiting to be read from the reception buffer. + */ + #define Serial_IsCharReceived() ((UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) ? true : false) + + /** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is + * not set. + */ + #define SERIAL_UBBRVAL(baud) (((F_CPU / 16) / baud) - 1) + + /** Macro for calculating the baud value from a given baud rate when the U2X (double speed) bit is + * set. + */ + #define SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(baud) (((F_CPU / 8) / baud) - 1) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Initializes the USART, ready for serial data transmission and reception. + * + * \param BaudRate Baud rate to configure the USART to + * \param DoubleSpeed Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate + */ + void Serial_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed); + + /** Transmits a given string located in program space (FLASH) through the USART. + * + * \param FlashStringPtr Pointer to a string located in program space + */ + void Serial_TxString_P(const char *FlashStringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Transmits a given string located in SRAM memory through the USART. + * + * \param StringPtr Pointer to a string located in SRAM space + */ + void Serial_TxString(const char *StringPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Transmits a given byte through the USART. + * + * \param DataByte Byte to transmit through the USART + */ + static inline void Serial_TxByte(const char DataByte) + { + while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1))); + UDR1 = DataByte; + } + + /** Receives a byte from the USART. + * + * \return Byte received from the USART + */ + static inline char Serial_RxByte(void) + { + while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1))); + return UDR1; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d986af42 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "Serial_Stream.h" + +FILE USARTStream = FDEV_SETUP_STREAM(SerialStream_TxByte, SerialStream_RxByte, _FDEV_SETUP_RW); + +int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream) +{ + Serial_TxByte(DataByte); + + return 0; +} + +int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream) +{ + return Serial_RxByte(); +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..adde5b95 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.h @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Serial stream driver for the USART subsystem on supported USB AVRs. This makes use of the functions in the + * regular USART driver, but allows the avr-libc standard stream functions (printf, puts, etc.) to work with the + * USART. + **/ + +#ifndef __SERIAL_STREAM_H__ +#define __SERIAL_STREAM_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "Serial.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* External Variables: */ + extern FILE USARTStream; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + int SerialStream_TxByte(char DataByte, FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + int SerialStream_RxByte(FILE *Stream) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes the serial stream (and regular USART driver) so that both the stream and regular + * USART driver functions can be used. Must be called before any stream or regular USART functions. + * + * \param BaudRate Baud rate to configure the USART to + * \param DoubleSpeed Enables double speed mode when set, halving the sample time to double the baud rate + */ + static inline void SerialStream_Init(const uint32_t BaudRate, const bool DoubleSpeed) + { + Serial_Init(BaudRate, DoubleSpeed); + + stdout = &USARTStream; + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edf4f8c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the HWB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __HWB_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__ +#define __HWB_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void HWB_Init(void) + { + DDRD &= ~(1 << 7); + PORTD |= (1 << 7); + } + + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) + { + return (!(PIND & (1 << 7))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..626d8cec --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the ATAVRUSBRF01. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__ +#define __LEDS_ATAVRUSBRF01_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + #define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + #define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 0) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 1) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD = (PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | (LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = (PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_ALL_LEDS)) + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08deb50d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific dataflash driver, for boards containing + * dataflash ICs for external non-volatile storage. + * + * User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct dataflash driver header file for + * the currently selected board. + * + * If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Dataflash.h file in the user project + * directory. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H + #define INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../AT90USBXXX/SPI.h" + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + #if !defined(BOARD) + #error BOARD must be set in makefile to a value specified in BoardTypes.h. + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) + #include "USBKEY/Dataflash.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) + #include "STK525/Dataflash.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) + #include "STK526/Dataflash.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER) + #include "Board/Dataflash.h" + #else + #error The selected board does not contain a dataflash IC. + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Returns the mask of the currently selected Dataflash chip, either DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP or a + * DATAFLASH_CHIPn mask (where n is the chip number). + */ + #define Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() (DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT & DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) + + /** Selects the dataflash chip given as a chip mask, in the form of DATAFLASH_CHIPn (where n + * is the chip number). + */ + #define Dataflash_SelectChip(mask) MACROS{ DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT = ((DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT \ + & ~DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK) | mask); }MACROE + + /** Deselects the current dataflash chip, so that no dataflash is selected. */ + #define Dataflash_DeselectChip() Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes the dataflash driver (including the SPI driver) so that commands and data may be + * sent to an attached dataflash IC. + * + * \param PrescalerMask SPI prescaler mask, see SPI.h documentation + */ + static inline void Dataflash_Init(const uint8_t PrescalerMask) + { + DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK; + DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT |= DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK; + + SPI_Init(PrescalerMask, true); + } + + /** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns a byte from the dataflash. + * + * \param Byte of data to send to the dataflash + * + * \return Last response byte from the dataflash + */ + static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline uint8_t Dataflash_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + return SPI_TransferByte(Byte); + } + + /** Sends a byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and ignores the next byte from the dataflash. + * + * \param Byte of data to send to the dataflash + */ + static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline void Dataflash_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + SPI_SendByte(Byte); + } + + /** Sends a dummy byte to the currently selected dataflash IC, and returns the next byte from the dataflash. + * + * \return Last response byte from the dataflash + */ + static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Dataflash_ReceiveByte(void) + { + return SPI_ReceiveByte(); + } + + /** Toggles the select line of the currently selected dataflash IC, so that it is ready to receive + * a new command. + */ + static inline void Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(void) + { + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + uint8_t SelectedChipMask = Dataflash_GetSelectedChip(); + + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + Dataflash_SelectChip(SelectedChipMask); + #else + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + #endif + } + + /** Spinloops while the currently selected dataflash is busy executing a command, such as a main + * memory page program or main memory to buffer transfer. + */ + static inline void Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(void) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + while (!(Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_READY)); + } + + /** Selects a dataflash IC from the given page number, which should range from 0 to + * ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). For boards containing only one + * dataflash IC, this will select DATAFLASH_CHIP1. If the given page number is outside the total number + * of pages contained in the boards dataflash ICs, all dataflash ICs are deselected. + * + * \param PageAddress Address of the page to manipulate, ranging from + * ((DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) - 1). + */ + static inline void Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(const uint16_t PageAddress) + { + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + if (PageAddress >= (DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + return; + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + if (PageAddress & 0x01) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + else + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + #else + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + #endif + } + + /** Sends a set of page and buffer address bytes to the currently selected dataflash IC, for use with + * dataflash commands which require a complete 24-byte address. + * + * \param PageAddress Page address within the selected dataflash IC + * \param BufferByte Address within the dataflash's buffer + */ + static inline void Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(uint16_t PageAddress, const uint16_t BufferByte) + { + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + PageAddress >>= 1; + #endif + + Dataflash_SendByte(PageAddress >> 5); + Dataflash_SendByte((PageAddress << 3) | (BufferByte >> 8)); + Dataflash_SendByte(BufferByte); + } + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43aac9b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific HWB driver, for boards containing a + * physical pushbutton connected to the AVR's HWB IO pin. + * + * User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct HWB driver header file for the + * currently selected board. + * + * If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/HWB.h file in the user project + * directory. + */ + +#ifndef __HWB_H__ +#define __HWB_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H + #define INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + #if !defined(BOARD) + #error BOARD must be set in makefile to a value specified in BoardTypes.h. + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) + #include "USBKEY/HWB.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) + #include "STK525/HWB.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) + #include "STK526/HWB.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01) + #include "ATAVRUSBRF01/HWB.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER) + #include "Board/HWB.h" + #else + #error The selected board does not contain a HWB. + #endif + + /* Psudo-Functions for Doxygen: */ + #if defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Initializes the HWB driver, so that the current button position can be read. This sets the appropriate + * I/O pin to an input with pull-up enabled. + * + * This must be called before any HWB functions are used. + */ + static inline void HWB_Init(void); + + /** Returns the current position of the HWB button on the board. + * + * \return Boolean true if the button is currently pressed, false otherwise + */ + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f57e62c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific Joystick driver, for boards containing a + * 5-way joystick. + * + * User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct joystick driver header file for the + * currently selected board. + * + * If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/Joystick.h file in the user project + * directory. + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H + #define INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + #if !defined(BOARD) + #error BOARD must be set in makefile to a value specified in BoardTypes.h. + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) + #include "USBKEY/Joystick.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) + #include "STK525/Joystick.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) + #include "STK526/Joystick.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER) + #include "Board/Joystick.h" + #else + #error The selected board does not contain a joystick. + #endif + + /* Psudo-Functions for Doxygen: */ + #if defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Initializes the joystick driver so that the joystick position can be read. This sets the appropriate + * I/O pins to inputs with their pull-ups enabled. + */ + static inline void Joystick_Init(void); + + /** Returns the current status of the joystick, as a mask indicating the direction the joystick is + * currently facing in (multiple bits can be set). + * + * \return Mask indicating the joystick direction - see corresponding board specific Joystick.h file + * for direction masks + */ + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cda15a42 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * This file is the master dispatch header file for the board-specific LED driver, for boards containing user + * controllable LEDs. + * + * User code should include this file, which will in turn include the correct LED driver header file for the + * currently selected board. + * + * If the BOARD value is set to BOARD_USER, this will include the /Board/LEDs.h file in the user project + * directory. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_H__ +#define __LEDS_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H + #define INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + #if !defined(BOARD) + #error BOARD must be set in makefile to a value specified in BoardTypes.h. + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USBKEY) + #include "USBKEY/LEDs.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK525) + #include "STK525/LEDs.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_STK526) + #include "STK526/LEDs.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_RZUSBSTICK) + #include "RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_ATAVRUSBRF01) + #include "ATAVRUSBRF01/LEDs.h" + #elif (BOARD == BOARD_USER) + #include "Board/LEDs.h" + #endif + + /* Psudo-Functions for Doxygen: */ + #if defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Initializes the board LED driver so that the LEDs can be controlled. This sets the appropriate port + * I/O pins as outputs, and sets the LEDs to default to off. + */ + static inline void LEDs_Init(void); + + /** Turns on the LEDs specified in the given LED mask. + * + * \param LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file) + */ + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask); + + /** Turns off the LEDs specified in the given LED mask. + * + * \param LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file) + */ + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask); + + /** Turns off all LEDs not specified in the given LED mask, and turns on all the LEDs in the given LED + * mask. + * + * \param LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file) + */ + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask); + + /** Turns off all LEDs in the LED mask that are not set in the active mask, and turns on all the LEDs + * specified in both the LED and active masks. + * + * \param LEDMask Mask of the board LEDs to manipulate (see board-specific LEDs.h driver file) + * \param ActiveMask Mask of whether the LEDs in the LED mask should be turned on or off + */ + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask); + + /** Returns the status of all the board LEDs; set LED masks in the return value indicate that the + * corresponding LED is on. + * + * \return Mask of the board LEDs which are currently turned on + */ + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38cbed0c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/RZUSBSTICK/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the RZUSBSTICK. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__ +#define __LEDS_RZUSBSTICK_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define LEDS_PORTD_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + #define LEDS_PORTE_LEDS (LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + #define LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT 4 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 7) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 5) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 ((1 << 6) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 ((1 << 7) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_PORTD_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_LED1; + PORTD |= LEDS_LED2; + + DDRE |= (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT); + PORTE |= (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT); + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1); + PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2); + PORTE &= ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT); + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD &= ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1); + PORTD |= (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2); + PORTE |= ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT); + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask) + { + PORTD = (((PORTD & ~LEDS_LED1) | (LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) | + ((PORTD | LEDS_LED2) & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED2))); + PORTE = ((PORTE | (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) & + ~((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LEDMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = (((PORTD & ~(LEDMask & LEDS_LED1)) | (ActiveMask & LEDS_LED1)) | + ((PORTD | (LEDMask & LEDS_LED2)) & ~(ActiveMask & LEDS_LED2))); + PORTE = ((PORTE | ((LEDMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) & + ~((ActiveMask & LEDS_PORTE_LEDS) << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)); + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (((PORTD & LEDS_LED1) | (~PORTD & LEDS_LED2)) | + ((~PORTE & (LEDS_PORTE_LEDS << LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)) >> LEDS_PORTE_MASK_SHIFT)); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac29967e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/AT45DB321C.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB321C as mounted on the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7) + #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6) + #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1) + + #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F + + #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2 + #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0xE8 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD4 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD6 + + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85 + + #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81 + #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50 + + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0xCF}) + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0xCF + + #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f30f97b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Dataflash.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_STK525_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "AT45DB321C.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK (1 << 4) + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR DDRB + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT PORTB + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */ + #define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS 1 + + /** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK + + /** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP1 0 + + /** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGES 8192 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0ff72de --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the HWB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __HWB_STK525_H__ +#define __HWB_STK525_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void HWB_Init(void) + { + DDRE &= ~(1 << 2); + PORTE |= (1 << 2); + } + + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) + { + return (!(PINE & (1 << 2))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58aed4f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific joystick driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h. + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_STK525_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define JOY_BMASK ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7)) + #define JOY_EMASK ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5)) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT (1 << 6) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT ((1 << 4) >> 1) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN ((1 << 5) >> 1) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS (1 << 5) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + DDRB &= ~(JOY_BMASK); + DDRE &= ~(JOY_EMASK); + + PORTB |= JOY_BMASK; + PORTE |= JOY_EMASK; + }; + + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1)); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13f626c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK525/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_STK525_H__ +#define __LEDS_STK525_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 5) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1 << 7) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD |= LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd38ed1d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/AT45DB642D.h @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the STK526. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7) + #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6) + #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1) + #define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON (1 << 0) + + #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F + + #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7 + #define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN 0xB9 + #define DF_CMD_WAKEUP 0xAB + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2 + #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0x03 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD1 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD3 + + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85 + + #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81 + #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50 + #define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE 0x7C + + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1 0xC7 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2 0x94 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3 0x80 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..177fefaa --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Dataflash.h @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_STK526_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "AT45DB642D.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK (1 << 2) + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR DDRC + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT PORTC + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */ + #define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS 1 + + /** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK + + /** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP1 0 + + /** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash IC. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE 1024 + + /** Total number of pages inside the board's dataflash IC. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGES 8192 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3bd2f995 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the STK526. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the HWB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __HWB_STK526_H__ +#define __HWB_STK526_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void HWB_Init(void) + { + DDRD &= ~(1 << 7); + PORTD |= (1 << 7); + } + + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) + { + return (!(PIND & (1 << 7))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5cd2e47 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific joystick driver header for the STK526. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h. + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_STK526_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define JOY_BMASK ((1 << 0) | (1 << 4) | (1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7)) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT (1 << 6) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS (1 << 0) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + DDRB &= ~JOY_BMASK; + + PORTB |= JOY_BMASK; + }; + + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + return ((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc88a573 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/STK526/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the STK526. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_STK526_H__ +#define __LEDS_STK526_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 1) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 0) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1 << 5) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1 << 4) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD |= LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f908ac96 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.c @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "Temperature.h" + +static const uint16_t PROGMEM Temperature_Lookup[] = { + 0x3B4, 0x3B0, 0x3AB, 0x3A6, 0x3A0, 0x39A, 0x394, 0x38E, 0x388, 0x381, 0x37A, 0x373, + 0x36B, 0x363, 0x35B, 0x353, 0x34A, 0x341, 0x338, 0x32F, 0x325, 0x31B, 0x311, 0x307, + 0x2FC, 0x2F1, 0x2E6, 0x2DB, 0x2D0, 0x2C4, 0x2B8, 0x2AC, 0x2A0, 0x294, 0x288, 0x27C, + 0x26F, 0x263, 0x256, 0x24A, 0x23D, 0x231, 0x225, 0x218, 0x20C, 0x200, 0x1F3, 0x1E7, + 0x1DB, 0x1CF, 0x1C4, 0x1B8, 0x1AC, 0x1A1, 0x196, 0x18B, 0x180, 0x176, 0x16B, 0x161, + 0x157, 0x14D, 0x144, 0x13A, 0x131, 0x128, 0x11F, 0x117, 0x10F, 0x106, 0x0FE, 0x0F7, + 0x0EF, 0x0E8, 0x0E1, 0x0DA, 0x0D3, 0x0CD, 0x0C7, 0x0C0, 0x0BA, 0x0B5, 0x0AF, 0x0AA, + 0x0A4, 0x09F, 0x09A, 0x096, 0x091, 0x08C, 0x088, 0x084, 0x080, 0x07C, 0x078, 0x074, + 0x071, 0x06D, 0x06A, 0x067, 0x064, 0x061, 0x05E, 0x05B, 0x058, 0x055, 0x053, 0x050, + 0x04E, 0x04C, 0x049, 0x047, 0x045, 0x043, 0x041, 0x03F, 0x03D, 0x03C, 0x03A, 0x038 + }; + +int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) +{ + uint16_t Temp_ADC = ADC_GetChannelReading(ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL); + + if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[0])) + return TEMP_MIN_TEMP; + + for (uint16_t Index = 0; Index < TEMP_TABLE_SIZE; Index++) + { + if (Temp_ADC > pgm_read_word(&Temperature_Lookup[Index])) + return (Index + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET); + } + + return TEMP_MAX_TEMP; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c205093a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Temperature sensor board driver for the USB boards which contain a temperature sensor. + */ + +#ifndef __TEMPERATURE_H__ +#define __TEMPERATURE_H__ + + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define INCLUDE_FROM_BOARD_DRIVER + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../AT90USBXXX/ADC.h" + #include "../../Common/Common.h" + + #if !defined(BOARD) + #error #error BOARD must be set in makefile to a value specified in BoardTypes.h. + #elif (BOARD != BOARD_USBKEY) && (BOARD != BOARD_STK525) && (BOARD != BOARD_STK526) + #error The selected board does not contain a temperature sensor. + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** ADC channel number for the temperature sensor. */ + #define TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL 0 + + /** Minimum returnable temperature from the Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */ + #define TEMP_MIN_TEMP TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET + + /** Maximum returnable temperature from the Temperature_GetTemperature() function. */ + #define TEMP_MAX_TEMP ((TEMP_TABLE_SIZE - 1) + TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET) + + /** Initializes the temperature sensor driver, including setting up the appropriate ADC channel. + * This must be called before any other temperature sensor routines. + * + * The ADC itself (not the ADC channel) must be configured seperately before calling the temperature + * sensor functions. + */ + #define Temperature_Init() ADC_SetupChannel(TEMP_ADC_CHANNEL); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Performs a complete ADC on the temperature sensor channel, and converts the result into a + * valid temperature between TEMP_MIN_TEMP and TEMP_MAX_TEMP in degrees Celcius. + * + * \return Signed temperature in degrees Celcius + */ + int8_t Temperature_GetTemperature(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define TEMP_TABLE_SIZE (sizeof(Temperature_Lookup) / sizeof(Temperature_Lookup[0])) + #define TEMP_TABLE_OFFSET -21 + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..197be1c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/AT45DB642D.h @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific Dataflash commands header for the AT45DB642D as mounted on the USBKEY. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_CMDS_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #define DF_STATUS_READY (1 << 7) + #define DF_STATUS_COMPMISMATCH (1 << 6) + #define DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON (1 << 1) + #define DF_STATUS_BINARYPAGESIZE_ON (1 << 0) + + #define DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL 0x1F + + #define DF_CMD_GETSTATUS 0xD7 + #define DF_CMD_POWERDOWN 0xB9 + #define DF_CMD_WAKEUP 0xAB + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1 0x53 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 0x55 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1COMP 0x60 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2COMP 0x61 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF1 0x58 + #define DF_CMD_AUTOREWRITEBUFF2 0x59 + + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD 0xD2 + #define DF_CMD_CONTARRAYREAD_LF 0x03 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1READ_LF 0xD1 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2READ_LF 0xD3 + + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE 0x84 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE 0x87 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x83 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE 0x86 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEM 0x88 + #define DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEM 0x89 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF1 0x82 + #define DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGETHROUGHBUFF2 0x85 + + #define DF_CMD_PAGEERASE 0x81 + #define DF_CMD_BLOCKERASE 0x50 + #define DF_CMD_SECTORERASE 0x7C + + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE ((char[]){0xC7, 0x94, 0x80, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE1 0xC7 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE2 0x94 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE3 0x80 + #define DF_CMD_CHIPERASE_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF ((char[]){0x3D, 0x2A, 0x7F, 0x9A}) + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE1 0x3D + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE2 0x2A + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE3 0x7F + #define DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF_BYTE4 0x9A + + #define DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO 0x9F + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..848ae32d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Dataflash.h @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the STK525. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the dataflash driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h. + */ + +#ifndef __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__ +#define __DATAFLASH_USBKEY_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include "AT45DB642D.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASH_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK ((1 << 1) | (1 << 0)) + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_DDR DDRE + #define DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_PORT PORTE + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Constant indicating the total number of dataflash ICs mounted on the selected board. */ + #define DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS 2 + + /** Mask for no dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_NO_CHIP DATAFLASH_CHIPCS_MASK + + /** Mask for the first dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP1 (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the second dataflash chip selected. */ + #define DATAFLASH_CHIP2 (1 << 0) + + /** Internal main memory page size for the board's dataflash ICs. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE 1024 + + /** Total number of pages inside each of the board's dataflash ICs. */ + #define DATAFLASH_PAGES 8192 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/HWB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/HWB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..750368b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/HWB.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific HWB driver header for the USBKEY. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the HWB driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h. + */ + +#ifndef __HWB_USBKEY_H__ +#define __HWB_USBKEY_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HWB_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/HWB.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void HWB_Init(void) + { + DDRE &= ~(1 << 2); + PORTE |= (1 << 2); + } + + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline bool HWB_GetStatus(void) + { + return (!(PINE & (1 << 2))); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c2d72ae --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/Joystick.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific joystick driver header for the USBKEY. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the joystick driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h. + */ + +#ifndef __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__ +#define __JOYSTICK_USBKEY_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_JOYSTICK_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h instead. + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define JOY_BMASK ((1 << 5) | (1 << 6) | (1 << 7)) + #define JOY_EMASK ((1 << 4) | (1 << 5)) + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the left direction. */ + #define JOY_LEFT (1 << 6) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the right direction. */ + #define JOY_RIGHT ((1 << 4) >> 1) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the upward direction. */ + #define JOY_UP (1 << 7) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed in the downward direction. */ + #define JOY_DOWN ((1 << 5) >> 1) + + /** Mask for the joystick being pushed inward. */ + #define JOY_PRESS (1 << 5) + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void Joystick_Init(void) + { + DDRB &= ~(JOY_BMASK); + DDRE &= ~(JOY_EMASK); + + PORTB |= JOY_BMASK; + PORTE |= JOY_EMASK; + }; + + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Joystick_GetStatus(void) + { + return (((uint8_t)~PINB & JOY_BMASK) | (((uint8_t)~PINE & JOY_EMASK) >> 1)); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07a2b750 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Board/USBKEY/LEDs.h @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Board specific LED driver header for the USBKEY. + * + * \note This file should not be included directly. It is automatically included as needed by the LEDs driver + * dispatch header located in LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h. + */ + +#ifndef __LEDS_USBKEY_H__ +#define __LEDS_USBKEY_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if !defined(INCLUDE_FROM_LEDS_H) + #error Do not include this file directly. Include LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDS.h instead. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the first LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED1 (1 << 4) + + /** LED mask for the second LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED2 (1 << 5) + + /** LED mask for the third LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED3 (1 << 7) + + /** LED mask for the fourth LED on the board. */ + #define LEDS_LED4 (1 << 6) + + /** LED mask for all the LEDs on the board. */ + #define LEDS_ALL_LEDS (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the none of the board LEDs */ + #define LEDS_NO_LEDS 0 + + /* Inline Functions: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + static inline void LEDs_Init(void) + { + DDRD |= LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + PORTD &= ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD |= LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD &= ~LedMask; + } + + static inline void LEDs_SetAllLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LEDS_ALL_LEDS) | LedMask); + } + + static inline void LEDs_ChangeLEDs(const uint8_t LedMask, const uint8_t ActiveMask) + { + PORTD = ((PORTD & ~LedMask) | ActiveMask); + } + + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t LEDs_GetLEDs(void) + { + return (PORTD & LEDS_ALL_LEDS); + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6e58708 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * ANSI terminal compatible escape sequences. These escape sequences are designed to be concatenated with existing + * strings to modify their display on a compatible terminal application. + * + * \note If desired, the macro DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES can be defined in the project makefile and passed to the GCC + * compiler via the -D switch to disable the terminal codes without modifying the source, for use with non + * compatible terminals (any terminal code then equate to empty strings). + * + * Example Usage: + * \code + * printf("Some String, " ESC_BOLD_ON " Some bold string"); + * \endcode + */ + +#ifndef __TERMINALCODES_H__ +#define __TERMINALCODES_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #if !defined(DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES) + /** Creates an ANSII escape sequence with the payload specified by "c". */ + #define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c) "\33[" c + #else + #define ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(c) + #endif + + /** Resets any escape sequence modifiers back to their defaults. */ + #define ESC_RESET ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("0m") + + /** Turns on bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in bold. */ + #define ESC_BOLD_ON ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("1m") + + /** Turns on italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in italics. */ + #define ESC_ITALICS_ON ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("3m") + + /** Turns on underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal underlined. */ + #define ESC_UNDERLINE_ON ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("4m") + + /** Turns on inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in inverted colours. */ + #define ESC_INVERSE_ON ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("7m") + + /** Turns on strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal with a line through the + * center. + */ + #define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_ON ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("9m") + + /** Turns off bold so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non bold. */ + #define ESC_BOLD_OFF ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("22m") + + /** Turns off italics so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non italics. */ + #define ESC_ITALICS_OFF ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("23m") + + /** Turns off underline so that any following text is printed to the terminal non underlined. */ + #define ESC_UNDERLINE_OFF ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("24m") + + /** Turns off inverse so that any following text is printed to the terminal in non inverted colours. */ + #define ESC_INVERSE_OFF ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("27m") + + /** Turns off strikethrough so that any following text is printed to the terminal without a line through + * the center. + */ + #define ESC_STRIKETHROUGH_OFF ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("29m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to black. */ + #define ESC_FG_BLACK ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("30m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to red. */ + #define ESC_FG_RED ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("31m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to green. */ + #define ESC_FG_GREEN ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("32m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to yellow. */ + #define ESC_FG_YELLOW ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("33m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to blue. */ + #define ESC_FG_BLUE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("34m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to magenta. */ + #define ESC_FG_MAGENTA ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("35m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to cyan. */ + #define ESC_FG_CYAN ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("36m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to white. */ + #define ESC_FG_WHITE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("37m") + + /** Sets the foreground (text) colour to the terminal's default. */ + #define ESC_FG_DEFAULT ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("39m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to black. */ + #define ESC_BG_BLACK ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("40m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to red. */ + #define ESC_BG_RED ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("41m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to green. */ + #define ESC_BG_GREEN ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("42m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to yellow. */ + #define ESC_BG_YELLOW ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("43m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to blue. */ + #define ESC_BG_BLUE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("44m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to magenta. */ + #define ESC_BG_MAGENTA ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("45m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to cyan. */ + #define ESC_BG_CYAN ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("46m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to white. */ + #define ESC_BG_WHITE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("47m") + + /** Sets the text background colour to the terminal's default. */ + #define ESC_BG_DEFAULT ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("49m") + + /** Sets the cursor position to the given line and column. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_POS(L, C) ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L ";" #C "H") + + /** Moves the cursor up the given number of lines. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_UP(L) ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "A") + + /** Moves the cursor down the given number of lines. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_DOWN(L) ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#L "B") + + /** Moves the cursor to the right the given number of columns. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_FORWARD(C) ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "C") + + /** Moves the cursor to the left the given number of columns. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_BACKWARD(C) ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE(#C "D") + + /** Saves the current cursor position so that it may be restored with ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("s") + + /** Restores the cursor position to the last position saved with ESC_CURSOR_POS_SAVE. */ + #define ESC_CURSOR_POS_RESTORE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("u") + + /** Erases the entire display, returning the cursor to the top left. */ + #define ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("2J") + + /** Erases the current line, returning the cursor to the far left. */ + #define ESC_ERASE_LINE ANSI_ESCAPE_SEQUENCE("K") + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a40705c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr, void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Configuration << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), + }; + + if (BufferPtr == NULL) + { + uint8_t ConfigHeader[sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t)]; + + ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ConfigHeader); + + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) + *ConfigSizePtr = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t).TotalConfigurationSize; + #else + *ConfigSizePtr = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigHeader, USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t).wTotalLength; + #endif + } + else + { + USB_HostRequest.wLength = *ConfigSizePtr; + + ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(BufferPtr); + } + + return ErrorCode; +} + +void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type) +{ + while (*BytesRem) + { + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc); + + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type) + return; + } +} + +void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t BeforeType) +{ + while (*BytesRem) + { + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc); + + if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == Type) + { + return; + } + else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(*CurrConfigLoc) == BeforeType) + { + *BytesRem = 0; + return; + } + } +} + +void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t AfterType) +{ + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, AfterType); + + if (*BytesRem) + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc, Type); +} + +uint8_t USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp_P(uint16_t* BytesRem, uint8_t** CurrConfigLoc, + uint8_t (* const ComparatorRoutine)(void*)) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + while (*BytesRem) + { + uint8_t** PrevDescLoc = CurrConfigLoc; + uint16_t PrevBytesRem = *BytesRem; + + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor(BytesRem, CurrConfigLoc); + + if ((ErrorCode = ComparatorRoutine(*CurrConfigLoc)) != Descriptor_Search_NotFound) + { + CurrConfigLoc = PrevDescLoc; + *BytesRem = PrevBytesRem; + + return ErrorCode; + } + } + + return Descriptor_Search_Comp_EndOfDescriptor; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1f8927f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Configuration descriptor parser API. This section of the library gives a friendly API which can be used in + * host applications to easily parse an attached device's configuration descriptor so that endpoint, interface + * and other descriptor data can be extracted and used as needed. + */ + +#ifndef __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__ +#define __CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h" + #include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into a pointer to the given + * descriptor type. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header + * USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t* ConfigHeaderPtr = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrDescriptor, + * USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t); + * + * // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the -> indirection operator + * \endcode + */ + #define DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) ((Type*)DescriptorPtr) + + /** Casts a pointer to a descriptor inside the configuration descriptor into the given descriptor + * type (as an actual struct instance rather than a pointer to a struct). + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * uint8_t* CurrDescriptor = &ConfigDescriptor[0]; // Pointing to the configuration header + * USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t ConfigHeader = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrDescriptor, + * USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t); + * + * // Can now access elements of the configuration header struct using the . operator + * \endcode + */ + #define DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, Type) (*DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(DescriptorPtr, Type)) + + /** Returns the descriptor's type, expressed as the 8-bit type value in the header of the descriptor. + * This value's meaning depends on the descriptor's placement in the descriptor, but standard type + * values can be accessed in the DescriptorTypes_t enum located in USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h. + */ + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr) DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Type + #else + #define DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(DescriptorPtr) DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).bDescriptorType + #endif + + /** Returns the descriptor's size, expressed as the 8-bit value indicating the number of bytes. */ + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr) DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size + #else + #define DESCRIPTOR_SIZE(DescriptorPtr) DESCRIPTOR_CAST(DescriptorPtr, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).bLength + #endif + + /** Creates a prototype for or begins a descriptor comparitor routine. Descriptor comparitor routines are + * small search routines which are passed a pointer to the current sub descriptor in the configuration + * descriptor, and which analyse the sub descriptor to determine whether or not it matches the routine's + * search parameters. Comparitor routines provide a powerful way to scan through the config descriptor + * for certain descriptors matching unique criteria. + * + * Comparitor routines are passed in a single pointer named CurrentDescriptor, and should return a value + * of a member of the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + #define DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(name) uint8_t DCOMP_##name (void* const CurrentDescriptor) + + /** Searches for the next descriptor in the given configuration descriptor using a premade comparator + * function. The routine updates the position and remaining configuration descriptor bytes values + * automatically. If a comparator routine fails a search, the descriptor pointer is retreated back + * so that the next descriptor search invocation will start from the descriptor which first caused the + * original search to fail. This behaviour allows for one comparator to be used immediately after another + * has failed, starting the second search from the descriptor which failed the first. + * + * \param DSize Pointer to an int storing the remaining bytes in the configuration descriptor + * \param DPos Pointer to the current position in the configuration descriptor + * \param DSearch Name of the comparitor search function to use on the configuration descriptor + * + * \return Value of one of the members of the DSEARCH_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(EndpointSearcher); // Comparator Prototype + * + * DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR(EndpointSearcher) + * { + * if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint) + * return Descriptor_Search_Found; + * else + * return Descriptor_Search_NotFound; + * } + * + * //... + * // After retrieving configuration descriptor: + * if (USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(&BytesRemaining, &ConfigDescriptorData, EndpointSearcher) == + * Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found) + * { + * // Do something with the endpoint descriptor + * } + * \endcode + */ + #define USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp(DSize, DPos, DSearch) \ + USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp_P(DSize, DPos, DCOMP_##DSearch) + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for return values of a descriptor comparator made with DESCRIPTOR_COMPARATOR. */ + enum DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t + { + Descriptor_Search_Found = 0, /**< Current descriptor matches comparator criteria. */ + Descriptor_Search_Fail = 1, /**< No further descriptor could possibly match criteria, fail the search. */ + Descriptor_Search_NotFound = 2, /**< Current descriptor does not match comparator criteria. */ + }; + + /** Enum for return values of USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp() */ + enum DSEARCH_Comp_Return_ErrorCodes_t + { + Descriptor_Search_Comp_Found = 0, /**< Configuration descriptor now points to decriptor which matches + * search criteria of the given comparator function. */ + Descriptor_Search_Comp_Fail = 1, /**< Comparator function returned Descriptor_Search_Fail. */ + Descriptor_Search_Comp_EndOfDescriptor = 2, /**< End of configuration descriptor reached before match found. */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Retrieves the configuration descriptor data or size from an attached device via a standard request. + * + * \param ConfigSizePtr Pointer to a uint16_t for either storing or retrieving the configuration + * descriptor size + * + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer for storing the configuration descriptor data. If this is + * NULL, the size of the configuration descriptor will be retrieved instead and + * placed in the variable pointed to by ConfigSizePtr. If this is non-NULL, the number + * of bytes indicated by ConfigSizePtr of the configuration descriptor will be loaded + * into the buffer + */ + uint8_t USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(uint16_t* const ConfigSizePtr, void* BufferPtr) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Skips over the current sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor, so that the pointer then + points to the next sub-descriptor. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented. + * + * \param BytesRem Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor + * \param CurrConfigLoc Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor + */ + static inline void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + static inline void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptor(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc) + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) + uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).Size; + #else + uint16_t CurrDescriptorSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(*CurrConfigLoc, USB_Descriptor_Header_t).bLength; + #endif + + *CurrConfigLoc += CurrDescriptorSize; + *BytesRem -= CurrDescriptorSize; + } + + /** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value. + * The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented. + * + * \param BytesRem Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor + * \param CurrConfigLoc Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor + * \param Type Descriptor type value to search for + */ + void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfType(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + + /** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value, + * which must come before a descriptor of the second given type value. If the BeforeType type + * descriptor is reached first, the number of bytes remaining to process is set to zero and the + * function exits. The bytes remaining value is automatically decremented. + * + * \param BytesRem Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor + * \param CurrConfigLoc Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor + * \param Type Descriptor type value to search for + * \param BeforeType Descriptor type value which must not be reached before the given Type descriptor + */ + void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeBefore(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t BeforeType) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + + /** Skips to the next sub-descriptor inside the configuration descriptor of the specified type value, + * which must come after a descriptor of the second given type value. The bytes remaining value is + * automatically decremented. + * + * \param BytesRem Pointer to the number of bytes remaining of the configuration descriptor + * \param CurrConfigLoc Pointer to the current descriptor inside the configuration descriptor + * \param Type Descriptor type value to search for + * \param AfterType Descriptor type value which must be reached before the given Type descriptor + */ + void USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorOfTypeAfter(uint16_t* const BytesRem, + uint8_t** const CurrConfigLoc, + const uint8_t Type, + const uint8_t AfterType) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t USB_Host_GetNextDescriptorComp_P(uint16_t* BytesRem, uint8_t** CurrConfigLoc, + uint8_t (* const ComparatorRoutine)(void* const)); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35b280b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c @@ -0,0 +1,326 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HIDParser.h" + +uint8_t ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData) +{ + HID_StateTable_t StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH]; + HID_StateTable_t* CurrStateTable = &StateTable[0]; + uint16_t UsageStack[HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH]; + uint8_t UsageStackSize = 0; + uint16_t BitOffsetIn = 0; + uint16_t BitOffsetOut = 0; +#if defined(HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING) + uint16_t BitOffsetFeature = 0; +#endif + HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrCollectionPath = NULL; + + memset((void*)ParserData, 0x00, sizeof(HID_ReportInfo_t)); + memset((void*)StateTable, 0x00, sizeof(StateTable)); + + while (ReportSize) + { + uint32_t ReportItemData = 0; + + switch (*ReportData & DATA_SIZE_MASK) + { + case DATA_SIZE_4: + ReportItemData = *((uint32_t*)(ReportData + 1)); + break; + case DATA_SIZE_2: + ReportItemData = *((uint16_t*)(ReportData + 1)); + break; + case DATA_SIZE_1: + ReportItemData = *((uint8_t*)(ReportData + 1)); + break; + } + + switch (*ReportData & (TYPE_MASK | TAG_MASK)) + { + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH): + if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH]) + return HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow; + + memcpy((CurrStateTable - 1), + CurrStateTable, + sizeof(HID_ReportItem_t)); + + CurrStateTable++; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_POP): + if (CurrStateTable == &StateTable[0]) + return HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow; + + CurrStateTable--; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Minimum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Logical.Maximum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Minimum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Physical.Maximum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Exponent = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Unit.Type = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT): + CurrStateTable->ReportCount = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_GLOBAL | TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID): + CurrStateTable->ReportID = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGE): + if (UsageStackSize == HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) + return HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow; + + UsageStack[UsageStackSize++] = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Minimum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_LOCAL | TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX): + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Maximum = ReportItemData; + break; + case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION): + if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL) + { + CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[0]; + } + else + { + HID_CollectionPath_t* ParentCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath; + + CurrCollectionPath = &ParserData->CollectionPaths[1]; + + while (CurrCollectionPath->Parent != NULL); + { + if (CurrCollectionPath == &ParserData->CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]) + return HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths; + + CurrCollectionPath++; + } + + CurrCollectionPath->Parent = ParentCollectionPath; + } + + CurrCollectionPath->Type = ReportItemData; + CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Page = CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.Page; + + if (UsageStackSize) + { + CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = UsageStack[0]; + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageStackSize; i++) + UsageStack[i] = UsageStack[i + 1]; + + UsageStackSize--; + } + else + { + CurrCollectionPath->Usage.Usage = 0; + } + + break; + case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION): + if (CurrCollectionPath == NULL) + return HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection; + + CurrCollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath->Parent; + + break; + case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_INPUT): + case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT): +#if defined(HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING) + case (TYPE_MAIN | TAG_MAIN_FEATURE): +#endif + for (uint8_t ReportItemNum = 0; ReportItemNum < CurrStateTable->ReportCount; ReportItemNum++) + { + HID_ReportItem_t* CurrReportItem = &ParserData->ReportItems[ParserData->TotalReportItems]; + + if (ParserData->TotalReportItems == HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) + return HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems; + + memcpy(&CurrReportItem->Attributes, + &CurrStateTable->Attributes, + sizeof(HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t)); + + CurrReportItem->ItemFlags = ReportItemData; + CurrReportItem->CollectionPath = CurrCollectionPath; + CurrReportItem->ReportID = CurrStateTable->ReportID; + + if (UsageStackSize) + { + CurrReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage = UsageStack[0]; + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UsageStackSize; i++) + UsageStack[i] = UsageStack[i + 1]; + + UsageStackSize--; + } + else + { + CurrReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage = 0; + } + + switch (*ReportData & TAG_MASK) + { + case TAG_MAIN_INPUT: + CurrReportItem->ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In; + CurrReportItem->BitOffset = BitOffsetIn; + + BitOffsetIn += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize; + + break; + case TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT: + CurrReportItem->ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out; + CurrReportItem->BitOffset = BitOffsetOut; + + BitOffsetOut += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize; + + break; +#if defined(HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING) + case TAG_MAIN_FEATURE: + CurrReportItem->ItemType = REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature; + CurrReportItem->BitOffset = BitOffsetFeature; + + BitOffsetFeature += CurrStateTable->Attributes.BitSize; + + break; +#endif + } + +#if !defined(HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS) + if (!(ReportItemData & IOF_CONSTANT)) + ParserData->TotalReportItems++; +#else + ParserData->TotalReportItems++; +#endif + } + + UsageStackSize = 0; + + break; + } + + if ((*ReportData & TYPE_MASK) == TYPE_MAIN) + { + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Minimum = 0; + CurrStateTable->Attributes.Usage.MinMax.Maximum = 0; + UsageStackSize = 0; + } + + switch (*ReportData & DATA_SIZE_MASK) + { + case DATA_SIZE_4: + ReportSize -= 5; + ReportData += 5; + break; + case DATA_SIZE_2: + ReportSize -= 3; + ReportData += 3; + break; + case DATA_SIZE_1: + ReportSize -= 2; + ReportData += 2; + break; + case DATA_SIZE_0: + ReportSize -= 1; + ReportData += 1; + break; + } + } + + return HID_PARSE_Successful; +} + +bool GetReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) +{ + uint16_t DataBitsRem = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize; + uint16_t CurrentBit = ReportItem->BitOffset; + uint32_t BitMask = (1 << 0); + + ReportItem->Value = 0; + + if (ReportItem->ReportID) + { + if (ReportItem->ReportID != ReportData[0]) + return false; + + ReportData++; + } + + while (DataBitsRem--) + { + if (ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8))) + ReportItem->Value |= BitMask; + + CurrentBit++; + BitMask <<= 1; + } + + return true; +} + +void SetReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, const HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem) +{ + uint16_t DataBitsRem = ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize; + uint16_t CurrentBit = ReportItem->BitOffset; + uint32_t BitMask = (1 << 0); + + if (ReportItem->ReportID) + { + ReportData[0] = ReportItem->ReportID; + ReportData++; + } + + while (DataBitsRem--) + { + if (ReportItem->Value & (1 << (CurrentBit % 8))) + ReportData[CurrentBit / 8] |= BitMask; + + CurrentBit++; + BitMask <<= 1; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..314d0807 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.h @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Human Interface Device (HID) Class report descriptor processing routines. This file allows for the easy + * parsing of the complex HID report descriptor, which describes the data that the device transmits to the host. + * + * The processed report is presented back to the user application as a flat structure containing each report + * item's IN, OUT and FEATURE (if desired) items along with each item's attributes. + * + * This library portion also allows for easy setting and retrieval of data from a HID report, including devices + * with multiple reports on the one HID interface. + * + * By default, FEATURE reports and IN/OUT reports with constant data are ignored in the HID report when processed + * to save on memory. This can be overridden by defining the HID_ENABLE_FEATURE_PROCESSING or + * HID_INCLUDE_CONSTANT_DATA_ITEMS tokens in the user project makefile, passing them to the compiler via the -D + * switch. + */ + +#ifndef __HIDPARSER_H__ +#define __HIDPARSER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "HIDReportData.h" + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor checks and defines: */ + #if !defined(HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the state table. A larger state table + * allows for more PUSH/POP report items to be nested, but consumes more memory. By default + * this is set to 3 levels (allowing for two PUSHes to be nested) but this can be overridden by + * defining HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH to another value in the user project makefile, passing the + * define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. + */ + #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH 3 + #endif + + #if !defined(HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant indicating the maximum stack depth of the usage table. A larger usage table + * allows for more USAGE items to be indicated sequentially for REPORT COUNT entries of more than + * one, but requires more stack space. By default this is set to 8 levels (allowing for a report + * item with a count of 8) but this can be overridden by defining HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH to another + * value in the user project makefile, passing the define to the compiler using the -D compiler + * switch. + */ + #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH 8 + #endif + + #if !defined(HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant indicating the maximum number of COLLECTION items (nested or unnested) that can be + * processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more COLLECTION items to be + * processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 5 collections, but this can be + * overridden by defining HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS to another value in the user project makefile, passing + * the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. + */ + #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS 5 + #endif + + #if !defined(HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant indicating the maximum number of report items (IN, OUT or FEATURE if enabled) that can be + * processed in the report item descriptor. A large value allows for more report items to be + * processed, but consumes more memory. By default this is set to 30 items, but this can be + * overridden by defining HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS to another value in the user project makefile, passing + * the define to the compiler using the -D compiler switch. + */ + #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS 30 + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for indicating what type of report item an entry in a HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array is */ + enum HID_ReportItemTypes_t + { + REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In = 0, /**< Indicates that the item is an IN report type. */ + REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Out = 1, /**< Indicates that the item is an OUT report type. */ + REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_Feature = 2, /**< Indicates that the item is a FEATURE report type. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error codes in the return value of the ProcessHIDReport() function */ + enum HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t + { + HID_PARSE_Successful = 0, /**< Successful parse of the HID report descriptor, no error. */ + HID_PARSE_HIDStackOverflow = 1, /**< More than HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH nested PUSHes in the report. */ + HID_PARSE_HIDStackUnderflow = 2, /**< A POP was found when the state table stack was empty. */ + HID_PARSE_InsufficientReportItems = 3, /**< More than HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS report items in the report. */ + HID_PARSE_UnexpectedEndCollection = 4, /**< END COLLECTION found without matching COLLECTION item. */ + HID_PARSE_InsufficientCollectionPaths = 5, /**< More than HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS collections in the report. */ + HID_PARSE_UsageStackOverflow = 6, /**< More than HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH usages listed in a row. */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for an attribute with both minimum and maximum values (e.g. Logical Min/Max). */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Minimum; /**< Minimum value for the attribute. */ + uint32_t Maximum; /**< Maximum value for the attribute. */ + } HID_MinMax_t; + + /** Type define for the Unit attributes of a report item. */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t Type; /**< Unit type (refer to HID specifications for details). */ + uint8_t Exponent; /**< Unit exponent (refer to HID specifications for details). */ + } HID_Unit_t; + + /** Type define for the Usage attributes of a report item. */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Page; /**< Usage page of the report item. */ + uint16_t Usage; /**< Usage of the report item. */ + HID_MinMax_t MinMax; /**< Usage minimum and maximum of the report item. */ + } HID_Usage_t; + + /** Type define for a COLLECTION object. Contains the collection attributes and a reference to the + * parent collection if any. + */ + typedef struct CollectionPath + { + uint8_t Type; /**< Collection type (for example "Generic Desktop"). */ + HID_Usage_t Usage; /**< Collection usage. */ + struct CollectionPath* Parent; /**< Reference to parent collection, or NULL if root collection. */ + } HID_CollectionPath_t; + + /** Type define for all the data attributes of a report item, except flags. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t BitSize; /**< Size in bits of the report item's data. */ + + HID_Usage_t Usage; /**< Usage of the report item. */ + HID_Unit_t Unit; /**< Unit type and exponent of the report item. */ + HID_MinMax_t Logical; /**< Logical minimum and maximum of the report item. */ + HID_MinMax_t Physical; /**< Physical minimum and maximum of the report item. */ + } HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t; + + /** Type define for a report item (IN, OUT or FEATURE) attributes and other details. */ + typedef struct + { + uint16_t BitOffset; /**< Bit offset in the IN, OUT or FEATURE report of the item. */ + uint8_t ItemType; /**< Report item type, a value in HID_Types_t. */ + uint16_t ItemFlags; /**< Item data flags, such as constant/variable, etc. */ + uint8_t ReportID; /**< Report ID this item belongs to, or 0x00 if device has only one report */ + HID_CollectionPath_t* CollectionPath; /**< Collection path of the item. */ + + HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes; /**< Report item attributes. */ + + uint32_t Value; /**< Current value of the report item. */ + } HID_ReportItem_t; + + /** Type define for a complete processed HID report, including all report item data and collections. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t TotalReportItems; /**< Total number of report items stored in the + * ReportItems array. */ + + HID_ReportItem_t ReportItems[HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS]; /**< Report items array, including + * all IN, OUT and FEATURE items. */ + + HID_CollectionPath_t CollectionPaths[HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS]; /**< All collection items, referenced + * by the report items. */ + } HID_ReportInfo_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Function to process a given HID report returned from an attached device, and store it into a given + * HID_ReportInfo_t structure. + * + * \param ReportData Buffer containing the device's HID report table + * \param ReportSize Size in bytes of the HID report table + * \param ParserData Pointer to a HID_ReportInfo_t instance for the parser output + * + * \return A value in the HID_Parse_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ + uint8_t ProcessHIDReport(const uint8_t* ReportData, uint16_t ReportSize, HID_ReportInfo_t* const ParserData) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 3); + + /** Extracts the given report item's value out of the given HID report and places it into the Value + * member of the report item's HID_ReportItem_t structure. + * + * \param ReportData Buffer containing an IN or FEATURE report from an attached device + * \param ReportItem Pointer to the report item of interest in a HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array + * + * \returns Boolean true if the item to retrieve was located in the given report, false otherwise + */ + bool GetReportItemInfo(const uint8_t* ReportData, HID_ReportItem_t* const ReportItem) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + + /** Retreives the given report item's value out of the Value member of the report item's + * HID_ReportItem_t structure and places it into the correct position in the HID report + * buffer. The report buffer is assumed to have the appropriate bits cleared before calling + * this function (i.e., the buffer should be explicitly cleared before report values are added). + * + * If the device has multiple HID reports, the report ID is set to the report ID of the given item. + * + * \param ReportData Buffer holding the current OUT report data + * \param ReportItem Pointer to the report item of interest in a HID_ReportInfo_t ReportItem array + */ + void SetReportItemInfo(uint8_t* ReportData, const HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1, 2); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + HID_ReportItem_Attributes_t Attributes; + uint8_t ReportCount; + uint8_t ReportID; + } HID_StateTable_t; + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDReportData.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDReportData.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1bb8676d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/HIDReportData.h @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Constants for HID report item attributes. Refer to the HID specification for details on each + * flag's meaning when applied to an IN, OUT or FEATURE item. + */ + +#ifndef __HIDREPORTDATA_H__ +#define __HIDREPORTDATA_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for constant data. */ + #define IOF_CONSTANT (1 << 0) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for data. */ + #define IOF_DATA (0 << 0) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for variable data. */ + #define IOF_VARIABLE (1 << 1) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for array data. */ + #define IOF_ARRAY (0 << 1) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for relative data. */ + #define IOF_RELATIVE (1 << 2) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for absolute data. */ + #define IOF_ABSOLUTE (0 << 2) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for wrapped value data. */ + #define IOF_WRAP (1 << 3) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non-wrapped value data. */ + #define IOF_NOWRAP (0 << 3) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for non linear data. */ + #define IOF_NONLINEAR (1 << 4) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for linear data. */ + #define IOF_LINEAR (0 << 4) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no preferred state. */ + #define IOF_NOPREFERRED (1 << 5) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for preferred state items. */ + #define IOF_PREFERREDSTATE (0 << 5) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for null state items. */ + #define IOF_NULLSTATE (1 << 6) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for no null position data. */ + #define IOF_NONULLPOSITION (0 << 6) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for buffered bytes. */ + #define IOF_BUFFEREDBYTES (1 << 8) + + /** HID_ReportItem_t.ItemFlags flag for bitfield data. */ + #define IOF_BITFIELD (0 << 8) + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define DATA_SIZE_MASK 0b00000011 + #define TYPE_MASK 0b00001100 + #define TAG_MASK 0b11110000 + + #define DATA_SIZE_0 0b00000000 + #define DATA_SIZE_1 0b00000001 + #define DATA_SIZE_2 0b00000010 + #define DATA_SIZE_4 0b00000011 + + #define TYPE_MAIN 0b00000000 + #define TYPE_GLOBAL 0b00000100 + #define TYPE_LOCAL 0b00001000 + + #define TAG_MAIN_INPUT 0b10000000 + #define TAG_MAIN_OUTPUT 0b10010000 + #define TAG_MAIN_COLLECTION 0b10100000 + #define TAG_MAIN_FEATURE 0b10110000 + #define TAG_MAIN_ENDCOLLECTION 0b11000000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_USAGEPAGE 0b00000000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMIN 0b00010000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_LOGICALMAX 0b00100000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMIN 0b00110000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_PHYSMAX 0b01000000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_UNITEXP 0b01010000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_UNIT 0b01100000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTSIZE 0b01110000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTID 0b10000000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_REPORTCOUNT 0b10010000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_PUSH 0b10100000 + #define TAG_GLOBAL_POP 0b10110000 + #define TAG_LOCAL_USAGE 0b00000000 + #define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMIN 0b00010000 + #define TAG_LOCAL_USAGEMAX 0b00100000 + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbc428aa --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C +#include "Events.h" + +void USB_Event_Stub(void) +{ + +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eeb0ed37 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.h @@ -0,0 +1,440 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** Library events module. This module contains macros and functions relating to the management of library + * events, which are small pieces of code similar to ISRs which are run when a given condition is met. Each + * event can be fired from multiple places in the user or library code, which may or may not be inside an ISR, + * thus each handler should be written to be as small and fast as possible to prevent possible problems. + * + * Events can be hooked by the user application using the EVENT_HANDLER() and HANDLES_EVENT() macros. If an + * event with no associated handler is fired within the library, it by default fires an internal empty stub + * function. This is achieved through the use of the GCC compiler's "alias" attribute. + * + * Each event must only have one associated event handler, but can be raised by multiple sources. + */ + +#ifndef __USBEVENTS_H__ +#define __USBEVENTS_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Raises a given event name, with the specified parameters. For events with no parameters the + * only argument to the macro is the event name, events with parameters list the parameter values + * after the name as a comma seperated list. + * + * When a given event is fired, its corresponding event handler code is executed. + * + * Usage Examples: + * \code + * // Raise the USB_VBUSChange event, which takes no parameters + * RAISE_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + * + * // Raise the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event which takes two parameters + * RAISE_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket, 0, 1); + * \endcode + * + * \see RAISES_EVENT() + */ + #define RAISE_EVENT(e, ...) Event_ ## e (__VA_ARGS__) + + /** Indicates that a given module can raise a given event. This is the equivelent of putting the + * event function's prototype into the module, but in a cleaner way. Each event which may be + * fired via the RAISE_EVENT macro in the module should have an accompanying RAISES_EVENT + * prototype in the module's header file. + * + * Usage Examples: + * \code + * // Module can raise the USB_VBUSChange event + * RAISES_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + * + * // ... + * // Inside a block of code in a function of the module, raise the USB_VBUSChange event + * RAISE_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + * \endcode + * + * \see RAISE_EVENT() + */ + #define RAISES_EVENT(e) HANDLES_EVENT(e) + + /** Defines an event handler for the given event. Event handlers should be short in length, as they + * may be raised from inside an ISR. The user application can react to each event as it sees fit, + * such as logging the event, indicating the change to the user or performing some other action. + * + * Only one event handler may be defined in any user project for each individual event. Events may + * or may not have parameters - for each event, refer to its documentation elsewhere in this module + * to determine the presense and purpose of any event parameters. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * // Create an event handler for the USB_VBUSChange event + * EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSChange) + * { + * // Code to execute when the VBUS level changes + * } + * \endcode + * + * \see HANDLES_EVENT() + */ + #define EVENT_HANDLER(e) void Event_ ## e e ## _P + + /** Indicates that a given module handles an event. This is the equivelent of putting the + * event function's prototype into the module, but in a cleaner way. Each event which may be + * handled via the EVENT_HANDLER macro in the module should have an accompanying HANDLES_EVENT + * prototype in the module's header file. + * + * Usage Examples: + * \code + * // Module handles the USB_VBUSChange event + * HANDLES_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + * + * // Create the USB_VBUSChange event handler + * EVENT_HANDLER(USB_VBUSChange) + * { + * // Event handler code here + * } + * \endcode + * + * \see EVENT_HANDLER() + */ + #define HANDLES_EVENT(e) EVENT_HANDLER(e) + + /* Psudo-Functions for Doxygen: */ + #if defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Event for VBUS level change. This event fires when the VBUS line of the USB AVR changes from + * high to low or vice-versa. + * + * \note This event is only available on USB AVR models which support VBUS notification interrupts. + */ + void USB_VBUSChange(void); + + /** Event for VBUS attachment. This event fires when the VBUS line of the USB AVR changes from + * low to high, signalling the attachment of the USB device to a host, before the enumeration + * process has begun. + * + * \note This event is only available on USB AVR models which support VBUS notification interrupts. + */ + void USB_VBUSConnect(void); + + /** Event for VBUS detachment. This event fires when the VBUS line of the USB AVR changes from + * high to low, signalling the USB device has been removed from a host whether it has been enumerated + * or not. + * + * \note This event is only available on USB AVR models which support VBUS notification interrupts. + */ + void USB_VBUSDisconnect(void); + + /** Event for USB device connection. This event fires when the AVR is in USB host mode and a device + * has been attached (but not yet fully enumerated), or when in device mode and the device is connected + * to a host, beginning the enumeration process. + * + * When in device mode, this can be used to progmatically start the USB management task to reduce + * CPU usage. + * + * \note For the smaller USB AVRs (AT90USBXX2) with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller. + * this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default, + * which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state + * needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by + * passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection + * and disconnection events may be manually fired by RAISE_EVENT(), and the USB_IsConnected global changed manually. + * + * \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage. + */ + void USB_Connect(void); + + /** Event for USB device disconnection. This event fires when the AVR is in USB host mode and an + * attached and enumerated device has been disconnected, or when in device mode and the device is + * disconnected from the host. + * + * When in device mode, this can be used to progmatically stop the USB management task to reduce + * CPU usage. + * + * \note For the smaller USB AVRs (AT90USBXX2) with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller. + * this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default, + * which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state + * needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by + * passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection + * and disconnection events may be manually fired by RAISE_EVENT(), and the USB_IsConnected global changed manually. + * + * \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage. + */ + void USB_Disconnect(void); + + /** Event for USB device power on failure. This event fires when the USB interface fails to + * initialize correctly due to a hardware or software fault. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t + * located in LowLevel.h. + */ + void USB_PowerOnFail(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + + /** Event for USB mode pin level change. This event fires when the USB interface is set to dual role + * mode, and the UID pin level has changed to indicate a new mode (device or host). This event fires + * before the mode is switched to the newly indicated mode. + * + * \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which support dual role modes. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY or USB_HOST_ONLY tokens have been supplied + * to the compiler (see LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_UIDChange(void); + + /** Event for USB host error. This event fires when a hardware fault has occurred whilst the USB + * interface is in host mode. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t + * located in Host.h. + * + * \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + + /** Event for USB device attachment. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and + * a USB device has been connected to the USB interface. This is interrupt driven, thus fires before + * the standard USB_DeviceConnect event and so can be used to programatically start the USB management + * task to reduce CPU consumption. + * + * \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + * + * \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage. + */ + void USB_DeviceAttached(void); + + /** Event for USB device removal. This event fires when a the USB interface is in host mode, and + * a USB device has been removed the USB interface whether or not it has been enumerated. This + * can be used to programatically stop the USB management task to reduce CPU consumption. + * + * \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + * + * \see USBTask.h for more information on the USB management task and reducing CPU usage. + */ + void USB_DeviceUnattached(void); + + /** Event for USB device enumeration failure. This event fires when a the USB interface is + * in host mode, and an attached USB device has failed to enumerate completely. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code indicating the failure reason, a value in + * USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t located in Host.h. + * + * \param SubErrorCode Sub error code indicating the reason for failure - for example, if the + * ErrorCode parameter indicates a control error, this will give the error + * code returned by the USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function. + * + * \note This event only exists on USB AVR models which supports host mode. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_DEVICE_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + + /** Event for USB device enumeration completion. This event fires when a the USB interface is + * in host mode and an attached USB device has been completely enumerated and is ready to be + * controlled by the user application, or when the library is in device mode, and the Host + * has finished enumerating the device. + */ + void USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + /** Event for unhandled control requests. This event fires when a the USB host issues a control + * request to the control endpoint (address 0) that the library does not handle. This may either + * be a standard request that the library has no handler code for, or a class specific request + * issued to the device which must be handled appropriately. Due to the strict timing requirements + * on control transfers, interrupts are disabled during control request processing. + * + * \param bRequest Request value, indicating what command the host has issued. + * \param bmRequestType Mask indicating the request data direction (if any), type and recipient. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + * + * \note Requests should be handled in the same manner as described in the USB 2.0 Specification, + * or appropriate class' specification. In all instances, the library has already read the + * request bmRequestType and bRequest values out (into the Request and RequestType parameters + * respectively) so that it can correctly determine if it is able to handle the request + * internally, or hand off the request to the user application via this event. Other request + * parameters (wValue, wIndex, wLength, and Data) remain in the control endpoint bank until + * read out by the user application for processing. + */ + void USB_UnhandledControlPacket(const uint8_t bRequest, const uint8_t bmRequestType); + + /** Event for USB configuration number changed. This event fires when a the USB host changes the + * selected configuration number while in device mode. This event should be hooked in device + * applications to create the endpoints and configure the device for the selected configuration. + * + * This event fires after the value of USB_ConfigurationNumber has been changed. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_ConfigurationChanged(void); + + /** Event for USB suspend. This event fires when a the USB host suspends the device by halting its + * transmission of Start Of Frame pulses to the device. This is generally hooked in order to move + * the device over to a low power state until the host wakes up the device. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + * + * \see USB_WakeUp() event for accompanying Wake Up event. + */ + void USB_Suspend(void); + + /** Event for USB wake up. This event fires when a the USB interface is suspended while in device + * mode, and the host wakes up the device by supplying Start Of Frame pulses. This is generally + * hooked to pull the user application out of a lowe power state and back into normal operating + * mode. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + * + * \see USB_Suspend() event for accompanying Suspend event. + */ + void USB_WakeUp(void); + + /** Event for USB interface reset. This event fires when a the USB interface is in device mode, and + * a the USB host requests that the device reset its interface. This is generally hooked so that + * the USB control endpoint can be switched to interrupt driven mode, by selecting it and calling + * USB_INT_Enable(ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP). Before this event fires, all device endpoints are reset and + * disabled. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_Reset(void); + + /** Event for USB device mode error. This event fires when the USB interface is in device mode, + * and an error occurs which prevents it from operating normally. + * + * \param ErrorCode Error code indicating the source of the error. One of the values in the + * USB_Device_ErrorCodes_t enum located in Device.h. + * + * \note This event does not exist if the USB_HOST_ONLY token is supplied to the compiler (see + * LowLevel.h documentation). + */ + void USB_DeviceError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define ALIAS_STUB(e) EVENT_HANDLER(e) ATTR_WEAK ATTR_ALIAS(USB_Event_Stub) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + #define USB_VBUSChange_P (void) + #define USB_VBUSConnect_P (void) + #define USB_VBUSDisconnect_P (void) + #endif + + #define USB_Connect_P (void) + #define USB_Disconnect_P (void) + #define USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete_P (void) + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + #define USB_PowerOnFail_P (const uint8_t ErrorCode) + #define USB_UIDChange_P (void) + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + #define USB_HostError_P (const uint8_t ErrorCode) + #define USB_DeviceAttached_P (void) + #define USB_DeviceUnattached_P (void) + #define USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed_P (const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + #define USB_UnhandledControlPacket_P (const uint8_t bRequest, const uint8_t bmRequestType) + #define USB_ConfigurationChanged_P (void) + #define USB_Suspend_P (void) + #define USB_WakeUp_P (void) + #define USB_Reset_P (void) + #define USB_DeviceError_P (const uint8_t ErrorCode) + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_EVENTS_C) + void USB_Event_Stub (void) ATTR_CONST; + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + ALIAS_STUB(USB_VBUSChange); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_VBUSConnect); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_VBUSDisconnect); + #endif + + ALIAS_STUB(USB_Connect); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_Disconnect); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + ALIAS_STUB(USB_PowerOnFail); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_UIDChange); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + ALIAS_STUB(USB_HostError); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_DeviceAttached); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_DeviceUnattached); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + ALIAS_STUB(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_Suspend); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_WakeUp); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_Reset); + ALIAS_STUB(USB_DeviceError); + #endif + #endif + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5fdc72e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#include "StdDescriptors.h" + +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceError, DEVICE_ERROR_GetDescriptorNotHooked); + + return 0; +}; + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9075cc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,523 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Standard USB device descriptor defines and retrieval routines, for USB devices. This module contains + * strucutures and macros for the easy creation of standard USB descriptors in USB device projects. + * + * All standard descriptors have their elements named in an identical manner to the official USB specification, + * however slightly more verbose alternate (non-standard) names are also supplied if the macro + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES is defined in the user project makefile and passed to the compiler at + * compilation time using the -D option. + * + * The non-standard names are documented here - if USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES is not defined, then all + * descriptors will contain elements named identically to the official USB specification. The alternately + * named descriptor elements are placed in the same order inside the descriptor structures as their officially + * named counterparts, thus they can be correlated easily with the official USB specification. + */ + +#ifndef __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__ +#define __USBDESCRIPTORS_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + #include "Events.h" + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + #include "../LowLevel/Device.h" + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates that a given descriptor does not exist in the device. This can be used inside descriptors + * for string descriptor indexes, or may be use as a return value for GetDescriptor when the specified + * descriptor does not exist. + */ + #define NO_DESCRIPTOR 0 + + /** Macro to calculate the power value for the device descriptor, from a given number of milliamps. */ + #define USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(x) (x >> 1) + + /** Macro to calculate the Unicode length of a string with a given number of Unicode characters. + * Should be used in string descriptor's headers for giving the string descriptor's byte length. + */ + #define USB_STRING_LEN(x) (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Header_t) + (x << 1)) + + /** Macro to encode a given four digit floating point version number (e.g. 01.23) into Binary Coded + * Decimal format for descriptor fields requiring BCD encoding, such as the USB version number in the + * standard device descriptor. + */ + #define VERSION_BCD(x) ((((VERSION_TENS(x) << 4) | VERSION_ONES(x)) << 8) | \ + ((VERSION_TENTHS(x) << 4) | VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x))) + + /** String language ID for the English language. Should be used in USB_Descriptor_Language_t descriptors + * to indicate that the English language is supported by the device in its string descriptors. + */ + #define LANGUAGE_ID_ENG 0x0409 + + /** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's + * EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the IN direction (i.e, from + * device to host). + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN 0x80 + + /** Can be masked with an endpoint address for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t endpoint descriptor's + * EndpointAddress value to indicate to the host that the endpoint is of the OUT direction (i.e, from + * host to device). + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT 0x00 + + /** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t + * descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power + * from the host's VBUS line. + */ + #define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED 0b10000000 + + /** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t + * descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration can draw its power + * from the device's own power source. + */ + #define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED 0b11000000 + + /** Can be masked with other configuration descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t + * descriptor's ConfigAttributes value to indicate that the specified configuration supports the + * remote wakeup feature of the USB standard, allowing a suspended USB device to wake up the host upon + * request. + */ + #define USB_CONFIG_ATTR_REMOTEWAKEUP 0b10100000 + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is not synchronized. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC (0b00 << 2) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is asynchronous. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ASYNC (0b01 << 2) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is adaptive. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_ATTR_ADAPTIVE (0b10 << 2) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is synchronized. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_ATTR_SYNC (0b11 << 2) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for data transfers. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA (0b00 << 4) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for feedback. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_USAGE_FEEDBACK (0b01 << 4) + + /** Can be masked with other endpoint descriptor attributes for a USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t descriptor's + * Attributes value to indicate that the specified endpoint is used for implicit feedback. + * + * \see The USB specification for more details on the possible Endpoint usage attributes. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_USAGE_IMPLICIT_FEEDBACK (0b10 << 4) + + /** Gives a void pointer to the specified descriptor (of any type). */ + #define DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(Descriptor) ((void*)&Descriptor) + + /* Events: */ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the Device Error event while in device mode, if the USB_GetDescriptor() + * routine is not hooked in the user application to properly return descriptors to the library. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceError); + #endif + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible standard descriptor types, as given in each descriptor's header. */ + enum USB_DescriptorTypes_t + { + DTYPE_Device = 0x01, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device descriptor. */ + DTYPE_Configuration = 0x02, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a configuration descriptor. */ + DTYPE_String = 0x03, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a string descriptor. */ + DTYPE_Interface = 0x04, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface descriptor. */ + DTYPE_Endpoint = 0x05, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an endpoint descriptor. */ + DTYPE_DeviceQualifier = 0x06, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is a device qualifier descriptor. */ + DTYPE_Other = 0x07, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is of other type. */ + DTYPE_InterfacePower = 0x08, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface power descriptor. */ + DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation = 0x0B, /**< Indicates that the descriptor is an interface association descriptor. */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for all descriptor's header, indicating the descriptor's length and type. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + uint8_t Size; /**< Size of the descriptor, in bytes. */ + uint8_t Type; /**< Type of the descriptor, either a value in DescriptorTypes_t or a value + * given by the specific class. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Header_t; + + /** Type define for a standard device descriptor. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + uint16_t USBSpecification; /**< BCD of the supported USB specification. */ + uint8_t Class; /**< USB device class. */ + uint8_t SubClass; /**< USB device subclass. */ + uint8_t Protocol; /**< USB device protocol. */ + + uint8_t Endpoint0Size; /**< Size of the control (address 0) endpoint's bank in bytes. */ + + uint16_t VendorID; /**< Vendor ID for the USB product. */ + uint16_t ProductID; /**< Unique product ID for the USB product. */ + uint16_t ReleaseNumber; /**< Product release (version) number. */ + + uint8_t ManufacturerStrIndex; /**< String index for the manufacturer's name. The + * host will request this string via a seperate + * control request for the string descriptor. + * + * \note If no string supplied, use NO_DESCRIPTOR. + */ + uint8_t ProductStrIndex; /**< String index for the product name/details. + * + * \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry. + */ + uint8_t SerialNumStrIndex; /**< String index for the product's globally unique hexadecimal + * serial number, in uppercase Unicoded ASCII. + * + * \see ManufacturerStrIndex structure entry. + */ + + uint8_t NumberOfConfigurations; /**< Total number of configurations supported by + * the device. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + uint16_t bcdUSB; + uint8_t bDeviceClass; + uint8_t bDeviceSubClass; + uint8_t bDeviceProtocol; + uint8_t bMaxPacketSize0; + uint16_t idVendor; + uint16_t idProduct; + uint16_t bcdDevice; + uint8_t iManufacturer; + uint8_t iProduct; + uint8_t iSerialNumber; + uint8_t bNumConfigurations; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Device_t; + + /** Type define for a standard configuration descriptor. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + uint16_t TotalConfigurationSize; /**< Size of the configuration descriptor header, + * and all sub descriptors inside the configuration. + */ + uint8_t TotalInterfaces; /**< Total number of interfaces in the configuration. */ + + uint8_t ConfigurationNumber; /**< Configuration index of the current configuration. */ + uint8_t ConfigurationStrIndex; /**< Index of a string descriptor describing the configuration. */ + + uint8_t ConfigAttributes; /**< Configuration attributes, comprised of a mask of zero or + * more USB_CONFIG_ATTR_* masks. + */ + + uint8_t MaxPowerConsumption; /**< Maximum power consumption of the device while in the + * current configuration, calculated by the USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA() + * macro. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + uint16_t wTotalLength; + uint8_t bNumInterfaces; + uint8_t bConfigurationValue; + uint8_t iConfiguration; + uint8_t bmAttributes; + uint8_t bMaxPower; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t; + + /** Type define for a standard interface descriptor. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + uint8_t InterfaceNumber; /**< Index of the interface in the current configuration. */ + uint8_t AlternateSetting; /**< Alternate setting for the interface number. The same + * interface number can have multiple alternate settings + * with different endpoint configurations, which can be + * selected by the host. + */ + uint8_t TotalEndpoints; /**< Total number of endpoints in the interface. */ + + uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */ + uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */ + uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */ + + uint8_t InterfaceStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the + * interface. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + uint8_t bInterfaceNumber; + uint8_t bAlternateSetting; + uint8_t bNumEndpoints; + uint8_t bInterfaceClass; + uint8_t bInterfaceSubClass; + uint8_t bInterfaceProtocol; + uint8_t iInterface; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Interface_t; + + /** Type define for a standard interface association descriptor. + * + * This descriptor has been added as a suppliment to the USB2.0 standard, in the ECN located at + * http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/InterfaceAssociationDescriptor_ecn.pdf. It allows compound + * devices with multiple interfaces related to the same function to have the multiple interfaces bound + * together at the point of enumeration, loading one generic driver for all the interfaces in the single + * function. Read the ECN for more information. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + uint8_t FirstInterfaceIndex; /**< Index of the first associated interface. */ + uint8_t TotalInterfaces; /** Total number of associated interfaces. */ + + uint8_t Class; /**< Interface class ID. */ + uint8_t SubClass; /**< Interface subclass ID. */ + uint8_t Protocol; /**< Interface protocol ID. */ + + uint8_t IADStrIndex; /**< Index of the string descriptor describing the + * interface association. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + uint8_t bFirstInterface; + uint8_t bInterfaceCount; + uint8_t bFunctionClass; + uint8_t bFunctionSubClass; + uint8_t bFunctionProtocol; + uint8_t iFunction; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t; + + /** Type define for a standard endpoint descriptor. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + uint8_t EndpointAddress; /**< Logical address of the endpoint within the device + * for the current configuration, including direction + * mask. + */ + uint8_t Attributes; /**< Endpoint attributes, comprised of a mask of the + * endpoint type (EP_TYPE_*) and attributes (ENDPOINT_ATTR_*) + * masks. + */ + uint16_t EndpointSize; /**< Size of the endpoint bank, in bytes. This indicates the + * maximum packet size that the endpoint can receive at a time. + */ + + uint8_t PollingIntervalMS; /**< Polling interval in milliseconds for the endpont + * if it is an INTERRUPT or ISOCHRONOUS type. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + uint8_t bEndpointAddress; + uint8_t bmAttributes; + uint16_t wMaxPacketSize; + uint8_t bInterval; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t; + + /** Type define for a standard string descriptor. Unlike other standard descriptors, the length + * of the descriptor for placement in the descriptor header must be determined by the USB_STRING_LEN() + * macro rather than by the size of the descriptor structure, as the length is not fixed. + * + * This structure should also be used for string index 0, which contains the supported language IDs for + * the device as an array. + * + * \note The non-standard structure element names are documented here - see the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more information on the two descriptor naming schemes. If the + * USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES token is not set, this structure contains elements with names + * identical to those listed in the USB standard. + */ + typedef struct + { + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Descriptor header, including type and size. */ + + int16_t UnicodeString[]; /**< String data, as unicode characters (alternatively, + * string language IDs). If normal ASCII characters are + * to be used, they must be added as an array of characters + * rather than a normal C string so that they are widened to + * Unicode size. + * + * Under GCC, strings prefixed with the "L" character (before + * the opening string quotation mark) are considered to be + * Unicode strings, and may be used instead of an explicit + * array of ASCII characters. + */ + #else + uint8_t bLength; + uint8_t bDescriptorType; + int16_t bString[]; + #endif + } USB_Descriptor_String_t; + + typedef struct + { + uint16_t Size; + void* Address; + } USB_Descriptor_Details_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Function to retrieve a given descriptor's size and memory location from the given descriptor type value, + * index and language ID. This function MUST be overridden in the user application (added with full, identical + * prototype and name except for the ATTR_WEAK attribute) so that the library can call it to retrieve descriptor + * data. + * + * \param wValue The type of the descriptor to retrieve in the upper byte, and the index in the + * lower byte (when more than one descriptor of the given type exists, such as the + * case of string descriptors). The type may be one of the standard types defined + * in the DescriptorTypes_t enum, or may be a class-specific descriptor type value. + * \param wIndex The language ID of the string to return if the wValue type indicates DTYPE_String, + * otherwise zero for standard descriptors, or as defined in a class-specific + * standards. + * \param DescriptorAddress Pointer to the descriptor in memory. This should be set by the routine to + * the location of the descriptor, found by the DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS macro. + * + * \note By default, the library expects all descriptors to be located in flash memory via the PROGMEM attribute. + * If descriptors should be located in RAM or EEPROM instead (to speed up access in the case of RAM, or to + * allow the descriptors to be changed dynamically at runtime) either the USE_SRAM_DESCRIPTORS or the + * USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS tokens may be defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler by the -D + * switch. + * + * \return Size in bytes of the descriptor if it exists, zero or NO_DESCRIPTOR otherwise + */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_WEAK ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define VERSION_TENS(x) (int)(x / 10) + #define VERSION_ONES(x) (int)(x - (10 * VERSION_TENS(x))) + #define VERSION_TENTHS(x) (int)((x - (int)x) * 10) + #define VERSION_HUNDREDTHS(x) (int)(((x - (int)x) * 100) - (10 * VERSION_TENTHS(x))) + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58faa69d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" +#include "USBInterrupt.h" + +void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void) +{ + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) + USBCON &= ~((1 << VBUSTE) | (1 << IDTE)); + #elif defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + USBCON &= ~(1 << VBUSTE); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + UHIEN = 0; + OTGIEN = 0; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + UDIEN = 0; + #endif +} + +void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void) +{ + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + USBINT = 0; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + UHINT = 0; + OTGINT = 0; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + UDINT = 0; + #endif +} + +ISR(USB_GEN_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBUS) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBUS)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUS); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + + if (USB_VBUS_GetStatus()) + { + RAISE_EVENT(USB_VBUSConnect); + + if (USB_IsConnected) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + + USB_IsConnected = true; + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Connect); + } + else + { + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_Detach(); + USB_CLK_Freeze(); + USB_PLL_Off(); + USB_REG_Off(); + + USB_IsConnected = false; + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_VBUSDisconnect); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBUS); + } + } + #endif + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SUSPEND) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SUSPEND)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP); + + USB_CLK_Freeze(); + + if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL)) + USB_PLL_Off(); + + USB_IsSuspended = true; + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Suspend); + + #if defined(USB_LIMITED_CONTROLLER) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT) + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + USB_IsConnected = false; + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + } + #endif + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_WAKEUP) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_WAKEUP)) + { + if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL)) + { + USB_PLL_On(); + while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady())); + } + + USB_CLK_Unfreeze(); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_WAKEUP); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_WAKEUP); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + + #if defined(USB_LIMITED_CONTROLLER) && !defined(NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT) + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + { + USB_IsConnected = true; + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Connect); + } + #endif + + USB_IsSuspended = false; + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_WakeUp); + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_EORSTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_EORSTI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_EORSTI); + + USB_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_WAKEUP); + + Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, USB_ControlEndpointSize, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Reset); + } + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DDISCI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_DDISCI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_VBERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_VBERRI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_HostError, HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip); + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached; + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SRPI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_SRPI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SRPI); + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_SRPI); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Attached; + } + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_BCERRI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_BCERRI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_BCERRI); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed, HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected, 0); + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + if (USB_IsConnected) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_IDTI) && USB_INT_IsEnabled(USB_INT_IDTI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI); + + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + else + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + } + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_UIDChange); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } + #endif +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8438a589 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main USB interrupt vector handler. This file manages the main USB interrupt vector, for handling such + * events as VBUS interrupts (on supported USB AVR models), device connections and disconnections, etc. + */ + +#ifndef __USBINTERRUPT_H__ +#define __USBINTERRUPT_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../LowLevel/LowLevel.h" + #include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + #include "Events.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Vector name for the common endpoint and pipe vector. This can be used to write an ISR handler + * for the endpoint and pipe events, to make certain USB functions interrupt rather than poll + * driven. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect USB_COM_vect + + /** Enables the given USB interrupt vector (such as the ENDPOINT_INT_* and PIPE_INT_* vectors in + * Endpoint.h and Pipe.h). + */ + #define USB_INT_Enable(int) MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int) |= USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int); }MACROE + + /** Disables the given USB interrupt vector. + * + * \see USB_INT_Enable() + */ + #define USB_INT_Disable(int) MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int) &= ~(USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int)); }MACROE + + /** Resets the given USB interrupt flag, so that the interrupt is re-primed for the next firing. */ + #define USB_INT_Clear(int) MACROS{ USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int) &= ~(USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)); }MACROE + + /** Returns boolean false if the given USB interrupt is disabled, or true if the interrupt is currently + * enabled. + */ + #define USB_INT_IsEnabled(int) ((USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(int) & USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(int)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns boolean true if the given interrupt flag is set (i.e. the condition for the interrupt has occurred, + * but the interrupt vector is not neccesarily enabled), otherwise returns false. + */ + #define USB_INT_HasOccurred(int) ((USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(int) & USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(int)) ? true : false) + + /* Throwable Events: */ + /** This module raises the USB Connected interrupt when the AVR is attached to a host while in device + * USB mode. + * + * \note For the smaller USB AVRs (AT90USBXX2) with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller. + * this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default, + * which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state + * needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by + * passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection + * and disconnection events may be manually fired by RAISE_EVENT(), and the USB_IsConnected global changed manually. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** This module raises the USB Disconnected interrupt when the AVR is removed from a host while in + * device USB mode. + * + * \note For the smaller USB AVRs (AT90USBXX2) with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller. + * this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default, + * which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state + * needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by + * passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection + * and disconnection events may be manually fired by RAISE_EVENT(), and the USB_IsConnected global changed manually. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the VBUS Change event when the current VBUS status (present or not present) has + * changed. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support VBUS interrupts; this event only exists on supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_VBUSChange); + + /** This module raises the VBUS Connect event when the VBUS line is powered. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support VBUS interrupts; this event only exists on supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_VBUSConnect); + + /** This module raises the VBUS Disconnect event when power is removed from the VBUS line. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support VBUS interrupts; this event only exists on supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_VBUSDisconnect); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the Suspended event when the host suspends the USB interface of the AVR + * whilst running in device mode. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Suspend); + + /** This module raises the Wake Up event when the host resumes the USB interface of the AVR + * whilst running in device mode. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_WakeUp); + + /** This module raises the USB Reset event when the host resets the USB interface of the AVR + * whilst running in device mode. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Reset); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the Host Error event when the VBUS line voltage dips below the minimum threshold + * while running in host mode. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support host mode; this event only exists on supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_HostError); + + /** This module raises the Device Unattached event when an attached device is removed from the AVR whilst + * running in host mode. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support host mode; this event only exists on supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the UID Change event when the UID line changes in value on dual-role devices. + * + * \note Not all USB AVR models support host mode and thus the UID pin; this event only exists on + * supported AVRs. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_UIDChange); + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define USB_INT_GET_EN_REG(a, b, c, d) a + #define USB_INT_GET_EN_MASK(a, b, c, d) b + #define USB_INT_GET_INT_REG(a, b, c, d) c + #define USB_INT_GET_INT_MASK(a, b, c, d) d + + #define USB_INT_VBUS USBCON, (1 << VBUSTE) , USBINT, (1 << VBUSTI) + #define USB_INT_IDTI USBCON, (1 << IDTE) , USBINT, (1 << IDTI) + #define USB_INT_WAKEUP UDIEN , (1 << WAKEUPE), UDINT , (1 << WAKEUPI) + #define USB_INT_SUSPEND UDIEN , (1 << SUSPE) , UDINT , (1 << SUSPI) + #define USB_INT_EORSTI UDIEN , (1 << EORSTE) , UDINT , (1 << EORSTI) + #define USB_INT_DCONNI UHIEN , (1 << DCONNE) , UHINT , (1 << DCONNI) + #define USB_INT_DDISCI UHIEN , (1 << DDISCE) , UHINT , (1 << DDISCI) + #define USB_INT_BCERRI OTGIEN, (1 << BCERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << BCERRI) + #define USB_INT_VBERRI OTGIEN, (1 << VBERRE) , OTGINT, (1 << VBERRI) + #define USB_INT_SOFI UDIEN, (1 << SOFE) , UDINT , (1 << SOFI) + #define USB_INT_HSOFI UHIEN, (1 << HSOFE) , UHINT , (1 << HSOFI) + #define USB_INT_RSTI UHIEN , (1 << RSTE) , UHINT , (1 << RSTI) + #define USB_INT_SRPI OTGIEN, (1 << SRPE) , OTGINT, (1 << SRPI) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(void); + void USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(void); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32b4db32 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C +#include "USBTask.h" + +volatile bool USB_IsSuspended; +volatile bool USB_IsConnected; +volatile bool USB_IsInitialized; + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) +volatile uint8_t USB_HostState; +#endif + +TASK(USB_USBTask) +{ + #if defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) + USB_HostTask(); + #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) + USB_DeviceTask(); + #else + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + USB_DeviceTask(); + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + USB_HostTask(); + #endif +} + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) +static void USB_DeviceTask(void) +{ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + uint8_t PrevEndpoint = Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint(); + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + + if (Endpoint_IsSetupReceived()) + { + ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + { + USB_Device_ProcessControlPacket(); + } + } + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(PrevEndpoint); + } +} +#endif + +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) +static void USB_HostTask(void) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError; + uint8_t SubErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError; + + static uint16_t WaitMSRemaining; + static uint8_t PostWaitState; + + switch (USB_HostState) + { + case HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice: + if (WaitMSRemaining) + { + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful) + { + USB_HostState = PostWaitState; + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage; + break; + } + + WaitMSRemaining--; + } + else + { + USB_HostState = PostWaitState; + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Attached: + WaitMSRemaining = HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS; + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForDeviceSettle; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForDeviceSettle: + _delay_ms(1); + + if (!(WaitMSRemaining--)) + { + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off(); + + USB_OTGPAD_On(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On(); + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForConnect; + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForConnect: + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_DCONNI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DCONNI); + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_VBERRI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBERRI); + + USB_IsConnected = true; + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + Pipe_ClearPipes(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Attached_DoReset); + } + + break; + case HOST_STATE_Attached_DoReset: + USB_Host_ResetDevice(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Powered); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Powered: + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, + PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured())) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError; + SubErrorCode = 0; + break; + } + + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Default; + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default: + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_GetDescriptor, + wValue: (DTYPE_Device << 8), + wIndex: 0, + wLength: PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE, + }; + + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) + uint8_t* DataBuffer = alloca(offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size) + 1); + #else + uint8_t* DataBuffer = alloca(offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, bMaxPacketSize0) + 1); + #endif + + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(DataBuffer)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError; + break; + } + + #if defined(USE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES) + USB_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, Endpoint0Size)]; + #else + USB_ControlPipeSize = DataBuffer[offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t, bMaxPacketSize0)]; + #endif + + USB_Host_ResetDevice(); + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(200, HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset: + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + Pipe_DeallocateMemory(); + Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, EP_TYPE_CONTROL, + PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP, PIPE_CONTROLPIPE, + USB_ControlPipeSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE); + + if (!(Pipe_IsConfigured())) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError; + SubErrorCode = 0; + break; + } + + Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests(); + + USB_HostRequest = (USB_Host_Request_Header_t) + { + bmRequestType: (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE), + bRequest: REQ_SetAddress, + wValue: USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: 0, + }; + + if ((SubErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError; + break; + } + + HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(100, HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet); + break; + case HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet: + USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Addressed; + + break; + } + + if ((ErrorCode != HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError) && (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Unattached)) + { + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed, ErrorCode, SubErrorCode); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + if (USB_IsConnected) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_ResetInterface(); + } +} +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fcc2bbb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.h @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main library USB management task for both Host and Device mode operations. This contains the master + * USB_USBTask task which should be periodically run to service both host and device USB projects. + */ + +#ifndef __USBTASK_H__ +#define __USBTASK_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Scheduler/Scheduler.h" + #include "../LowLevel/LowLevel.h" + #include "../LowLevel/HostChapter9.h" + #include "../LowLevel/USBMode.h" + #include "Events.h" + #include "StdDescriptors.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Global Variables: */ + /** Indicates if the USB interface is currently connected to a host if in device mode, or to a + * device while running in host mode. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + * + * \note For the smaller USB AVRs (AT90USBXX2) with limited USB controllers, VBUS is not available to the USB controller. + * this means that the current connection state is derived from the bus suspension and wake up events by default, + * which is not always accurate (host may suspend the bus while still connected). If the actual connection state + * needs to be determined, VBUS should be routed to an external pin, and the auto-detect behaviour turned off by + * passing the NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT token to the compiler via the -D switch at compile time. The connection + * and disconnection events may be manually fired by RAISE_EVENT(), and the USB_IsConnected global changed manually. + */ + extern volatile bool USB_IsConnected; + + /** Indicates if the USB interface is currently initialized but not neccesarily connected to a host + * or device (i.e. if USB_Init() has been run). If this is false, all other library globals are invalid. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern volatile bool USB_IsInitialized; + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates if the USB interface is currently suspended by the host when in device mode. When suspended, + * the device should consume minimal power, and cannot communicate to the host. If Remote Wakeup is + * supported by the device and USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled is true, suspension can be terminated by the device + * by issuing a Remote Wakup request. + * + * \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB device. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern volatile bool USB_IsSuspended; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the current host state machine state. When in host mode, this indicates the state + * via one of the values of the USB_Host_States_t enum values in Host.h. + * + * This value may be altered by the user application to implement the HOST_STATE_Addressed, + * HOST_STATE_Configured, HOST_STATE_Ready and HOST_STATE_Suspended states which are not implemented + * by the library. + * + * \note This global is only present if the user application can be a USB host. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_HostState; + #endif + + /* Throwable Events: */ + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the USB Connect event when a USB device has been connected whilst in host + * mode, but not yet enumerated. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** This module raises the USB Device Attached event when in host mode, and a device is attached + * to the AVR's USB interface. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceAttached); + + /** This module raises the USB Device Unattached event when in host mode, and a device is removed + * from the AVR's USB interface. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceUnattached); + + /** This module raises the USB Device Enumeration Failed event when in host mode, and an + * attached USB device has failed to successfully enumerated. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed); + + /** This module raises the USB Device Enumeration Complete event when in host mode, and an + * attached USB device has been successfully enumerated and ready to be used by the user + * application. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + + /** This module raises the USB Disconnect event when an attached USB device is removed from the USB + * bus. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + #endif + + /* Tasks: */ + /** This is the main USB management task. The USB driver requires that this task be executed + * continuously when the USB system is active (device attached in host mode, or attached to a host + * in device mode) in order to manage USB communications. This task may be executed inside an RTOS, + * scheduler (e.g. the simple LUFA Scheduler), fast timer ISR or the main user application loop. + * + * The USB task must be serviced within 50mS in all modes, when needed. The task may be serviced + * at all times, or (for minimum CPU consumption): + * + * - In device mode, it may be disabled at startup, enabled on the firing of the USB_Connect event + * and disabled again on the firing of the USB_Disconnect event. + * + * - In host mode, it may be disabled at startup, enabled on the firing of the USB_DeviceAttached + * event and disabled again on the firing of the USB_DeviceUnattached event. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on the USB events. + */ + TASK(USB_USBTask); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_USBTASK_C) + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + static void USB_HostTask(void); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + static void USB_DeviceTask(void); + #endif + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + #define HOST_TASK_NONBLOCK_WAIT(duration, nextstate) {USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice; WaitMSRemaining = duration; PostWaitState = nextstate; } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ea3f417 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c @@ -0,0 +1,313 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C +#include "DevChapter9.h" + +uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber; +bool USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled; +bool USB_CurrentlySelfPowered; + +void USB_Device_ProcessControlPacket(void) +{ + uint8_t bmRequestType = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + uint8_t bRequest = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + bool RequestHandled = false; + + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetStatus: + if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) || + (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT))) + { + USB_Device_GetStatus(bmRequestType); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; +#if !defined(NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST) + case REQ_ClearFeature: + case REQ_SetFeature: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT)) + { + USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(bRequest, bmRequestType); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; +#endif + case REQ_SetAddress: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) + { + USB_Device_SetAddress(); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; + case REQ_GetDescriptor: + if ((bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) || + (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE))) + { + USB_Device_GetDescriptor(); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; + case REQ_GetConfiguration: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) + { + USB_Device_GetConfiguration(); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; + case REQ_SetConfiguration: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE)) + { + USB_Device_SetConfiguration(); + RequestHandled = true; + } + + break; + } + + if (!(RequestHandled)) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket, bRequest, bmRequestType); + + if (Endpoint_IsSetupReceived()) + { + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + } +} + +static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void) +{ + uint8_t wValue_LSB = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + UDADDR = ((1 << ADDEN) | (wValue_LSB & 0x7F)); + + return; +} + +static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void) +{ + uint8_t wValue_LSB = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + bool AlreadyConfigured = (USB_ConfigurationNumber != 0); + +#if defined(USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION) + if (wValue_LSB > 1) +#else + USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DevDescriptorPtr; + + if ((USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DevDescriptorPtr) == NO_DESCRIPTOR) || + #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) + (wValue_LSB > DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations)) + #elif defined (USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) + (wValue_LSB > eeprom_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations))) + #else + (wValue_LSB > pgm_read_byte(&DevDescriptorPtr->NumberOfConfigurations))) + #endif +#endif + { + return; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + USB_ConfigurationNumber = wValue_LSB; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + if (!(AlreadyConfigured) && USB_ConfigurationNumber) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + + RAISE_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); +} + +void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void) +{ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + Endpoint_Write_Byte(USB_ConfigurationNumber); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); +} + +static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void) +{ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + void* DescriptorPointer; + uint16_t DescriptorSize; + + bool SendZLP; + + if ((DescriptorSize = USB_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, &DescriptorPointer)) == NO_DESCRIPTOR) + return; + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + if (wLength > DescriptorSize) + wLength = DescriptorSize; + + while (wLength) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())) + { + if (Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + return; + } + } + + while (wLength && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < USB_ControlEndpointSize)) + { + #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*((uint8_t*)DescriptorPointer++)); + #elif defined (USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(eeprom_read_byte(DescriptorPointer++)); + #else + Endpoint_Write_Byte(pgm_read_byte(DescriptorPointer++)); + #endif + + wLength--; + } + + SendZLP = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == USB_ControlEndpointSize); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + if (SendZLP) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); +} + +static void USB_Device_GetStatus(const uint8_t bmRequestType) +{ + uint8_t CurrentStatus = 0; + + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + uint8_t wIndex_LSB = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + switch (bmRequestType) + { + case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE): + if (USB_CurrentlySelfPowered) + CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED; + + if (USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled) + CurrentStatus |= FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED; + + break; + case (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT): + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(wIndex_LSB); + + CurrentStatus = Endpoint_IsStalled(); + + break; + } + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(CurrentStatus); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); +} + +#if !defined(NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST) +static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(const uint8_t bRequest, const uint8_t bmRequestType) +{ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + switch (bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT) + { + case REQREC_ENDPOINT: + if (wValue == FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT) + { + uint8_t EndpointIndex = (wIndex & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK); + + if (EndpointIndex != ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP) + { + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EndpointIndex); + + if (Endpoint_IsEnabled()) + { + if (bRequest == REQ_ClearFeature) + { + Endpoint_ClearStall(); + Endpoint_ResetFIFO(EndpointIndex); + Endpoint_ResetDataToggle(); + } + else + { + Endpoint_StallTransaction(); + } + } + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP); + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + } + + break; + } +} +#endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e1772a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.h @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Module for device mode request processing. This module allows for the processing of standard control + * requests to the default control endpoint while in device mode. + * + * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + +#ifndef __DEVCHAPTER9_H__ +#define __DEVCHAPTER9_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h" + #include "../HighLevel/Events.h" + #include "LowLevel.h" + #include "StdRequestType.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Global Variables: */ + /** Indicates the currently set configuration number of the device. USB devices may have several + * different configurations which the host can select between; this indicates the currently selected + * value, or 0 if no configuration has been selected. + * + * If a device has only one single configuration, the token USE_SINGLE_DEVICE_CONFIGURATION may be + * defined in the project makefile and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. This optimize for + * a single configuration, saving a small amount of space in the resulting compiled binary. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern uint8_t USB_ConfigurationNumber; + + /** Indicates if the host is currently allowing the device to issue remote wakeup events. If this + * flag is cleared, the device should not issue remote wakeup events to the host. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern bool USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled; + + /** Indicates if the device is currently being powered by its own power supply, rather than being + * powered by the host's USB supply. This flag should remain cleared if the device does not + * support self powered mode, as indicated in the device descriptors. + */ + extern bool USB_CurrentlySelfPowered; + + /* Throwable Events: */ + /** This module raises the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when a request to the default control + * endpoint has been received, but the library does not implement an internal handler for it. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /** This module raises the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when the host issues a REQ_SetConfiguration + * device request, to change the currently selected configuration number. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** This module raises the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event when the host has completed its + * enumeration of the device (i.e. when a REQ_SetConfiguration request changes the current configuration + * number from 0 to a non-zero value). + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) + #error USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive. + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USB_Device_ProcessControlPacket(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DEVCHAPTER9_C) + static void USB_Device_SetAddress(void); + static void USB_Device_SetConfiguration(void); + static void USB_Device_GetConfiguration(void); + static void USB_Device_GetDescriptor(void); + static void USB_Device_GetStatus(const uint8_t bmRequestType); + #if !defined(NO_CLEARSET_FEATURE_REQUEST) + static void USB_Device_ClearSetFeature(const uint8_t bRequest, const uint8_t bmRequestType); + #endif + #endif + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..187fccb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Device.h @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when + * the USB controller is initialized in device mode. + */ + +#ifndef __USBDEVICE_H__ +#define __USBDEVICE_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h" + #include "Endpoint.h" + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in low speed (1.5Mb/s) mode. + * + * \note Low Speed mode is not available on all USB AVR models. + * + * \note Restrictions apply on the number, size and type of endpoints which can be used + * when running in low speed mode -- refer to the USB 2.0 standard. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED (1 << 0) + #endif + + /** Mask for the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface should be initialized in full speed (12Mb/s) mode. + */ + #define USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED (0 << 0) + + /** Sends a Remote Wakeup request to the host. This signals to the host that the device should + * be taken out of suspended mode, and communications should resume. + * + * Typically, this is implemented so that HID devices (mice, keyboards, etc.) can wake up the + * host computer when the host has suspended all USB devices to enter a low power state. + * + * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it + * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors, and should only be + * issued if the host is currently allowing remote wakeup events from the device (i.e., + * the USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled flag is set, see DevChapter9.h documentation). + * + * \see StdDescriptors.h for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors. + */ + #define USB_Device_SendRemoteWakeup() MACROS{ UDCON |= (1 << RMWKUP); }MACROE + + /** Indicates if a Remote Wakeup request is being sent to the host. This returns true if a + * remote wakeup is currently being sent, false otherwise. + * + * This can be used in conjunction with the USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() macro to determine if + * a sent RMWAKEUP request was accepted or rejected by the host. + * + * \note This macro should only be used if the device has indicated to the host that it + * supports the Remote Wakeup feature in the device descriptors. + * + * \see StdDescriptors.h for more information on the RMWAKEUP feature and device descriptors. + */ + #define USB_Device_IsRemoteWakeupSent() ((UDCON & (1 << RMWKUP)) ? false : true) + + /** Indicates if the device is currently suspended by the host. While suspended, the device is + * to enter a low power state until resumed by the host. While suspended no USB traffic to or + * from the device can ocurr (except for Remote Wakeup requests). + * + * This macro returns true if the USB communications have been suspended by the host, false + * otherwise. + */ + #define USB_Device_IsUSBSuspended() ((UDINT & (1 << SUSPI)) ? true : false) + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the ErrorCode parameter of the USB_DeviceError event. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + enum USB_Device_ErrorCodes_t + { + DEVICE_ERROR_GetDescriptorNotHooked = 0, /**< Indicates that the GetDescriptor() method + * has not been hooked by the user application. + * + * \see StdDescriptors.h for more information on + * the GetDescriptor() method. + */ + }; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define USB_Device_SetLowSpeed() MACROS{ UDCON |= (1 << LSM); }MACROE + #define USB_Device_SetHighSpeed() MACROS{ UDCON &= ~(1 << LSM); }MACROE + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..273e1908 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c @@ -0,0 +1,387 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_ENDPOINT_C +#include "Endpoint.h" + +#if !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) +uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize = ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE; +#endif + +#if !defined(STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION) +bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks) +{ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number); + Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(); + + UECFG1X = 0; + + UECFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Direction); + UECFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)); + + return Endpoint_IsConfigured(); +} +#else +bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointStatic(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData) +{ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(Number); + Endpoint_EnableEndpoint(); + + UECFG1X = 0; + + UECFG0X = UECFG0XData; + UECFG1X = UECFG1XData; + + return Endpoint_IsConfigured(); +} +#endif + +void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void) +{ + UEINT = 0; + + for (uint8_t EPNum = 0; EPNum < ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS; EPNum++) + { + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(EPNum); + UEIENX = 0; + UEINTX = 0; + Endpoint_DeallocateMemory(); + Endpoint_DisableEndpoint(); + } +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void) +{ + uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI); + + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected; + else if (Endpoint_IsStalled()) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled; + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_SOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_SOFI); + + if (!(TimeoutMSRem--)) + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout; + } + } + + return ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Endpoint_Discard_Byte(); + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Buffer; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++)); + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Buffer + Length - 1); + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(DataStream--)); + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Buffer; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + *(DataStream++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Buffer + Length - 1); + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + *(DataStream--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + } + + return ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Buffer; + bool SendZLP = true; + + while (Length && !(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + while (Length && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < USB_ControlEndpointSize)) + { + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++)); + + Length--; + } + + SendZLP = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == USB_ControlEndpointSize); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + if (Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_HostAborted; + + if (SendZLP) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Buffer + Length - 1); + bool SendZLP = true; + + while (Length && !(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + while (Length && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < USB_ControlEndpointSize)) + { + Endpoint_Write_Byte(*(DataStream--)); + + Length--; + } + + SendZLP = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == USB_ControlEndpointSize); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + if (Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived()) + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_HostAborted; + + if (SendZLP) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Buffer; + + while (Length) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + *(DataStream++) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + Length--; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Buffer + Length - 1); + + while (Length) + { + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived())); + + while (Length && Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + *(DataStream--) = Endpoint_Read_Byte(); + + Length--; + } + + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + while (!(Endpoint_IsSetupINReady())); + + return ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f317041 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.h @@ -0,0 +1,842 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions, macros and enums related to endpoint management when in USB Device mode. This + * module contains the endpoint management macros, as well as endpoint interrupt and data + * send/recieve functions for various datatypes. + */ + +#ifndef __ENDPOINT_H__ +#define __ENDPOINT_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h" + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "StreamCallbacks.h" + #endif + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint data direction mask for Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the OUT direction - i.e. data flows from host to device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT 0 + + /** Endpoint data direction mask for Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(). This indicates that the endpoint + * should be initialized in the IN direction - i.e. data flows from device to host. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DIR_IN (1 << EPDIR) + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results + * in slower transfers as only one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access the endpoint's + * bank at the one time. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE 0 + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro. This indicates + * that the endpoint should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results + * in faster transfers as one USB device (the AVR or the host) can access one bank while the other + * accesses the second bank. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE (1 << EPBK0) + + /** Endpoint address for the default control endpoint, which always resides in address 0. This is + * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the endpoint macros. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP 0 + + /** Default size of the default control endpoint's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value + * in the device descriptor. Not available if the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token is defined. + */ + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + #define ENDPOINT_CONTROLEP_DEFAULT_SIZE 8 + #endif + + /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * numerical address in the device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK 0b111 + + /** Endpoint bank size mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * bank size in the device. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_EPSIZE_MASK 0x7FF + + /** Maximum size in bytes of a given endpoint. + * + * \param n Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_MAX_SIZE(n) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n) + + /** Indicates if the given endpoint supports double banking. + * + * \param n Endpoint number, a value between 0 and (ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS - 1) + */ + #define ENDPOINT_DOUBLEBANK_SUPPORTED(n) _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Total number of endpoints (including the default control endpoint at address 0) which may + * be used in the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of endpoints, + * this value reflects the maximum number of endpoints for the currently selected AVR model. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 7 + #else + #define ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS 5 + #endif + + /** Interrupt definition for the endpoint SETUP interrupt (for CONTROL type endpoints). Should be + * used with the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on a CONTROL type endpoint if a new control packet is + * received from the host. + */ + #define ENDPOINT_INT_SETUP UEIENX, (1 << RXSTPE), UEINTX, (1 << RXSTPI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the endpoint IN interrupt (for INTERRUPT type endpoints). Should be + * used with the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on an INTERRUPT type endpoint if a the endpoint interrupt + * period has elapsed and the endpoint is ready for a new packet to be written to its FIFO buffer + * (if required). + */ + #define ENDPOINT_INT_IN UEIENX, (1 << TXINE) , UEINTX, (1 << TXINI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the endpoint OUT interrupt (for INTERRUPT type endpoints). Should be + * used with the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on an INTERRUPT type endpoint if a the endpoint interrupt + * period has elapsed and the endpoint is ready for a packet from the host to be read from its + * FIFO buffer (if received). + */ + #define ENDPOINT_INT_OUT UEIENX, (1 << RXOUTE), UEINTX, (1 << RXOUTI) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current endpoint's selected bank. */ + #define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() UEBCX + #else + #define Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() UEBCLX + #endif + + /** Returns the endpoint address of the currently selected endpoint. This is typically used to save + * the currently selected endpoint number so that it can be restored after another endpoint has + * been manipulated. + */ + #define Endpoint_GetCurrentEndpoint() (UENUM & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) + + /** Selects the given endpoint number. If the address from the device descriptors is used, the + * value should be masked with the ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK constant to extract only the endpoint + * number (and discarding the endpoint direction bit). + * + * Any endpoint operations which do not require the endpoint number to be indicated will operate on + * the currently selected endpoint. + */ + #define Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(epnum) MACROS{ UENUM = epnum; }MACROE + + /** Resets the endpoint bank FIFO. This clears all the endpoint banks and resets the USB controller's + * In and Out pointers to the bank's contents. + */ + #define Endpoint_ResetFIFO(epnum) MACROS{ UERST = (1 << epnum); UERST = 0; }MACROE + + /** Enables the currently selected endpoint so that data can be sent and received through it to + * and from a host. + * + * \note Endpoints must first be configured properly rather than just being enabled via the + * Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint() macro, which calls Endpoint_EnableEndpoint() automatically. + */ + #define Endpoint_EnableEndpoint() MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << EPEN); }MACROE + + /** Disables the currently selected endpoint so that data cannot be sent and received through it + * to and from a host. + */ + #define Endpoint_DisableEndpoint() MACROS{ UECONX &= ~(1 << EPEN); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the currently selected endpoint is enabled, false otherwise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsEnabled() ((UECONX & (1 << EPEN)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the currently selected endpoint may be read from (if data is waiting in the endpoint + * bank and the endpoint is an OUT direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the endpoint is an + * IN direction). This function will return false if an error has occured in the endpoint, or if + * the endpoint is an OUT direction and no packet has been received, or if the endpoint is an IN + * direction and the endpoint bank is full. + */ + #define Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed() ((UEINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the currently selected endpoint is configured, false otherwise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsConfigured() ((UESTA0X & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns a mask indicating which INTERRUPT type endpoints have interrupted - i.e. their + * interrupt duration has elapsed. Which endpoints have interrupted can be determined by + * masking the return value against (1 << {Endpoint Number}). + */ + #define Endpoint_GetEndpointInterrupts() UEINT + + /** Clears the endpoint interrupt flag. This clears the specified endpoint number's interrupt + * mask in the endpoint interrupt flag register. + */ + #define Endpoint_ClearEndpointInterrupt(n) MACROS{ UEINT &= ~(1 << n); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the specified endpoint number has interrupted (valid only for INTERRUPT type + * endpoints), false otherwise. + */ + #define Endpoint_HasEndpointInterrupted(n) ((UEINT & (1 << n)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the currently selected endpoint bank, and switches to the alternate bank if the currently + * selected endpoint is dual-banked. When cleared, this either frees the bank up for the next packet + * from the host (if the endpoint is of the OUT direction) or sends the packet contents to the host + * (if the endpoint is of the IN direction). + */ + #define Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << FIFOCON); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the current CONTROL type endpoint is ready for an IN packet, false otherwise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsSetupINReady() ((UEINTX & (1 << TXINI)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the current CONTROL type endpoint is ready for an OUT packet, false otherwise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsSetupOUTReceived() ((UEINTX & (1 << RXOUTI)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the current CONTROL type endpoint is ready for a SETUP packet, false otherwise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsSetupReceived() ((UEINTX & (1 << RXSTPI)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears a received SETUP packet on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint. */ + #define Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived() MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTPI); }MACROE + + /** Sends an IN packet to the host on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint. */ + #define Endpoint_ClearSetupIN() MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << TXINI); }MACROE + + /** Acknowedges an OUT packet to the host on the currently selected CONTROL type endpoint, freeing + * up the endpoint for the next packet. + */ + #define Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT() MACROS{ UEINTX &= ~(1 << RXOUTI); }MACROE + + /** Stalls the current endpoint, indicating to the host that a logical problem occured with the + * indicated endpoint and that the current transfer sequence should be aborted. This provides a + * way for devices to indicate invalid commands to the host so that the current transfer can be + * aborted and the host can begin its own recovery seqeuence. + * + * The currently selected endpoint remains stalled until either the Endpoint_ClearStall() macro + * is called, or the host issues a CLEAR FEATURE request to the device for the currently selected + * endpoint. + */ + #define Endpoint_StallTransaction() MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQ); }MACROE + + /** Clears the stall on the currently selected endpoint. */ + #define Endpoint_ClearStall() MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << STALLRQC); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the currently selected endpoint is stalled, false othewise. */ + #define Endpoint_IsStalled() ((UECONX & (1 << STALLRQ)) ? true : false) + + /** Resets the data toggle of the currently selected endpoint. */ + #define Endpoint_ResetDataToggle() MACROS{ UECONX |= (1 << RSTDT); }MACROE + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_WaitUntilReady function */ + enum Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Endpoint is ready for next packet, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream + * transfer by the host or device. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while + * waiting for the endpoint to become ready. + */ + ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_Timeout = 3, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_EndpointStalled = 1, /**< The endpoint was stalled during the stream + * transfer by the host or device. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected = 1, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during + * the transfer. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout = 2, /**< The host failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted = 3, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function + * aborted the transfer early. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Endpoint_*_Control_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + ENDPOINT_RWCSTREAM_ERROR_HostAborted = 1, /**< The aborted the transfer prematurely. */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Reads one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Byte(void) + { + return UEDATX; + } + + /** Writes one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for IN direction endpoints. */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + UEDATX = Byte; + } + + /** Discards one byte from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Byte(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UEDATX; + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(void) + { + uint16_t Data; + + Data = UEDATX; + Data |= (((uint16_t)UEDATX) << 8); + + return Data; + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t Endpoint_Read_Word_BE(void) + { + uint16_t Data; + + Data = (((uint16_t)UEDATX) << 8); + Data |= UEDATX; + + return Data; + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) + { + UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF); + UEDATX = (Word >> 8); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) + { + UEDATX = (Word >> 8); + UEDATX = (Word & 0xFF); + } + + /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_Word(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UEDATX; + Dummy = UEDATX; + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(void) + { + union + { + uint32_t DWord; + uint8_t Bytes[4]; + } Data; + + Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX; + + return Data.DWord; + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Endpoint_Read_DWord_BE(void) + { + union + { + uint32_t DWord; + uint8_t Bytes[4]; + } Data; + + Data.Bytes[3] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[2] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[1] = UEDATX; + Data.Bytes[0] = UEDATX; + + return Data.DWord; + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) + { + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(DWord); + Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(DWord >> 16); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected endpoint's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction endpoints. + */ + static inline void Endpoint_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) + { + Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(DWord >> 16); + Endpoint_Write_Word_BE(DWord); + } + + /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected endpoint's bank, for OUT direction endpoints. */ + static inline void Endpoint_Discard_DWord(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UEDATX; + Dummy = UEDATX; + Dummy = UEDATX; + Dummy = UEDATX; + } + + /* External Variables: */ + /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control endpoint located at address + * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the device descriptor in the user + * project once the USB interface is initialized into device mode. + * + * If space is an issue, it is possible to fix this to a static value by defining the control + * endpoint size in the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token passed to the compiler in the makefile + * via the -D switch. When a fixed control endpoint size is used, the size is no longer dynamically + * read from the descriptors at runtime and instead fixed to the given value. When used, it is + * important that the descriptor control endpoint size value matches the size given as the + * FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token - it is recommended that the FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE token + * be used in the descriptors to ensure this. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + #if (!defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + extern uint8_t USB_ControlEndpointSize; + #else + #define USB_ControlEndpointSize FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Configures the specified endpoint number with the given endpoint type, direction, bank size + * and banking mode. Endpoints should be allocated in ascending order by their address in the + * device (i.e. endpoint 1 should be configured before endpoint 2 and so on). + * + * The endpoint type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h and the direction + * may be either ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT or ENDPOINT_DIR_IN. + * + * The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the endpoint can handle. Different + * endpoint numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's + * datasheet to determine the maximum bank size for each endpoint. + * + * The banking mode may be either ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE or ENDPOINT_BANK_DOUBLE. + * + * The success of this routine can be determined via the Endpoint_IsConfigured() macro. + * + * By default, the routine is entirely dynamic, and will accept both constant and variable inputs. + * If dynamic configuration is unused, a small space savings can be made by defining the + * STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION macro via the -D switch to the compiler, to optimize for constant + * input values. + * + * \note This routine will select the specified endpoint, and the endpoint will remain selected + * once the routine completes regardless of if the endpoint configuration succeeds. + * + * \return Boolean true if the configuration succeeded, false otherwise + */ + bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Direction, + const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks); + + /** Spinloops until the currently selected non-control endpoint is ready for the next packet of data + * to be read or written to it. + * + * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(void); + + /** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer, + * discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically + * discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually + * discarding the last packet from the host via the Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between + * each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next + * packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian, + * sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function + * is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early + * aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian, + * sending full packets to the host as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function + * is executed repeatedly until the endpoint is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early + * aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in little endian, + * discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically + * discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually + * discarding the last packet from the host via the Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between + * each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint + * is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the endpoint from the given buffer in big endian, + * discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The last packet is not automatically + * discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the user is responsible for manually + * discarding the last packet from the host via the Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between + * each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the endpoint + * is ready to accept the next packet, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \note This routine should not be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in little endian, + * sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowedgement is not automatically cleared + * in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to + * finalize the transfer via the Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT() macro. + * + * \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained + * together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer. + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the CONTROL type endpoint from the given buffer in big endian, + * sending full packets to the host as needed. The host OUT acknowedgement is not automatically cleared + * in both failure and success states; the user is responsible for manually clearing the setup OUT to + * finalize the transfer via the Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT() macro. + * + * \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained + * together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected endpoint into the buffer. + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in little endian, + * discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowedgement is not + * automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the + * setup IN to finalize the transfer via the Endpoint_ClearSetupIN() macro. + * + * \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained + * together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the CONTROL endpoint from the given buffer in big endian, + * discarding fully read packets from the host as needed. The device IN acknowedgement is not + * automatically sent after success or failure states; the user is responsible for manually sending the + * setup IN to finalize the transfer via the Endpoint_ClearSetupIN() macro. + * + * \note This routine should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints. + * + * \warning Unlike the standard stream read/write commands, the control stream commands cannot be chained + * together; i.e. the entire stream data must be read or written at the one time. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the destination data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the Endpoint_ControlStream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /* Function Aliases: */ + /** Alias for Endpoint_Discard_Byte(). + */ + #define Endpoint_Ignore_Byte() Endpoint_Discard_Byte() + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Discard_Word(). + */ + #define Endpoint_Ignore_Word() Endpoint_Discard_Word() + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Discard_DWord(). + */ + #define Endpoint_Ignore_DWord() Endpoint_Discard_DWord() + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Read_Word() Endpoint_Read_Word_LE() + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Write_Word(Word) Endpoint_Write_Word_LE(Word) + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Read_DWord() Endpoint_Read_DWord_LE() + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Write_DWord(DWord) Endpoint_Write_DWord_LE(DWord) + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + #define Endpoint_Read_Stream(Buffer, Length, Callback) Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, Callback) + #else + #define Endpoint_Read_Stream(Buffer, Length) Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length) + #endif + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + #define Endpoint_Write_Stream(Buffer, Length, Callback) Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, Callback) + #else + #define Endpoint_Write_Stream(Buffer, Length) Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length) + #endif + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream(Data, Length) Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(Data, Length) + + /** Alias for Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream(Data, Length) Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(Data, Length) + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define Endpoint_AllocateMemory() MACROS{ UECFG1X |= (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE + #define Endpoint_DeallocateMemory() MACROS{ UECFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE + + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE(n) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE2(details) _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(details) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_MAXSIZE3(maxsize, db) maxsize + + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK(n) _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP ## n) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK2(details) _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(details) + #define _ENDPOINT_GET_DOUBLEBANK3(maxsize, db) db + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 256, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP5 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP6 64, true + #else + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP0 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP1 64, false + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP2 64, false + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP3 64, true + #define ENDPOINT_DETAILS_EP4 64, true + #endif + + #if defined(STATIC_ENDPOINT_CONFIGURATION) + #define Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(Number, Type, Direction, Size, Banks) \ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointStatic(Number, \ + ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Direction), \ + ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size))); + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Endpoint_ClearEndpoints(void); + bool Endpoint_ConfigureEndpointStatic(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t UECFG0XData, const uint8_t UECFG1XData); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline uint8_t Endpoint_BytesToEPSizeMask(const uint16_t Bytes) + { + if (Bytes <= 8) + return (0 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 16) + return (1 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 32) + return (2 << EPSIZE0); + #if defined(USB_LIMITED_CONTROLLER) + else + return (3 << EPSIZE0); + #else + else if (Bytes <= 64) + return (3 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 128) + return (4 << EPSIZE0); + else + return (5 << EPSIZE0); + #endif + }; + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7acbffe7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#include "Host.h" + +uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS) +{ + bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(); + uint8_t ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_Successful; + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + + while (MS) + { + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + MS--; + } + + if ((USB_IsConnected == false) || (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE)) + { + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect; + + break; + } + + if (Pipe_IsError() == true) + { + Pipe_ClearError(); + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError; + + break; + } + + if (Pipe_IsStalled() == true) + { + Pipe_ClearStall(); + ErrorCode = HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled; + + break; + } + } + + if (BusSuspended) + USB_Host_SuspendBus(); + + return ErrorCode; +} + +void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void) +{ + bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(); + + USB_INT_Disable(USB_INT_DDISCI); + + USB_Host_ResetBus(); + while (!(USB_Host_IsResetBusDone())); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + + for (uint8_t MSRem = 10; MSRem != 0; MSRem--) + { + /* Workaround for powerless-pullup devices. After a USB bus reset, + all disconnection interrupts are supressed while a USB frame is + looked for - if it is found within 10ms, the device is still + present. */ + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_DDISCI); + break; + } + + _delay_ms(1); + } + + if (BusSuspended) + USB_Host_SuspendBus(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_DDISCI); +} +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cc21545 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.h @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Host mode related macros and enums. This module contains macros and enums which are used when + * the USB controller is initialized in host mode. + */ + +#ifndef __USBHOST_H__ +#define __USBHOST_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates the fixed USB device address which any attached device is enumerated to when in + * host mode. As only one USB device may be attached to the AVR in host mode at any one time + * and that the address used is not important (other than the fact that it is non-zero), a + * fixed value is specified by the library. + */ + #define USB_HOST_DEVICEADDRESS 1 + + #if !defined(USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of sent USB control transactions to an attached + * device. If a device fails to respond to a sent control request within this period, the + * library will return a timeout error code. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS 1000 + #endif + + #if !defined(HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the delay in milliseconds after a device is connected before the library + * will start the enumeration process. Some devices require a delay of up to 5 seconds + * after connection before the enumeration process can start or incorrect operation will + * occur. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS 1500 + #endif + + /** Resets the USB bus, including the endpoints in any attached device and pipes on the AVR host. + * USB bus resets leave the default control pipe configured (if already configured). + * + * If the USB bus has been suspended prior to issuing a bus reset, the attached device will be + * woken up automatically and the bus resumed after the reset has been correctly issued. + */ + #define USB_Host_ResetBus() MACROS{ UHCON |= (1 << RESET); }MACROE + + /** Determines if a previously issued bus reset (via the USB_Host_ResetBus() macro) has + * completed. This macro returns true if no bus reset is currently being sent, false + * otherwise. + */ + #define USB_Host_IsResetBusDone() ((UHCON & (1 << RESET)) ? false : true) + + /** Resumes USB communications with an attached and enumerated device, by resuming the transmission + * of the 1MS Start Of Frame messages to the device. When resumed, USB communications between the + * host and attached device may occur. + */ + #define USB_Host_ResumeBus() MACROS{ UHCON |= (1 << SOFEN); }MACROE + + /** Suspends the USB bus, preventing any communications from occuring between the host and attached + * device until the bus has been resumed. This stops the transmission of the 1MS Start Of Frame + * messages to the device. + */ + #define USB_Host_SuspendBus() MACROS{ UHCON &= ~(1 << SOFEN); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the USB bus has been suspended via the use of the USB_Host_SuspendBus() macro, + * false otherwise. While suspended, no USB communications can occur until the bus is resumed, + * except for the Remote Wakeup event from the device if supported. + */ + #define USB_Host_IsBusSuspended() ((UHCON & (1 << SOFEN)) ? false : true) + + /** Returns true if the attached device is currently enumerated in Full Speed mode (12Mb/s), or + * false if the attached device is enumerated in Low Speed mode (1.5Mb/s). + */ + #define USB_Host_IsDeviceFullSpeed() ((USBSTA & (1 << SPEED)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the attached device is currently issuing a Remote Wakeup request, requesting + * that the host resume the USB bus and wake up the device, false otherwise. + */ + #define USB_Host_IsRemoteWakeupSent() ((UHINT & (1 << RXRSMI)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the flag indicating that a Remote Wakeup request has been issued by an attached + * device. + */ + #define USB_Host_ClearRemoteWakeupSent() MACROS{ UHINT &= ~(1 << RXRSMI); }MACROE + + /** Accepts a Remote Wakeup request from an attached device. This must be issued in response to + * a device's Remote Wakeup request within 2ms for the request to be accepted and the bus to + * be resumed. + */ + #define USB_Host_ResumeFromWakeupRequest() MACROS{ UHCON |= (1 << RESUME); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if no resume from Remote Wakeup request is currently being sent to an attached + * device, false otherwise. + */ + #define USB_Host_IsResumeFromWakeupRequestSent() ((UHCON & (1 << RESUME)) ? false : true) + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the various states of the USB Host state machine. Only some states are + * implemented in the LUFA library - other states are left to the user to implement. + * + * For information on each state, refer to the USB 2.0 specification. Some states have + * + * \see USBTask.h for information on the global variable USB_HostState, which stores the + * current host state machine state. + */ + enum USB_Host_States_t + { + HOST_STATE_WaitForDevice = 0, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Unattached = 1, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Attached = 2, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForDeviceSettle = 3, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Attached_WaitForConnect = 4, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Attached_DoReset = 5, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Powered = 6, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Default = 7, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Default_PostReset = 8, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Default_PostAddressSet = 9, /**< Internally implemented by the library. */ + HOST_STATE_Addressed = 10, /**< May be implemented by the user project. */ + HOST_STATE_Configured = 11, /**< May be implemented by the user project. */ + HOST_STATE_Ready = 12, /**< May be implemented by the user project. */ + HOST_STATE_Suspended = 13, /**< May be implemented by the user project. */ + }; + + /** Enum for the error codes for the USB_HostError event. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + enum USB_Host_ErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_ERROR_VBusVoltageDip = 0, /**< VBUS voltage dipped to an unacceptable level. This + * error may be the result of an attached device drawing + * too much current from the VBUS line, or due to the + * AVR's power source being unable to supply sufficient + * current. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the error codes for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + enum USB_Host_EnumerationErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_ENUMERROR_NoError = 0, /**< No error occurred. Used internally, this is not a valid + * ErrorCode parameter value for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed + * event. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_WaitStage = 1, /**< One of the delays between enumeration steps failed + * to complete successfuly, due to a timeout or other + * error. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_NoDeviceDetected = 2, /**< No device was detected, despite the USB data lines + * indicating the attachment of a device. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_ControlError = 3, /**< One of the enumeration control requests failed to + * complete successfuly. + */ + HOST_ENUMERROR_PipeConfigError = 4, /**< The default control pipe (address 0) failed to + * configure correctly. + */ + }; + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define USB_Host_HostMode_On() MACROS{ USBCON |= (1 << HOST); }MACROE + #define USB_Host_HostMode_Off() MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << HOST); }MACROE + + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Enable() MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON |= (1 << UVCONE); }MACROE + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable() MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << VBUSHWC); UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVCONE); DDRE |= (1 << 7); }MACROE + + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_On() MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << VBUSREQ); }MACROE + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On() MACROS{ PORTE |= (1 << 7); }MACROE + + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off() MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << VBUSRQC); }MACROE + #define USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Off() MACROS{ PORTE &= ~(1 << 7); }MACROE + + #define USB_Host_SetDeviceAddress(addr) MACROS{ UHADDR = (addr & 0b01111111); }MACROE + + /* Enums: */ + enum USB_Host_WaitMSErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_WAITERROR_Successful = 0, + HOST_WAITERROR_DeviceDisconnect = 1, + HOST_WAITERROR_PipeError = 2, + HOST_WAITERROR_SetupStalled = 3, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t USB_Host_WaitMS(uint8_t MS); + void USB_Host_ResetDevice(void); + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a584964 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C +#include "HostChapter9.h" + +USB_Host_Request_Header_t USB_HostRequest; + +uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr) +{ + uint8_t* HeaderStream = (uint8_t*)&USB_HostRequest; + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)BufferPtr; + bool BusSuspended = USB_Host_IsBusSuspended(); + uint8_t ReturnStatus = HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful; + uint16_t DataLen = USB_HostRequest.wLength; + + USB_Host_ResumeBus(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful) + return ReturnStatus; + + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP); + Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(); + Pipe_ClearSetupSent(); + + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + for (uint8_t HeaderByte = 0; HeaderByte < sizeof(USB_Host_Request_Header_t); HeaderByte++) + Pipe_Write_Byte(*(HeaderStream++)); + + Pipe_ClearSetupOUT(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + Pipe_ClearSetupSent(); + Pipe_Freeze(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + if ((USB_HostRequest.bmRequestType & CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION) == REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST) + { + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN); + + if (DataStream != NULL) + { + while (DataLen) + { + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + if (!(Pipe_BytesInPipe())) + DataLen = 0; + + while (Pipe_BytesInPipe() && DataLen) + { + *(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_Byte(); + DataLen--; + } + + Pipe_Freeze(); + Pipe_ClearSetupIN(); + } + } + + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + Pipe_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + else + { + if (DataStream != NULL) + { + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_OUT); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + while (DataLen) + { + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + while (DataLen && (Pipe_BytesInPipe() < USB_ControlPipeSize)) + { + Pipe_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++)); + DataLen--; + } + + Pipe_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + Pipe_Freeze(); + } + + Pipe_SetToken(PIPE_TOKEN_IN); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + if ((ReturnStatus = USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived))) + goto End_Of_Control_Send; + + Pipe_ClearSetupIN(); + } + +End_Of_Control_Send: + Pipe_Freeze(); + + if (BusSuspended) + USB_Host_SuspendBus(); + + Pipe_ResetPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + return ReturnStatus; +} + +static uint8_t USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(const uint8_t WaitType) +{ + uint16_t TimeoutCounter = USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS; + + while (!(((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent) && Pipe_IsSetupSent()) || + ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived) && Pipe_IsSetupINReceived()) || + ((WaitType == USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady) && Pipe_IsSetupOUTReady()))) + { + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_WaitMS(1)) != HOST_WAITERROR_Successful) + return ErrorCode; + + if (!(TimeoutCounter--)) + return HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut; + } + + return HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful; +} + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ca4343a --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.h @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Module for host mode request processing. This module allows for the transmission of standard, class and + * vendor control requests to the default control endpoint of an attached device while in host mode. + * + * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 specification. + */ + +#ifndef __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__ +#define __HOSTCHAPTER9_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "LowLevel.h" + #include "StdRequestType.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a standard USB control request. + * + * \see StdRequestType.h for information on the request type and data. + * \see The USB 2.0 specification for more information on standard control requests. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t bmRequestType; /**< Type of the request. */ + uint8_t bRequest; /**< Request command code. */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< wValue parameter of the request. */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< wIndex parameter of the request. */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Length of the data to transfer in bytes. */ + } USB_Host_Request_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the USB_Host_SendControlRequest() return code, indicating the reason for the error + * if the transfer of the request is unsuccessful. + */ + enum USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t + { + HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful = 0, /**< No error occurred in the request transfer. */ + HOST_SENDCONTROL_DeviceDisconnect = 1, /**< The attached device was disconnected during the + * request transfer. + */ + HOST_SENDCONTROL_PipeError = 2, /**< An error occured in the pipe while sending the request. */ + HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled = 3, /**< The attached device stalled the request, usually + * indicating that the request is unsupported on the device. + */ + HOST_SENDCONTROL_SoftwareTimeOut = 4, /**< The request or data transfer timed out. */ + }; + + /* Global Variables: */ + /** Global for the request to send via the USB_Host_SendControlRequest() function. This + * global should be filled with the correct control request data before sending the request to + * the attached device while in host mode. + */ + extern USB_Host_Request_Header_t USB_HostRequest; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Sends the request stored in the USB_HostRequest global structure to the attached device, + * and transfers the data stored in the buffer to the device, or from the device to the buffer + * as requested. + * + * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the start of the data buffer if the request has a data stage, or + * NULL if the request transfers no data to or from the device. + * + * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum to indicate the result. + */ + uint8_t USB_Host_SendControlRequest(void* BufferPtr); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Enums: */ + enum USB_WaitForTypes_t + { + USB_HOST_WAITFOR_SetupSent, + USB_HOST_WAITFOR_InReceived, + USB_HOST_WAITFOR_OutReady, + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HOSTCHAPTER9_C) + static uint8_t USB_Host_Wait_For_Setup_IOS(const uint8_t WaitType); + #endif + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61acf6de --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "USBMode.h" + +#include "LowLevel.h" + +#if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) +volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE; +#endif + +#if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) +volatile uint8_t USB_Options; +#endif + +void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ) +{ + USB_ShutDown(); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + USB_CurrentMode = Mode; + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + USB_Options = Options; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) + UHWCON |= (1 << UIMOD); + #elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) + UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD); + #elif defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (Mode == USB_MODE_UID) + { + UHWCON |= (1 << UIDE); + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI); + + USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(); + } + else if (Mode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + { + UHWCON |= (1 << UIMOD); + } + else if (Mode == USB_MODE_HOST) + { + UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIMOD); + } + else + { + RAISE_EVENT(USB_PowerOnFail, POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified); + return; + } + #endif + + USB_ResetInterface(); + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + USB_OTGPAD_On(); + #endif + + USB_IsInitialized = true; + + sei(); +} + +void USB_ShutDown(void) +{ + if (USB_IsConnected) + RAISE_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + USB_Detach(); + + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_IsConnected = false; + USB_IsInitialized = false; + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + USB_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + #endif + + #if defined(CAN_BE_BOTH) + USB_CurrentMode = USB_MODE_NONE; + #endif + + USB_Interface_Disable(); + USB_PLL_Off(); + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + USB_OTGPAD_Off(); + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + UHWCON &= ~(1 << UIDE); + #endif +} + +void USB_ResetInterface(void) +{ + USB_INT_DisableAllInterrupts(); + USB_INT_ClearAllInterrupts(); + + USB_IsConnected = false; + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Unattached; + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) + USB_ConfigurationNumber = 0; + USB_IsSuspended = false; + USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled = false; + USB_CurrentlySelfPowered = false; + #endif + + if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL)) + { + #if defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + PLLFRQ = ((1 << PLLUSB) | (1 << PDIV3) | (1 << PDIV1)); + #endif + + USB_PLL_On(); + while (!(USB_PLL_IsReady())); + } + + USB_Interface_Reset(); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) + if (UHWCON & (1 << UIDE)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_IDTI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_IDTI); + USB_CurrentMode = USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(); + } + #endif + + if (!(USB_Options & USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED)) + USB_REG_On(); + + USB_CLK_Unfreeze(); + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && (defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER))) + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + { + if (USB_Options & USB_DEVICE_OPT_LOWSPEED) + USB_Device_SetLowSpeed(); + else + USB_Device_SetHighSpeed(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_VBUS); + } + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) && !defined(FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)) + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + { + USB_Descriptor_Device_t* DeviceDescriptorPtr; + + if (USB_GetDescriptor((DTYPE_Device << 8), 0, (void*)&DeviceDescriptorPtr) != NO_DESCRIPTOR) + { + #if defined(USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) + USB_ControlEndpointSize = DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size; + #elif defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS) + USB_ControlEndpointSize = eeprom_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + #else + USB_ControlEndpointSize = pgm_read_byte(&DeviceDescriptorPtr->Endpoint0Size); + #endif + } + } + #endif + + USB_Attach(); + + #if defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI); + #elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) + USB_Host_HostMode_On(); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + USB_OTGPAD_Off(); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI); + #else + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_DEVICE) + { + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SUSPEND); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_EORSTI); + } + else if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_HOST) + { + USB_Host_HostMode_On(); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Auto_Off(); + USB_OTGPAD_Off(); + + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_Enable(); + USB_Host_VBUS_Manual_On(); + + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_SRPI); + USB_INT_Enable(USB_INT_BCERRI); + } + #endif +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..faafbd7b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.h @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main low level USB driver. This module manages the low level initialization and shut down of the USB AVR's + * USB interface in either device or (if supported) host mode. + */ + +#ifndef __USBLOWLEVEL_H__ +#define __USBLOWLEVEL_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "USBMode.h" + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../HighLevel/Events.h" + #include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h" + #include "../HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h" + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "Host.h" + #include "Pipe.h" + #include "OTG.h" + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "Device.h" + #include "Endpoint.h" + #include "DevChapter9.h" + #endif + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Preprocessor Checks and Defines: */ + #if (F_CPU == 8000000) + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC 0 + #elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC ((1 << PLLP1) | (1 << PLLP0)) + #elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC 0 + #endif + #elif (F_CPU == 16000000) + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP1)) + #elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC ((1 << PLLP2) | (1 << PLLP0)) + #elif (defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC (1 << PLLP0) + #elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)) + #define USB_PLL_PSC (1 << PINDIV) + #endif + #endif + + #if !defined(USB_PLL_PSC) + #error No PLL prescale value available for chosen F_CPU value and AVR model. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mode mask for the USB_CurrentMode global. This indicates that the USB interface is currently not + * initialized into any mode. + */ + #define USB_MODE_NONE 0 + + /** Mode mask for the USB_CurrentMode global and the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB device mode. + */ + #define USB_MODE_DEVICE 1 + + /** Mode mask for the USB_CurrentMode global and the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the + * USB interface is or should be initialized in the USB host mode. + * + * \note Not all USB AVRs support host mode. + */ + #define USB_MODE_HOST 2 + + /** Mode mask for the the USB_Init() function. This indicates that the USB interface should be + * initialized into whatever mode the UID pin of the USB AVR indicates, and that the device + * should swap over its mode when the level of the UID pin changes during operation. + * + * \note Not all USB AVRs support host mode, and thus UID mode. + */ + #define USB_MODE_UID 3 + + /** Regulator disable option mask for USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad + * regulator should be enabled to regulate the data pin voltages to within the USB standard. + * + * \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator. + */ + #define USB_OPT_REG_DISABLED (1 << 1) + + /** Regulator enable option mask for USB_Init(). This indicates that the internal 3.3V USB data pad + * regulator should be disabled and the AVR's VCC level used for the data pads. + * + * \note See USB AVR data sheet for more information on the internal pad regulator. + */ + #define USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED (0 << 1) + + /** Manual PLL control option mask for USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the user application + * will take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock + * that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations. + */ + #define USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL (1 << 2) + + /** Automatic PLL control option mask for USB_Init(). This indicates to the library that the library should + * take full responsibility for controlling the AVR's PLL (used to generate the high frequency clock + * that the USB controller requires) and ensuring that it is locked at the correct frequency for USB operations. + */ + #define USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL (0 << 2) + + /** Mask for a CONTROL type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See Endpoint.h and Pipe.h headers for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_CONTROL 0b00 + + /** Mask for an ISOCHRONOUS type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See Endpoint.h and Pipe.h headers for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_ISOCHRONOUS 0b01 + + /** Mask for a BULK type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See Endpoint.h and Pipe.h headers for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_BULK 0b10 + + /** Mask for an INTERRUPT type endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See Endpoint.h and Pipe.h headers for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT 0b11 + + /** Mask for determining the type of an endpoint or pipe. This should then be compared with the + * EP_TYPE_* macros elsewhere in this module to determine the exact type of the endpoint or pipe. + * + * \note See Endpoint.h and Pipe.h headers for endpoint/pipe functions. + */ + #define EP_TYPE_MASK 0b11 + + /** Returns boolean true if the VBUS line is currently high (i.e. the USB host is supplying power), + * otherwise returns false. + */ + #define USB_VBUS_GetStatus() ((USBSTA & (1 << VBUS)) ? true : false) + + /** Detaches the device from the USB bus. This has the effect of removing the device from any + * host if, ceasing USB communications. If no host is present, this prevents any host from + * enumerating the device once attached until USB_Attach() is called. + */ + #define USB_Detach() MACROS{ UDCON |= (1 << DETACH); }MACROE + + /** Attaches the device to the USB bus. This announces the device's presence to any attached + * USB host, starting the enumeration process. If no host is present, attaching the device + * will allow for enumeration once a host is connected to the device. + * + * This is inexplicably also required for proper operation while in host mode, to enable the + * attachment of a device to the host. This is despite the bit being located in the device-mode + * register and despite the datasheet making no mention of its requirement in host mode. + */ + #define USB_Attach() MACROS{ UDCON &= ~(1 << DETACH); }MACROE + + #if !defined(USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Constant for the maximum software timeout period of the USB data stream transfer functions + * (both control and standard) when in either device or host mode. If the next packet of a stream + * is not received or acknowedged within this time period, the stream function will fail. + * + * This value may be overridden in the user project makefile as the value of the + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS token, and passed to the compiler using the -D switch. + */ + #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS 100 + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Main function to initialize and start the USB interface. Once active, the USB interface will + * allow for device connection to a host when in device mode, or for device enumeration while in + * host mode. + * + * As the USB library relies on USB interrupts for some of its functionality, this routine will + * enable global interrupts. + * + * Calling this function when the USB interface is already initialized will cause a complete USB + * interface reset and re-enumeration. + * + * \param Mode This is a mask indicating what mode the USB interface is to be initialized to. + * Valid mode masks are USB_MODE_DEVICE, USB_MODE_HOST or USB_MODE_UID. + * + * \param Options Mask indicating the options which should be used when initializing the USB + * interface to control the USB interface's behaviour. This should be comprised of + * a USB_OPT_REG_* mask to control the regulator, a USB_OPT_*_PLL mask to control the + * PLL, and a USB_DEVICE_OPT_* mask (when the device mode is enabled) to set the device + * mode speed. + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only device or host mode is required, + * this can be statically set via defining the token USB_DEVICE_ONLY for device mode or + * USB_HOST_ONLY for host mode in the use project makefile, passing the token to the compiler + * via the -D switch. If the mode is statically set, this parameter does not exist in the + * function prototype. + * + * \note To reduce the FLASH requirements of the library if only fixed settings are are required, + * the options may be set statically in the same manner as the mode (see the Mode parameter of + * this function). To statically set the USB options, pass in the USE_STATIC_OPTIONS token, + * defined to the appropriate options masks. When the options are statically set, this + * parameter does not exist in the function prototype. + * + * \note The mode parameter does not exist on devices where only one mode is possible, such as USB + * AVR models which only implement the USB device mode in hardware. + * + * \see Device.h for the USB_DEVICE_OPT_* masks. + */ + void USB_Init( + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Mode + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , + #elif (!defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) && defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS)) + void + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + const uint8_t Options + #endif + ); + + /** Shuts down the USB interface. This turns off the USB interface after deallocating all USB FIFO + * memory, endpoints and pipes. When turned off, no USB functionality can be used until the interface + * is restarted with the USB_Init() function. + */ + void USB_ShutDown(void); + + /** Resets the interface, when already initialized. This will re-enumerate the device if already connected + * to a host, or re-enumerate an already attached device when in host mode. + */ + void USB_ResetInterface(void); + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for error codes relating to the powering on of the USB interface. These error codes are + * used in the ErrorCode parameter value of the USB_PowerOnFail event. + */ + enum USB_PowerOnErrorCodes_t + { + POWERON_ERROR_NoUSBModeSpecified = 0, /**< Indicates that USB_Init() was called with an + * invalid or missing Mode parameter. + */ + }; + + /* Global Variables: */ + #if (!defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Indicates the mode that the USB interface is currently initialized to. This value will be + * one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t USB_CurrentMode; + #endif + + #if !defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + extern volatile uint8_t USB_Options; + /** Indicates the current USB options that the USB interface was initialized with when USB_Init() + * was called. This value will be one of the USB_MODE_* masks defined elsewhere in this module. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + #endif + + /* Throwable Events: */ + /** This module raises the USB_Disconnect event if the USB interface is reset (such as during a mode + * change while in UID mode) while the USB interface is connected to a device when in host mode, or + * a host while in device mode. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** This module raises the Power On Failure event when an error occurs while initializing the USB + * interface. + * + * \see Events.h for more information on this event. + */ + RAISES_EVENT(USB_PowerOnFail); + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define USB_PLL_On() MACROS{ PLLCSR = USB_PLL_PSC; PLLCSR |= (1 << PLLE); }MACROE + #define USB_PLL_Off() MACROS{ PLLCSR = 0; }MACROE + #define USB_PLL_IsReady() ((PLLCSR & (1 << PLOCK)) ? true : false) + + #if defined(USB_FULL_CONTROLLER) || defined(USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER) + #define USB_REG_On() MACROS{ UHWCON |= (1 << UVREGE); }MACROE + #define USB_REG_Off() MACROS{ UHWCON &= ~(1 << UVREGE); }MACROE + #else + #define USB_REG_On() MACROS{ REGCR &= ~(1 << REGDIS); }MACROE + #define USB_REG_Off() MACROS{ REGCR |= (1 << REGDIS); }MACROE + #endif + + #define USB_OTGPAD_On() MACROS{ USBCON |= (1 << OTGPADE); }MACROE + #define USB_OTGPAD_Off() MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << OTGPADE); }MACROE + + #define USB_CLK_Freeze() MACROS{ USBCON |= (1 << FRZCLK); }MACROE + #define USB_CLK_Unfreeze() MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << FRZCLK); }MACROE + + #define USB_Interface_Enable() MACROS{ USBCON |= (1 << USBE); }MACROE + #define USB_Interface_Disable() MACROS{ USBCON &= ~(1 << USBE); }MACROE + #define USB_Interface_Reset() MACROS{ uint8_t Temp = USBCON; USBCON = (Temp & ~(1 << USBE)); \ + USBCON = (Temp | (1 << USBE)); }MACROE + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t USB_GetUSBModeFromUID(void) + { + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)) + if (USBSTA & (1 << ID)) + return USB_MODE_DEVICE; + else + return USB_MODE_HOST; + #else + return USB_MODE_DEVICE; + #endif + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1a92f1e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/OTG.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Macros for embedded USB hosts with dual role On The Go capabilities, for managing role exchange. OTG + * is a way for two USB dual role devices to talk to one another directly without fixed device/host roles. + * + * \note These macros are only for AVRs which support the OTG protocol, and do not exist for device-only AVRs. + */ + +#ifndef __USBOTG_H__ +#define __USBOTG_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Initiate a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This indicates to the other connected device + * that the device wishes to change device/host roles. + */ + #define USB_OTG_DEV_Request_HNP() MACROS{ OTGCON |= (1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE + + /** Cancel a Host Negotiation Protocol request. This stops a pending HNP request to the other + * connected device. + */ + #define USB_OTG_DEV_Cancel_HNP_Request() MACROS{ OTGCON &= ~(1 << HNPREQ); }MACROE + + /** Returns boolean false if not currently sending a HNP to the other connected device, or true + * if a HNP is currently being issued. + */ + #define USB_OTG_DEV_IsSendingHNP() ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false) + + /** Accepts a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should exchange + * device/host roles. + */ + #define USB_OTG_HOST_Accept_HNP() USB_OTG_DEV_Request_HNP() + + /** Rejects a HNP from a connected device, indicating that both devices should remain in their + * current device/host roles. + */ + #define USB_OTG_HOST_Reject_HNP() USB_OTG_DEV_Cancel_HNP_Request() + + /** Returns boolean false if the connected device is not currently sending a HNP request, or true + * if a HNP is currently being issued by the connected device. + */ + #define USB_OTG_HOST_IsHNPReceived() ((OTGCON & (1 << HNPREQ)) ? true : false) + + /** Initiates a Session Request Protocol request. Most OTG devices turn off VBUS when the USB + * interface is not in use, to conserve power. Sending a SRP to a USB OTG device running in + * host mode indicates that VBUS should be applied and a session started. + * + * There are two different methods of sending a SRP - either pulses on the VBUS line, or by + * pulsing the Data + line via the internal pullup resistor. The SRP mode is given as the + * "type" parameter, and can be either USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS or USB_OTG_STP_DATA. + */ + #define USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP(type) MACROS{ OTGCON = ((OTGCON & ~(1 << SRPSEL)) | (type | (1 << SRPREQ))); }MACROE + + /** Mask for the VBUS pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices. + * + * \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP() + */ + #define USB_OTG_SRP_VBUS (1 << SRPSEL) + + /** Mask for the Data + pulsing method of SRP, supported by some OTG devices. + * + * \see USB_OTG_DEV_Initiate_SRP() + */ + #define USB_OTG_STP_DATA 0 + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..743bb91f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ +#include "USBMode.h" +#if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_PIPE_C +#include "Pipe.h" + +uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize = PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE; + +bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber, + const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks) +{ + Pipe_SelectPipe(Number); + Pipe_EnablePipe(); + + UPCFG1X = 0; + + UPCFG0X = ((Type << EPTYPE0) | Token | (EndpointNumber << PEPNUM0)); + UPCFG1X = ((1 << ALLOC) | Banks | Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(Size)); + + return Pipe_IsConfigured(); +} + +void Pipe_ClearPipes(void) +{ + UPINT = 0; + + for (uint8_t PNum = 0; PNum < PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES; PNum++) + { + Pipe_ResetPipe(PNum); + Pipe_SelectPipe(PNum); + UPIENX = 0; + UPINTX = 0; + Pipe_ClearError(); + Pipe_ClearErrorFlags(); + Pipe_DeallocateMemory(); + Pipe_DisablePipe(); + } +} + +uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void) +{ + uint8_t TimeoutMSRem = USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS; + + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + while (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + if (Pipe_IsStalled()) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled; + else if (!(USB_IsConnected)) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected; + + if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI)) + { + USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI); + + if (!(TimeoutMSRem--)) + return PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout; + } + } + + return PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Data, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Data; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Pipe_Write_Byte(*(DataStream++)); + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Data, uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Data + Length - 1); + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Pipe_Write_Byte(*(DataStream--)); + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length +#if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + Pipe_Discard_Byte(); + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)Buffer; + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + *(DataStream++) = Pipe_Read_Byte(); + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) +#endif + ) +{ + uint8_t* DataStream = (uint8_t*)(Buffer + Length - 1); + uint8_t ErrorCode; + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + + while (Length--) + { + if (!(Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Pipe_ClearCurrentBank(); + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + if ((Callback != NULL) && (Callback() == STREAMCALLBACK_Abort)) + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted; + #endif + + if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_WaitUntilReady())) + return ErrorCode; + } + + *(DataStream--) = Pipe_Read_Byte(); + } + + return PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError; +} + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a1f28ccc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.h @@ -0,0 +1,788 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions, macros and enums related to pipe management when in USB Host mode. This + * module contains the pipe management macros, as well as pipe interrupt and data + * send/recieve functions for various datatypes. + */ + +#ifndef __PIPE_H__ +#define __PIPE_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include "../../../Common/Common.h" + #include "../HighLevel/USBTask.h" + + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "StreamCallbacks.h" + #endif + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a CRC error occurred in the pipe on the received data. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_CRC16 (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware timeout error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_TIMEOUT (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware PID error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_PID (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data PID error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATAPID (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for Pipe_GetErrorFlags(), indicating that a hardware data toggle error occurred in the pipe. */ + #define PIPE_ERRORFLAG_DATATGL (1 << 0) + + /** Token mask for Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a SETUP token (for CONTROL type pipes), + * which will trigger a control request on the attached device when data is written to the pipe. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_SETUP (0b00 << PTOKEN0) + + /** Token mask for Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes), + * indicating that the pipe data will flow from device to host. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_IN (0b01 << PTOKEN0) + + /** Token mask for Pipe_ConfigurePipe(). This sets the pipe as a IN token (for non-CONTROL type pipes), + * indicating that the pipe data will flow from host to device. + */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_OUT (0b10 << PTOKEN0) + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe + * should have one single bank, which requires less USB FIFO memory but results in slower transfers as + * only one USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access the pipe's bank at the one time. + */ + #define PIPE_BANK_SINGLE 0 + + /** Mask for the bank mode selection for the Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro. This indicates that the pipe + * should have two banks, which requires more USB FIFO memory but results in faster transfers as one + * USB device (the AVR or the attached device) can access one bank while the other accesses the second + * bank. + */ + #define PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE (1 << EPBK0) + + /** Pipe address for the default control pipe, which always resides in address 0. This is + * defined for convenience to give more readable code when used with the pipe macros. + */ + #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE 0 + + /** Default size of the default control pipe's bank, until altered by the Endpoint0Size value + * in the device descriptor of the attached device. + */ + #define PIPE_CONTROLPIPE_DEFAULT_SIZE 8 + + /** Pipe number mask, for masking against pipe addresses to retrieve the pipe's numerical address + * in the device. + */ + #define PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK 0x07 + + /** Total number of pipes (including the default control pipe at address 0) which may be used in + * the device. Different USB AVR models support different amounts of pipes, this value reflects + * the maximum number of pipes for the currently selected AVR model. + */ + #define PIPE_TOTAL_PIPES 7 + + /** Size in bytes of the largest pipe bank size possible in the device. Not all banks on each AVR + * model supports the largest bank size possible on the device; different pipe numbers support + * different maximum bank sizes. This value reflects the largest possible bank of any pipe on the + * currently selected USB AVR model. + */ + #define PIPE_MAX_SIZE 256 + + /** Endpoint number mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * numerical address in the attached device. + */ + #define PIPE_EPNUM_MASK 0x07 + + /** Endpoint bank size mask, for masking against endpoint addresses to retrieve the endpoint's + * bank size in the attached device. + */ + #define PIPE_EPSIZE_MASK 0x7FF + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe IN interrupt (for INTERRUPT type pipes). Should be used with + * the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on an INTERRUPT type pipe if the pipe interrupt period has + * elapsed and the pipe is ready for the next packet from the attached device to be read out from its + * FIFO buffer (if received). + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. + */ + #define PIPE_INT_IN UPIENX, (1 << RXINE) , UPINTX, (1 << RXINI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe OUT interrupt (for INTERRUPT type pipes). Should be used with + * the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on an INTERRUPT type endpoint if a the pipe interrupt period + * has elapsed and the pipe is ready for a packet to be written to the pipe's FIFO buffer and sent + * to the attached device (if required). + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. */ + #define PIPE_INT_OUT UPIENX, (1 << TXOUTE), UPINTX, (1 << TXOUTI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe SETUP bank ready interrupt (for CONTROL type pipes). Should be + * used with the USB_INT_* macros located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on an CONTROL type pipe when the pipe is ready for a new + * control request. + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. + */ + #define PIPE_INT_SETUP UPIENX, (1 << TXSTPE) , UPINTX, (1 << TXSTPI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe error interrupt. Should be used with the USB_INT_* macros + * located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on a particular pipe if an error occurs on that pipe, such + * as a CRC mismatch error. + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. + * + * \see Pipe_GetErrorFlags() for more information on the pipe errors. + */ + #define PIPE_INT_ERROR UPIENX, (1 << PERRE), UPINTX, (1 << PERRI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe NAK received interrupt. Should be used with the USB_INT_* macros + * located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on a particular pipe if an attached device returns a NAK in + * response to a sent packet. + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. + * + * \see Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more information on pipe NAKs. + */ + #define PIPE_INT_NAK UPIENX, (1 << NAKEDE), UPINTX, (1 << NAKEDI) + + /** Interrupt definition for the pipe STALL received interrupt. Should be used with the USB_INT_* macros + * located in USBInterrupt.h. + * + * This interrupt will fire if enabled on a particular pipe if an attached device returns a STALL on the + * currently selected pipe. This will also fire if the pipe is an isochronous pipe and a CRC error occurs. + * + * This interrupt must be enabled on *each* pipe which requires it (after the pipe is selected), and + * will fire the common pipe interrupt vector. + * + * \see ENDPOINT_PIPE_vect for more information on the common pipe and endpoint interrupt vector. + */ + #define PIPE_INT_STALL UPIENX, (1 << RXSTALLE), UPINTX, (1 << RXSTALLI) + + /** Indicates the number of bytes currently stored in the current pipe's selected bank. */ + #define Pipe_BytesInPipe() UPBCX + + /** Resets the desired pipe, including the pipe banks and flags. */ + #define Pipe_ResetPipe(pipenum) MACROS{ UPRST = (1 << pipenum); UPRST = 0; }MACROE + + /** Selects the given pipe number. Any pipe operations which do not require the pipe number to be + * indicated will operate on the currently selected pipe. + */ + #define Pipe_SelectPipe(pipenum) MACROS{ UPNUM = pipenum; }MACROE + + /** Returns the pipe address of the currently selected pipe. This is typically used to save the + * currently selected pipe number so that it can be restored after another pipe has been manipulated. + */ + #define Pipe_GetCurrentPipe() (UPNUM & PIPE_PIPENUM_MASK) + + /** Enables the currently selected pipe so that data can be sent and received through it to and from + * an attached device. + * + * \note Pipes must first be configured properly rather than just being enabled via the + * Pipe_ConfigurePipe() macro, which calls Pipe_EnablePipe() automatically. + */ + #define Pipe_EnablePipe() MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PEN); }MACROE + + /** Disables the currently selected pipe so that data cannot be sent and received through it to and + * from an attached device. + */ + #define Pipe_DisablePipe() MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PEN); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the currently selected pipe is enabled, false otherwise. */ + #define Pipe_IsEnabled() ((UPCONX & (1 << PEN)) ? true : false) + + /** Sets the token for the currently selected endpoint to one of the tokens specified by the PIPE_TOKEN_* + * masks. This should only be used on CONTROL type endpoints, to allow for bidirectional transfer of + * data during control requests. + */ + #define Pipe_SetToken(token) MACROS{ UPCFG0X = ((UPCFG0X & ~PIPE_TOKEN_MASK) | token); }MACROE + + /** Configures the currently selected pipe to allow for an unlimited number of IN requests. */ + #define Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests() MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << INMODE); }MACROE + + /** Configures the currently selected pipe to only allow the specified number of IN requests to be + * accepted by the pipe before it is automatically frozen. + */ + #define Pipe_SetFiniteINRequests(n) MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << INMODE); UPINRQX = n; }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the currently selected pipe is configured, false otherwise. */ + #define Pipe_IsConfigured() ((UPSTAX & (1 << CFGOK)) ? true : false) + + /** Sets the period between interrupts for an INTERRUPT type pipe to a specified number of milliseconds. */ + #define Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(ms) MACROS{ UPCFG2X = ms; }MACROE + + /** Returns a mask indicating which pipe's interrupt periods have elapsed, indicating that the pipe should + * be serviced. + */ + #define Pipe_GetPipeInterrupts() UPINT + + /** Clears the interrupt flag for the specified pipe number. */ + #define Pipe_ClearPipeInterrupt(n) MACROS{ UPINT &= ~(1 << n); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the specified pipe's interrupt period has elapsed, false otherwise. */ + #define Pipe_HasPipeInterrupted(n) ((UPINT & (1 << n)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the pipe bank, and switches to the alternate bank if the currently selected pipe is + * dual-banked. When cleared, this either frees the bank up for the next packet from the host + * (if the endpoint is of the OUT direction) or sends the packet contents to the host (if the + * pipe is of the IN direction). + */ + #define Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << FIFOCON); }MACROE + + /** Unfreezes the pipe, allowing it to communicate with an attached device. */ + #define Pipe_Unfreeze() MACROS{ UPCONX &= ~(1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE + + /** Freezes the pipe, preventing it from communicating with an attached device. */ + #define Pipe_Freeze() MACROS{ UPCONX |= (1 << PFREEZE); }MACROE + + /** Clears the master pipe error flag. */ + #define Pipe_ClearError() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << PERRI); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the master pipe error flag is set for the currently selected pipe, indicating that + * some sort of hardware error has occurred on the pipe. + * + * \see Pipe_GetErrorFlags() macro for information on retreiving the exact error flag. + */ + #define Pipe_IsError() ((UPINTX & (1 << PERRI)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears all the currently selected pipe's hardware error flags, but does not clear the master error + * flag for the pipe. */ + #define Pipe_ClearErrorFlags() MACROS{ UPERRX = 0; }MACROE + + /** Returns a mask of the hardware error flags which have occured on the currently selected pipe. This + * value can then be masked against the PIPE_ERRORFLAG_* masks to determine what error has occurred. + */ + #define Pipe_GetErrorFlags() UPERRX + + /** Returns true if the currently selected pipe may be read from (if data is waiting in the pipe + * bank and the pipe is an IN direction, or if the bank is not yet full if the pipe is an OUT + * direction). This function will return false if an error has occured in the pipe, or if the pipe + * is an IN direction and no packet has been received, or if the pipe is an OUT direction and the + * pipe bank is full. + */ + #define Pipe_ReadWriteAllowed() ((UPINTX & (1 << RWAL)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the flag indicating that a SETUP request has been sent to the attached device from the + * currently selected CONTROL type pipe. + */ + #define Pipe_ClearSetupSent() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << TXSTPI); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if no SETUP request is currently being sent to the attached device, false otherwise. */ + #define Pipe_IsSetupSent() ((UPINTX & (1 << TXSTPI)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the currently selected pipe has been stalled by the attached device, false otherwise. */ + #define Pipe_IsStalled() ((UPINTX & (1 << RXSTALLI)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the stall condition on the currently selected pipe. */ + #define Pipe_ClearStall() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXSTALLI); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if an IN request has been received on the currently selected CONTROL type pipe, false + * otherwise. + */ + #define Pipe_IsSetupINReceived() ((UPINTX & (1 << RXINI)) ? true : false) + + /** Returns true if the currently selected CONTROL type pipe is ready to send an OUT request, false + * otherwise. + */ + #define Pipe_IsSetupOUTReady() ((UPINTX & (1 << TXOUTI)) ? true : false) + + /** Acknowedges the reception of a setup IN request from the attached device on the currently selected + * CONTROL type endpoint, allowing for the transmission of a setup OUT packet, or the reception of + * another setup IN packet. + */ + #define Pipe_ClearSetupIN() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << RXINI); UPINTX &= ~(1 << FIFOCON); }MACROE + + /** Sends the currently selected CONTROL type pipe's contents to the device as a setup OUT packet. */ + #define Pipe_ClearSetupOUT() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << TXOUTI); UPINTX &= ~(1 << FIFOCON); }MACROE + + /** Returns true if the device sent a NAK (Negative Acknowedge) in response to the last sent packet on + * the currently selected pipe. This ocurrs when the host sends a packet to the device, but the device + * is not currently ready to handle the packet (i.e. its endpoint banks are full). Once a NAK has been + * received, it must be cleard using Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() before the previous (or any other) packet + * can be re-sent. + */ + #define Pipe_IsNAKReceived() ((UPINTX & (1 << NAKEDI)) ? true : false) + + /** Clears the NAK condition on the currently selected pipe. + * + * \see Pipe_IsNAKReceived() for more details. + */ + #define Pipe_ClearNAKReceived() MACROS{ UPINTX &= ~(1 << NAKEDI); }MACROE + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_WaitUntilReady function */ + enum Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t + { + PIPE_READYWAIT_NoError = 0, /**< Pipe ready for next packet, no error */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe while waiting. */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host while waiting. */ + PIPE_READYWAIT_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of the Pipe_*_Stream_* functions. */ + enum Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t + { + PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_NoError = 0, /**< Command completed successfully, no error. */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_PipeStalled = 1, /**< The device stalled the pipe during the transfer. */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_DeviceDisconnected = 2, /**< Device was disconnected from the host during + * the transfer. + */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout = 3, /**< The device failed to accept or send the next packet + * within the software timeout period set by the + * USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS macro. + */ + PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted = 4, /**< Indicates that the stream's callback function aborted + * the transfer early. + */ + }; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Reads one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_Read_Byte(void) + { + return UPDATX; + } + + /** Writes one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for IN direction pipes. */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_Byte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + UPDATX = Byte; + } + + /** Discards one byte from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. */ + static inline void Pipe_Discard_Byte(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UPDATX; + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_LE(void) + { + uint16_t Data; + + Data = UPDATX; + Data |= (((uint16_t)UPDATX) << 8); + + return Data; + } + + /** Reads two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint16_t Pipe_Read_Word_BE(void) + { + uint16_t Data; + + Data = (((uint16_t)UPDATX) << 8); + Data |= UPDATX; + + return Data; + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_LE(const uint16_t Word) + { + UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF); + UPDATX = (Word >> 8); + } + + /** Writes two bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_Word_BE(const uint16_t Word) + { + UPDATX = (Word >> 8); + UPDATX = (Word & 0xFF); + } + + /** Discards two bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. */ + static inline void Pipe_Ignore_Word(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UPDATX; + Dummy = UPDATX; + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(void) + { + union + { + uint32_t DWord; + uint8_t Bytes[4]; + } Data; + + Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX; + + return Data.DWord; + } + + /** Reads four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for OUT + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint32_t Pipe_Read_DWord_BE(void) + { + union + { + uint32_t DWord; + uint8_t Bytes[4]; + } Data; + + Data.Bytes[3] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[2] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[1] = UPDATX; + Data.Bytes[0] = UPDATX; + + return Data.DWord; + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in little endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(const uint32_t DWord) + { + Pipe_Write_Word_LE(DWord); + Pipe_Write_Word_LE(DWord >> 16); + } + + /** Writes four bytes to the currently selected pipe's bank in big endian format, for IN + * direction pipes. + */ + static inline void Pipe_Write_DWord_BE(const uint32_t DWord) + { + Pipe_Write_Word_BE(DWord >> 16); + Pipe_Write_Word_BE(DWord); + } + + /** Discards four bytes from the currently selected pipe's bank, for OUT direction pipes. */ + static inline void Pipe_Ignore_DWord(void) + { + uint8_t Dummy; + + Dummy = UPDATX; + Dummy = UPDATX; + Dummy = UPDATX; + Dummy = UPDATX; + } + + /* External Variables: */ + /** Global indicating the maximum packet size of the default control pipe located at address + * 0 in the device. This value is set to the value indicated in the attached device's device + * descriptor once the USB interface is initialized into host mode and a device is attached + * to the USB bus. + * + * \note This variable should be treated as read-only in the user application, and never manually + * changed in value. + */ + extern uint8_t USB_ControlPipeSize; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Configures the specified pipe number with the given pipe type, token, target endpoint number in the + * attached device, bank size and banking mode. Pipes should be allocated in ascending order by their + * address in the device (i.e. pipe 1 should be configured before pipe 2 and so on). + * + * The pipe type may be one of the EP_TYPE_* macros listed in LowLevel.h, the token may be one of the + * PIPE_TOKEN_* masks. + * + * The bank size must indicate the maximum packet size that the pipe can handle. Different pipe + * numbers can handle different maximum packet sizes - refer to the chosen USB AVR's datasheet to + * determine the maximum bank size for each pipe. + * + * The banking mode may be either PIPE_BANK_SINGLE or PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE. + * + * A newly configured pipe is frozen by default, and must be unfrozen before use via the Pipe_Unfreeze() macro. + * + * \note This routine will select the specified pipe, and the pipe will remain selected once the + * routine completes regardless of if the pipe configuration succeeds. + * + * \return Boolean true if the configuration is successful, false otherwise + */ + bool Pipe_ConfigurePipe(const uint8_t Number, const uint8_t Type, const uint8_t Token, const uint8_t EndpointNumber, + const uint16_t Size, const uint8_t Banks); + + /** Spinloops until the currently selected non-control pipe is ready for the next packed of data + * to be read or written to it. + * + * \note This routine should not be called on CONTROL type pipes. + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_WaitUntilReady_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_WaitUntilReady(void); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in little endian, + * sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is + * executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Writes the given number of bytes to the pipe from the given buffer in big endian, + * sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is + * executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to read from. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe into the buffer. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_Write_Stream_BE(const void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads and discards the given number of bytes from the pipe, discarding fully read packets from the host + * as needed. The last packet is not automatically discarded once the remaining bytes has been read; the + * user is responsible for manually discarding the last packet from the host via the Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro. + * Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, + * allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \param Length Number of bytes to send via the currently selected pipe. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_Discard_Stream(uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in little endian, + * sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is + * executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Reads the given number of bytes from the pipe into the given buffer in big endian, + * sending full packets to the device as needed. The last packet filled is not automatically sent; + * the user is responsible for manually sending the last written packet to the host via the + * Pipe_ClearCurrentBank() macro. Between each USB packet, the given stream callback function is + * executed repeatedly until the next packet is ready, allowing for early aborts of stream transfers. + * + * The callback routine should be created using the STREAM_CALLBACK() macro. If the token + * NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS is passed via the -D option to the compiler, stream callbacks are disabled + * and this function has the Callback parameter ommitted. + * + * \param Buffer Pointer to the source data buffer to write to. + * \param Length Number of bytes to read for the currently selected pipe to read from. + * \param Callback Name of a callback routine to call between sucessive USB packet transfers, NULL if no callback + * + * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum. + */ + uint8_t Pipe_Read_Stream_BE(void* Buffer, uint16_t Length + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + , uint8_t (* const Callback)(void) + #endif + ) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /* Function Aliases: */ + /** Alias for Pipe_Discard_Byte(). + */ + #define Pipe_Ignore_Byte() Pipe_Discard_Byte() + + /** Alias for Pipe_Discard_Word(). + */ + #define Pipe_Ignore_Word() Pipe_Discard_Word() + + /** Alias for Pipe_Discard_DWord(). + */ + #define Pipe_Ignore_DWord() Pipe_Discard_DWord() + + /** Alias for Pipe_Read_Word_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Pipe_Read_Word() Pipe_Read_Word_LE() + + /** Alias for Pipe_Write_Word_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Pipe_Write_Word(Word) Pipe_Write_Word_LE(Word) + + /** Alias for Pipe_Read_DWord_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Pipe_Read_DWord() Pipe_Read_DWord_LE() + + /** Alias for Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #define Pipe_Write_DWord(DWord) Pipe_Write_DWord_LE(DWord) + + /** Alias for Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + #define Pipe_Read_Stream(Buffer, Length, Callback) Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, Callback) + #else + #define Pipe_Read_Stream(Buffer, Length) Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length) + #endif + + /** Alias for Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(). By default USB transfers use little endian format, thus + * the command with no endianness specifier indicates little endian mode. + */ + #if !defined(NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS) + #define Pipe_Write_Stream(Buffer, Length, Callback) Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length, Callback) + #else + #define Pipe_Write_Stream(Buffer, Length) Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Length) + #endif + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define PIPE_TOKEN_MASK (0x03 << PTOKEN0) + + #define Pipe_AllocateMemory() MACROS{ UPCFG1X |= (1 << ALLOC); }MACROE + #define Pipe_DeallocateMemory() MACROS{ UPCFG1X &= ~(1 << ALLOC); }MACROE + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Pipe_ClearPipes(void); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_CONST ATTR_ALWAYSINLINE; + static inline uint8_t Pipe_BytesToEPSizeMask(uint16_t Bytes) + { + if (Bytes <= 8) + return (0 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 16) + return (1 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 32) + return (2 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= 64) + return (3 << EPSIZE0); + else if (Bytes <= (8 << 4)) + return (4 << EPSIZE0); + else + return (5 << EPSIZE0); + }; + + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StdRequestType.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StdRequestType.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02d4fdc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StdRequestType.h @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Contains definitions for the various control request parameters, so that the request details (such as data + * direction, request recipient, etc.) can be extracted via masking. + */ + +#ifndef __STDREQTYPE_H__ +#define __STDREQTYPE_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the direction of the request data (Host to Device + * or Device to Host). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request direction masks. + * + * \see REQDIR_* macros for masks indicating the request data direction. + */ + #define CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION 0b10000000 + + /** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the type of request (Device, Class or Vendor + * Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request type masks. + * + * \see REQTYPE_* macros for masks indicating the request type. + */ + #define CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE 0b01100000 + + /** Mask for the request type parameter, to indicate the recipient of the request (Standard, Class + * or Vendor Specific). The result of this mask should then be compared to the request recipient + * masks. + * + * \see REQREC_* macros for masks indicating the request recipient. + */ + #define CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT 0b00011111 + + /** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from host to device. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro. + */ + #define REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE (0 << 7) + + /** Request data direction mask, indicating that the request data will flow from device to host. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_DIRECTION macro. + */ + #define REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST (1 << 7) + + /** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a standard request. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro. + */ + #define REQTYPE_STANDARD (0 << 5) + + /** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a class-specific request. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro. + */ + #define REQTYPE_CLASS (1 << 5) + + /** Request type mask, indicating that the request is a vendor specific request. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE macro. + */ + #define REQTYPE_VENDOR (2 << 5) + + /** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to the device as a whole. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro. + */ + #define REQREC_DEVICE (0 << 0) + + /** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an interface in the + * currently selected configuration. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro. + */ + #define REQREC_INTERFACE (1 << 0) + + /** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an endpoint in the + * currently selected configuration. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro. + */ + #define REQREC_ENDPOINT (2 << 0) + + /** Request recipient mask, indicating that the request is to be issued to an unspecified element + * in the currently selected configuration. + * + * \see CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT macro. + */ + #define REQREC_OTHER (3 << 0) + + /** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature + * request this indicates that an endpoint (whose address is given elsewhere in the request + * should have its stall condition cleared. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature + * request, this stalls an endpoint. + */ + #define FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT 0x00 + + /** Feature indicator for Clear Feature or Set Feature commands. When used in a Clear Feature + * request this indicates that the remote wakeup enabled device should not issue remote + * wakeup requests until further notice. If used in a similar manner inside a Set Feature + * request, this re-enabled the remote wakeup feature on the device. + */ + #define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP 0x01 + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enumeration for the various standard request commands. These commands are applicable when the + * request type is REQTYPE_STANDARD (with the exception of REQ_GetDescriptor, which is always + * handled regardless of the request type value). + * + * \see Chapter 9 of the USB 2.0 Specification. + */ + enum USB_Control_Request_t + { + REQ_GetStatus = 0, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface + * recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_ClearFeature = 1, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface + * recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_SetFeature = 3, /**< Implemented in the library for device, endpoint and interface + * recipients. Passed to the user application for other recipients + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_SetAddress = 5, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed + * to the user application for other recipients via the + * USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_GetDescriptor = 6, /**< Implemented in the library for all recipients and all request + * types. */ + REQ_SetDescriptor = 7, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_GetConfiguration = 8, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed + * to the user application for other recipients via the + * USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_SetConfiguration = 9, /**< Implemented in the library for the device recipient. Passed + * to the user application for other recipients via the + * USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_GetInterface = 10, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_SetInterface = 11, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + REQ_SynchFrame = 12, /**< Not implemented in the library, passed to the user application + * via the USB_UnhandledControlPacket() event when received in + * device mode. */ + }; + +/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define FEATURE_SELFPOWERED_ENABLED (1 << 0) + #define FEATURE_REMOTE_WAKEUP_ENABLED (1 << 1) + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StreamCallbacks.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StreamCallbacks.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60e408e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/StreamCallbacks.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Macros and enums for the stream callback routines in Endpoint.h and Pipe.c. This module contains the + * code required to easily set up stream callback functions which can be used to force early abort of a + * stream read/write process. + */ + +#ifndef __STREAMCALLBACK_H__ +#define __STREAMCALLBACK_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Creates a prototype for or begins a stream callback routine. Stream callback routines are small + * routines which are executed during stream read or writes (if the callback-enabled versions of + * these functions are used) which allow the user application to abort the transfer when certain + * arbitrary conditions are met. + * + * Stream callback functions should return a value from the StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t + * enum. + * + * Usage Example (Device Endpoint, but applicable for Host pipes also): + * \code + * STREAM_CALLBACK(GlobalNotSet); // Callback Prototype + * + * STREAM_CALLBACK(GlobalNotSet) + * { + * if (MyGlobal == false) + * return ENDPOINT_STREAMCALLBACK_Continue; + * else + * return ENDPOINT_STREAMCALLBACK_Abort; + * } + * + * //... + * // Inside some routine: + * if (Endpoint_Write_CStream_LE(DataBuffer, sizeof(DataBuffer), GlobalNotSet) == + * ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_CallbackAborted) + * { + * // Do something when the callback aborted the transfer early + * } + * \endcode + */ + #define STREAM_CALLBACK(name) uint8_t name (void) + + /** Used with the Endpoint and Pipe stream functions as the callback function parameter, indicating that the stream + * call has no callback function to be called between USB packets. + */ + #define NO_STREAM_CALLBACK NULL + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible error return codes of a stream callback function */ + enum StreamCallback_Return_ErrorCodes_t + { + STREAMCALLBACK_Continue = 0, /**< Continue sending or receiving the stream. */ + STREAMCALLBACK_Abort = 1, /**< Abort the stream send or reciving process. */ + }; + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBMode.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBMode.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0fbf68d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBMode.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#ifndef __USBMODE_H__ +#define __USBMODE_H__ + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #if ((defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__)) && !defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY + #endif + + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)) + #define USB_LIMITED_CONTROLLER + #elif (defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)) + #define USB_MODIFIED_FULL_CONTROLLER + #else + #define USB_FULL_CONTROLLER + #endif + + #if (!defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) && !defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)) + #define USB_CAN_BE_BOTH + #define USB_CAN_BE_HOST + #define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE + #elif defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) + #define USB_CAN_BE_HOST + #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_HOST + #elif defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY) + #define USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE + #define USB_CurrentMode USB_MODE_DEVICE + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_HOST_ONLY) && defined(USB_DEVICE_ONLY)) + #error USB_HOST_ONLY and USB_DEVICE_ONLY are mutually exclusive. + #endif + + #if (defined(USB_RAM_DESCRIPTORS) && defined(USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS)) + #error USB_RAM_DESCRIPTORS and USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS are mutually exclusive. + #endif + + #if defined(USE_STATIC_OPTIONS) + #define USB_Options USE_STATIC_OPTIONS + #endif + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e90d397c --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Master include file for the library USB functionality. This file should be included in all user projects making + * use of the USB portions of the library, instead of including any headers in the USB/LowLevel or USB/HighLevel + * directories. + * + * Class specific utility files in USB/Class/ must still be included manually, as they are not normally part of + * the USB library unless desired by the library user. + */ + +#ifndef __USB_H__ +#define __USB_H__ + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (!(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)) && defined(USB_HOST_ONLY)) + #error USB_HOST_ONLY is not available for the currently selected USB AVR model. + #endif + + #if (!(defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__) || defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__) || \ + defined(__AVR_ATmega32U6__))) + #error The currently selected AVR model is not supported under the USB component of the LUFA library. + #endif + + /* Includes: */ + #include "LowLevel/USBMode.h" + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_HOST) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "LowLevel/Host.h" + #include "LowLevel/HostChapter9.h" + #include "LowLevel/Pipe.h" + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_DEVICE) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "LowLevel/Device.h" + #include "LowLevel/DevChapter9.h" + #include "LowLevel/Endpoint.h" + #endif + + #if defined(USB_CAN_BE_BOTH) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + #include "LowLevel/OTG.h" + #endif + + #include "LowLevel/LowLevel.h" + #include "HighLevel/USBTask.h" + #include "HighLevel/USBInterrupt.h" + #include "HighLevel/Events.h" + #include "HighLevel/StdDescriptors.h" + +#endif + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/GettingStarted.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/GettingStarted.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fe3f50b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/GettingStarted.txt @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_GettingStarted Getting Started + * + * Out of the box, LUFA contains a large number of pre-made class demos for you to test, experiment with and + * ultimately build upon for your own projects. All the demos come pre-configured to build and run correctly + * on the AT90USB1287 AVR microcontroller, mounted on the Atmel USBKEY board and running at an 8MHz master clock. + * This is due to two reasons; one, it is the hardware the author posesses, and two, it is the most popular Atmel + * USB demonstration board to date. + * + * \section Sec_Prerequisites Prerequisites + * Before you can compile any of the LUFA library code or demos, you will need a recent distribution of avr-libc (1.6.2+) + * and the AVR-GCC (4.2+) compiler. For Windows users, the best way to obtain these is the WinAVR project + * (http://winavr.sourceforge.net) as this provides a single-file setup for everything required to compile your + * own AVR projects. + * + * \section Sec_Configuring Configuring the Demos, Bootloaders and Projects + * If the target AVR model, clock speed, board or other settings are different to the current settings, they must be changed + * and the project recompiled from the source code before being programmed into the AVR microcontroller. Most project + * configuration options are located in the "makefile" build script inside each LUFA application's folder, however some + * demo or application-specific configuration settings (such as the output format in the AudioOut demo) are located in the + * main .c source file of the project. + * + * Each project "makefile" contains all the script and configuration data required to compile each project. When opened with + * any regular basic text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad (ensure that the save format is a pure ASCII text format) the + * build configuration settings may be altered. + * + * Inside each makefile, a number of configuration variables are located, with the format " = ". For + * each application, the important variables which should be altered are: + * + * - MCU, the target AVR processor. + * - BOARD, the target board hardware + * - F_CPU, the target AVR master clock frequency + * - CDEFS, the C preprocessor defines which configure the source code + * + * These values should be changed to reflect the build hardware. + * + * \subsection SSec_MCU The MCU Parameter + * This parameter indicates the target AVR model for the compiled application. This should be set to the model of the target AVR + * (such as the AT90USB1287, or the ATMEGA32U4), in all lower-case (e.g. "at90usb1287"). Note that not all demos support all the + * USB AVR models, as they may make use of peripherals or modes only present in some devices. + * + * For supported library AVR models, see main documentation page. + * + * \subsection SSec_BOARD The BOARD Parameter + * This parameter indicates the target AVR board hardware for the compiled application. Some LUFA library drivers are board-specific, + * such as the LED driver, and the library needs to know the layout of the target board. If you are using one of the board models listed + * on the main library page, change this parameter to the board name in all UPPER-case. + * + * If you are not using any board-specific drivers in the LUFA library, or you are using a custom board layout, change this to read + * "USER" (no quotes) instead of a standard board name. If the USER board type is selected and the application makes use of one or more + * board-specific hardware drivers inside the LUFA library, then the appropriate stub drives files should be copied from the /BoardStubs/ + * directory into a /Board/ folder inside the application directory, and the stub driver completed with the appropriate code to drive the + * custom board's hardware. + * + * \subsection SSec_F_CPU The F_CPU Parameter + * This parameter indicates the target AVR's master clock frequency, in Hz. Consult your AVR model's datasheet for allowable clock frequencies + * if the USB interface is to be operational. + * + * Note that this value does not actually *alter* the AVR's clock frequency, it is just a way to indicate to the library the clock frequency + * of the AVR as set by the AVR's fuses. If this value does not reflect the actual running frequency of the AVR, incorrect operation of one of more + * library components will ocurr. + * + * \subsection SSec_CDEFS The CDEFS Parameter + * Most applications will actually have multiple CDEF lines, which are concatenated together with the "+=" operator. This ensures that large + * numbers of configuration options remain readable by splitting up groups of options into seperate lines. + * + * Normally, these options do not need to be altered to allow an application to compile and run correctly on a different board or AVR to the + * current configuration - if the options are incorrect, then the demo is most likely incompatible with the chosen USB AVR model and cannot be + * made to function through the altering of the makefile settings alone (or at all). Settings such as the USB mode (device, host or both), the USB + * interface speed (Low or Full speed) and other LUFA configuration options can be set here - refer to the library documentation for details on the + * configuration parameters. + * + * \section Sec_Compiling Compiling a LUFA Application + * Compiling the LUFA demos, applications and/or bootloaders is very simple. LUFA comes with makefile scripts for + * each individual demo, bootloader and project folder, as well as scripts in the /Demos/, /Bootloaders/, /Projects/ + * and the LUFA root directory. This means that compilation can be started from any of the above directories, with + * a build started from an upper directory in the directory structure executing build of all child directories under it. + * This means that while a build inside a particular demo directory will build only that particular demo, a build stated + * from the /Demos/ directory will build all LUFA demo projects sequentially. + * + * \subsection SSec_CommandLine Via the Command Line + * To build a project from the source via the command line, the command "make all" should be executed from the command line in the directory + * of interest. To remove compiled files (including the binary output, all intermediatary files and all diagnostic output + * files), execute "make clean". Once a "make all" has been run and no errors were encountered, the resulting binary will + * be located in the generated ".HEX" file. If your project makes use of pre-initialized EEPROM variables, the generated ".EEP" + * file will contain the project's EEPROM data. + * + * \subsection SSec_AVRStudio Via AVRStudio + * Each demo, project and bootloader contains an AVRStudio project (.aps) which can be used to build each project. Once opened + * in AVRStudio, the project can be built and cleaned using the GUI buttons or menus. Note that the AVRStudio project files make + * use of the external project makefile, thus the procedure for configuring a demo remains the same regardless of the build environment. + * + * \section Sec_Programming Programming a USB AVR + * Once you have built an application, you will need a way to program in the resulting ".HEX" file (and, if your + * application uses EEPROM variables with initial values, also a ".EEP" file) into your USB AVR. Normally, the + * reprogramming an AVR device must be performed using a special piece of programming hardware, through one of the + * supported AVR programming protocols - ISP, HVSP, HVPP, JTAG or dW. This can be done through a custom programmer, + * a third party programmer, or an official Atmel AVR tool - for more information, see the Atmel.com website. + * + * Alternatively, you can use the bootloader. From the Atmel factory, each USB AVR comes preloaded with the Atmel + * DFU (Device Firmware Update) class bootloader, a small piece of AVR firmware which allows the remainder of the + * AVR to be programmed through a non-standard interface such as the serial USART port, SPI, or (in this case) USB. + * Bootloaders have the advantage of not requiring any special hardware for programming, and cannot usually be erased + * or broken without an external programming device. They have disadvantages however; they cannot change the fuses of + * the AVR (special configuration settings that control the operation of the chip itself) and a small portion of the + * AVR's FLASH program memory must be reserved to contain the bootloader firmware, and thus cannot be used by the + * loaded application. Atmel's DFU bootloader is either 4KB (for the smaller USB AVRs) or 8KB (for the larger USB AVRs). + * + * If you wish to use the DFU bootloader to program in your application, refer to your DFU programmer's documentation. + * Atmel provides a free utility called FLIP which is USB AVR compatible, and an open source (Linux compatible) + * alternative exists called "dfu-programmer". + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MainPage.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MainPage.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a12b821 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MainPage.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** + * \mainpage About the LUFA (Formerly MyUSB) Library + * + * Lightweight USB Framework for AVRs Library, written by Dean Camera. + * + * \section Sec_About About this library + * + * Originally based on the AT90USBKEY from Atmel, it is an open-source, driver for the USB-enabled AVR + * microcontrollers, released under the MIT license. Currently, the AT90USB1286, AT90USB1287, AT90USB646, + * AT90USB647, AT90USB162, AT90USB82, ATMEGA16U4, ATMEGA32U6 and ATMEGA32U4 AVR microcontrollers are supported by the + * library. Supported premade boards are the USBKEY, STK525, STK526, RZUSBSTICK and ATAVRUSBRF01. + * + * The library is currently in a stable release, suitable for download and incorporation into user projects for + * both host and device modes. For information about the project progression, check out my blog. + * + * LUFA is written specifically for the free AVR-GCC compiler, and uses several GCC-only extensions to make the + * library API more streamlined and robust. You can download AVR-GCC for free in a convenient windows package, + * from the the WinAVR website. + * + * \section Sec_Links Library Links + * Project Homepage: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php \n + * Development Blog: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/blog \n + * Discussion Group: http://groups.google.com/group/LUFA-support-list \n + * Bugs and Feature Requests: http://code.google.com/p/LUFA-issues/issues/ \n + * Author's Website: http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com \n + * + * WinAVR Website: http://winavr.sourceforge.net \n + * avr-libc Website: http://www.nongnu.org/avr-libc/ \n + * + * USB-IF Website: http://www.usb.org \n + * + * \section Sec_License License + * The LUFA library is currently released under the MIT licence, included below. + * + * \verbatim + * Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + * and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + * granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + * copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + * permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + * documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + * advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + * software without specific, written prior permission. + * + * The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + * software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + * and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + * special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + * whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + * in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + * arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + * this software. + * \endverbatim + * + * \section Sec_Demos Demos and Bootloaders + * The LUFA library ships with several different host and device demos, located in the /Demos/ subdirectory. + * If this directory is missing, please re-download the project from the project homepage. + * + * Also included with the library are two fully functional bootloaders, loacated in the /Bootloaders/ subdirectory. + * The DFU class bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP software or the open source dfu-programmer project, and + * the CDC class (AVR109 protocol) is compatible with such open source software as AVRDUDE and AVR-OSP. + * + * \section Sec_Donations Donate + * I am a 19 year old University student studying for a double degree in Computer Science and Electronics + * Engineering. This leaves little time for any sort of work or leisure. Please consider donating a small amount + * to myself to support this and my future Open Source projects. You can donate any amount via PayPal on my + * website, http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com . All donations are greatly appreciated. + */ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a91e0f35 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DYNALLOC_C +#include "DynAlloc.h" + +struct +{ + char Mem_Heap[NUM_BLOCKS * BLOCK_SIZE]; + void* Mem_Handles[NUM_HANDLES]; + uint8_t Mem_Block_Flags[(NUM_BLOCKS / 4) + ((NUM_BLOCKS % 4) ? 1 : 0)]; + uint8_t FlagMaskLookupMask[4]; + uint8_t FlagMaskLookupNum[4]; +} Mem_MemData = {FlagMaskLookupMask: {(3 << 0), (3 << 2), (3 << 4), (3 << 6)}, + FlagMaskLookupNum: { 0, 2, 4, 6}}; + +static uint8_t Mem_GetBlockFlags(const Block_Number_t BlockNum) +{ + const Block_Number_t BlockIndex = (BlockNum >> 2); + const uint8_t FlagMask = Mem_MemData.FlagMaskLookupMask[BlockNum & 0x03]; + const uint8_t FlagMaskShift = Mem_MemData.FlagMaskLookupNum[BlockNum & 0x03]; + + return ((Mem_MemData.Mem_Block_Flags[BlockIndex] & FlagMask) >> FlagMaskShift); +} + +static void Mem_SetBlockFlags(const Block_Number_t BlockNum, const uint8_t Flags) +{ + const Block_Number_t BlockIndex = (BlockNum >> 2); + const uint8_t FlagMask = Mem_MemData.FlagMaskLookupMask[BlockNum & 0x03]; + const uint8_t FlagMaskShift = Mem_MemData.FlagMaskLookupNum[BlockNum & 0x03]; + + Mem_MemData.Mem_Block_Flags[BlockIndex] &= ~FlagMask; + Mem_MemData.Mem_Block_Flags[BlockIndex] |= (Flags << FlagMaskShift); +} + +static inline void Mem_Defrag(void) +{ + Block_Number_t FreeStartBlock = 0; + char* FreeStartPtr = NULL; + char* UsedStartPtr = NULL; + Block_Number_t CurrBlock; + + for (CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < NUM_BLOCKS; CurrBlock++) + { + if (!(Mem_GetBlockFlags(CurrBlock) & BLOCK_USED_MASK)) + { + FreeStartPtr = &Mem_MemData.Mem_Heap[CurrBlock * BLOCK_SIZE]; + FreeStartBlock = CurrBlock; + break; + } + } + + if (FreeStartPtr == NULL) + return; + + while (++CurrBlock < NUM_BLOCKS) + { + uint8_t CurrBlockFlags = Mem_GetBlockFlags(CurrBlock); + + if (CurrBlockFlags & BLOCK_USED_MASK) + { + UsedStartPtr = &Mem_MemData.Mem_Heap[CurrBlock * BLOCK_SIZE]; + + for (Handle_Number_t HandleNum = 0; HandleNum < NUM_HANDLES; HandleNum++) + { + if (Mem_MemData.Mem_Handles[HandleNum] == UsedStartPtr) + { + Mem_MemData.Mem_Handles[HandleNum] = FreeStartPtr; + break; + } + } + + memcpy(FreeStartPtr, UsedStartPtr, BLOCK_SIZE); + FreeStartPtr += BLOCK_SIZE; + + Mem_SetBlockFlags(FreeStartBlock++, CurrBlockFlags); + Mem_SetBlockFlags(CurrBlock, 0); + } + } +} + +static inline bool Mem_FindFreeBlocks(Block_Number_t* const RetStartPtr, const Block_Number_t Blocks) +{ + Block_Number_t FreeInCurrSec = 0; + + for (Block_Number_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < NUM_BLOCKS; CurrBlock++) + { + if (Mem_GetBlockFlags(CurrBlock) & BLOCK_USED_MASK) + FreeInCurrSec = 0; + else + FreeInCurrSec++; + + if (FreeInCurrSec >= Blocks) + { + *RetStartPtr = CurrBlock; + return true; + } + } + + return false; +} + +Mem_Handle_t Mem_Alloc(const Alloc_Size_t Bytes) +{ + Block_Number_t ReqBlocks = (Bytes / BLOCK_SIZE); + Block_Number_t StartBlock; + + if (Bytes % BLOCK_SIZE) + ReqBlocks++; + + if (!(Mem_FindFreeBlocks(&StartBlock, ReqBlocks))) + { + Mem_Defrag(); + + if (!(Mem_FindFreeBlocks(&StartBlock, ReqBlocks))) + return NULL; + } + + for (Block_Number_t UsedBlock = 0; UsedBlock < (ReqBlocks - 1); UsedBlock++) + Mem_SetBlockFlags((StartBlock + UsedBlock), (BLOCK_USED_MASK | BLOCK_LINKED_MASK)); + + Mem_SetBlockFlags((StartBlock + (ReqBlocks - 1)), BLOCK_USED_MASK); + + for (Handle_Number_t AllocEntry = 0; AllocEntry < NUM_HANDLES; AllocEntry++) + { + Mem_Handle_t CurrHdl = (Mem_Handle_t)&Mem_MemData.Mem_Handles[AllocEntry]; + + if (DEREF(CurrHdl, void*) == NULL) + { + DEREF(CurrHdl, void*) = &Mem_MemData.Mem_Heap[StartBlock * BLOCK_SIZE]; + return CurrHdl; + } + } + + return NULL; +} + +Mem_Handle_t Mem_Realloc(Mem_Handle_t CurrAllocHdl, const Alloc_Size_t Bytes) +{ + Mem_Free(CurrAllocHdl); + return Mem_Alloc(Bytes); +} + +Mem_Handle_t Mem_Calloc(const Alloc_Size_t Bytes) +{ + Mem_Handle_t AllocHdl = Mem_Alloc(Bytes); + + if (AllocHdl != NULL) + memset(DEREF(AllocHdl, void*), 0x00, Bytes); + + return AllocHdl; +} + +void Mem_Free(Mem_Handle_t CurrAllocHdl) +{ + char* MemBlockPtr = DEREF(CurrAllocHdl, char*); + Block_Number_t CurrBlock = ((uint16_t)(MemBlockPtr - Mem_MemData.Mem_Heap) / BLOCK_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrBlockFlags; + + if ((CurrAllocHdl == NULL) || (MemBlockPtr == NULL)) + return; + + do + { + CurrBlockFlags = Mem_GetBlockFlags(CurrBlock); + Mem_SetBlockFlags(CurrBlock, 0); + + CurrBlock++; + } + while (CurrBlockFlags & BLOCK_LINKED_MASK); + + DEREF(CurrAllocHdl, void*) = NULL; +} + +Block_Number_t Mem_TotalFreeBlocks(void) +{ + Block_Number_t FreeBlocks = 0; + + for (Block_Number_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < NUM_BLOCKS; CurrBlock++) + { + if (!(Mem_GetBlockFlags(CurrBlock) & BLOCK_USED_MASK)) + FreeBlocks++; + } + + return FreeBlocks; +} + +Handle_Number_t Mem_TotalFreeHandles(void) +{ + Handle_Number_t FreeHandles = 0; + + for (Handle_Number_t CurrHandle = 0; CurrHandle < NUM_HANDLES; CurrHandle++) + { + if (Mem_MemData.Mem_Handles[CurrHandle] == NULL) + FreeHandles++; + } + + return FreeHandles; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fd743ea --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.h @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Dynamic, auto-defragmenting block memory allocator library. This library provides a convenient replacement for + * the standard avr-libc dynamic memory allocation routines. Memory is handed out in block chunks, to reduce the + * management memory overhead. + * + * Unlike the normal memory allocation routines, this library gives out handles to memory which must be dereferenced + * at the exact time of use, rather than handing back direct memory pointers. By using library managed handles + * instead of pointers, allocated memory blocks can be shifted around as needed transparently to defragment the + * memory as more blocks are requested. + * + * The memory heap is static, thus the total memory usage of the compiled application (as reported by the avr-size + * tool of the AVR-GCC toolchain) includes the dynamic memory heap. + * + * The constants NUM_BLOCKS, BLOCK_SIZE and NUM_HANDLES must be defined in the project makefile (and passed to the + * preprocessor via the -D GCC switch) for this library to compile. + * + * NUM_BLOCKS indicates the number of memory blocks in the memory psudoheap which can be chaned together and handed + * to the application via a memory handle. NUM_HANDLES is the maximum number of memory handles (pointing to one or + * more chained memory blocks) which can be handed out simultaneously before requring a handle (and its associated + * memory) to be freed. BLOCK_SIZE gives the number of bytes in each memory block. + */ + +#ifndef __DYN_ALLOC__ +#define __DYN_ALLOC__ + + /* Includes : */ + #include + #include + #include + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (!defined(NUM_BLOCKS) || !defined(BLOCK_SIZE) || !defined(NUM_HANDLES)) + #error NUM_BLOCKS, BLOCK_SIZE and NUM_HANDLES must be defined before use via makefile. + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to dereference a given memory handle into the given type. The given type should be a pointer + * if the memory is to contain an array of items, or should be a standard type (such as a primative or + * structure) if the memory is to hold a single item of a single type. */ + #define DEREF(handle, type) (*(type*)handle) + + /** Constant, giving the total heap size in bytes. */ + #define ALLOCABLE_BYTES (1UL * NUM_BLOCKS * BLOCK_SIZE) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Memory handle type, used to store handles given by the library functions. */ + typedef const void** Mem_Handle_t; + + #if (ALLOCABLE_BYTES > 0xFFFF) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Type define for the size (in bytes) for an allocation for passing to the library functions. + * The exact type width varies depending on the value of ALLOCABLE_BYTES to ensure that a single + * allocation can request the entire heap if needed. + */ + typedef uint32_t Alloc_Size_t; + #elif (ALLOCABLE_BYTES > 0xFF) + typedef uint16_t Alloc_Size_t; + #else + typedef uint8_t Alloc_Size_t; + #endif + + #if (NUM_BLOCKS > 0xFFFF) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Type define for a block number in the heap. The exact type width varies depending on the + * value of NUM_BLOCKS to ensure that the type can store an index to any block in the block pool. + */ + typedef uint32_t Block_Number_t; + #elif (NUM_BLOCKS > 0xFF) + typedef uint16_t Block_Number_t; + #else + typedef uint8_t Block_Number_t; + #endif + + #if (NUM_HANDLES > 0xFFFF) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Type define for a handle number. The exact type width varies depending on the value of NUM_HANDLES + * to ensure that the type can store the index of any handle in the handle pool. + */ + typedef uint32_t Handle_Number_t; + #elif (NUM_HANDLES > 0xFF) + typedef uint16_t Handle_Number_t; + #else + typedef uint8_t Handle_Number_t; + #endif + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Allocates a given number of blocks from the heap (calculated from the requested number of bytes) and + * returns a handle to the newly allocated memory. + * + * \param Bytes The number of bytes requested to be allocated from the heap + * + * \return NULL handle if the allocation fails, or handle to the allocated memory if the allocation succeeds + */ + Mem_Handle_t Mem_Alloc(const Alloc_Size_t Bytes); + + /** Allocates a given number of blocks from the heap (calculated from the requested number of bytes) and + * returns a handle to the newly allocated memory. Calloced memory is automatically cleared to all 0x00 + * values at the time of allocation. + * + * \param Bytes The number of pre-cleared bytes requested to be allocated from the heap + * + * \return NULL handle if the allocation fails, or handle to the allocated memory if the allocation succeeds + */ + Mem_Handle_t Mem_Calloc(const Alloc_Size_t Bytes); + + /** Deallocates a given memory handle, and attempts to allocates the given number of blocks from the heap + * (calculated from the requested number of bytes) immediately following the deallocation. The new memory + * may be located in the same area as the previous memory, but this is not guaranteed. + * + * \param CurrAllocHdl Handle to an already allocated section of memory in the heap to deallocate + * \param Bytes The number of bytes requested to be allocated from the heap following the + * deallocation + * + * \return NULL handle if the allocation fails, or handle to the allocated memory if the allocation succeeds + * + * \warning Even if the allocation fails, the deallocation will still occur. Care should be taken to ensure + * that the previously allocated memory is not used following an unsuccessful realloc(). + */ + Mem_Handle_t Mem_Realloc(Mem_Handle_t CurrAllocHdl, const Alloc_Size_t Bytes); + + /** Deallocates a given previously allocated section of memory from the heap. + * + * \param CurrAllocHdl Handle to a previously allocated section of memory in the heap + */ + void Mem_Free(Mem_Handle_t CurrAllocHdl); + + /** Returns the total number of unallocated blocks in the heap. + * + * \return Number of free blocks in the heap, as a Block_Number_t integer + */ + Block_Number_t Mem_TotalFreeBlocks(void); + + /** Returns the total number of unallocated handles in the handle pool. + * + * \return Number of free handles in the handle pool, as a Handle_Number_t integer + */ + Handle_Number_t Mem_TotalFreeHandles(void); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define BLOCK_USED_MASK (1 << 0) + #define BLOCK_LINKED_MASK (1 << 1) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DYNALLOC_C) + static uint8_t Mem_GetBlockFlags(const Block_Number_t BlockNum); + static void Mem_SetBlockFlags(const Block_Number_t BlockNum, const uint8_t Flags); + static void Mem_Defrag(void); + #endif + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MigrationInformation.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MigrationInformation.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eced0a96 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/MigrationInformation.txt @@ -0,0 +1,227 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_Migration Migrating from Older Versions + * + * Below is migration information for updating existing projects based on previous versions of the LUFA library + * to the next version released. It does not indicate all new additions to the library in each version change, only + * areas relevant to making older projects compatible with the API changes of each new release. + * + * \section Sec_Migration090209 Migrating from 081217 to 090209 + * + * Device Mode + * - The ENDPOINT_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of ENDPOINT_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS. + * - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user + * makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout. + * + * Host Mode + * - The PIPE_MAX_ENDPOINTS constant has been renamed to the more appropriate name of PIPE_TOTAL_ENDPOINTS. + * - The USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS stream timeout default period has been extended to 100ms. This can be overridden in the user + * makefile if desired to restore the previous 50ms timeout. + * - The USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event now contains a second "SubErrorCode" parameter, giving the error code of the function + * which failed. + * - The HID_PARSE_Sucessful enum member constant has been corrected to HID_PARSE_Successful. + * + * Non-USB Library Components + * - The previous SPI_SendByte() functionality is now located in SPI_TransferByte(). SPI_SendByte() now discards the return byte + * for speed, to compliment the new SPI_ReceiveByte() function. If two-way SPI transfers are required, calls to SPI_SendByte() + * should be changed to SPI_TransferByte(). + * - The serial driver now sets the Tx line as an output explicitly, and enables the pullup of the Rx line. + * - The Serial_Init() and SerialStream_Init() functions now take a second DoubleSpeed parameter, which indicates if the USART + * should be initialized in double speed mode - useful in some circumstances for attaining baud rates not usually possible at + * the given AVR clock speed. + * + * Library Demos + * - Most library demos have been enhanced and/or had errors corrected. All users of all demos should upgrade their codebase to + * the latest demo versions. + * + * \section Sec_Migration171208 Migrating from V1.5.3 to 081217 + * + * All + * - The MyUSB project name has been changed to LUFA (Lightweight Framework for USB AVRs). All references to MyUSB, including macro names, + * have been changed to LUFA. + * + * Library Demos + * - The ReconfigureUSART() routine in the USBtoSerial demo was not being called after new line encoding + * parameters were set by the host. Projects built on the USBtoSerial code should update to the latest version. + * - The HID Parser now supports multiple report (on a single endpoint) HID devices. The MouseHostWithParser and + * KeyboardHostWithPaser demos use the updated API functions to function correctly on such devices. Projects + * built on either "WithParser" demo should update to the latest code. + * - The RNDIS demo TCP stack has been modified so that connections can be properly closed. It is still not + * recommended that the MyUSB RNDIS demo TCP/IP stack be used for anything other than demonstration purposes, + * as it is neither a full nor a standards compliant implementation. + * + * Non-USB Library Components + * - The Serial_IsCharRecieved() macro has been changed to the correct spelling of Serial_IsCharReceived() in Serial.h. + * + * Device Mode + * - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask + * to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. + * - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is + * currently initialized. + * - Interrupts are now disabled when processing control requests, to avoid problems with interrupts causing the library + * or user request processing code to exceed the strict USB timing requirements on control transfers. + * - The USB Reset event now resets and disables all device endpoints. If user code depends on endpoints remaining configured + * after a Reset event, it should be altered to explicitly re-initialize all user endpoints. + * - The prototype for the GetDescriptor function has been changed, as the return value was redundant. The function now + * returns the size of the descriptor, rather than passing it back via a parameter, or returns NO_DESCRIPTOR if the specified + * descriptor does not exist. + * - The NO_DESCRIPTOR_STRING macro has been renamed NO_DESCRIPTOR, and is now also used as a possible return value for the + * GetDescriptor function. + * + * Host Mode + * - The MANUAL_PLL_CONTROL compile time token has been removed, and replaced with a USB_OPT_MANUAL_PLL mask + * to be used in the Options parameter of the USB_Init() function. + * - The HID report parser now supports multiple Report IDs. The HID report parser GetReportItemInfo() and + * SetReportItemInfo() routines now return a boolean, set if the requested report item was located in the + * current report. If sending a report to a multi-report device, the first byte of the report is automatically + * set to the report ID of the given report item. + * - Calling USB_Init() now forces a complete USB interface reset and enumeration, even if the USB interface is + * currently initialized. + * + * + * \section Sec_Migration152 Migrating from V1.5.2 to V1.5.3 + * + * Library Demos + * - Previously, all demos contained a serial number string descriptor, filled with all zeros. A serial number + * string is required in Mass Storage devices, or devices which are to retain settings when moved between + * ports on a machine. As people were not changing the serial number value, this was causing conflicts and so + * the serial number descriptor has been removed from all but the Mass Storage demo, which requires it. + * - The AudioOut and AudioIn demos did not previously silence their endpoints when the host has deactivated + * them. Projects built upon either demo should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The FEATURE_ENDPOINT macro has been renamed FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT, and is now correctly documented. + * - The MassStoreHost demo contained errors which caused it to lock up randomly on certain devices. Projects built + * on the MassStoreDemo code should update to the latest version. + * - The Interrupt type endpoint in the CDC based demos previously had a polling interval of 0x02, which caused + * problems on some Linux systems. This has been changed to 0xFF, projects built on the CDC demos should upgrade + * to the latest code. + * - The HID keyboard and mouse demos were not previously boot mode compatible. To enable boot mode support, projects + * built on the keyboard or mouse demos (or derivatives) should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The Mass Storage demo was not previously standards compliant. Projects built on the Mass Storage demo should + * upgrade to the latest code. + * - The USART was not being reconfigured after the host sent new encoding settings in the USBtoSerial demo. This was + * previously discovered and fixed, but the change was lost. Projects built on the USBtoSerial demo should update + * to the latest code. + * + * Device Mode + * - The endpoint non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream. + * If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The + * timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired + * timeout duration in ms. + * - Rather than returning fixed values, the flags indicating if the device has Remote Wakeup currently enabled + * and/or is self-powered are now accessed and set through the new USB_RemoteWakeupEnabled and + * USB_CurrentlySelfPowered macros. See the DevChapter9.h documentation for more details. + * - All endpoint stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated + * to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by pasing + * the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch. + * + * Host Mode + * - The pipe non-control stream functions now have a default timeout of 50ms between packets in the stream. + * If this timeout is exceeded, the function returns the new PIPE_RWSTREAM_ERROR_Timeout error value. The + * timeout value can be overridden by defining the USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS in the project makefile to the desired + * timeout duration in ms. + * - CollectionPath_t has been renamed to HID_CollectionPath_t to be more in line with the other HID parser structures. + * - All pipe stream functions now require an extra Callback function parameter. Existing code may be updated + * to either supply NO_STREAM_CALLBACK as the extra parameter, or disable stream callbacks altogether by pasing + * the token NO_STREAM_CALLBACKS to the compiler using the -D switch. + * + * + * \section Sec_Migration151 Migrating from V1.5.1 to V1.5.2 + * + * Library Demos + * - The RNDIS demo application has been updated so that it is functional on Linux under earlier implementations + * of the RNDIS specification, which had non-standard behaviour. Projects built upon the demo should upgrade + * to the latest code. + * - The DFU class bootloader has had several bugs corrected in this release. It is recommended that where + * possible any existing devices upgrade to the latest bootloader code. + * + * + * \section Sec_Migration150 Migrating from V1.5.0 to V1.5.1 + * + * Library Demos + * - The USBtoSerial demo was broken in the 1.5.0 release, due to incorrect register polling in place of the + * global "Transmitting" flag. The change has been reverted in this release. Projects built upon the demo + * should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The HID class demos did not implement the mandatory GetReport HID class request. Projects built upon the HID + * demos should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The HID class demos incorrectly reported themselves as boot-protocol enabled HID devices in their descriptors. + * Projects built upon the HID demos should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The MIDI device demo had incorrect AudioStreaming interface descriptors. Projects built upon the MIDI demo + * should upgrade to the latest code. + * - The AudioOut demo did not correctly tristate the speaker pins when USB was disconnected, wasting power. + * Projects built upon the AudioOut demo should upgrade to the latest code. + * + * + * \section Sec_Migration141 Migrating from V1.4.1 to V1.5.0 + * + * Library Demos + * - Previous versions of the library demos had incorrectly encoded BCD version numbers in the descriptors. To + * avoid such mistakes in the future, the VERSION_BCD macro has been added to StdDescriptors.h. Existing + * projects should at least manually correct the BCD version numbers, or preferably update the descriptors to + * encode the version number in BCD format using the new macro. + * - The mandatory GetReport class-specific request was accidentally ommitted from previous versions of the demos + * based on the Human Interface Device (HID) class. This has been corrected, and any user projects based on the + * HID demos should also be updated accordingly. + * - The CDC demos now correctly send an empty packet directly after a full packet, to end the transmission. + * Failure to do this on projects which always or frequently send full packets will cause buffering issues on + * the host OS. All CDC user projects are advised to update their transmission routines in the same manner as + * the library CDC demos. + * - The previous interrupt-driven Endpoint/Pipe demos did not properly save and restore the currently selected + * Endpoint/Pipe when the ISR fired. This has been corrected - user projects based on the interrupt driven + * demos should also update to properly save and restore the selected Endpoint/Pipe. + * + * Non-USB Library Components + * - The Atomic.h and ISRMacro.h header files in MyUSB/Common have been removed, as the library is now only + * compatible with avr-libc library versions newer than the time before the functionality of the deleted + * headers was available. + * + * Device Mode + * - The GetDescriptor function (see StdDescriptors.h) now has a new prototype, with altered parameter names and + * functions. Existing projects will need to update the GetDescriptor implementation to reflect the new API. + * The previously split Type and Index parameters are now passed as the original wValue parameter to the + * function, to make way for the USB specification wIndex parameter which is not the same as the + * previous Index parameter. + * - The USB_UnhandledControlPacket event (see Events.h) now has new parameter names, to be in line with the + * official USB specification. Existing code will need to be altered to use the new parameter names. + * - The USB_CreateEndpoints event (see Events.h) has been renamed to USB_ConfigurationChanged, which is more + * appropriate. It fires in an identical manner to the previously named event, thus the only change to be made + * is the event name itself in the user project. + * - The USB_Descriptor_Language_t structure no longer exists in StdDescriptors.h, as this was a + * psudo-descriptor modelled on the string descriptor. It is replaced by the true USB_Descriptor_String_t type + * descriptor as indicated in the USB specification, thus all device code must be updated accordingly. + * - The names of several Endpoint macros have been changed to be more consistant with the rest of the library, + * with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names + * with no other considerations required. See Endpoint.h for the new macro names. + * - The previous version of the MassStorage demo had an incorrect value in the SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t + * strucuture named SenseData in SCSI.c which caused some problems with some hosts. User projects based on this + * demo should correct the structure value to maintain compatibility across multiple OS platforms. + * - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous + * versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current + * and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more details. + * + * Host Mode + * - The USB_Host_Request_Header_t structure in HostChapter9.h (used for issuing control requests) has had its + * members renamed to the official USB specification names for requests. Existing code will need to be updated + * to use the new names. + * - The names of several Pipe macros have been changed to be more consistant with the rest of the library, + * with no implementation changes. This means that existing code can be altered to use the new macro names + * with no other considerations required. See Pipe.h for the new macro names. + * - By default, the descriptor structures use the official USB specification names for the elements. Previous + * versions of the library used non-standard (but more verbose) names, which are still usable in the current + * and future releases when the correct compile time option is enabled. See the StdDescriptors.h file + * documentation for more details. + * - The names of the macros in Host.h for controlling the SOF generation have been renamed, see the Host.h + * module documentation for the new macro names. + * + * Dual Role Mode + * - The OTG.h header file has been corrected so that the macros now perform their stated functions. Any existing + * projects using custom headers to fix the broken OTG header should now be altered to once again use the OTG + * header inside the library. + * - The USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event (see Events.h) now also fires in Device mode, when the host has + * finished enumerating the device. Projects relying on the event only firing in Host mode should be updated + * so that the event action only ocurrs when the USB_Mode global is set to USB_MODE_HOST. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff8946a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "Scheduler.h" + +volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t Scheduler_TickCounter; +volatile uint8_t Scheduler_TotalTasks; + +bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay, SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter) +{ + SchedulerDelayCounter_t CurrentTickValue_LCL; + SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter_LCL; + + ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + { + CurrentTickValue_LCL = Scheduler_TickCounter; + } + + DelayCounter_LCL = *DelayCounter; + + if (CurrentTickValue_LCL >= DelayCounter_LCL) + { + if ((CurrentTickValue_LCL - DelayCounter_LCL) >= Delay) + { + *DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL; + return true; + } + } + else + { + if (((MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - DelayCounter_LCL) + CurrentTickValue_LCL) >= Delay) + { + *DelayCounter = CurrentTickValue_LCL; + return true; + } + } + + return false; +} + +void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus) +{ + TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0]; + + while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks]) + { + if (CurrTask->Task == Task) + { + CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus; + break; + } + + CurrTask++; + } +} + +void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus) +{ + TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0]; + + while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[Scheduler_TotalTasks]) + { + if (CurrTask->GroupID == GroupID) + CurrTask->TaskStatus = TaskStatus; + + CurrTask++; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39f94ef8 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.h @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Simple round-robbin cooperative scheduler for use in basic projects where non realtime tasks need + * to be executed. Each task is executed in sequence, and can be enabled or disabled individually or as a group. + * + * For a task to yield it must return, thus each task should have persistant data marked with the static attribute. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * #include + * + * TASK(MyTask1); + * TASK(MyTask2); + * + * TASK_LIST + * { + * { Task: MyTask1, TaskStatus: TASK_RUN, GroupID: 1 }, + * { Task: MyTask2, TaskStatus: TASK_RUN, GroupID: 1 }, + * } + * + * int main(void) + * { + * Scheduler_Start(); + * } + * + * TASK(MyTask1) + * { + * // Implementation Here + * } + * + * TASK(MyTask2) + * { + * // Implementation Here + * } + * \endcode + */ + +#ifndef __SCHEDULER_H__ +#define __SCHEDULER_H__ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + #include "../Common/Common.h" + + /* Enable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + extern "C" { + #endif + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Creates a new scheduler task body or prototype. Should be used in the form: + * \code + * TASK(TaskName); // Prototype + * + * TASK(TaskName) + * { + * // Task body + * } + * \endcode + */ + #define TASK(name) void name (void) + + /** Defines a task list array, containing one or more task entries of the type TaskEntry_t. Each task list + * should be encased in curly braces and ended with a comma. + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * TASK_LIST + * { + * { Task: MyTask1, TaskStatus: TASK_RUN, GroupID: 1 }, + * // More task entries here + * } + * \endcode + */ + #define TASK_LIST extern TaskEntry_t Scheduler_TaskList[]; TaskEntry_t Scheduler_TaskList[] = + + /** Constant, giving the maximum delay in scheduler ticks which can be stored in a variable of type + * SchedulerDelayCounter_t. + */ + #define TASK_MAX_DELAY (MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT - 1) + + /** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */ + #define TASK_RUN true + + /** Task status mode constant, for passing to Scheduler_SetTaskMode() or Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(). */ + #define TASK_STOP false + + /** Starts the scheduler in its infinite loop, executing running tasks. This should be placed at the end + * of the user application's main() function, as it can never return to the calling function. + */ + #define Scheduler_Start() Scheduler_GoSchedule(TOTAL_TASKS); + + /** Initializes the scheduler so that the scheduler functions can be called before the scheduler itself + * is started. This must be exeucted before any scheduler function calls other than Scheduler_Start(), + * and can be ommitted if no such functions could be called before the scheduler is started. + */ + #define Scheduler_Init() Scheduler_InitScheduler(TOTAL_TASKS); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a pointer to a scheduler task. */ + typedef void (*TaskPtr_t)(void); + + /** Type define for a variable which can hold a tick delay value for the scheduler up to the maximum delay + * possible. + */ + typedef uint16_t SchedulerDelayCounter_t; + + /** Structure for holding a single task's information in the scheduler task list. */ + typedef struct + { + TaskPtr_t Task; /**< Pointer to the task to execute. */ + bool TaskStatus; /**< Status of the task (either TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP). */ + uint8_t GroupID; /**< Group ID of the task so that its status can be changed as a group. */ + } TaskEntry_t; + + /* Global Variables: */ + /** Task entry list, containing the scheduler tasks, task statuses and group IDs. Each entry is of type + * TaskEntry_t and can be manipulated as desired, although it is preferential that the proper Scheduler + * functions should be used instead of direct manipulation. + */ + extern TaskEntry_t Scheduler_TaskList[]; + + /** Contains the total number of tasks in the task list, irrespective of if the task's status is set to + * TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP. + * + * \note This value should be treated as read-only, and never altered in user-code. + */ + extern volatile uint8_t Scheduler_TotalTasks; + + /** Contains the current scheduler tick count, for use with the delay functions. If the delay functions + * are used in the user code, this should be incremented each tick period so that the delays can be + * calculated. + */ + extern volatile SchedulerDelayCounter_t Scheduler_TickCounter; + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Resets the delay counter value to the current tick count. This should be called to reset the period + * for a delay in a task which is dependant on the current tick value. + * + * \param DelayCounter Counter which is storing the starting tick count for a given delay. + */ + static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter) + ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + static inline void Scheduler_ResetDelay(SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter) + { + ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + { + *DelayCounter = Scheduler_TickCounter; + } + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Determines if the given tick delay has elapsed, based on the given . + * + * \param Delay The delay to test for, measured in ticks + * \param DelayCounter The counter which is storing the starting tick value for the delay + * + * \return Boolean true if the delay has elapsed, false otherwise + * + * Usage Example: + * \code + * static SchedulerDelayCounter_t DelayCounter = 10000; // Force immediate run on startup + * + * // Task runs every 10000 ticks, 10 seconds for this demo + * if (Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(10000, &DelayCounter)) + * { + * // Code to execute after delay interval elapsed here + * } + * \endcode + */ + bool Scheduler_HasDelayElapsed(const uint16_t Delay, + SchedulerDelayCounter_t* const DelayCounter) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2); + + /** Sets the task mode for a given task. + * + * \param Task Name of the task whose status is to be changed + * \param TaskStatus New task status for the task (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP) + */ + void Scheduler_SetTaskMode(const TaskPtr_t Task, const bool TaskStatus); + + /** Sets the task mode for a given task group ID, allowing for an entire group of tasks to have their + * statuses changed at once. + * + * \param GroupID Value of the task group ID whose status is to be changed + * \param TaskStatus New task status for tasks in the specified group (TASK_RUN or TASK_STOP) + */ + void Scheduler_SetGroupTaskMode(const uint8_t GroupID, const bool TaskStatus); + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + #if !defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /* Macros: */ + #define TOTAL_TASKS (sizeof(Scheduler_TaskList) / sizeof(TaskEntry_t)) + #define MAX_DELAYCTR_COUNT 0xFFFF + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void Scheduler_InitScheduler(const uint8_t TotalTasks) + { + Scheduler_TotalTasks = TotalTasks; + } + + static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks) ATTR_NO_RETURN; + static inline void Scheduler_GoSchedule(const uint8_t TotalTasks) + { + Scheduler_InitScheduler(TotalTasks); + + for (;;) + { + TaskEntry_t* CurrTask = &Scheduler_TaskList[0]; + + while (CurrTask != &Scheduler_TaskList[TotalTasks]) + { + if (CurrTask->TaskStatus == TASK_RUN) + CurrTask->Task(); + + CurrTask++; + } + } + } + #endif + + /* Disable C linkage for C++ Compilers: */ + #if defined(__cplusplus) + } + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/SchedulerOverview.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/SchedulerOverview.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a4f4928 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/SchedulerOverview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_SchedulerOverview LUFA Scheduler Overview + * + * The LUFA library comes with a small, basic round-robbin scheduler which allows for small "tasks" to be executed + * continuously in sequence, and enabled/disabled at runtime. Unlike a conventional, complex RTOS scheduler, the + * LUFA scheduler is very simple in design and operation and is essentially a loop conditionally executing a series + * of functions. + * + * Each LUFA scheduler task should be written similar to an ISR; it should execute quickly (so that no one task + * hogs the processor, preventing another from running before some sort of timeout is exceeded). Unlike normal RTOS + * tasks, each LUFA scheduler task is a regular function, and thus must be designed to be called, and designed to + * return to the calling scheduler function repeatedly. Data which must be preserved between task calls should be + * declared as global or (prefferably) as a static local variable inside the task. + * + * The scheduler consists of a task list, listing all the tasks which can be executed by the scheduler. Once started, + * each task is then called one after another, unless the task is stopped by another running task or interrupt. + * + * + * If desired, the LUFA scheduler does not need to be used in a LUFA powered application. A more conventional + * approach to application design can be used, or a proper scheduling RTOS inserted in the place of the LUFA scheduler. + * In the case of the former the USB task must be run manually repeatedly to maintain USB communications, and in the + * case of the latter a proper RTOS task must be set up to do the same. + * + * + * For more information on the LUFA scheduler, see the Scheduler.h file documentation. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/VIDAndPIDValues.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/VIDAndPIDValues.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d650b7b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/VIDAndPIDValues.txt @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_VIDPID VID and PID values + * + * The LUFA library uses VID/PID combinations generously donated by Atmel. The following VID/PID combinations + * are used within the LUFA demos, and thus may be re-used by derivations of each demo. Free PID values may be + * used by future LUFA demo projects. + * + * These VID/PID values should not be used in commercial designs under any circumstances. Private projects may + * use the following values freely, but must accept any collisions due to other LUFA derived private projects + * sharing identical values. It is suggested that private projects using interfaces compatible with existing + * demos share the save VID/PID value. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
+ * VID + * + * PID + * + * Usage + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2040 + * + * Test Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2041 + * + * Mouse Demo Application (and derivatives) + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2042 + * + * Keyboard Demo Application (and derivatives) + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2043 + * + * Joystick Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2044 + * + * CDC Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2045 + * + * Mass Storage Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2046 + * + * Audio Output Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2047 + * + * Audio Input Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2048 + * + * MIDI Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x2049 + * + * MagStripe Project + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204A + * + * CDC Bootloader + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204B + * + * USB to Serial Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204C + * + * RNDIS Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204D + * + * Keyboard and Mouse Combination Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204E + * + * Dual CDC Demo Application + *
+ * 0x03EB + * + * 0x204F + * + * * UNUSED - FREE FOR PRIVATE HOBBYIST PROJECTS UNTIL ALLOCATED * + *
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Version.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Version.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a606beeb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/Version.h @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Version constants for informational purposes and version-specific macro creation. This header file contains the + * current LUFA version number in several forms, for use in the user-application (for example, for printing out + * whilst debugging, or for testing for version compatibility). + */ + +#ifndef __LUFA_VERSION_H__ +#define __LUFA_VERSION_H__ + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Indicates the version number of the library, as an integer. */ + #define LUFA_VERSION_INTEGER 090209 + + /** Indicates the version number of the library, as a string. */ + #define LUFA_VERSION_STRING "090209" + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/WritingBoardDrivers.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/WritingBoardDrivers.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d0e74d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/WritingBoardDrivers.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \page Page_WritingBoardDrivers Writing LUFA Board Drivers + * + * LUFA ships with several basic pre-made board drivers, to control hardware present on the supported board + * hardware - such as Dataflash ICs, LEDs, Joysticks, or other hardware peripherals. When compiling an application + * which makes use of one or more board drivers located in LUFA/Drivers/Board, you must also indicate what board + * hardware you are using in your project makefile. This is done by defining the BOARD macro using the -D switch + * passed to the compiler, with a constant of BOARD_{Name}. For example -DBOARD=BOARD_USBKEY instructs the + * compiler to use the USBKEY board hardware drivers. + * + * If your application does not use *any* board level drivers, you can ommit the definition of the BOARD macro. + * However, some users may wish to write their own custom board hardware drivers which are to remain compatible + * with the LUFA hardware API. To do this, the BOARD macro should be defined to the value BOARD_USER. This indicates + * that the board level drivers should be located in a folder named "Board" located inside the application's folder. + * + * When used, the driver stub files located in the DriverStubs folder should be copied to the user Board directory, + * and fleshed out to include the values and code needed to control the custom board hardware. Once done, the existing + * LUFA board level APIs (accessed in the regular LUFA/Drivers/Board/ folder) will redirect to the user board drivers, + * maintaining code compatibility and allowing for a different board to be selected through the project makefile with + * no code changes. + */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4020936f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/LUFA/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile for the LUFA library itself. + +LUFA_SRC_FILES = ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/Class/HIDParser.c \ + ./Drivers/USB/Class/ConfigDescriptor.c \ + ./Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ./MemoryAllocator/DynAlloc.c \ + ./Drivers/Board/Temperature.c \ + ./Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ./Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial_Stream.c \ + +all: + +clean: + rm -f $(LUFA_SRC_FILES:%.c=%.o) + +clean_list: + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Library Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..643454d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Firmware_Design.txt @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +Instructions for converting the LUFA USBtoSerial Demo to an AVR ISP Programmer. +By Opendous Inc., Copyright under the Creative Commons Attribution License: +http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/ + +1) Start with the LUFA/Demos/USBtoSerial firmware. + - rename USBtoSerial.c, USBtoSerial.h, and USBtoSerial.aps to + AVRISP_Programmer.* + - edit AVRISP_Programmer.aps and rename all instances of "USBtoSerial" to + "AVRISP_Programmer" + - copy AVRISP_Programmer.txt from an older version of AVRISP_Programmer + +2) Edit makefile by changing TARGET from "USBtoSerial" to "AVRISP_Programmer" + +3) Edit AVRISP_Programmer.h: + - change ifdef _USB_TO_SERIAL_H to _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_ + - rename ReconfigureUSART(void) to ReconfigureSPI(void) + - add void processHostSPIRequest(void); & void delay_ms(uint8_t dly); + - replace the define for Serial.h with one for SPI.h: + #include + +4) Make alterations to Descriptors.c + - change manufacturer string to "www.AVRopendous.org", length=19 + - change product string to "LUFA-Based AVR ISP Programmer", length=29 + +5) Edit Ringbuff.h to enable the Peek Command: #define BUFF_USEPEEK + +6) Edit AVRISP_Programmer.c: + - change #include "USBtoSerial.h" to #include "AVRISP_Programmer.h" + - change BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName to "LUFA AVR910 ISP Programmer" + - in main(), rename ReconfigureUSART() to Reconfigure(); + - in EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket), rename ReconfigureUSART + - delete the ISRs: ISR(USART1_RX_vect) & ISR(USART1_TX_vect) + - delete ReconfigureUSART(void) + - add void ReconfigureSPI(void), void processHostSPIRequest(void), + and void delay_ms(uint8_t dly) from a previous version + - add Timer1 and SPI initialization code to main(): + /* Hardware Initialization */ + //LEDs_Init(); + DDRB = 0; + PORTB = 0; + DDRC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2 + // PC2 is also used for RESET, so set it HIGH initially - note 'P' command sets it to LOW (Active) + PORTC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2 + DDRD = 0; + PORTD = (1 << PB7); // only PB7(HWB) should be High as this is the bootloader pin + // Prepare PortB for SPI - set PB0(^SS), PB1(SCK), PB2(MOSI) as output as well as all other pins except PB3(MISO) + DDRB = (1 << PB0) | (1 << PB1) | (1 << PB2) | (0 << PB3) | (1 << PB4) | (1 << PB5) | (1 << PB6) | (1 << PB7); + PORTB |= (1 << PB0); + + // initialize Timer1 for use in delay function + TCCR1A = 0; + //TCCR1B = (1 << CS10); // no prescaling, use CLK + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10)); // prescale by CLK/1024 + // 8MHz/1024 = 7813 ticks per second --> ~8 ticks per millisecond (ms) + timerval = TCNT1; // start timer1 + + - In TASK(CDC_Task) in the + if (USB_IsConnected) { + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) { + while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) { + ... + structure, after Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte()): + + /* Each time there is an element, check which comand should be + run and if enough data is available to run that command. + There are 1-byte, 2-byte, 3-byte, 4-byte commands, and 5-byte commands + Remember that the "which command" byte counts as 1 */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 0) { + // do nothing, wait for data + } else { + tempByte = Buffer_PeekElement(&Rx_Buffer); // peek at first element + + /* make sure the issued command and associated data are all ready */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 1) { // zero data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'P') | (tempByte == 'a') | (tempByte == 'm') | + (tempByte == 'R') | (tempByte == 'd') | (tempByte == 'e') | + (tempByte == 'L') | (tempByte == 's') | (tempByte == 't') | + (tempByte == 'S') | (tempByte == 'V') | (tempByte == 'v') | + (tempByte == 'p') | (tempByte == 'F')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 2) { // one data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'T') | (tempByte == 'c') | (tempByte == 'C') | + (tempByte == 'D') | (tempByte == 'l') | (tempByte == 'f') | + (tempByte == 'x') | (tempByte == 'y')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 3) { // two data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'A') | (tempByte == 'Z')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 4) { // three data byte command + if ((tempByte == ':')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 5) { // four data byte command + if ((tempByte == '.')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else { + // do nothing + } + } + + - need to add code to flush the buffer. Change: + /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle*/ + if (!(Transmitting)) + { + Transmitting = true; + Serial_TxByte(Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer)); + } + } + To: + /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle*/ + if (!(Transmitting)) + { + Transmitting = true; + /* The following flushes the receive buffer to prepare for new + data and commands. Need to flush the buffer as the command + byte which is peeked above needs to be dealt with, otherwise + the command bytes will overflow the buffer eventually */ + //Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // also works + Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer); + } + } + + - need to add the following defines and globals: + #define RESETPORT PORTB + #define RESETPIN PB0 + #define RESETPORT2 PORTC + #define RESETPIN2 PC2 + #define CR_HEX '\r' + + #define DELAY_VERYSHORT 0x01 + #define DELAY_SHORT 0x02 + #define DELAY_MEDIUM 0x03 + #define DELAY_LONG 0x05 + #define DELAY_MULTIPLE 0x04 + + /* AVR Device Codes - Can have a maximum of 14 but can be any you want. + Note that these are completely irrelevent. If AVRdude supports a + device, then that device is programmable. Use -F switch to ignore + device codes. */ + #define AVRDEVCODE01 0x55 /* ATtiny12 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE02 0x56 /* ATtiny15 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE03 0x5E /* ATtiny261 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE04 0x76 /* ATmega8 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE05 0x74 /* ATmega16 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE06 0x72 /* ATmega32 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE07 0x45 /* ATmega64 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE08 0x74 /* ATmega644 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE09 0x43 /* ATmega128 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE10 0x63 /* ATmega162 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE11 0x78 /* ATmega169 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE12 0x6C /* AT90S4434 */ + #define AVRDEVCODE13 0x38 /* AT90S8515A */ + #define AVRDEVCODE14 0x65 /* AT90S8555 */ + + /* some global variables used throughout */ + uint8_t tempIOreg = 0; + uint8_t tempIOreg2 = 0; + uint8_t tempIOreg3 = 0; + uint8_t tempIOreg4 = 0; + uint8_t dataWidth = 0; + uint8_t firstRun = 1; + uint8_t deviceCode = 0; + uint8_t tempByte = 0; + uint16_t currAddress = 0; + uint16_t timerval = 0; + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74800231 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +AVRISP_Programmer30-Sep-2008 14:18:3930-Sep-2008 14:18:52241030-Sep-2008 14:18:3944, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Demos\AVRISP_Programmer\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cRingBuff.cAVRISP_Programmer.cDescriptors.hRingBuff.hAVRISP_Programmer.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111AVRISP_Programmer.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4dc18cd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.c @@ -0,0 +1,886 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + AVR ISP Programmer code Copyright 2009 Opendous Inc. (www.opendous.org) + For more info and usage instructions for this firmware, visit: + http://code.google.com/p/avropendous/wiki/AVR_ISP_Programmer + + Note that this firmware is designed to work with AVRdude: + http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude + But should work with other software that supports the AVR910 ISP + programmer or STK200 hardware. + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + Usage: + avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 + Note -F flag which overrides signature check and enables programming + of any "In-System Programmable via SPI Port" AVR MCU. Part number, + t261, should be set to your target device. + avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:PROG.hex + PROG.hex is the hex file to program your t261 AVR with + avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -b 115200 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:test.hex + The -b 115200 sets the SPI clock to 62.5kHz from the default 125kHz and may + work when the default programming speed fails. + AVROSP.exe -dATtiny261 -cCOM7 -rf + AVRosp is the Open Source AVR ISP Programming Software available from Atmel.com + + Note: on Linux systems, COM7 should be replaced with someting like /dev/ttyACM0 + You can determine this value by running dmesg after plugging in the device + Note: you must RESET the programmer after each use (AVRdude session). + + Note: If you experience errors with older devices, try changing the DELAY defines + + MISO, MOSI, and SCK are connected directly from the AVRopendous board + to the pin of the same functionality on the target. RESET pin on the target + can be connected either to SS (PB0), or PC2. Do not have any other pins + connected - especially HWB pin, to avoid unintentional behaviour. + + AVR910 functionality was overlayed on USBtoSerial functionality. + Keep this in mind when looking over the code. + Default target speed is 125kHz and corresponds to 19200 baud, which + is the default setting for AVRdude. + + Changing "Baud-Rate" will change the SPI speed. Defualt SPI clock speed + is 8Mhz / 4 = 2MHz. 8Mhz is the device clock speed. This is the setting at + 9600 baud. The following is a table of baud-rate vs. SPI Speed that will result + 9600 = 2Mhz + 14400 = 1MHz + 19200 = 125kHz (AVRdude Default) + 38400 = 250kHz + 57600 = 500kHz + 115200 = 62.5kHz + + Before running, you will need to install the INF file that + is located in the project directory. This will enable + Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need + for special Windows drivers for the device. To install, + right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. +*/ + +/* TODO: - fix the requirement that a RESET must be performed after each session, which + is only an issue under Windows. Everything works fine under Linux +*/ + +#include "AVRISP_Programmer.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "LUFA AVR910 ISP Programmer"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + + +#define RESETPORT PORTB +#define RESETPIN PB0 +#define RESETPORT2 PORTC +#define RESETPIN2 PC2 +#define CR_HEX '\r' + +#define DELAY_VERYSHORT 0x01 +#define DELAY_SHORT 0x02 +#define DELAY_MEDIUM 0x03 +#define DELAY_LONG 0x05 +#define DELAY_MULTIPLE 0x02 + + +/* AVR Device Codes - Can have a maximum of 14 but can be any you want. + Note that these are completely irrelevent. If AVRdude supports a device, + then that device is programmable. Use -F switch to ignore device codes. */ +#define AVRDEVCODE01 0x55 /* ATtiny12 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE02 0x56 /* ATtiny15 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE03 0x5E /* ATtiny261 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE04 0x76 /* ATmega8 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE05 0x74 /*ATmega16 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE06 0x72 /* ATmega32 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE07 0x45 /* ATmega64 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE08 0x74 /* ATmega644 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE09 0x43 /* ATmega128 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE10 0x63 /* ATmega162 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE11 0x78 /* ATmega169 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE12 0x6C /* AT90S4434 */ +#define AVRDEVCODE13 0x38 /* AT90S8515A */ +#define AVRDEVCODE14 0x65 /* AT90S8555 */ + + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: CDC_Task , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Globals: */ +/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the virtual serial port. + * + These values are set by the host via a class-specific request, and the physical USART should be reconfigured to match the + new settings each time they are changed by the host. + */ +CDC_Line_Coding_t LineCoding = { BaudRateBPS: 9600, + CharFormat: OneStopBit, + ParityType: Parity_None, + DataBits: 8 }; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the RX data - data from the host to the attached device on the serial port. */ +RingBuff_t Rx_Buffer; + +/** Ring (circular) buffer to hold the TX data - data from the attached device on the serial port to the host. */ +RingBuff_t Tx_Buffer; + +/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently transmitting data from the Rx_Buffer circular buffer. */ +volatile bool Transmitting = false; + + +/* some global variables used throughout */ +uint8_t tempIOreg = 0; +uint8_t tempIOreg2 = 0; +uint8_t tempIOreg3 = 0; +uint8_t tempIOreg4 = 0; +uint8_t dataWidth = 0; +uint8_t firstRun = 1; +uint8_t deviceCode = 0; +uint8_t tempByte = 0; +uint16_t currAddress = 0; +uint16_t timerval = 0; + + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ReconfigureSPI(); + // prepare PortB + DDRB = 0; + PORTB = 0; + DDRC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2 + // PC2 is also used for RESET, so set it HIGH initially - note 'P' command sets it to LOW (Active) + PORTC |= ((1 << PC2) | (1 << PC4) | (1 << PC5) | (1 << PC6) | (1 << PC7)); //AT90USBxx2 + DDRD = 0; + PORTD = (1 << PB7); // only PB7(HWB) should be High as this is the bootloader pin + // Prepare PortB for SPI - set PB0(^SS), PB1(SCK), PB2(MOSI) as output as well as all other pins except PB3(MISO) + DDRB = (1 << PB0) | (1 << PB1) | (1 << PB2) | (0 << PB3) | (1 << PB4) | (1 << PB5) | (1 << PB6) | (1 << PB7); + PORTB |= (1 << PB0); + // make sure DataFlash devices to not interfere - deselect them by setting PE0 and PE1 HIGH: + PORTE = 0xFF; + DDRE = 0xFF; + + // initialize Timer1 for use in delay function + TCCR1A = 0; + //TCCR1B = (1 << CS10); // no prescaling, use CLK + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10)); // prescale by CLK/1024 + // 8MHz/1024 = 7813 ticks per second --> ~8 ticks per millisecond (ms) + timerval = TCNT1; // start timer1 + + + /* Ringbuffer Initialization */ + Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and + starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); + + /* Indicate USB enumerating */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBEnumerating); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via + the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running CDC and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + + /* Indicate USB not ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBNotReady); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration + of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, + ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Indicate USB connected and ready */ + UpdateStatus(Status_USBReady); + + /* Start CDC task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(CDC_Task, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library (including the CDC control commands, + which are all issued via the control endpoint), so that they can be handled appropriately for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + uint8_t* LineCodingData = (uint8_t*)&LineCoding; + + /* Process CDC specific control requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetLineEncoding: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */ + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(LineCodingData, sizeof(LineCoding)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to clear the last packet from the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + + /* Reconfigure the USART with the new settings */ + ReconfigureSPI(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetControlLineState: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can read in the line state mask from the host, to get the current state of the output handshake + lines. The mask is read in from the wValue parameter, and can be masked against the CONTROL_LINE_OUT_* masks + to determine the RTS and DTR line states using the following code: + */ + + uint16_t wIndex = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + // Do something with the given line states in wIndex +#endif + + /* Acknowedge the SETUP packet, ready for data transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Task to manage CDC data transmission and reception to and from the host, from and to the physical USART. */ +TASK(CDC_Task) +{ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { +#if 0 + /* NOTE: Here you can use the notification endpoint to send back line state changes to the host, for the special RS-232 + handshake signal lines (and some error states), via the CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks and the following code: + */ + + USB_Notification_Header_t Notification = (USB_Notification_Header_t) + { + NotificationType: (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + Notification: NOTIF_SerialState, + wValue: 0, + wIndex: 0, + wLength: sizeof(uint16_t), + }; + + uint16_t LineStateMask; + + // Set LineStateMask here to a mask of CONTROL_LINE_IN_* masks to set the input handshake line states to send to the host + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&Notification, sizeof(Notification)); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&LineStateMask, sizeof(LineStateMask)); + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); +#endif + + /* Select the Serial Rx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPNUM); + + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Read the received data endpoint into the transmission buffer */ + while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()) + { + /* Wait until the buffer has space for a new character */ + while (!((BUFF_STATICSIZE - Rx_Buffer.Elements))); + + /* Store each character from the endpoint */ + Buffer_StoreElement(&Rx_Buffer, Endpoint_Read_Byte()); + + + + + /* Each time there is an element, check which comand should be + run and if enough data is available to run that command. + There are 1-byte, 2-byte, 3-byte, 4-byte commands, and 5-byte commands + Remember that the "which command" byte counts as 1 */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 0) { + // do nothing, wait for data + } else { + tempByte = Buffer_PeekElement(&Rx_Buffer); // peek at first element + + /* make sure the issued command and associated data are all ready */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 1) { // zero data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'P') | (tempByte == 'a') | (tempByte == 'm') | + (tempByte == 'R') | (tempByte == 'd') | (tempByte == 'e') | + (tempByte == 'L') | (tempByte == 's') | (tempByte == 't') | + (tempByte == 'S') | (tempByte == 'V') | (tempByte == 'v') | + (tempByte == 'p') | (tempByte == 'F')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 2) { // one data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'T') | (tempByte == 'c') | (tempByte == 'C') | + (tempByte == 'D') | (tempByte == 'l') | (tempByte == 'f') | + (tempByte == 'x') | (tempByte == 'y')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 3) { // two data byte command + if ((tempByte == 'A') | (tempByte == 'Z')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 4) { // three data byte command + if ((tempByte == ':')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else if (Rx_Buffer.Elements == 5) { // four data byte command + if ((tempByte == '.')) { + processHostSPIRequest(); // command has enough data, process it + } + } else { + // do nothing + } + } + + + + } + + /* Clear the endpoint buffer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + + /* Check if Rx buffer contains data */ + if (Rx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Initiate the transmission of the buffer contents if USART idle */ + if (!(Transmitting)) + { + Transmitting = true; + /* The following flushes the receive buffer to prepare for new data and commands */ + /* Need to flush the buffer as the command byte which is peeked above needs to be */ + /* dealt with, otherwise the command bytes will overflow the buffer eventually */ + //Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // works also + Buffer_Initialize(&Rx_Buffer); + } + } + + /* Select the Serial Tx Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPNUM); + + /* Check if the Tx buffer contains anything to be sent to the host */ + if (Tx_Buffer.Elements) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Check before sending the data if the endpoint is completely full */ + bool IsFull = (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE); + + /* Write the transmission buffer contents to the received data endpoint */ + while (Tx_Buffer.Elements && (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() < CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE)) + Endpoint_Write_Byte(Buffer_GetElement(&Tx_Buffer)); + + /* Send the data */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* If a full endpoint was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to terminate the transfer */ + if (IsFull) + { + /* Wait until Serial Tx Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + while (!(Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed())); + + /* Send an empty packet to terminate the transfer */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + } + } + } +} + + + +/** Function to manage status updates to the user. This is done via LEDs on the given board, if available, but may be changed to + log to a serial port, or anything else that is suitable for status updates. + * + \param CurrentStatus Current status of the system, from the USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t enum + */ +void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS; + + /* Set the LED mask to the appropriate LED mask based on the given status code */ + switch (CurrentStatus) + { + case Status_USBNotReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1); + break; + case Status_USBEnumerating: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2); + break; + case Status_USBReady: + LEDMask = (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4); + break; + } + + /* Set the board LEDs to the new LED mask */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + + +/** Reconfigures SPI to match the current serial port settings issued by the host. */ +void ReconfigureSPI(void) +{ + uint8_t SPCRmask = (1 << SPE) | (1 << MSTR); // always enable SPI as Master + uint8_t SPSRmask = 0; + + /* Determine data width */ + if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Odd) { + dataWidth = 16; + } else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_Even) { + dataWidth = 32; + } else if (LineCoding.ParityType == Parity_None) { + dataWidth = 8; + } + + /* Determine stop bits - 1.5 stop bits is set as 1 stop bit due to hardware limitations */ + /* For SPI, determine whether format is LSB or MSB */ + if (LineCoding.CharFormat == TwoStopBits) { + SPCRmask |= (1 << DORD); + } else if (LineCoding.CharFormat == OneStopBit) { + SPCRmask |= (0 << DORD); + } + + /* Determine data size - 5, 6, 7, or 8 bits are supported */ + /* Changing line coding changes SPI Mode + CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) SPI-Mode0 == 8 bits line coding + CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) SPI-Mode1 == 7 bits line coding + CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) SPI-Mode2 == 6 bits line coding + CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) SPI-Mode3 == 5 bits line coding + */ + if (LineCoding.DataBits == 5) { + SPCRmask |= ((1 << CPOL) | (1 << CPHA)); + } else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 6) { + SPCRmask |= ((1 << CPOL) | (0 << CPHA)); + } else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 7) { + SPCRmask |= ((0 << CPOL) | (1 << CPHA)); + } else if (LineCoding.DataBits == 8) { + SPCRmask |= ((0 << CPOL) | (0 << CPHA)); + } + + + /* Set the USART baud rate register to the desired baud rate value */ + /* also alter the SPI speed via value of baud rate */ + if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 9600) { // 2Mhz SPI (Fosc / 4) + SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X); + } else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 14400) { // 1Mhz SPI (Fosc / 8) + SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (1 << SPI2X); + } else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 57600) { // 500kHz SPI (Fosc / 16) + SPCRmask |= ((0 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X); + } else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 38400) { // 250kHz SPI (Fosc / 32) + SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (1 << SPI2X); + } else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 19200) { // 125kHz SPI (Fosc / 64) + SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (0 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X); + } else if (LineCoding.BaudRateBPS == 115200) { // 62.5kHz SPI (Fosc / 128) + SPCRmask |= ((1 << SPR1) | (1 << SPR0)); + SPSRmask |= (0 << SPI2X); + } + + SPCR = SPCRmask; + SPSR = SPSRmask; + + // only read if first run + if (firstRun) { + tempIOreg = SPSR; //need to read to initiliaze + tempIOreg = SPDR; //need to read to initiliaze + firstRun = 0; + } + +} + + +/* process data according to AVR910 protocol */ +void processHostSPIRequest(void) { + + uint8_t readByte1 = 0; + uint8_t readByte2 = 0; + uint8_t readByte3 = 0; + uint8_t readByte4 = 0; + uint8_t firstByte = 0; + + /* Taken from a90isp_ver23.asm: + +-------------+------------+------+ + ;* Commands | Host writes | Host reads | | + ;* -------- +-----+-------+------+-----+ | + ;* | ID | data | data | | Note | + ;* +-----------------------------------+-----+-------+------+-----+------+ + ;* | Enter programming mode | 'P' | | | 13d | 1 | + ;* | Report autoincrement address | 'a' | | | 'Y' | | + ;* | Set address | 'A' | ah al | | 13d | 2 | + ;* | Write program memory, low byte | 'c' | dd | | 13d | 3 | + ;* | Write program memory, high byte | 'C' | dd | | 13d | 3 | + ;* | Issue Page Write | 'm' | | | 13d | | + ;* | Read program memory | 'R' | |dd(dd)| | 4 | + ;* | Write data memory | 'D' | dd | | 13d | | + ;* | Read data memory | 'd' | | dd | | | + ;* | Chip erase | 'e' | | | 13d | | + ;* | Write lock bits | 'l' | dd | | 13d | | + ;* | Write fuse bits | 'f' | dd | | 13d | 11 | + ;* | Read fuse and lock bits | 'F' | | dd | | 11 | + ;* | Leave programming mode | 'L' | | | 13d | 5 | + ;* | Select device type | 'T' | dd | | 13d | 6 | + ;* | Read signature bytes | 's' | | 3*dd | | | + ;* | Return supported device codes | 't' | | n*dd | 00d | 7 | + ;* | Return software identifier | 'S' | | s[7] | | 8 | + ;* | Return sofware version | 'V' | |dd dd | | 9 | + ;* | Return hardware version | 'v' | |dd dd | | 9 | + ;* | Return programmer type | 'p' | | dd | | 10 | + ;* | Set LED | 'x' | dd | | 13d | 12 | + ;* | Clear LED | 'y' | dd | | 13d | 12 | + ;* | Universial command | ':' | 3*dd | dd | 13d | | + ;* | New universal command | '.' | 4*dd | dd | 13d | | + ;* | Special test command | 'Z' | 2*dd | dd | | | + */ + + firstByte = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_Initialize(&Tx_Buffer); // make sure the buffer is clear before proceeding + + if (firstByte == 'P') { // enter Programming mode + // enable SPI -- already done + // enter programming mode on target: + //PORTB = 0; // set clock to zero + RESETPORT = (1 << RESETPIN); // set RESET pin on target to 1 + RESETPORT2 = (1 << RESETPIN2); + delay_ms(DELAY_SHORT); + //RESETPORT = (RESETPORT & ~(1 << RESETPIN)); // set RESET pin on target to 0 - Active + RESETPORT = 0x00; + RESETPORT2 = 0; + delay_ms(DELAY_SHORT); + SPI_SendByte(0xAC); + SPI_SendByte(0x53); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + delay_ms(DELAY_VERYSHORT); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'T') { // Select device type + deviceCode = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // set device type + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'a') { // Report autoincrement address + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'Y'); // return 'Y' - Auto-increment enabled + + } else if (firstByte == 'A') { //Load Address + // get two bytes over serial and set currAddress to them + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // high byte + readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // low byte + currAddress = (readByte1 << 8) | (readByte2); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'c') { // Write program memory, low byte + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x40, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + SPI_SendByte(0x40); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data + delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); // certain MCUs require a delay of about 24585 cycles + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'C') { // Write program memory, high byte + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x48, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + SPI_SendByte(0x48); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data + currAddress++; // increment currAddress + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'm') { // Write Program Memory Page + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x4c, then Address High Byte, then Low, then 0x00 + SPI_SendByte(0x4C); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + delay_ms(DELAY_LONG); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'R') { // Read Program Memory + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x28, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial + SPI_SendByte(0x28); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x20, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial + SPI_SendByte(0x20); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + readByte2 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte2); + currAddress++; // increment currAddress + + } else if (firstByte == 'D') { // Write Data Memory + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xc0, then Address High Byte, then Low, then data + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + SPI_SendByte(0xC0); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + SPI_SendByte(readByte1); // data + delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); + currAddress++; // increment currAddress + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'd') { // Read Data Memory + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xa0, then Address High Byte, then Low, then send back read data from 4th byte over serial + SPI_SendByte(0xA0); + SPI_SendByte((currAddress >> 8)); // high byte + SPI_SendByte((currAddress)); // low byte + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + currAddress++; // increment currAddress + + } else if (firstByte == 'e') { // erase the target device + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xac, 0x80, 0x04, 0x00 + SPI_SendByte(0xAC); + SPI_SendByte(0x80); + SPI_SendByte(0x04); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + delay_ms(DELAY_LONG); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'l') { // write lock bits + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0xac, [andi s_data 0x06], 0xe0, 0x00 + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); // read in lock bits data + SPI_SendByte(0xAC); + SPI_SendByte(((0x06 & readByte1) | 0xE0)); // TODO - is this correct??? + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'f') { // write fuse bits + // ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'L') { // leave programming mode + RESETPORT |= (1 << RESETPIN); // set RESET pin on target to 1 + RESETPORT2 |= (1 << RESETPIN2); // set RESET pin on target to 1 + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 's') { // Read signature bytes + // send 4 bytes over SPI; 0x30, 0x00, 0x02, read and send last byte over serial + SPI_SendByte(0x30); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + SPI_SendByte(0x02); + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + SPI_SendByte(0x30); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + SPI_SendByte(0x01); + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + SPI_SendByte(0x30); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + SPI_SendByte(0x00); + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); // read in data + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + + } else if (firstByte == 't') { // Return supported device codes + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE01); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE02); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE03); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE04); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE05); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE06); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE07); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE08); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE09); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE10); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE11); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE12); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE13); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, AVRDEVCODE14); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 0x00); + + } else if (firstByte == 'S') { // Return software identifier + // return string[7] with "AVR ISP" + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'A'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'V'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'R'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 0x20); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'I'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'S'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'P'); + + } else if (firstByte == 'V') { // Return sofware version + //return two bytes, software Major then Minor + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, '2'); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, '3'); + + } else if (firstByte == 'v') { // Return hardware version + //return two bytes, hardware Major then Minor + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ('1')); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, ('0')); + + } else if (firstByte == 'p') { // Return programmer type + // return 'S' for Serial Programmer + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, 'S'); + + } else if (firstByte == 'x') { // set LED + // ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'y') { // clear LED + // ignore this command, but need to remove data from the receive buffer + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == ':') { // Universal Command + // get 3 bytes over serial + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte3 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + SPI_SendByte(readByte1); + SPI_SendByte(readByte2); + SPI_SendByte(readByte3); + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(0x00); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == '.') { // New Universal Command + // get 4 bytes over serial + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte3 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte4 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + SPI_SendByte(readByte1); + SPI_SendByte(readByte2); + SPI_SendByte(readByte3); + readByte1 = SPI_TransferByte(readByte4); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, readByte1); + delay_ms(DELAY_MEDIUM); + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + + } else if (firstByte == 'Z') { // Special test command + // do nothing, but need to remove data from the receive buffer + readByte1 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + readByte2 = Buffer_GetElement(&Rx_Buffer); + + } else { + // do nothing, but need to return with a carriage return + Buffer_StoreElement(&Tx_Buffer, CR_HEX); // return carriage return (CR_HEX) if successful + } +} + + +void delay_ms(uint8_t dly) { + uint16_t endtime = 0; + + endtime = TCNT1; + if (endtime > 63486) { + endtime = (dly * DELAY_MULTIPLE); + } else { + endtime += (dly * DELAY_MULTIPLE); + } + + timerval = TCNT1; + while (timerval < endtime) { + timerval = TCNT1; + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e78ba293 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.h @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBtoSerial.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_ +#define _AVRISP_PROGRAMMER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "RingBuff.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // SPI driver + #include // LEDs driver + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + /* Macros: */ + /** CDC Class specific request to get the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_GetLineEncoding 0x21 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port configuration settings. */ + #define REQ_SetLineEncoding 0x20 + + /** CDC Class specific request to set the current virtual serial port handshake line states. */ + #define REQ_SetControlLineState 0x22 + + /** Notification type constant for a change in the virtual serial port handshake line states, for + * use with a USB_Notification_Header_t notification structure when sent to the host via the CDC + * notification endpoint. + */ + #define NOTIF_SerialState 0x20 + + /** Mask for the DTR handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that the DTR line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the RTS handshake line for use with the REQ_SetControlLineState class specific request + * from the host, to indicate that theRTS line state should be high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_OUT_RTS (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the DCD handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DCD line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DCD (1 << 0) + + /** Mask for the DSR handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the DSR line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_DSR (1 << 1) + + /** Mask for the BREAK handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the BREAK line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_BREAK (1 << 2) + + /** Mask for the RING handshake line for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification + * from the device to the host, to indicate that the RING line state is currently high. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_RING (1 << 3) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a framing error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_FRAMEERROR (1 << 4) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a parity error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_PARITYERROR (1 << 5) + + /** Mask for use with the a NOTIF_SerialState class specific notification from the device to the host, + * to indicate that a data overrun error has ocurred on the virtual serial port. + */ + #define CONTROL_LINE_IN_OVERRUNERROR (1 << 6) + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the virtual serial port line encoding settings, for storing the current USART configuration + * as set by the host via a class specific request. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint32_t BaudRateBPS; /**< Baud rate of the virtual serial port, in bits per second */ + uint8_t CharFormat; /**< Character format of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t enum + */ + uint8_t ParityType; /**< Parity setting of the virtual serial port, a value from the + * CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t enum + */ + uint8_t DataBits; /**< Bits of data per charater of the virtual serial port */ + } CDC_Line_Coding_t; + + /** Type define for a CDC notification, sent to the host via the CDC notification endpoint to indicate a + * change in the device state asynchronously. + */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t NotificationType; /**< Notification type, a mask of REQDIR_*, REQTYPE_* and REQREC_* constants + * from the library StdRequestType.h header + */ + uint8_t Notification; /**< Notification value, a NOTIF_* constant */ + uint16_t wValue; /**< Notification wValue, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wIndex; /**< Notification wIndex, notification-specific */ + uint16_t wLength; /**< Notification wLength, notification-specific */ + } USB_Notification_Header_t; + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible line encoding formats of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_CDC_LineCodingFormats_t + { + OneStopBit = 0, /**< Each frame contains one stop bit */ + OneAndAHalfStopBits = 1, /**< Each frame contains one and a half stop bits */ + TwoStopBits = 2, /**< Each frame contains two stop bits */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible line encoding parity settings of a virtual serial port. */ + enum CDCDevice_LineCodingParity_t + { + Parity_None = 0, /**< No parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Odd = 1, /**< Odd parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Even = 2, /**< Even parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Mark = 3, /**< Mark parity bit mode on each frame */ + Parity_Space = 4, /**< Space parity bit mode on each frame */ + }; + + /** Enum for the possible status codes for passing to the UpdateStatus() function. */ + enum USBtoSerial_StatusCodes_t + { + Status_USBNotReady = 0, /**< USB is not ready (disconnected from a USB host) */ + Status_USBEnumerating = 1, /**< USB interface is enumerating */ + Status_USBReady = 2, /**< USB interface is connected and ready */ + }; + + /* Tasks: */ + TASK(CDC_Task); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ReconfigureSPI(void); + void UpdateStatus(uint8_t CurrentStatus); + void processHostSPIRequest(void); + void delay_ms(uint8_t dly); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1872cfb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage AVRISP_Programmer + * + * Communications Device Class demonstration application. + * This gives a simple reference application for implementing + * a USB to Serial converter using the CDC class. Data communicated + * over the USB Virtual Serial Port according to Atmel's AVR910 + * protocol is used to program AVR MCUs that are + * "In-System Programmable via SPI Port". + * + * After running this firmware for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * Usage: + * avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 + * Note -F flag which overrides signature check and enables programming + * of any "In-System Programmable via SPI Port" AVR MCU. Part number, + * t261, should be set to your target device. + * avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:PROG.hex + * PROG.hex is the hex file to program your t261 AVR with + * avrdude -vv -F -P COM7 -b 115200 -c avr910 -p t261 -U flash:w:test.hex + * The -b 115200 sets the SPI clock to 62.5kHz from the default 125kHz and may + * work when the default programming speed fails. + * AVROSP.exe -dATtiny261 -cCOM7 -rf + * AVRosp is the Open Source AVR ISP Programming Software available from Atmel.com + * + * Note: on Linux systems, COM7 should be replaced with someting like /dev/ttyACM0 + * You can determine this value by running dmesg after plugging in the device + * Note: you must RESET the programmer after each use (AVRdude session). + * + * Note: If you experience errors with older devices, try changing DELAY_LONG + * to a larger value, such as 0xFF in AVRISP_Programmer.c + * + * MISO, MOSI, and SCK are connected directly from the AVRopendous board + * to the pin of the same functionality on the target. RESET pin on the target + * can be connected either to SS (PB0), or PC2. Do not have any other pins + * connected - especially HWB pin, to avoid unintentional behaviour. + * + * AVR910 functionality was overlayed on USBtoSerial functionality. + * Keep this in mind when looking over the code. + * Default target speed is 125kHz and corresponds to 19200 baud, which + * is the default setting for AVRdude. + * + * Changing "Baud-Rate" will change the SPI speed. Defualt SPI clock speed + * is 8Mhz / 4 = 2MHz. 8Mhz is the device clock speed. This is the setting at + * 9600 baud. The following is a table of baud-rate vs. SPI Speed that will result + * 9600 = 2Mhz + * 14400 = 1MHz + * 19200 = 125kHz (AVRdude Default) + * 38400 = 250kHz + * 57600 = 500kHz + * 115200 = 62.5kHz + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Communications Device Class (CDC)
USB Subclass:Abstract Control Model (ACM)
Relevant Standards:USBIF CDC Class Standard
Usable Speeds:Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87ec3d43 Binary files /dev/null and b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/AVRISP_Programmer_Picture.jpg differ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b948498f --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2044, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 2, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + CCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x02, + SubClass: 0x02, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + CDC_Functional_IntHeader: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x00, + + Data: {0x01, 0x10} + }, + + CDC_Functional_CallManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x01, + + Data: {0x03, 0x01} + }, + + CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x02, + + Data: {0x06} + }, + + CDC_Functional_Union: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), Type: 0x24}, + SubType: 0x06, + + Data: {0x00, 0x01} + }, + + ManagementEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0xFF + }, + + DCI_Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 1, + AlternateSetting: 0, + + TotalEndpoints: 2, + + Class: 0x0A, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + DataOutEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + }, + + DataInEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_BULK, + EndpointSize: CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x00 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(19), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"www.AVRopendous.org" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(29), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"LUFA-Based AVR ISP Programmer" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bec5e40d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to define a CDC class-specific functional descriptor. CDC functional descriptors have a + * uniform structure but variable sized data payloads, thus cannot be represented accurately by + * a single typedef struct. A macro is used instead so that functional descriptors can be created + * easily by specifying the size of the payload. This allows sizeof() to work correctly. + * + * \param DataSize Size in bytes of the CDC functional descriptor's data payload + */ + #define CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(DataSize) \ + struct \ + { \ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; \ + uint8_t SubType; \ + uint8_t Data[DataSize]; \ + } + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM 2 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPNUM 3 + + /** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPNUM 4 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CCI_Interface; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_IntHeader; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_CallManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1) CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement; + CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2) CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t ManagementEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1eb8c543 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Demo" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd9c8bf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/LUFA AVRISP_Programmer.inf @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +; Windows LUFA USB to Serial Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%COMPANY% +LayoutFile=layout.inf +DriverVer=06/06/2006,1.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME% = ManufName + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[ManufName] +%Modem3% = Modem3, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Windows 2000/XP Sections +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Modem3.nt] +CopyFiles=USBModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=Modem3.nt.AddReg + +[USBModemCopyFileSection] +usbser.sys,,,0x20 + +[Modem3.nt.AddReg] +HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern +HKR,,NTMPDriver,,usbser.sys +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +[Modem3.nt.Services] +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService + +[DriverService] +DisplayName=%SERVICE% +ServiceType=1 +StartType=3 +ErrorControl=1 +ServiceBinary=%12%\usbser.sys + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +[Strings] +COMPANY="LUFA Library" +MFGNAME="Dean Camera" +Modem3="USB Virtual Serial Port" +SERVICE="USB Virtual Serial Port CDC Driver" \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f477f17 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.c @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "RingBuff.h" + +void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + Buffer->Elements = 0; + } +} + +void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data) +{ + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { + #if defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + { + Buffer->OutPtr++; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + else + { + Buffer->Elements++; + } + #elif defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) + if (Buffer->Elements == BUFF_LENGTH) + return; + + Buffer->Elements++; + #elif defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK) + Buffer->Elements++; + #endif + + *(Buffer->InPtr) = Data; + Buffer->InPtr++; + + if (Buffer->InPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->InPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } +} + +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + + Buffer->OutPtr++; + Buffer->Elements--; + + if (Buffer->OutPtr == &Buffer->Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]) + Buffer->OutPtr = (RingBuff_Data_t*)&Buffer->Buffer; + } + + return BuffData; +} + +#if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) +RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer) +{ + RingBuff_Data_t BuffData; + + BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + { +#if defined(BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO) + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + return 0; +#elif !defined(BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK) + #error No empty buffer check behaviour specified. +#endif + + BuffData = *(Buffer->OutPtr); + } + + return BuffData; +} +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68e4a6e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/RingBuff.h @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* Buffer Configuration: */ + /* Buffer length - select static size of created ringbuffers: */ + #define BUFF_STATICSIZE 128 // Set to the static ringbuffer size for all ringbuffers (place size after define) + + /* Volatile mode - uncomment to make buffers volatile, for use in ISRs, etc: */ + #define BUFF_VOLATILE // Uncomment to cause all ring buffers to become volatile (and atomic if multi-byte) in access + + /* Drop mode - select behaviour when Buffer_StoreElement called on a full buffer: */ + #define BUFF_DROPOLD // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the oldest character to make space when full + // #define BUFF_DROPNEW // Uncomment to cause full ring buffers to drop the new character when full + // #define BUFF_NODROPCHECK // Uncomment to ignore full ring buffer checks - checking left to user! + + /* Underflow behaviour - select behaviour when Buffer_GetElement is called with an empty ringbuffer: */ + //#define BUFF_EMPTYRETURNSZERO // Uncomment to return 0 when an empty ringbuffer is read + #define BUFF_NOEMPTYCHECK // Uncomment to disable checking of empty ringbuffers - checking left to user! + + /* Buffer storage type - set the datatype for the stored data */ + #define BUFF_DATATYPE uint8_t // Change to the data type that is going to be stored into the buffer + + /* Peek routine - uncomment to include the peek routine (fetches next byte without removing it from the buffer */ + #define BUFF_USEPEEK + +#ifndef _RINGBUFF_H_ +#define _RINGBUFF_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include + + /* Defines and checks: */ + #if defined(BUFF_STATICSIZE) + #define BUFF_LENGTH BUFF_STATICSIZE + #else + #error No buffer length specified! + #endif + + #if !(defined(BUFF_DROPOLD) || defined(BUFF_DROPNEW) || defined(BUFF_NODROPCHECK)) + #error No buffer drop mode specified. + #endif + + #if !defined(BUFF_DATATYPE) + #error Ringbuffer storage data type not specified. + #endif + + #if defined(BUFF_VOLATILE) + #define BUFF_MODE volatile + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK ATOMIC_BLOCK(ATOMIC_RESTORESTATE) + #else + #define BUFF_MODE + #define BUFF_ATOMIC_BLOCK + #endif + + #if (BUFF_STATICSIZE > LONG_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint64_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > INT_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint32_t + #elif (BUFF_STATICSIZE > CHAR_MAX) + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint16_t + #else + #define RingBuff_Elements_t uint8_t + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef BUFF_DATATYPE RingBuff_Data_t; + + typedef BUFF_MODE struct + { + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer[BUFF_LENGTH]; + RingBuff_Data_t* InPtr; + RingBuff_Data_t* OutPtr; + RingBuff_Elements_t Elements; + } RingBuff_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void Buffer_Initialize(RingBuff_t* Buff); + void Buffer_StoreElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer, RingBuff_Data_t Data); + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_GetElement(RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #if defined(BUFF_USEPEEK) + RingBuff_Data_t Buffer_PeekElement(const RingBuff_t* Buffer); + #endif + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5af76eb --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/Sample_Programming_Session.txt @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +ubuntu@ubuntu:~/LUFA/Bootloaders/LUFA_DFU_Bootloader_AT90USB162$ sudo avrdude -vv -F -P /dev/ttyACM0 -c avr910 -p usb162 -U flash:w:BootloaderDFU.hex + +avrdude: Version 5.5, compiled on May 9 2008 at 13:04:46 + Copyright (c) 2000-2005 Brian Dean, http://www.bdmicro.com/ + + System wide configuration file is "/etc/avrdude.conf" + User configuration file is "/home/ubuntu/.avrduderc" + User configuration file does not exist or is not a regular file, skipping + + Using Port : /dev/ttyACM0 + Using Programmer : avr910 + AVR Part : AT90USB162 + Chip Erase delay : 9000 us + PAGEL : PD7 + BS2 : PA0 + RESET disposition : dedicated + RETRY pulse : SCK + serial program mode : yes + parallel program mode : yes + Timeout : 200 + StabDelay : 100 + CmdexeDelay : 25 + SyncLoops : 32 + ByteDelay : 0 + PollIndex : 3 + PollValue : 0x53 + Memory Detail : + + Block Poll Page Polled + Memory Type Mode Delay Size Indx Paged Size Size #Pages MinW MaxW ReadBack + ----------- ---- ----- ----- ---- ------ ------ ---- ------ ----- ----- --------- + eeprom 65 10 8 0 no 512 4 0 9000 9000 0x00 0x00 + flash 65 6 128 0 yes 16384 128 128 4500 4500 0x00 0x00 + lfuse 0 0 0 0 no 1 0 0 9000 9000 0x00 0x00 + hfuse 0 0 0 0 no 1 0 0 9000 9000 0x00 0x00 + efuse 0 0 0 0 no 1 0 0 9000 9000 0x00 0x00 + lock 0 0 0 0 no 1 0 0 9000 9000 0x00 0x00 + calibration 0 0 0 0 no 1 0 0 0 0 0x00 0x00 + signature 0 0 0 0 no 3 0 0 0 0 0x00 0x00 + + Programmer Type : avr910 + Description : Atmel Low Cost Serial Programmer + +Found programmer: Id = "AVR ISP"; type = S + Software Version = 2.3; Hardware Version = 1.0 +Programmer supports auto addr increment. + +Programmer supports the following devices: + Device code: 0x55 = ATtiny12 + Device code: 0x56 = ATtiny15 + Device code: 0x5e = ATtiny2313 + Device code: 0x76 = ATMEGA8 + Device code: 0x74 = ATMEGA6450 + Device code: 0x72 = ATMEGA32 + Device code: 0x45 = ATMEGA64 + Device code: 0x74 = ATMEGA6450 + Device code: 0x43 = ATMEGA128 + Device code: 0x63 = ATMEGA162 + Device code: 0x78 = ATMEGA169 + Device code: 0x6c = AT90S4434 + Device code: 0x38 = AT90S8515 + Device code: 0x65 = (unknown) + +avrdude: warning: selected device is not supported by programmer: usb162 +avrdude: AVR device initialized and ready to accept instructions + +Reading | ################################################## | 100% 0.00s + +avrdude: Device signature = 0x1e9482 +avrdude: safemode: lfuse reads as 5E +avrdude: safemode: hfuse reads as D9 +avrdude: safemode: efuse reads as F4 +avrdude: NOTE: FLASH memory has been specified, an erase cycle will be performed + To disable this feature, specify the -D option. +avrdude: erasing chip +avrdude: reading input file "BootloaderDFU.hex" +avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex auto detected as Intel Hex +avrdude: writing flash (16066 bytes): + +Writing | ################################################## | 100% 33.39s + + + +avrdude: 16066 bytes of flash written +avrdude: verifying flash memory against BootloaderDFU.hex: +avrdude: load data flash data from input file BootloaderDFU.hex: +avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex auto detected as Intel Hex +avrdude: input file BootloaderDFU.hex contains 16066 bytes +avrdude: reading on-chip flash data: + +Reading | ################################################## | 100% 16.07s + + + +avrdude: verifying ... +avrdude: 16066 bytes of flash verified + +avrdude: safemode: lfuse reads as 5E +avrdude: safemode: hfuse reads as D9 +avrdude: safemode: efuse reads as F4 +avrdude: safemode: Fuses OK + +avrdude done. Thank you. + diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0665aaab --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/AVRISP_Programmer/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (USBKEY, STK525, STK526, RZUSBSTICK, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 8000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = AVRISP_Programmer + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + RingBuff.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/AT90USBXXX/Serial.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d23762e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.c @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits + * to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce + * overall RAM usage. + */ + +#include "CircularBitBuffer.h" + +/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */ +void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) +{ + /* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */ + Buffer->Elements = 0; + + /* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */ + Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0); +} + +/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */ +void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer, bool Bit) +{ + /* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */ + if (Bit) + *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask; + + /* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */ + Buffer->Elements++; + + /* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */ + if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7)) + { + /* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */ + if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1]) + Buffer->In.CurrentByte++; + else + Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + + /* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */ + Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + } + else + { + /* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */ + Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1; + } +} + +/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */ +bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) +{ + /* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */ + bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0); + + /* Clear the buffer bit */ + *Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask; + + /* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */ + Buffer->Elements--; + + /* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */ + if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7)) + { + /* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */ + if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1]) + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++; + else + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + + /* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */ + Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + } + else + { + /* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */ + Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1; + } + + /* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */ + return Bit; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fb80b9d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/CircularBitBuffer.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_ +#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + + #include + + /* Macros: */ + /** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eigth of this value per buffer. */ + #define MAX_BITS 1024 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /* Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */ + uint8_t ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */ + } BitBufferPointer_t; + + /** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */ + uint16_t Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */ + + BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */ + BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */ + } BitBuffer_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits. + * + * \param Buffer Bit buffer to initialize + */ + void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer. + * + * \param Buffer Bit buffer to store a bit into + * \param Bit Bit to store into the buffer + */ + void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer, bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer. + * + * \param Buffer Bit buffer to store a bit into + * + * \return Next bit from the buffer + */ + bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a25857b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the + * reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent, + * where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used. + * + * See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors. + */ +USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + 0x05, 0x01, /* Usage Page (Generic Desktop) */ + 0x09, 0x06, /* Usage (Keyboard) */ + 0xa1, 0x01, /* Collection (Application) */ + 0x75, 0x01, /* Report Size (1) */ + 0x95, 0x08, /* Report Count (8) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Key Codes) */ + 0x19, 0xe0, /* Usage Minimum (Keyboard LeftControl) */ + 0x29, 0xe7, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Right GUI) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x01, /* Logical Maximum (1) */ + 0x81, 0x02, /* Input (Data, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x01, /* Report Count (1) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x81, 0x03, /* Input (Const, Variable, Absolute) */ + 0x95, 0x06, /* Report Count (6) */ + 0x75, 0x08, /* Report Size (8) */ + 0x15, 0x00, /* Logical Minimum (0) */ + 0x25, 0x65, /* Logical Maximum (101) */ + 0x05, 0x07, /* Usage Page (Keyboard) */ + 0x19, 0x00, /* Usage Minimum (Reserved (no event indicated)) */ + 0x29, 0x65, /* Usage Maximum (Keyboard Application) */ + 0x81, 0x00, /* Input (Data, Array, Absolute) */ + 0xc0 /* End Collection */ +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), Type: DTYPE_Device}, + + USBSpecification: VERSION_BCD(01.10), + Class: 0x00, + SubClass: 0x00, + Protocol: 0x00, + + Endpoint0Size: 8, + + VendorID: 0x03EB, + ProductID: 0x2042, + ReleaseNumber: 0x0000, + + ManufacturerStrIndex: 0x01, + ProductStrIndex: 0x02, + SerialNumStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + NumberOfConfigurations: 1 +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + Config: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), Type: DTYPE_Configuration}, + + TotalConfigurationSize: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + TotalInterfaces: 1, + + ConfigurationNumber: 1, + ConfigurationStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + ConfigAttributes: (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + MaxPowerConsumption: USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + Interface: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), Type: DTYPE_Interface}, + + InterfaceNumber: 0x00, + AlternateSetting: 0x00, + + TotalEndpoints: 1, + + Class: 0x03, + SubClass: 0x01, + Protocol: 0x01, + + InterfaceStrIndex: NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + KeyboardHID: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t), Type: DTYPE_HID}, + + HIDSpec: VERSION_BCD(01.11), + CountryCode: 0x00, + TotalHIDReports: 0x01, + HIDReportType: DTYPE_Report, + HIDReportLength: sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + KeyboardEndpoint: + { + Header: {Size: sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), Type: DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + EndpointAddress: (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | KEYBOARD_EPNUM), + Attributes: EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + EndpointSize: KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + PollingIntervalMS: 0x02 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(1), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(32), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich" +}; + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = +{ + Header: {Size: USB_STRING_LEN(20), Type: DTYPE_String}, + + UnicodeString: L"Magnetic Card Reader" +}; + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see StdDescriptors.h + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device recieves a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(DeviceDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case 0x00: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(LanguageString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x01: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ManufacturerString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case 0x02: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ProductString); + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case DTYPE_HID: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(ConfigurationDescriptor.KeyboardHID); + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Report: + Address = DESCRIPTOR_ADDRESS(KeyboardReport); + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..77be5402 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the HID class specific HID descriptor. A HID descriptor is used in HID class devices + * to give information about the HID device, including the HID specification used, and the report descriptors + * the device contains to describe how the HID device should be controlled. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard USB descriptor header */ + + uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< HID specification implemented by the device, in BCD form */ + uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code for the country the HID device is localised for */ + + uint8_t TotalHIDReports; /**< Total number of HID reports linked to this HID interface */ + + uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< Type of the first HID report descriptor */ + uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Length of the first HID report descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_HID_t; + + /** Type define for the data type used for the HID Report descriptor data elements. A HID report + * descriptor contains an array of this data type, indicating how the reports from and to the + * device are formatted and how the report data is to be used by the host. + */ + typedef uint8_t USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t; + + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */ + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_HID_t KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t KeyboardLEDsEndpoint; /**< Keyboard LED report endpoint descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint number of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPNUM 1 + + /** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Descriptor type value for a HID descriptor. */ + #define DTYPE_HID 0x21 + + /** Descriptor type value for a HID report. */ + #define DTYPE_Report 0x22 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d0abf9b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Doxygen.conf @@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project +# +# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ") + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all +# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the +# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See +# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded +# by quotes) that should identify the project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. +# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or +# if some version control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0 + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) +# base path where the generated documentation will be put. +# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location +# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create +# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output +# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories. +# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of +# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would +# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# The default language is English, other supported languages are: +# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional, +# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek, +# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish, +# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene, +# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in +# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc). +# Set to NO to disable this. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend +# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description. +# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator +# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string +# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be +# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is +# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. +# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically +# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget" +# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains" +# "represents" "a" "an" "the" + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full +# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set +# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag +# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is +# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of +# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the +# path to strip. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of +# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells +# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class. +# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class +# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that +# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter +# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems +# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen +# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc +# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments +# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.) + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will +# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style +# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments +# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring +# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen +# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// +# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour. +# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed +# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented +# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it +# re-implements. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce +# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will +# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. +# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts +# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value". +# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to +# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which +# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:". +# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. +# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list +# of all members will be omitted, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified +# scopes will look different, etc. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for +# Fortran. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for +# VHDL. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should +# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s. +# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only. +# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public +# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter +# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default) +# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the +# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or +# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the +# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of +# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a +# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to +# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using +# the \nosubgrouping command. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum +# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically +# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to +# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk. +# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk. +# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is +# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause +# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time +# causing a significant performance penality. +# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the +# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on +# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the +# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula: +# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0, +# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols + +SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. +# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless +# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file +# will be included in the documentation. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) +# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation. +# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local +# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in +# the interface are included in the documentation. +# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base +# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default +# anonymous namespace are hidden. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces. +# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the +# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated. +# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. +# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various +# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all +# friend (class|struct|union) declarations. +# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the +# documentation. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. +# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the +# function's detailed documentation block. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation +# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set +# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded. +# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate +# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen +# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the +# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation +# of that file. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline] +# is inserted in the documentation for inline members. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen +# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members +# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically +# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in +# declaration order. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default) +# the group names will appear in their defined order. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be +# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to +# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name, +# not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the +# alphabetical list. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug +# commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or +# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting +# \deprecated commands in the documentation. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional +# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines +# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in +# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified +# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. +# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the +# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer +# command in the documentation regardless of this setting. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated +# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories +# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy +# in the documentation. The default is NO. + +SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. +# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the +# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index +# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command , where is the value of +# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and is the name of an input file +# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output +# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by +# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files +# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents +# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a +# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name +# of the layout file. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated +# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank +# NO is used. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings +# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will +# automatically be disabled. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some +# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that +# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for +# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters +# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about +# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of +# documentation. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that +# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text +# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the +# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain +# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could +# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER) + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning +# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written +# to stderr. + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or +# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories +# with spaces. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is +# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built +# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for +# the list of possible encodings. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank the following patterns are tested: +# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx +# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90 + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories +# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO. +# If left blank NO is used. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. + +EXCLUDE = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded +# from the input. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched +# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories +# for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see +# the \include command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp +# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left +# blank all files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude +# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or +# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see +# the \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command , where +# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and is the name of an +# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes +# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be +# ignored. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: +# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further +# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER +# is applied to all files. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source +# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will +# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also +# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body +# of functions and classes directly in the documentation. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct +# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code +# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented +# functions referencing it will be listed. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES +# then for each documented function all documented entities +# called/used by that function will be listed. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default) +# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from +# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will +# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code +# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen +# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source +# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You +# will need version 4.8.6 or higher. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen +# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for +# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index +# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project +# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then +# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns +# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20]) + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all +# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. +# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that +# should be ignored while generating the index headers. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate HTML output. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for +# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank +# doxygen will generate files with .html extension. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for +# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard footer. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading +# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to +# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen +# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy +# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own +# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased! + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes, +# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to +# NO a bullet list will be used. + +HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari). + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 +# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard). +# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the +# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that +# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find +# it at startup. +# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the +# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple +# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite) +# can be grouped. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that +# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a +# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen +# will append .docset to the name. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files +# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the +# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm) +# of the generated HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You +# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. + +CHM_FILE = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of +# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run +# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag +# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that +# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING +# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file +# content. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag +# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a +# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members +# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER +# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for +# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated +# HTML documentation. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can +# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file. +# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Namespace. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating +# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see +# Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can +# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator. +# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated +# .qhp file . + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at +# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and +# the value YES disables it. + +DISABLE_INDEX = NO + +# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20]) +# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. +# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated +# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that +# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports +# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, +# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are +# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values +# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories, +# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list; +# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which +# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous +# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE +# respectively. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be +# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree +# is shown. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included +# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that +# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need +# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory +# to force them to be regenerated. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate Latex output. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to +# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the +# default command name. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used +# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and +# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX +# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for +# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until +# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing! + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated +# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of +# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode. +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep +# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. +# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not +# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) +# in the output. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output +# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with +# other RTF readers or editors. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact +# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to +# save some trees in general. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated +# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. +# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other +# programs which support those fields. +# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's +# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide +# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document. +# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate man pages + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to +# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3) + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output, +# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity +# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files +# only source the real man page, but without them the man command +# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an XML file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be +# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_SCHEMA = + +# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD, +# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the +# syntax of the XML files. + +XML_DTD = + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting +# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that +# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file +# that captures the structure of the code including all +# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental +# and incomplete at the moment. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will +# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of +# the code including all documentation. Note that this +# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the +# moment. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate +# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able +# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be +# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful +# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this +# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller +# and Perl will parse it just the same. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file +# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. +# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same +# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include +# files. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro +# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional +# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled +# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES +# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the +# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files +# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by +# the preprocessor. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will +# be used. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that +# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name +# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are +# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being +# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator +# instead of the = operator. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then +# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. +# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. +# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then +# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone +# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such +# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse +# the parser if not removed. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles. +# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation +# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without +# this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or +# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool +# does not have to be run to correct the links. +# Note that each tag file must have a unique name +# (where the name does NOT include the path) +# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen +# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create +# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed +# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes +# will be listed. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will +# be listed. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl'). + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base +# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that +# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a +# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide +# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented +# or is not a class. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization +# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section +# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default) + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output +# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This +# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need +# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name +# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font, +# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the +# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory +# containing the font. + +DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs. +# The default size is 10pt. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the +# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a +# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot +# can find it using this tag. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the +# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and +# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and +# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the +# relations between templates and their instances. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT +# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented +# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with +# other documented files. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and +# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each +# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or +# indirectly include this file. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs +# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function +# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase +# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller +# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen +# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES +# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories +# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include +# relations between the files in the directories. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif +# If left blank png will be used. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. + +DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin" + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the +# \dotfile command). + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of +# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph +# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is +# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the +# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note +# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the +# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable +# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes +# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this +# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large +# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not +# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used, +# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of +# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read). + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) +# support this, this feature is disabled by default. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and +# arrows in the dot generated graphs. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will +# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate +# the various graphs. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration::additions related to the search engine +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be +# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86d011ab --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.aps @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Magstripe30-Sep-2008 14:19:1430-Sep-2008 14:19:28241030-Sep-2008 14:19:1444, 14, 0, 589AVR GCCC:\Users\Dean\Documents\Electronics\Projects\WORK\MyUSBWORK\Projects\Magstripe\falseR00R01R02R03R04R05R06R07R08R09R10R11R12R13R14R15R16R17R18R19R20R21R22R23R24R25R26R27R28R29R30R31Auto000Descriptors.cMagstripe.cDescriptors.hMagstripe.hMagstripeHW.hmakefiledefaultYESmakefileatmega128111Magstripe.elfdefault\1-Wall -gdwarf-2 -std=gnu99 -Os -funsigned-char -funsigned-bitfields -fpack-struct -fshort-enumsdefault1C:\WinAVR-20080512\bin\avr-gcc.exeC:\WinAVR-20080512\utils\bin\make.exe diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3696c124 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c @@ -0,0 +1,436 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MagStripe application. This file contains the code which drives + * the USB keyboard interface from the magnetic card stripe reader device. + */ + +#include "Magstripe.h" + +/* Project Tags, for reading out using the ButtLoad project */ +BUTTLOADTAG(ProjName, "Magstripe Reader"); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildTime, __TIME__); +BUTTLOADTAG(BuildDate, __DATE__); +BUTTLOADTAG(LUFAVersion, "LUFA V" LUFA_VERSION_STRING); + +/* Scheduler Task List */ +TASK_LIST +{ + { Task: USB_USBTask , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: USB_Keyboard_Report , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, + { Task: Magstripe_Read , TaskStatus: TASK_STOP }, +}; + +/* Global Variables */ +/** Indicates if the device is using Report Protocol mode, instead of Boot Protocol mode. Boot Protocol mode + * is a special reporting mode used by compatible PC BIOS to support USB keyboards before a full OS and USB + * driver has been loaded, by using predefined report structures indicated in the USB HID standard. + */ +bool UsingReportProtocol = true; + +/** Total idle period in milliseconds set by the host via a SetIdle request, used to silence the report endpoint + * until the report data changes or the idle period elapsed. Generally used to implement hardware key repeats, or + * by some BIOS to reduce the number of reports when in Boot Protocol mode. + */ +uint8_t IdleCount = 0; + +/** Milliseconds remaining counter for the HID class SetIdle and GetIdle requests, used to silence the report + * endpoint for an amount of time indicated by the host or until the report changes. + */ +uint16_t IdleMSRemaining = 0; + +/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 1 of the inserted magnetic card. */ +BitBuffer_t Track1Data; + +/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 2 of the inserted magnetic card. */ +BitBuffer_t Track2Data; + +/** Circular buffer to hold the read bits from track 3 of the inserted magnetic card. */ +BitBuffer_t Track3Data; + +/** Delay counter between sucessive key strokes. This is to prevent the OS from ignoring multiple keys in a short + * period of time due to key repeats. Two milliseconds works for most OSes. + */ +uint8_t KeyDelayRemaining; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks. + */ +int main(void) +{ + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable Clock Division */ + SetSystemClockPrescaler(0); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Magstripe_Init(); + + /* Buffer Initialization */ + BitBuffer_Init(&Track1Data); + BitBuffer_Init(&Track2Data); + BitBuffer_Init(&Track3Data); + + /* Millisecond timer initialization, with output compare interrupt enabled for the idle timing */ + OCR0A = 0xFA; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + /* Initialize Scheduler so that it can be used */ + Scheduler_Init(); + + /* Initialize USB Subsystem */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Scheduling - routine never returns, so put this last in the main function */ + Scheduler_Start(); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This starts the USB task. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Connect) +{ + /* Start USB management task */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This stops the USB and keyboard report tasks. */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_Disconnect) +{ + /* Stop running keyboard reporting, card reading and USB management tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_USBTask, TASK_STOP); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Magstripe_Read, TASK_STOP); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready + * to relay reports to the host, and starts the keyboard report task. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_ConfigurationChanged) +{ + /* Setup Keyboard Keycode Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, + ENDPOINT_DIR_IN, KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE); + + /* Default to report protocol on connect */ + UsingReportProtocol = true; + + /* Start Keyboard reporting and card reading tasks */ + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(USB_Keyboard_Report, TASK_RUN); + Scheduler_SetTaskMode(Magstripe_Read, TASK_RUN); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event. This is used to catch standard and class specific + * control requests that are not handled internally by the USB library, so that they can be handled appropriately + * for the application. + */ +EVENT_HANDLER(USB_UnhandledControlPacket) +{ + /* Handle HID Class specific requests */ + switch (bRequest) + { + case REQ_GetReport: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + + /* Ignore report type and ID number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Ignore unused Interface number value */ + Endpoint_Discard_Word(); + + /* Read in the number of bytes in the report to send to the host */ + uint16_t wLength = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + /* If trying to send more bytes than exist to the host, clamp the value at the report size */ + if (wLength > sizeof(KeyboardReportData)) + wLength = sizeof(KeyboardReportData); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the report data to the control endpoint */ + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, wLength); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet or clear the host abort */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupOUT(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current protocol flag to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(UsingReportProtocol); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetProtocol: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the new protocol mode */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Set or clear the flag depending on what the host indicates that the current Protocol should be */ + UsingReportProtocol = (wValue != 0x0000); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_SetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + /* Read in the wValue parameter containing the idle period */ + uint16_t wValue = Endpoint_Read_Word_LE(); + + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Get idle period in MSB */ + IdleCount = (wValue >> 8); + + /* Send an empty packet to acknowedge the command */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + case REQ_GetIdle: + if (bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + Endpoint_ClearSetupReceived(); + + /* Write the current idle duration to the host */ + Endpoint_Write_Byte(IdleCount); + + /* Send the flag to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearSetupIN(); + } + + break; + } +} + +/** ISR for the timer 0 compare vector. This ISR fires once each millisecond, and decrements the counter indicating + * the number of milliseconds left to idle (not send the host reports) if the device has been instructed to idle + * by the host via a SetIdle class specific request. + */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* One millisecond has elapsed, decrement the idle time remaining counter if it has not already elapsed */ + if (IdleMSRemaining) + IdleMSRemaining--; + + if (KeyDelayRemaining) + KeyDelayRemaining--; +} + +/** Constructs a keyboard report indicating the currently pressed keyboard keys to the host. + * + * \param ReportData Pointer to a USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t report structure where the resulting report should + * be stored + * + * \return Boolean true if the current report is different to the previous report, false otherwise + */ +bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData) +{ + static bool OddReport = false; + static bool MustRelease = false; + + BitBuffer_t* Buffer = NULL; + + /* Clear the report contents */ + memset(ReportData, 0, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + /* Get the next non-empty track data buffer */ + if (Track1Data.Elements) + Buffer = &Track1Data; + else if (Track2Data.Elements) + Buffer = &Track2Data; + else if (Track3Data.Elements) + Buffer = &Track3Data; + + if (Buffer != NULL) + { + /* Toggle the odd report number indicator */ + OddReport = !OddReport; + + /* Set the flag indicating that a null report must eventually be sent to release all pressed keys */ + MustRelease = true; + + /* Only send the next key on odd reports, so that they are interpersed with null reports to release keys */ + if (OddReport) + { + /* Set the report key code to the key code for the next data bit */ + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(Buffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0; + + /* If buffer is now empty, a new line must be sent instead of the terminating bit */ + if (!(Buffer->Elements)) + { + /* Set the keycode to the code for an enter key press */ + ReportData->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER; + } + } + + return true; + } + else if (MustRelease) + { + /* Leave key code to null (0), to release all pressed keys */ + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +/** Task to read out data from inserted magnetic cards and place the seperate track data into their respective + * data buffers for later sending to the host as keyboard key presses. + */ +TASK(Magstripe_Read) +{ + /* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the seperate card tracks */ + const struct + { + BitBuffer_t* Buffer; + uint8_t ClockMask; + uint8_t DataMask; + } TrackInfo[] = {{&Track1Data, MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA}, + {&Track2Data, MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA}, + {&Track3Data, MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}}; + + /* Previous magnetic card control line' status, for later comparison */ + uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0; + + /* Buffered current card reader control line' status */ + uint8_t Magstripe_LCL = Magstripe_GetStatus(); + + /* Exit the task early if no card is present in the reader */ + if (!(Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)) + return; + + /* Read out card data while a card is present */ + while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT) + { + /* Read out the next bit for each track of the card */ + for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < 3; Track++) + { + /* Current data line status for the current card track */ + bool DataLevel = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0); + + /* Current clock line status for the current card track */ + bool ClockLevel = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0); + + /* Current track clock transition check */ + bool ClockChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0); + + /* Sample the next bit on the falling edge of the track's clock line, store key code into the track's buffer */ + if (ClockLevel && ClockChanged) + BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(TrackInfo[Track].Buffer, DataLevel); + } + + /* Retain the current card reader control line states for later edge detection */ + Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL; + + /* Retrieve the new card reader control line states */ + Magstripe_LCL = Magstripe_GetStatus(); + } + + /* Add terminators to the end of each track buffer */ + BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track1Data, 0); + BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track2Data, 0); + BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&Track3Data, 0); +} + +/** Task for the magnetic card reading and keyboard report generation. This task waits until a card is inserted, + * then reads off the card data and sends it to the host as a series of keyboard keypresses via keyboard reports. + */ +TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReportData; + bool SendReport = false; + + /* Check if the USB system is connected to a host */ + if (USB_IsConnected) + { + /* Select the Keyboard Report Endpoint */ + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(KEYBOARD_EPNUM); + + /* Check if Keyboard Endpoint Ready for Read/Write */ + if (Endpoint_ReadWriteAllowed()) + { + /* Only fetch the next key to send once the period between key presses has elapsed */ + if (!(KeyDelayRemaining)) + { + /* Create the next keyboard report for transmission to the host */ + SendReport = GetNextReport(&KeyboardReportData); + } + + /* Check if the idle period is set and has elapsed */ + if (IdleCount && !(IdleMSRemaining)) + { + /* Idle period elapsed, indicate that a report must be sent */ + SendReport = true; + + /* Reset the idle time remaining counter, must multiply by 4 to get the duration in milliseconds */ + IdleMSRemaining = (IdleCount << 2); + } + + /* Write the keyboard report if a report is to be sent to the host */ + if (SendReport) + { + /* Write Keyboard Report Data */ + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReportData, sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearCurrentBank(); + + /* Reset the key delay period counter */ + KeyDelayRemaining = 2; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cde2fcdc --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.fourwalledcubicle.com +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Magstripe.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_ +#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + #include + #include + #include + #include + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "MagstripeHW.h" + #include "CircularBitBuffer.h" + + #include // Library Version Information + #include // PROGMEM tags readable by the ButtLoad project + #include // USB Functionality + #include // Simple scheduler for task management + + + /* Task Definitions: */ + /** Task definition for the keyboard and magnetic card reading task. */ + TASK(USB_Keyboard_Report); + + TASK(Magstripe_Read); + + /* Macros: */ + /** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report from the device. */ + #define REQ_GetReport 0x01 + + /** HID Class Specific Request to get the current device idle count. */ + #define REQ_GetIdle 0x02 + + /** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report to the device. */ + #define REQ_SetReport 0x09 + + /** HID Class Specific Request to set the device's idle count. */ + #define REQ_SetIdle 0x0A + + /** HID Class Specific Request to get the current HID report protocol mode. */ + #define REQ_GetProtocol 0x03 + + /** HID Class Specific Request to set the current HID report protocol mode. */ + #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_1 30 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_0 39 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_ENTER 40 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the keyboard report structure. This structure matches the report layout + * given to the host in the HID Report descriptor, as well as matches the boot protocol report + * structure. This means that this one report structure can be used in both Report and Boot Protocol + * modes. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Modifier; /**< Modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys such as CTRL or ALT */ + uint8_t Reserved; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */ + uint8_t KeyCode[6]; /**< Key code array for pressed keys - up to six can be given simultaneously */ + } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t; + + /* Event Handlers: */ + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Connect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Connect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_Disconnect event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_Disconnect); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_ConfigurationChanged event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_ConfigurationChanged); + + /** Indicates that this module will catch the USB_UnhandledControlPacket event when thrown by the library. */ + HANDLES_EVENT(USB_UnhandledControlPacket); + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool GetNextReport(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* ReportData); + void SendKey(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReportData, uint8_t Key); + void Send(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReportData, bool SendReport); + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d91fddde --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project + * + * Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card + * reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed + * to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/. + * + * See http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/ for the USB reader hardware project website, + * including construction and support details. + * + * To use, connect your magentic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted + * from the project makefile): + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
Signal:AVR Port:
Track 1 DataPORTC, Pin 1
Track 1 ClockPORTC, Pin 2
Track 2 DataPORTC, Pin 3
Track 2 ClockPORTC, Pin 0
Track 3 DataPORTC, Pin 5
Track 3 ClockPORTC, Pin 6
Card DetectPORTC, Pin 4
+ * + * + * This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard demonstration application, + * written by Denver Gingerich. + * + * This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected + * a TTL magnetic stripe reader to the connected computer. The raw bitstream + * obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through the keyboard + * driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the demo will send a return key. + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + * + *
USB Mode:Device
USB Class:Human Interface Device (HID)
USB Subclass:Keyboard
Relevant Standards:USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables
Usable Speeds:Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode
+ */ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4681188 --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/MagstripeHW.h @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +/* + Copyright 2009 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software + and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby + granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all + copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros + prior to including the file: + + MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (ie. PORTC1) + MAG_T1_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (ie. PORTC2) + MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (ie. PORTC3) + MAG_T2_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (ie. PORTC0) + MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (ie. PORTC5) + MAG_T3_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (ie. PORTC6) + MAG_CLS_PIN Pin connected to card loaded wire (ie. PORTC4) + MAG_PIN PIN macro for the reader's port (ie. PINC) + MAG_DDR DDR macro for the reader's port (ie. DDRC) + MAG_PORT PORT macro for the reader's port (ie. PORTC) + + The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is + connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to + pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded + wire is connected to pin 4 on port C. + + If the magstripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks, + then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a + pin that is unused. For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on + port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are + not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or + temperature sensor). + + Connecting wires to pins on different ports (ie. a data wire to pin 0 + on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently + unsupported. All pins specified above must be on the same port. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K). + */ + +#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_ +#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include + + #include + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */ + #define MAG_MASK (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \ + MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \ + MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \ + MAG_CARDPRESENT) + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader + * device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before + * trying to read any of the card reader's status lines. + */ + static inline void Magstripe_Init(void) + { + MAG_DDR &= ~MAG_MASK; + MAG_PORT |= MAG_MASK; + }; + + /** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs. + * + * \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low + */ + static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) + { + /* Magstripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */ + return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK); + } + +#endif diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d90f961d --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*- +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al. +# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. << +# +# Released to the Public Domain +# +# Additional material for this makefile was written by: +# Peter Fleury +# Tim Henigan +# Colin O'Flynn +# Reiner Patommel +# Markus Pfaff +# Sander Pool +# Frederik Rouleau +# Carlos Lamas +# Dean Camera +# Opendous Inc. +# +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# On command line: +# +# make all = Make software. +# +# make clean = Clean out built project files. +# +# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF. +# +# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF. +# +# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude. +# Please customize the avrdude settings below first! +# +# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must +# have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must +# have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer +# (must have dfu-programmer installed). +# +# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP +# (must have Atmel FLIP installed). +# +# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have +# DoxyGen installed) +# +# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, +# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging. +# +# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only. +# +# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting +# bug reports to the GCC project. +# +# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all". +#---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +# MCU name +MCU = at90usb1287 + + +# Target board (see library BoardTypes.h documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring +# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called +# "Board" inside the application directory. +BOARD = USBKEY + + +# Processor frequency. +# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the +# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to +# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done +# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code. +# Typical values are: +# F_CPU = 1000000 +# F_CPU = 1843200 +# F_CPU = 2000000 +# F_CPU = 3686400 +# F_CPU = 4000000 +# F_CPU = 7372800 +# F_CPU = 8000000 +# F_CPU = 11059200 +# F_CPU = 14745600 +# F_CPU = 16000000 +# F_CPU = 18432000 +# F_CPU = 20000000 +F_CPU = 16000000 + + +# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary) +FORMAT = ihex + + +# Target file name (without extension). +TARGET = Magstripe + + +# Object files directory +# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make +# this an empty or blank macro! +OBJDIR = . + + +# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +SRC = $(TARGET).c \ + Descriptors.c \ + CircularBitBuffer.c \ + ../../LUFA/Scheduler/Scheduler.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \ + ../../LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/StdDescriptors.c \ + +# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.) +CPPSRC = + + +# List Assembler source files here. +# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s +# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler +# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"! +# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same, +# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does +# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line. +ASRC = + + +# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. +# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size. +# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.) +OPT = s + + +# Debugging format. +# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs. +# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2. +# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run. +DEBUG = dwarf-2 + + +# List any extra directories to look for include files here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRAINCDIRS = ../../ + + +# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level. +# c89 = "ANSI" C +# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions +# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented) +# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions +CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99 + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C sources +CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS +CDEFS += -DUSB_DEVICE_ONLY -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)" + +CDEFS += -DMAG_T1_CLOCK="(1 << 0)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_T1_DATA="(1 << 1)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_T2_CLOCK="(1 << 2)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_T2_DATA="(1 << 3)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_T3_CLOCK="(1 << 4)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_T3_DATA="(1 << 5)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_CARDPRESENT="(1 << 6)" +CDEFS += -DMAG_PIN=PINB +CDEFS += -DMAG_DDR=DDRB +CDEFS += -DMAG_PORT=PORTB + +# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources +ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU) + + +# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources +CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS +#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS + + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CFLAGS += $(CDEFS) +CFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections +CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20 +CFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ---------------- +# -g*: generate debugging information +# -O*: optimization level +# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation +# -Wall...: warning level +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns...: create assembler listing +CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG) +CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS) +CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT) +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char +CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields +CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct +CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums +CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions +CPPFLAGS += -Wall +CFLAGS += -Wundef +#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time +#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes +#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code +#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare +CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) +CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS)) +#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD) + + +#---------------- Assembler Options ---------------- +# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler. +# -adhlns: create listing +# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that +# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames +# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source +# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there] +# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex +# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input. +ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100 + + +#---------------- Library Options ---------------- +# Minimalistic printf version +PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min + +# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version. +PRINTF_LIB = +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN) +#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +# Minimalistic scanf version +SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min + +# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below) +SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt + +# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version. +SCANF_LIB = +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN) +#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT) + + +MATH_LIB = -lm + + +# List any extra directories to look for libraries here. +# Each directory must be seperated by a space. +# Use forward slashes for directory separators. +# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes. +EXTRALIBDIRS = + + + +#---------------- External Memory Options ---------------- + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!), +# only used for heap (malloc()). +#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff + +EXTMEMOPTS = + + + +#---------------- Linker Options ---------------- +# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker. +# -Map: create map file +# --cref: add cross reference to map file +LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax +LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections +LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS) +LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS)) +LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB) +#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x + + + +#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ---------------- + +# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd +# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500 +# +# Type: avrdude -c ? +# to get a full listing. +# +AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII + +# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port. +AVRDUDE_PORT = usb + +AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex +#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep + + +# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter. +# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn, +# see avrdude manual. +#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y + +# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be +# performed after programming the device. +#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V + +# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug +# reports about avrdude. See +# to submit bug reports. +#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v + +AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE) +AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER) + + + +#---------------- Debugging Options ---------------- + +# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency. +DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU) + +# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight. +# DEBUG_UI = gdb +DEBUG_UI = insight + +# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr. +DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice +#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr + +# GDB Init Filename. +GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit + +# When using avarice settings for the JTAG +JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1 + +# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr. +DEBUG_PORT = 4242 + +# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally +# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when +# avarice is running on a different computer. +DEBUG_HOST = localhost + + + +#============================================================================ + + +# Define programs and commands. +SHELL = sh +CC = avr-gcc +OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy +OBJDUMP = avr-objdump +SIZE = avr-size +AR = avr-ar rcs +NM = avr-nm +AVRDUDE = avrdude +REMOVE = rm -f +REMOVEDIR = rm -rf +COPY = cp +WINSHELL = cmd + +# Define Messages +# English +MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none +MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin -------- +MSG_END = -------- end -------- +MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: +MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after: +MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF: +MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF: +MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash: +MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM: +MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing: +MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table: +MSG_LINKING = Linking: +MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C: +MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++: +MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling: +MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project: +MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library: + + + + +# Define all object files. +OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + +# Define all listing files. +LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + + +# Compiler flags to generate dependency files. +GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d + + +# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags. +# Add target processor to flags. +ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS) +ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS) + + + + + +# Default target. +all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode sizeafter end + +# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library. +build: elf hex eep lss sym +#build: lib + + +elf: $(TARGET).elf +hex: $(TARGET).hex +eep: $(TARGET).eep +lss: $(TARGET).lss +sym: $(TARGET).sym +LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a +lib: $(LIBNAME) + + + +# Eye candy. +# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on +# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job. +begin: + @echo + @echo $(MSG_BEGIN) + +end: + @echo $(MSG_END) + @echo + + +# Display size of file. +HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex +ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) --mcu=$(MCU) --format=avr $(TARGET).elf + +sizebefore: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +sizeafter: + @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \ + 2>/dev/null; echo; fi + +checkhooks: build + @echo + @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events ------- + @$(shell) (grep -s '^Event.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \ + cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \ + echo "(None)" + @echo ----- End Unhooked LUFA Events ----- + +checklibmode: + @echo + @echo ----------- Library Mode ----------- + @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \ + | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \ + || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)." + @echo ------------------------------------ + +# Display compiler version information. +gccversion : + @$(CC) --version + + + +# Program the device. +program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM) + +flip: $(TARGET).hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu: $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + +flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + mv $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase F memory FLASH erase F + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM + loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex memory FLASH loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex + program + batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0 + +dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep + dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase + dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex + dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom --debug 1 $(TARGET).eep + +# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following: +# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set +# a breakpoint at main(). +gdb-config: + @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr) + @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) +endif + @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE) + +debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf +ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice) + @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays. + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \ + $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) + @$(WINSHELL) /c pause + +else + @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \ + $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT) +endif + @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE) + + + + +# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB. +COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000 +COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000 + + + +coff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + +extcoff: $(TARGET).elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof + $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof + + + +# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file. +%.hex: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@ + $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@ + +%.eep: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@ + -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \ + --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0 + +# Create extended listing file from ELF output file. +%.lss: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@ + $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@ + +# Create a symbol table from ELF output file. +%.sym: %.elf + @echo + @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@ + $(NM) -n $< > $@ + + + +# Create library from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.a: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@ + $(AR) $@ $(OBJ) + + +# Link: create ELF output file from object files. +.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf +.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ) +%.elf: $(OBJ) + @echo + @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@ + $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS) + + +# Compile: create object files from C source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create object files from C++ source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp + @echo + @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C source files. +%.s : %.c + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files. +%.s : %.cpp + $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files. +$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S + @echo + @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $< + $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report. +%.i : %.c + $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ + + +# Target: clean project. +clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end + +clean_binary: + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex + +clean_list: + @echo $(MSG_CLEANING) + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym + $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d) + $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i) + $(REMOVEDIR) .dep + + +doxygen: + @echo Generating Project Documentation... + @doxygen Doxygen.conf + @echo Documentation Generation Complete. + +clean_doxygen: + rm -rf Documentation + +# Create object files directory +$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null) + + +# Include the dependency files. +-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*) + + +# Listing of phony targets. +.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode begin \ +finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \ +build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \ +clean clean_list clean_binary program debug \ +gdb-config doxygen dfu flip diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50851a3e --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/Projects/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA Projects. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all projects. + +# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +all: + make -C Magstripe clean + make -C Magstripe all + + make -C AVRISP_Programmer clean + make -C AVRISP_Programmer all + +%: + make -C Magstripe $@ + make -C AVRISP_Programmer $@ diff --git a/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/makefile b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fca4a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/digital/avr/modules/usb/lufa/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.fourwalledcubicle.com +# + +# Makefile to build the LUFA library and Demos. + +# Call with "make all" to rebuild everything, "make clean" to clean everything, +# "make clean_list" to remove all intermediatary files but preserve any binaries +# and "make doxygen" to document the project with DoxyGen (if installed). + +# It is suggested that for the master build, the --quiet switch is passed to make, +# to remove all the commands from the output. This gives a much easier to read +# report of the entire build process. + +%: + @echo Executing \"make $@\" on all LUFA library elements. + @echo + make -C LUFA/ $@ + make -C Demos/ $@ + make -C Projects/ $@ + make -C Bootloaders/ $@ + @echo + @echo LUFA \"make $@\" operation complete. -- cgit v1.2.3